Micom P122 Relay Wiring Diagram
This manual provides a description of MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 ... 2021=1. Setting. 0 /150/0.01. 21. 00. EARTH FAULT. 01. Stage 1 Overcurrent.
File Info : application/pdf, 557 Pages, 10.81MB
Document P12x EN T Gd6 202007MiCOM P120, P121, P122 & P123 Overcurrent Relays P12x/EN T/Gd6_ Version Software version: V14 Hardware version: 5 Technical Guide Note: The technical manual for this device gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate Schneider Electric technical sales office and request the necessary information. Any agreements, commitments, and legal relationships and any obligations on the part of Schneider Electric including settlements of warranties, result solely from the applicable purchase contract, which is not affected by the contents of the technical manual. This device MUST NOT be modified. If any modification is made without the express permission of Schneider Electric, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the product unsafe. The Schneider Electric logo and any alternative version thereof are trademarks and service marks of Schneider Electric. MiCOM is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric. All trade names or trademarks mentioned herein whether registered or not, are the property of their owners. This manual is provided for informational use only and is subject to change without notice. � 2013, Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. Customer Care Centre http://www.schneider-electric.com/CCC 2017 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. Schneider Electric 35 rue Joseph Monier 92506 Rueil-Malmaison FRANCE Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00 Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00 www.schneider-electric.com Publication: P12x/EN T/Gd6 Publishing: Schneider Electric 07/2017 Technical Guide Contents MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 MiCOM P120/P121/P122 & P123 OVERCURRENT RELAYS TECHNICAL GUIDE CONTENTS Safety Instructions Introduction Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions User Guide Menu Content Tables Technical Data and Curve Characteristics Getting Started Application Guide Communication Database Commissioning and Maintenance Guide Connection Diagrams Commissioning Test and Setting Records Sheets Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility P12x/EN T/Gd6 Page 1/2 Pxxxx/EN SS/G11 P12x/EN IT/Fc6 P12x/EN IN/Eb6 P12x/EN FT/Gd6 P12x/EN HI/Gd6 P12x/EN TD/Gd6 P12x/EN GS/Fc6 P12x/EN AP/Fc6 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 P12x/EN CM/Fc6 P12x/EN CO/Gd6 P12x/EN RS/Fc6 P12x/EN VC/Gd6 P12x/EN T/Gd6 Page 2/2 BLANK PAGE Technical Guide Contents MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Pxxx/EN SS/G11 SAFETY SECTION Safety Section Pxxx/EN SS/G11 Page 1/8 STANDARD SAFETY STATEMENTS AND EXTERNAL LABEL INFORMATION FOR SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT 1. INTRODUCTION 3 2. HEALTH AND SAFETY 3 3. SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT 4 3.1 Symbols 4 3.2 Labels 4 4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING 4 5. DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL 7 6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY 8 6.1 Protective fuse rating 8 6.2 Protective Class 8 6.3 Installation Category 8 6.4 Environment 8 Pxxx/EN SS/G11 Page 2/8 Safety Section BLANK PAGE Safety Section Pxxx/EN SS/G11 Page 3/8 1. INTRODUCTION This guide and the relevant equipment documentation provide full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment. This Safety Guide also includes descriptions of equipment label markings. Documentation for equipment ordered from Schneider Electric is despatched separately from manufactured goods and may not be received at the same time. Therefore this guide is provided to ensure that printed information which may be present on the equipment is fully understood by the recipient. The technical data in this safety guide is typical only, see the technical data section of the relevant product publication(s) for data specific to a particular equipment. Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with the contents of this Safety Guide and the ratings on the equipment's rating label. Reference should be made to the external connection diagram before the equipment is installed, commissioned or serviced. Language specific, self-adhesive User Interface labels are provided in a bag for some equipment. 2. HEALTH AND SAFETY The information in the Safety Section of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition. It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the equipment will be familiar with the contents of that Safety Section, or this Safety Guide. When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger personnel and equipment and also cause personal injury or physical damage. Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated. Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment. Qualified personnel are individuals who: � Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the system to which it is being connected; � Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety engineering practices and are authorised to energize and de-energize equipment and to isolate, ground, and label it; � Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering practices; � Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid). The equipment documentation gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate Schneider Electric technical sales office and request the necessary information. Pxxx/EN SS/G11 Page 4/8 Safety Section 3. SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT For safety reasons the following symbols and external labels, which may be used on the equipment or referred to in the equipment documentation, should be understood before the equipment is installed or commissioned. 3.1 Symbols Caution: refer to equipment documentation Caution: risk of electric shock Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal Functional/Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal. Note: This symbol may also be used for a Protective Conductor (Earth) Terminal if that terminal is part of a terminal block or subassembly e.g. power supply. *NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS GUIDE IS THE DIRECT EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH AMERICAN TERM GROUND. 3.2 Labels See Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M/G11) for equipment labelling information. 4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING Equipment connections Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work for this equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety. The equipment documentation should be consulted before installing, commissioning, or servicing the equipment. Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated. The clamping screws of all terminal block connectors, for field wiring, using M4 screws shall be tightened to a nominal torque of 1.3 Nm. Equipment intended for rack or panel mounting is for use on a flat surface of a Type 1 enclosure, as defined by Underwriters Laboratories (UL). Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts at hazardous voltage, also electronic parts may be damaged if suitable electrostatic voltage discharge (ESD) precautions are not taken. If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards. Voltage and current connections shall be made using insulated crimp terminations to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained for safety. Watchdog (self-monitoring) contacts are provided in numerical relays to indicate the health of the device. Schneider Electric strongly recommends that these contacts are hardwired into the substation's automation system, for alarm purposes. Safety Section Pxxx/EN SS/G11 Page 5/8 To ensure that wires are correctly terminated the correct crimp terminal and tool for the wire size should be used. The equipment must be connected in accordance with the appropriate connection diagram. Protection Class I Equipment - Before energizing the equipment it must be earthed using the protective conductor terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment. - The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since the protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would be lost. - When the protective (earth) conductor terminal (PCT) is also used to terminate cable screens, etc., it is essential that the integrity of the protective (earth) conductor is checked after the addition or removal of such functional earth connections. For M4 stud PCTs the integrity of the protective (earth) connections should be ensured by use of a locknut or similar. The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm� (3.3 mm� for North America) unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the equipment documentation, or otherwise required by local or country wiring regulations. The protective conductor (earth) connection must be low-inductance and as short as possible. All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections that are pre-wired, but not used, should preferably be grounded when binary inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be connected to the common potential of the grouped connections. Before energizing the equipment, the following should be checked: - Voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation), - CT circuit rating (rating label) and integrity of connections, - Protective fuse rating, - Integrity of the protective conductor (earth) connection (where applicable), - Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable to the application. Accidental touching of exposed terminals If working in an area of restricted space, such as a cubicle, where there is a risk of electric shock due to accidental touching of terminals which do not comply with IP20 rating, then a suitable protective barrier should be provided. Equipment use If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired. Removal of the equipment front panel/cover Removal of the equipment front panel/cover may expose hazardous live parts, which must not be touched until the electrical power is removed. Pxxx/EN SS/G11 Page 6/8 Safety Section UL and CSA/CUL Listed or Recognized equipment To maintain UL and CSA/CUL Listing/Recognized status for North America the equipment should be installed using UL or CSA Listed or Recognized parts for the following items: connection cables, protective fuses/fuseholders or circuit breakers, insulation crimp terminals and replacement internal battery, as specified in the equipment documentation. For external protective fuses a UL or CSA Listed fuse shall be used. The Listed type shall be a Class J time delay fuse, with a maximum current rating of 15 A and a minimum d.c. rating of 250 Vd.c., for example type AJT15. Where UL or CSA Listing of the equipment is not required, a high rupture capacity (HRC) fuse type with a maximum current rating of 16 Amps and a minimum d.c. rating of 250 Vd.c. may be used, for example Red Spot type NIT or TIA. Equipment operating conditions The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental limits. Current transformer circuits Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation. Generally, for safety, the secondary of the line CT must be shorted before opening any connections to it. For most equipment with ring-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination has automatic CT shorting on removal of the module. Therefore external shorting of the CTs may not be required, the equipment documentation should be checked to see if this applies. For equipment with pin-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination does NOT have automatic CT shorting on removal of the module. External resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs) Where external resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs), are fitted to the equipment, these may present a risk of electric shock or burns, if touched. Battery replacement Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended type and be installed with the correct polarity to avoid possible damage to the equipment, buildings and persons. Insulation and dielectric strength testing Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected. Insertion of modules and pcb cards Modules and PCB cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energized, since this may result in damage. Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards Extender cards are available for some equipment. If an extender card is used, this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energized. This is to avoid possible shock or damage hazards. Hazardous live voltages may be accessible on the extender card. Safety Section Pxxx/EN SS/G11 Page 7/8 External test blocks and test plugs Great care should be taken when using external test blocks and test plugs such as the MMLG, MMLB and MiCOM P990 types, hazardous voltages may be accessible when using these. *CT shorting links must be in place before the insertion or removal of MMLB test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages. *Note: When a MiCOM P992 Test Plug is inserted into the MiCOM P991 Test Block, the secondaries of the line CTs are automatically shorted, making them safe. Fiber optic communication Where fiber optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device. Cleaning The equipment may be cleaned using a lint free cloth dampened with clean water, when no connections are energized. Contact fingers of test plugs are normally protected by petroleum jelly, which should not be removed. 5. DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL De-commissioning The supply input (auxiliary) for the equipment may include capacitors across the supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely isolating the supplies to the equipment (both poles of any dc supply), the capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to de-commissioning. Disposal It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided. The equipment should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any equipment containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of operation, may apply to the disposal of the equipment. Pxxx/EN SS/G11 Page 8/8 Safety Section 6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY Unless otherwise stated in the equipment technical manual, the following data is applicable. 6.1 Protective fuse rating The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for equipments is 16A, high rupture capacity (HRC) Red Spot type NIT, or TIA, or equivalent. Unless otherwise stated in equipment technical manual, the following data is applicable. The protective fuse should be located as close to the unit as possible. CAUTION - CTs must NOT be fused since open circuiting them may produce lethal hazardous voltages. 6.2 Protective Class IEC 60255-27: 2005 EN 60255-27: 2006 Class I (unless otherwise specified in the equipment documentation). This equipment requires a protective conductor (earth) connection to ensure user safety. 6.3 Installation Category IEC 60255-27: 2005 EN 60255-27: 2006 Installation Category III (Overvoltage Category III): Distribution level, fixed installation. Equipment in this category is qualification tested at 5 kV peak, 1.2/50 �s, 500 , 0.5 J, between all supply circuits and earth and also between independent circuits. 6.4 Environment The equipment is intended for indoor installation and use only. If it is required for use in an outdoor environment then it must be mounted in a specific cabinet or housing which will enable it to meet the requirements of IEC 60529 with the classification of degree of protection IP54 (dust and splashing water protected). Pollution Degree - Pollution Degree 2 Altitude - Operation up to 2000m Compliance is demonstrated by reference to safety standards. IEC 60255-27:2005 EN 60255-27: 2006 Introduction MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN IT/Fc6 INTRODUCTION Introduction MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 CONTENTS P12x/EN IT/Fc6 Page 1/9 1. INTRODUCTION 3 2. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 4 3. INTRODUCTION TO THE MICOM RANGE 6 4. INTRODUCTION TO THE MICOM P120, P121, P122 & P123 RELAYS 7 5. MAIN FUNCTIONS 8 5.1 Main functions 8 5.2 General functions 9 P12x/EN IT/Fc6 Page 2/9 BLANK PAGE Introduction MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Introduction P12x/EN IT/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 3/9 1. INTRODUCTION The overcurrent relays of the MiCOM P120 range are Schneider Electric universal overcurrent relays. MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays have been designed to control, protect and monitor industrial installations, public distribution networks and substations, and to be used as back-up protection for EHV and HV transmission networks. P12x/EN IT/Fc6 Introduction Page 4/9 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL This manual provides a description of MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 functions and settings. The goal of this manual is to allow the user to become familiar with the application, installation, setting and commissioning of these relays. This manual has the following format: P12x/EN IT Introduction The introduction presents the documentation structure and a brief presentation of the relay, including functions. P12x/EN IN Handling, installation and case dimensions This section provides logistics general instructions for handling, installing and stocking. P12x/EN FT User Guide of MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays This section provides relay settings with a brief explanation of each setting and detailed description. It also provides recording and measurements functions including the configuration of the event and disturbance recorder and measurement functions. P12x/EN HI Menu content tables This section shows the menu structure of the relays, with a complete list of all of the menu settings. P12x/EN AP Application Notes This section includes a description of common power system applications of the relay, calculation of suitable settings, some typical worked examples, and how to apply the settings to the relay. P12x/EN TD Technical data and curve characteristics This section provides technical data including setting ranges, accuracy limits, recommended operating conditions, ratings and performance data. Compliance with norms and international standards is quoted where appropriate. P12x/EN CT Communication mapping data bases This section provides an overview regarding the communication interfaces of the relay. Detailed protocol mappings, semantics, profiles and interoperability tables are not provided within this manual. Separate documents are available per protocol, available for download from our website. P12x/EN CM Commissioning and Maintenance Guide Instructions on how to commission the relay, comprising checks on the calibration and functionality of the relay. P12x/EN CO Connection diagrams for MiCOM P120/P121 and P122/P123 This section provides the mechanical and electrical description. External wiring connections to the relay are indicated. P12x/EN RS Commissioning test records This section contains checks on the calibration and functionality of the relay. P12x/EN VC Hardware/Software version history History of all hardware and software releases for the product. Introduction MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN AD P12x/EN IT/Fc6 Page 5/9 ADDENDUM documentation MiCOM P120 R This section gives information about P120R specific relay. P12x/EN IT/Fc6 Introduction Page 6/9 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 3. INTRODUCTION TO THE MiCOM RANGE MiCOM is a comprehensive solution capable of meeting all electricity supply requirements. It comprises of a range of components, systems and services from Schneider Electric. Flexibility is central to the MiCOM concept. MiCOM provides the ability to define an application solution and, through extensive communication capabilities, to integrate this solution with your power supply control system. The components within MiCOM are: � P range protection relays � C range control products � M range measurement products for accurate metering and monitoring � S range versatile PC support and substation control packages MiCOM products include extensive facilities for recording information on the state and behaviour of a power system, using disturbance and fault records. They can also provide measurements of the power system at regular intervals to a control centre enabling remote monitoring and control to take place. For up-to-date information on any MiCOM product, refer to the technical publications, which can be obtained from: Schneider Electric or your local sales office; alternatively visit our web site. Introduction P12x/EN IT/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 7/9 4. INTRODUCTION TO THE MiCOM P120, P121, P122 & P123 RELAYS The range of MiCOM protection relays is built on the success of the MIDOS, K and MODN ranges by incorporating the last changes in digital technology. Relays from the MiCOM P120 range are fully compatible and use the same modular box concept. MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays provide comprehensive overcurrent phase and earth fault protection for utilities networks, industrial plants and networks as well as for other applications where overcurrent protection is required. The earth fault protection is sensitive enough to be applied in electrical networks where the earth fault current is low. In addition to its protective functions, each relay offers control and recording features. They can be fully integrated to a control system so protection, control, data acquisition and recording of faults, events and disturbances can be made available. The relays are equipped on the front panel with a liquid crystal display (LCD) with 2 x 16 backlit alphanumerical characters, a tactile 7 button keypad (to access all settings, clear alarms and read measurements) and 8 LEDs that indicate the status of MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays. In addition, the use of the RS485 communication port makes it possible to read, reinitialise and change the settings of the relays, if required, from a local or remote PC computer loaded with MiCOM S1 software. Its flexibility of use, reduced maintenance requirements and ease of integration allow the MiCOM P120 range to provide an adaptable solution for the problems of the protection of electric networks. P12x/EN IT/Fc6 Introduction Page 8/9 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 5. MAIN FUNCTIONS 5.1 Main functions The following table shows the functions available for the different models of the MiCOM P120 range of relays. ANSI CODES FEATURES 50/51 or 50N/51N Single-phase overcurrent 50/51 Three-phase overcurrent 50N/51N Earth fault overcurrent 50N/51N Derived fault overcurrent 64N Restricted Earth fault 49 Thermal overload (True RMS) 37 Undercurrent 46 Negative sequence overcurrent Broken conductor detection Cold load pickup Instantaneous/start contact 86 50BF Latching output contacts Setting groups Circuit breaker failure detection Trip circuit supervision Circuit Breaker monitoring and control Blocking logic Inrush Blocking Selective relay scheme logic Logic equations Auxiliary Timers 79 Multi-shot autoreclose Clockwise and anti-clockwise phase rotation Switch on to fault (SOTF) Test of output relays (maintenance) CB control Local/Remote P120 � � � 1 � 2 P121 � � � � � 1 � � 2 P122 � � � � � � � � � � � 2 � � � � � � � 3 � � P123 � � � � � � � � � � � 2 � � � � � � � 5 � � � � � Introduction MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 5.2 General functions The following table shows the general features available. GENERAL FEATURES Number of digital inputs Total number of outputs relays Events recording Fault recording Disturbance recording Setting group Auxiliary timers Communication IEC60870-5-103, DNP 3.0 & Modbus RTU Courier Time synchronisation Settings software Logic equation Measurements Via rear communication port (DCS) Via digital input (external clock) MiCOM S1 using RS232 front port AND, OR and NOT gates (8 equations) RMS currents values & frequency Peak and rolling currents values Max and average currents values P120 2 4 250 25 5 1 2 � � � � � � P121 2 4 0 0 0 1 2 � � � � � P12x/EN IT/Fc6 Page 9/9 P122 3 6 250 25 5 2 3 � P123 5 8 250 25 5 2 5 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN IN/Eb6 HANDLING, INSTALLATION AND CASE DIMENSIONS Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 CONTENTS 1. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS 1.1 Receipt of relays 1.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) 2. HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT 3. RELAY MOUNTING 4. UNPACKING 5. STORAGE 6. CONNECTION 6.1 Connection of power terminals, and Signals terminals 6.2 Communication port RS485 6.3 Earthing 7. CASE DIMENSIONS P12x/EN IN/Eb6 Page 1/10 3 3 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 9 9 10 P12x/EN IN/Eb6 Page 2/10 Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions BLANK PAGE MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions P12x/EN IN/Eb6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 3/10 1. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY GUIDE SFTY/4LM/E11 OR LATER ISSUE, OR THE SAFETY AND TECHNICAL DATA SECTIONS OF THE TECHNICAL MANUAL AND ALSO THE RATINGS ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL. 1.1 Receipt of relays Protective relays, although generally of robust construction, require careful treatment prior to installation on site. Upon receipt, relays should be examined immediately to ensure no damage has been sustained in transit. If damage has been sustained during transit a claim should be made to the transport contractor and Schneider Electric should be promptly notified. Relays that are supplied unmounted and not intended to be installed immediately should be returned with their protective polythene bags. 1.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) The relays use components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharges. The electronic circuits are well protected by the metal case and the internal module should not be withdrawn unnecessarily. When handling the module outside its case, care should be taken to avoid contact with components and electrical connections. If removed from the case for storage, the module should be placed in an electrically conducting antistatic bag. There are no setting adjustments within the module and it is advised that it is not unnecessarily disassembled. Although the printed circuit boards are plugged together, the connectors are a manufacturing aid and not intended for frequent dismantling; in fact, considerable effort may be required to separate them. Touching the printed circuit board should be avoided, since complementary metal oxide semiconductors (CMOS) are used, which can be damaged by static electricity discharged from the body. P12x/EN IN/Eb6 Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions Page 4/10 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2. HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT A person's normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuits can cause serious damage, which often may not be immediately apparent but the reliability of the circuit will have been reduced. The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case. Do not expose them to risk of damage by withdrawing modules unnecessarily. Each module incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductor devices. However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw a module, the following precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed and manufactured. 1. Before removing a module, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as the equipment by touching the case. 2. Handle the module by its frontplate, frame or edges of the printed circuit board. Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit track or connectors. 3. Do not pass the module to another person without first ensuring you are both at the same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential. 4. Place the module on an antistatic surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the same potential as yourself. 5. Store or transport the module in a conductive bag. If you are making measurements on the internal electronic circuitry of an equipment in service, it is preferable that you are earthed to the case with a conductive wrist strap. Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between 500k � 10M. If a wrist strap is not available, you should maintain regular contact with the case to prevent a build-up of static. Instrumentation which may be used for making measurements should be earthed to the case whenever possible. More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can be found in BS5783 and IEC 147-OF. It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on electronic circuitry or modification work should be carried out in a special handling area such as described in the above-mentioned BS and IEC documents. Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions P12x/EN IN/Eb6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 5/10 3. RELAY MOUNTING Relays are dispatched either individually or as part of a panel/rack assembly. If an MMLG test block is to be included, it should be positioned at the right-hand side of the assembly (viewed from the front). Modules should remain protected by their metal case during assembly into a panel or rack. For individually mounted relays an outline diagram is supplied in section 6 of this chapter showing the panel cut-outs and hole centres. P12x/EN IN/Eb6 Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions Page 6/10 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 4. UNPACKING Care must be taken when unpacking and installing the relays so that none of the parts is damaged or the settings altered. Relays must only be handled by skilled personnel. The installation should be clean, dry and reasonably free from dust and excessive vibration. The site should be well lit to facilitate inspection. Relays that have been removed from their cases should not be left in situations where they are exposed to dust or damp. This particularly applies to installations which are being carried out at the same time as construction work. Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions P12x/EN IN/Eb6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 7/10 5. STORAGE If relays are not to be installed immediately upon receipt they should be stored in a place free from dust and moisture in their original cartons. Where de-humidifier bags have been included in the packing they should be retained. The action of the de-humidifier crystals will be impaired if the bag has been exposed to ambient conditions and may be restored by gently heating the bag for about an hour, prior to replacing it in the carton. Dust which collects on a carton may, on subsequent unpacking, find its way into the relay; in damp conditions the carton and packing may become impregnated with moisture and the dehumifier will lose its efficiency. Storage temperature: �25�C to +70�C. P12x/EN IN/Eb6 Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions Page 8/10 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 6. CONNECTION 6.1 Connection of power terminals, and Signals terminals The individual equipments are delivered with sufficient M4 screws to connect the relay via annular terminals, with a maximum recommended of two annular terminals per contact. If necessary, Schneider Electric can provide annular terminals to crimp. 5 references exist according to the section of the wire (see below). Each reference corresponds to a sachet of 100 terminals. ATTENTION AREVA Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions P12x/EN IN/Eb6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 9/10 To insure the insulation of the terminals and to respect the security and safety instructions, an isolated sleeve can be used. We recommend the following cable cross-sections: - Auxiliary sources Vaux: 1.5 mm� - Communication Port see paragraph 6.2 - Other circuits 1.0 mm� Because of the limitations of the annular terminals, the maximum wire cross-section which can be used for the connector blocks (for current inputs and signals) is of 6mm� by using non insulated annular terminals. When only pre- insulated terminals can be used, the maximum wire cross-section is reduced to 2, 63 mm� per annular terminal. If a more significant wire cross-section is necessary, two wires can be put in parallel, each one finished by a separate annular terminal. All the terminal blocks used for connections, except of the port RS485, must be able to withstand a nominal voltage of minimum 300V peak value. We recommend to protect the auxiliary source connection by using a fuse of type NIT or TIA with a breaking capacity of 16A. For security reasons, do never install fuses in current transformers circuits. The other circuits must be protected by fuses. 6.2 Communication port RS485 Connections to RS485 is made using annular terminals. It is recommended that a two core screened cable, is used with a maximum total length of 1000 m or a200nF total cable capacitance. Typical specification: - Each core: 16/0.2 mm copper conductor, PVC insulated. - Nominal conductor area: 0.5 mm� per core - Screen: Overall braid, PVC sheathed - Linear capacitance between conductor and earth: 100pF/m 6.3 Earthing Each equipment must be connected to a local earth terminal by the intermediary of a M4 earth terminals. We recommend a wire of minimal section of 2,5 mm�, with annular terminals on the side of the equipment. Because of the limitations of the annular terminals, the possible maximum section is of 6mm� by wire. If a larger section is necessary, one can use cables connected in parallel, each one ending with an annular terminal separated on the side of the equipment. One can also use a metal bar. NOTE: To prevent any electrolytic risk between copper conductor or brass conductor and the back plate of the equipment, it is necessary to take precautions to isolate them one from the other. This can be done in several ways, for example by inserting between the conductor and the case a plated nickel or insulated ring washer or by using a tin terminals. P12x/EN IN/Eb6 Handling, Installation and Case Dimensions Page 10/10 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 7. CASE DIMENSIONS MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays are available in a 4U metal case for panel or flush mounting. Weight: 1.7 to 2.1 Kg External size: Height Width Depth case front panel case front panel case front panel + case 152 mm 177 mm 97 mm 103 mm 226 mm 252 mm MiCOM P120, P121, P122 AND P123 RELAYS CASE DIMENSIONS NOTE: The chassis is normally secured in the case by four screws (Self tap screws 6x1,4), to ensure good seating. The fixing screws should be fitted in normal service (do not add washers). Do not discard these screws. User Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN FT/Gd6 USER GUIDE User Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 CONTENTS P12x/EN FT/Gd6 Page 1/63 1. PRESENTATION OF MICOM P120, P121, P122 AND P123 RELAYS 3 1.1 USER INTERFACE 4 1.1.1 Relay Overview 4 1.1.2 Front panel description 5 1.1.3 LCD display and keypad description 6 1.1.4 LEDs 6 1.1.5 Description of the two areas under the top and bottom flaps 8 1.1.6 The USB/RS232 cable (to power and set the relay) 8 1.2 Menu structure 8 1.3 PASSWORD 9 1.3.1 Password protection 9 1.3.2 Password entry 9 1.3.3 Changing the password 9 1.3.4 Change of setting invalidation 9 1.4 Displays of Alarm & Warning Messages 10 1.4.1 Electrical Network Alarms 10 1.4.2 Relay Hardware or Software Warning Messages 12 2. MENUS 14 2.1 Default display 14 2.2 Menu contents description 14 2.3 OP PARAMETERS Menu 15 2.4 ORDERS menu (P122 and P123 Only) 16 2.5 CONFIGURATION menu 17 2.5.1 Submenu DISPLAY 17 2.5.2 Submenu CT RATIO 17 2.5.3 Submenus LED 5 to 8 18 2.5.4 Submenu GROUP SELECT (P122 & P123 only) 20 2.5.5 Submenu ALARMS (P121, P122 and P123 only) 20 2.5.6 Submenu CONFIGURATION INPUTS (P122 & P123 only) 21 2.5.7 Submenu OUTPUT RELAYS (P121, P122 and P123 only) 22 2.5.8 Submenu PHASE ROTATION (P122 & P123 only) 22 2.6 MEASUREMENTS Menu 22 2.7 COMMUNICATION Menu 24 2.7.1 MODBUS COMMUNICATION Menu 24 2.7.2 Courier COMMUNICATION Menu 25 2.7.3 IEC 60870-5-103 COMMUNICATION Menu 25 2.7.4 DNP3 COMMUNICATION Menu 25 2.8 PROTECTION Menu 26 2.8.1 Submenu [50/51] PHASE OC 26 P12x/EN FT/Gd6 User Guide Page 2/63 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2.8.2 Submenu [50N/51N] EARTH OC (P121 - P122 - P123 only) 28 2.8.3 Submenu [46] NEGATIVE Phase SEQUENCE I2> (P122 & P123 only) 33 2.8.4 Submenu [49] Therm OL (P122 & P123 only) 34 2.8.5 Submenu [37] UNDERCURRENT I< (P122 & P123 only) 35 2.8.6 Submenu [79] AUTORECLOSE (P123 only) 35 2.9 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu 39 2.9.1 Submenu Trip Commands 39 2.9.2 Submenu Latch of trip output relay by Function 40 2.9.3 Submenu Blocking Logic 42 2.9.4 Inrush Blocking Logic submenu (P122 and P123 only) 43 2.9.5 Submenus Logic Select (P122 & P123 only) 44 2.9.6 Outputs Relays submenu 44 2.9.7 Latch of the auxiliary output relays (RL2 to RL8) 47 2.9.8 Inputs submenu 48 2.9.9 BROKEN CONDUCTOR submenu (P122 & P123 only) 50 2.9.10 COLD LOAD PICK-UP submenu (P122 & P123 only) 50 2.9.11 CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE submenu (P122 & P123 only) 51 2.9.12 CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION sub-menu (P122 & P123 only) 53 2.9.13 Submenu SOTF (Switch on to Fault) (P123 only) 54 2.9.14 Submenu Logic Equations (P121, P122 & P123 only) 55 2.10 RECORDS Menu (P120, P122 and P123 only) 58 2.10.1 CB MONITORING submenu (P122, P123 only) 58 2.10.2 Fault Record submenu 58 2.10.3 INSTANTANEOUS submenu 59 2.10.4 DISTURBANCE RECORD submenu 60 2.10.5 Time PEAK VALUE submenu (P122, P123 only) 60 2.10.6 ROLLING DEMAND submenu (P122, P123 only) 61 3. WIRING 62 3.1 Auxiliary supply 62 3.2 Current measurement inputs 62 3.3 Logic inputs 62 3.4 Output relays 62 3.5 Communication 63 3.5.1 RS485 rear communication port 63 3.5.2 RS232 front communication port (P120, P121, P122, P123) 63 User Guide P12x/EN FT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 3/63 1. PRESENTATION OF MiCOM P120, P121, P122 AND P123 RELAYS MiCOM P120, P121 P122 and P123 are fully numerical relays designed to perform electrical protection and control functions. The following section describes the MiCOM P120 range and the main differences between the different models. MiCOM relays are powered either from a DC (2 voltage ranges) or an AC auxiliary power supply. Using the front panel, the user can easily navigate through the menu and access data, change settings, read measurements, etc. Eight LEDs situated in the front panel help the user to quickly know the status of the relay and the presence of alarms. Alarms that have been detected are stored and can be displayed on the back-lit LCD. Any short time voltage interruption (<50ms) is filtered and regulated through the auxiliary power supply. Regarding current inputs, MiCOM P120 has 2 current inputs available, one for 1A and one for 5A rated CTs. MiCOM P121, P122 & P123 have 3 phase and 1 earth current inputs available for 1 and 5 Amps rated CTs. On each one of these relays, it is possible to combine 1 and 5 Amp current inputs together (i-e a mix between 1A for earth fault and 5A for phase connections). MiCOM 120, P121, P122 and P123 relays continuously measure phase and earth currents (P120 makes a single measurement) and take into account the true RMS current value up to 10th harmonic (at 50 Hz). Output relays are freely configurable and can be activated by any of the control or protection functions available in the relay. Logic inputs can also be assigned to various control functions. On their rear terminals MiCOM P120, P121 P122 and P123 have a standard RS485 port available. When ordering, the user can choose between the following communication protocol: ModBus RTU, IEC 60870-5-103, Courier or DNP3.0. Using RS485 communication channel, all stored information (measurements, alarms, and parameters) can be read and settings can be modified when the chosen protocol allows it. Reading and modification of this data can be carried out on site with a standard PC loaded with Schneider Electric setting software. Thanks to its RS485 based communication, MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays can be connected directly to a digital control system. All the available data can then be gathered by a substation control system and be processed either locally or remotely. P12x/EN FT/Gd6 User Guide Page 4/63 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 1.1 1.1.1 USER INTERFACE Relay Overview The next figures show the MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays. The table shows the case size for the relays. Height 4U (177mm) Depth 226mm Width 20 TE The hinged covers at the top and bottom of the relay are shown closed. Extra physical protection for the front panel can be provided by an optional transparent front cover; this allows read only access to the relays settings and data but does not affect the relays IP rating. When full access to the relay keypad is required to edit the settings, the transparent cover can be unclipped and removed when the top and bottom hinged covers are open. User Guide P12x/EN FT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 5/63 1.1.2 Front panel description MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relay front panel allows the user to easily enter relay settings, display measured values and alarms and to clearly display the status of the relay. FIGURE 1: MiCOM P120, P121, P122 AND P123 FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTION The front panel of the relay has three separate sections: 1. The LCD display and the keypad, 2. The LEDs 3. The two zones under the upper and lower flaps. NOTE: Starting from Hardware 5, there is no need of battery in the front of the relay. Indeed, disturbance, fault and event records are stored on a flash memory card that doesn't need to be backed up by a battery. The compartment is fitted with a blanking cover. P12x/EN FT/Gd6 User Guide Page 6/63 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 1.1.3 1.1.3.1 LCD display and keypad description The front panel components are shown below. The front panel functionality is identical for the P120, P121, P122 & P123 relays. LCD display In the front panel, a liquid crystal display (LCD) displays settings, measured values and alarms. Data is accessed through a menu structure. The LCD has two lines, with sixteen characters each. A back-light is activated when a key is pressed and will remain lit for five minutes after the last key press. This allows the user to be able to read the display in most lighting conditions. 1.1.3.2 Keypad The keypad has seven keys divided into two groups: � Two keys located just under the screen (keys 0 and 1). Keys 0 and 1 are used to read and acknowledge alarms. To display successive alarms, press key 1. Alarms are displayed in reverse order of their detection (the most recent alarm first, the oldest alarm last). To acknowledge the alarms, the user can either acknowledge each alarm using 0 or go to the end of the ALARM menu and acknowledge all the alarms at the same time. When navigating through submenus, key 0 is also used to come back to the head line of the corresponding menu. NOTE: To acknowledge a relay latched refer to the corresponding submenu section. � Four main keys 2, 6, 4, 8 located in the middle of the front panel. They are used to navigate through the different menus and submenus and to do the setting of the relay. The key 5 is used to validate a choice or a value (modification of settings). 1.1.4 LEDs The LED labels on the front panel are by default written in English, however the user has selfadhesive labels available with MiCOM relays on which it is possible to write using a ball point pen. User Guide P12x/EN FT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 7/63 The top four LEDs indicate the status of the relay (Trip condition, alarm LED, equipment failure, auxiliary supply). The four lower LEDs are freely programmable by the user and can be assigned to display a threshold crossing for example (available for all models) or to show the status of logic input. The description of each one of these eight LEDs located in the left side of the front view is given hereafter (numbered from the top to bottom from 1 to 8): LED 1 LED 8 P3951ENa LED 1 Colour: RED Label: Trip LED 1 indicates that the relay has issued a trip order to the cut-off element (circuit breaker, contactor). This LED recopies the trip order issued to the Trip logic output. Its normal state is unlit. As soon as a triggering order is issued, the LED lights up. It is cleared when the associated alarm is acknowledged either through the front panel, or by a remote command, a digital input, or by a new fault (CONFIGURATION/Alarms menu). LED 2 Colour: ORANGE Label: ALARM LED 2 indicates that the relay has detected an alarm. This alarm can either be a threshold crossing (instantaneous), or a trip order (time delayed). As soon as an alarm is detected, the LED starts blinking. After all the alarms have been read, the LED lights up continuously. After acknowledgement of all the alarms, the LED is extinguished. NOTE: It is possible to configure the instantaneous alarms to be self reset or not by choosing Yes or No in the CONFIGURATION/Alarms Menu. The alarm LED can be reset either through the front panel, or by remote command, by a digital input, or by a new fault (CONFIGURATION/Alarms menu). LED 3 Colour: ORANGE Label: Warning LED 3 indicates internal alarms of the relay. When the relay detects a � non critical � internal alarm (typically a communication failure), the LED starts blinking continuously. When the relay detects a fault that is considered as � critical �, the LED lights up continuously. Only the disappearance of the cause of the fault can clear this LED (repair of the module, clearance of the Fault). LED 4 Colour: GREEN Label: Healthy LED 4 indicates that the relay is powered by an auxiliary source at the nominal range. LED 5 to 8 Colour: RED Label: Aux.1 to 4. These LEDs are user programmable and can be set to display information about instantaneous and time-delayed thresholds as well as the status of the logic inputs (for P122 & P123 only). Under the CONFIGURATION/LED menu of the relay, the user can select the information he wishes to associate with each LED. He can affect more than one function to one LED. The LED will then light up when at least one of the associated information is valid (OR gate). The LED is cleared when all the associated alarms are acknowledged. P12x/EN FT/Gd6 User Guide Page 8/63 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 1.1.5 1.1.5.1 1.1.5.2 1.1.6 1.2 Description of the two areas under the top and bottom flaps Relay Identification Under the upper flap, a label identifies the relay according to its model number (order number) and its serial number. This information defines the product in a way that is unique. In all your requests, please make reference to these two numbers. Under the model and serial number, you will find information about the level of voltage of the auxiliary supply and the nominal earth current value. Lower flap Under the lower flap, a RS232 port is available in all MiCOM relays. It can be used either to download a new version of the application software version into the relay flash memory or to download/retrieve settings plugging a laptop loaded with MiCOM S1 setting software. Note that on older hardware, the downloading/retrieval of settings was not possible on P120 and P121 relays. To withdraw more easily the active part of the MiCOM relay (i-e the chassis) from its case, open the two flaps, then with a 3mm screwdriver, turn the extractor located under the upper flap, and pull it out of its case pulling the flaps towards you. The USB/RS232 cable (to power and set the relay) The USB/RS232 cable is able to perform the following functions: 1. It is able to power the relay from its front port. This allows the user to view or modify data on the relay even when the auxiliary power supply of the relay has failed or when the relay is not connected to any power supply. The USB port of the PC supplies the power necessary to energize the relay. This lasts as long as the battery of the PC can last. 2. It provides an USB / RS 232 interface between the MiCOM relay and the PC. This allows the user to be able to change the setting of the relay using a PC with its USB port. It eases the use of the relay allowing the retrieval of records and disturbance files for example when the auxiliary supply has failed or is not available. The associated driver (supplied with the relay) needs to be installed in the PC. For more information, refer to MiCOM E2 User Guide. Menu structure The relay's menu is arranged in a tabular structure. Each setting in the menu is referred to as a cell, and each cell in the menu may be accessed by reference to a row and column address. The settings are arranged so that each column contains related settings, for example all of the disturbance recorder settings are contained within the same column. As shown in the figure, the top row of each column contains the heading that describes the settings contained within that column. Movement between the columns of the menu can only be made at the column heading level. A complete list of all of the menu settings is given in the Menu Content tables (P12x/EH HI section). User Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN FT/Gd6 Page 9/63 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 MENU STRUCTURE PASSWORD Password protection A password is required for relay settings, especially when changing the various thresholds, time delays, communication parameters, allocation of inputs and outputs relays. The password consists of four capital characters. When leaving factory, the password is set to AAAA. The user can define his own combination of four characters. Should the password be lost or forgotten, the modification of the stored parameters is blocked. It is then necessary to contact the manufacturer or his representative and a stand-by password specific to the relay may be obtained. The programming mode is indicated with the letter "P" on the right hand side of the display on each menu heading. The letter "P" remains present as long as the password is active (5 minutes if there is no action on the keypad). Password entry The input of the password is requested as soon as a modification of a parameter is made for any one of the six/eight menus and the submenus. The user enters each one of the 4 characters and then validates the entire password with 5. After 5 seconds, the display returns to the point of the preceding menu. If no key is pressed inside of 5 minutes, the password is deactivated. A new password request is associated with any subsequent parameter modification. Changing the password To change an active password, go to the OP. PARAMETERS menu and then to the Password submenu. Enter the current password and validate it. Then press 5 and enter the new password character by character and validate the new password using 5. The message NEW PASSWORD OK is displayed to indicate that the new password has been accepted. Change of setting invalidation The procedure to modify a setting is described in the following sections of this manual. P12x/EN FT/Gd6 User Guide Page 10/63 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 If there is a need to get back to the old setting push key 0 before validating the setting change. The following message will then appear on the LCD for a few seconds and the old setting will remain unchanged. UPGRADE CANCEL 1.4 1.4.1 Displays of Alarm & Warning Messages Alarm messages are displayed directly on the front panel LCD. They have priority over the default display presenting measured current values. As soon as the relay detects an alarm condition (crossing of a threshold for example), the associated message is displayed on the front panel LCD and the LED Alarm (LED 2) lights up. We distinguish two types of alarm and warning messages: - Alarm messages generated by the electrical power network. - Warning messages caused by hardware or software faults from the relay. Electrical Network Alarms Any crossing of a threshold (instantaneous or time delay) generates an "electrical network alarm". The involved threshold is indicated. Regarding the phase thresholds, the phase designation (A, B or C) is also displayed. If several alarms are triggered, they are all stored in their order of appearance and presented on the LCD in reverse order of their detection (the most recent alarm first, the oldest alarm last). Each alarm message is numbered and the total number of alarm messages is displayed. The user can read all the alarm messages pressing 1. The user acknowledges and clears the alarm messages from the LCD pressing 0. The user can acknowledge each alarm message one by one or all by going to the end of the list to acknowledge, and clear, all the alarm messages pressing 0. The control of the ALARM LED (LED 2) is directly assigned to the status of the alarm messages stored in the memory. If one or several messages are NOT READ and NOT ACKNOWLEDGED, the ALARM LED (LED 2) flashes. If all the messages have been READ but NOT ACKNOWLEDGED, the ALARM LED (LED 2) lights up continuously. If all the messages have been ACKNOWLEDGED, and cleared, if the cause that generated the alarm disappears, the ALARM LED (LED 2) is extinguished. The different electrical system alarms are listed below: Ie> 1st stage earth fault threshold Ie>> 2nd stage earth fault threshold Ie>>> 3rd stage earth fault threshold I> PHASE 1st stage overcurrent threshold I>> PHASE 2nd stage overcurrent threshold I>>> PHASE 3rd stage overcurrent threshold tIe> 1st stage earth fault time-out tIe>> 2nd stage earth fault time-out tIe>>> 3rd stage earth fault time-out Ie_d> 1st stage derived earth current fault threshold User Guide P12x/EN FT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 11/63 tIe_d> Ie_d>> tIe_d>> TCS tI> PHASE tI>> PHASE tI>>> PHASE THERMAL ALARM THERMAL TRIP I< tI< PHASE BRKN COND. t AUX 1 t AUX 2 t AUX 3 t AUX 4 t AUX 5 CB FAIL I2> tI2> I2>> tI2>> SPRING CHARGE FAIL T operating CB CB OPEN NB Amps(n) TRIP CIRCUIT LATCH RELAY LATCH RELAY TRIP CB CLOSE FAILURE RECLOSER SUCCESSFUL RECLOSER BLOCKED 1st stage derived earth current time-out 2nd stage derived earth current fault threshold 2nd stage derived earth current time-out trip circult supervision alarm 1st stage overcurrent time-out 2nd stage overcurrent time-out 3rd stage overcurrent time-out thermal alarm threshold thermal trip threshold undercurrent element threshold undercurrent fault time-out broken conductor indication. I2/I1 ratio exceeded for a period of time that is higher than tBC can be set under the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Broken cond. menu. t AUX1 time-out t AUX2 time-out t AUX3 time-out t AUX4 time-out t AUX5 time-out circuit breaker failure indication (the CB does not trip on tBF time. tBF can be set under the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Fail menu. negative sequence current threshold (1st stage) negative sequence current threshold time-out (1st stage) negative sequence current threshold (2nd stage) negative sequence current threshold time-out (2nd stage) Faulty circuit breaker indication given by a logic input that has been assigned (under the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs menu). Operating (or tripping) time of the circuit breaker longer than the value set in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu. Number of circuit breaker operation higher that the value set in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu. Total measured current broken by CB is higher than the value set in AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu. Circuit breaker trip circuit failure longer than the supervision timer t SUP (that can be set under the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu or RL1 energised (trip circuit supervision not enabled). At least one output relay is latched. The relay trip is latched. Circuit breaker closing time longer than the value set in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision menu. Successful reclose signal. Indicates that when the fault has been cleared upon circuit breaker reclosure, and has not reappeared before expiry of the reclaim time. Recloser blocking signal. Generated by: P12x/EN FT/Gd6 User Guide Page 12/63 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 1.4.2 RECLOSER CONFLICT - auxiliary power supply failure during dead time (definitive trip). - external blocking signal. External blocking can be set by the user in the PROTECTION G1 / [79] AUTORECLOSE/Ext Block menu. This blocking signal is provided via a logic input assigned to the Block_79 function in the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs menu. - definitive trip. - remote trip command during the reclaim time. - pick-up of I2> or thermal trip during dead time. - breaker failure (circuit breaker failure to trip on expiry of tBF). - breaker operating time (or tripping time) longer than the set time. Configuration conflict of the re-close function. This signal is generated by: - O/O Interlock not assigned to a logic input or assigned but not wired to the input. - no output relay assigned to the CB CLOSE function (AUTOMAT. CTRL/Output Relays menu). - trip contact latched. - no re-close cycle assigned to the protection functions (PROTECTION/ [79] Autoreclose menu). MAINTENANCE MODE The relay is in maintenance mode. Relay Hardware or Software Warning Messages Any software or hardware fault internal to MiCOM relay generates a "hardware/software alarm" that is stored in memory as a "Hardware Alarm". If several hardware alarms are detected they are all stored in their order of appearance. The warning messages are presented on the LCD in reverse order of their detection (the most recent first and the oldest last). Each warning message is numbered and the total stored is shown. The user can read all warning messages pressing 1, without entering the password. It is not possible to acknowledge and clear warning messages caused by internal relay hardware or software failure. This message can only be cleared once the cause of the hardware or software failure has been removed. The control of the WARNING LED (LED 3) is directly assigned to the status of the warning messages stored in the memory. If the internal hardware or software failure is major (i.e. the relay cannot perform protection functions), the WARNING LED (LED 3) lights up continuously. - major fault: Protection and automation functions of the equipment are blocked. In this condition, the protection relay detects the corresponding fault and activates RL0 Watch Dog relay (35-36 terminals contact is closed). For instance: the "DEF. ANA" fault (fault in the analog circuit channel) is considered as a major fault because the protection functions will not operate correctly. - minor fault: Protection and automation functions of the relay operate. A minor fault will not activate RL0 Watch Dog relay (35-36 terminals contact is closed, 36-37 terminals is open). This fault causes a LED alarm and is displayed on the LCD panel. The Watch Dog relay controls the correct operation of the protection and automation function. This relay fault "RL0 relay" is activated if the following functions or checks are faulty: - microprocessor operation, User Guide P12x/EN FT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 13/63 - power supply check, - reconstituted internal power supply check, - heating of a circuit board component monitoring, - analog channel monitoring (acquisition sampling), - program execution monitoring, - communication ports monitoring. If the internal hardware or software failure is minor (like a communication failure that has no influence on the protection and automation functions), the WARNING LED (LED 3) will flash. Possible Hardware or Software alarm messages are: Major fault: The protection and automation functions are stopped. The RL0 watchdog relay is de-energised (35-36 contact closed). << CALIBRATION ERROR.>>: Calibration zone failure << CT ERROR >>: Analog channel failure << DEFAULT SETTINGS (*) >> << SETTING ERROR (**) >> (*) DEFAULT SETTINGS: Each time the relay is powered ON it will check its memory contents to determine whether the settings are set to the factory defaults. If the relay detects that the default settings are loaded an alarm is raised. The ALARM LED (YELLOW) will light up and the Watch Dog contact will be activated. Only one parameter in the relay's menu needs to be changed to suppress these messages and to reset the watch dog. This alarm is only an indication to the user that the relay has its default settings applied. (**) SETTING ERROR: Each time the relay is powered ON it will check the coherence of the setting data. If the relay detects a problem with the settings, a "HARDWARE" ALARM will appear on the LCD display followed by "SETTING ERROR" message (when pushing on the button). The ALARM LED (YELLOW) will light up and the Watch Dog contact will be activated. To reset this alarm, it is necessary to power ON and OFF the relay. Following this, the last unsuccessful setting change will then need to be re-applied. If the alarm persists, i.e. the "SETTING ERROR" alarm is still displayed, please contact Schneider Electric Customer Care Centre for advice and assistance. Minor fault: The MiCOM relay is fully operational. The RL0 watchdog relay is energised (35-36 contact open, 36-37 contact closed). << COMM.ERROR >>: Communication failure << CLOCK ERROR >>: Time tag failure << STATS RESET >>: Statistical data recorded (like CB supervision statistics (Number of CB opening, etc) have been reset. P12x/EN FT/Gd6 User Guide Page 14/63 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2. MENUS The menu of MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays is divided into main menus and submenus. The available content depends on the model of the relay. 2.1 Default display By default, the LCD displays the current value measured (selected phase or earth). As soon as an alarm is detected by the relay, that information is considered as more important and the alarm message is then displayed instead of the default value. The user can configure the information he wants to display by default going under the CONFIGURATION/Display menu. 2.2 Menu contents description The menu of MiCOM P122 & P123 relays is divided into main sections. To access to these menus from the default display, press 2. To return to the default display from these menus or sub-menus press 8. DEFAULT DISPLAY O P PARAMETERS P120, P122 and P123 only O RDERS CO N FIGURATIO N MEASUREMEN TS CO MMUN ICATIO N P122 and PROTECTION G1/ G2 P123 only AUTOMAT. CTRL P120, P122 and P123 only RECO RDS FIGURE 2: ORGANIZATION OF MiCOM P12x MAIN MENU NOTE: The content of the menu is presented in the document P12x/EN HI. This table helps the user to navigate through the different menus and submenus. For MiCOM P121, P122 and P123, while navigating between submenu points, the user can press the key 0 to go back to the corresponding head menu. Using MiCOM S1 Studio, the menu is displayed with a tree structure. A click on the "+" sign (or a double click on the menu title) opens the corresponding submenu. The second column displays the corresponding value for each parameter. User Guide P12x/EN FT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 15/63 2.3 OP PARAMETERS Menu On the P12x front panel, press 2 to access the menu OP PARAMETERS from the default display. OP PARAMETERS Heading of the OP PARAMETERS menu Press 2 to access the menu content. Password * * * * Password entry. This password is required when modifying relay settings and parameters (see � 1.3). Password AAAA To enter a password, enter it letter by letter using 8 2 to go up or down in the alphabet. After each letter, press 6 to enter the following letter. At the end, press 5 to validate the password. If the password is correct, the message � PASSWORD OK � is displayed on the screen. NOTE: The password is initially set in factory to AAAA. WARNING: NO SETTING CHANGES DONE EITHER LOCALLY (THROUGH RS232) OR REMOTELY (THROUGH RS485) WILL BE ALLOWED DURING THE 5 FIRST MINUTES FOLLOWING A CHANGE OF PASSWORD. Language ENGLISH Description P12xxxxxxxxxx Serial Number 00123456 Reference MiCOM Software version XX Frequency 50 Hz Active Group 1 Input Status 54321 10110 Indicates the language used in the display. Indicates the cortec of relay Indicates the serial number of relay Displays the reference number that lists the equipment associated with the relay. Displays the version of the software (P121, P122 and P123 only) Nominal value of the network frequency. Select either 50 or 60 Hz. Displays the active protection and automation group. This value can be either 1 or 2. (P122 and P123 only) Displays the status of the logic Inputs Logic Inputs are numbered from 1 to 5 for P123, 1 to 3 for P122 and 1 to 2 for P120 and P121. When the status of one input is: - state 0: input relay is not activated - state 1: input relay is activated Relay Status 87654321 01011101 Date 12/08/02 Displays the status of the logic outputs. Logic Outputs are numbered from 1 to 8 for P123, 1 to 6 for P122 and 1 to 4 for P120 and P121. When The state of each output is: - state 0: it means that the output relay is not activated - state 1: it means that the output relay is activated To activate an unlatching operation, the password is requested. NOTE: The Watch-dog output (RL0) is not displayed in the output status menu. Displays the date (12/08/02 = 12 August 2002). P12x/EN FT/Gd6 User Guide Page 16/63 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Time 13:57:44 Displays the time (13:57:44 = 1:57:44 pm). 2.4 ORDERS menu (P120, P122 and P123 Only) This menu gives the possibility: - To send open or close orders to the Circuit Breakers from the front panel (MiCOM P122 and P123). Open and close orders are written in the event file. This action generates a "Control Trip" alarm, which can be inhibited. If inhibited, the "trip" LED and the "Alarm" LED are not lit if the relay RL1 is ordered by a control trip information (affected to an input in the "configuration/inputs" submenu). - To reset locally alarms and LEDs, and to clear records when a fault is acknowledged (P120 only), - To start a disturbance recording from the protection relay. ORDERS Open Order No Close Order No General Reset No Disturb rec start No Heading of the ORDERS menu P122 and P123 only Sends manually an open order from the local control panel. This order is permanently assigned to the Trip output relay (selected with "automatic control/output relay" menu . Setting range: No, Yes. To apply the control, enter the password (if necessary). In the "confirmation ?" cell, select Yes to apply the order. P122 and P123 only, Sends manually a close order from the local control panel: RL2 to RL8 (if configured) Setting range: No, Yes (the "confirmation ?" cell will be displayed after setting change) When a fault drops out, this command resets locally alarms and LEDs (except hardware alarms), and clears disturbance records, fault records and event records. Setting range: No, Yes To apply the control, enter the password (if necessary). In the "confirmation ?" cell, select Yes to apply the order. Trigs a disturbance recording from the front panel. Setting range: No, Yes (the "confirmation ?" cell will be displayed after setting change). User Guide P12x/EN FT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2.5 CONFIGURATION menu Page 17/63 2.5.1 Under this menu, the different submenus are: CONFIGURATION 82 Display 6 CT Ratio 4 6 Led 5 4 6 Led 6 4 6 Led 7 4 6 Led 8 4 6 Group select 6 Alarms (1) 4 (1) 4 6 Inputs 4 (1) 6 Output 4 Relays (1) P122 & P123 only (2) P121, P122 & P123 only 6 Phase (2) 4 rotation (1) Press 2 to access the CONFIGURATION menu from the default display, then 6 until the desired submenu header is displayed. Submenu DISPLAY CONFIGURATION Heading of the CONFIGURATION menu. Display Heading of the DISPLAY submenu. 2.5.2 Default Display IL1,2,3,N Phase A Text L1 Phase B Text L2 Phase C Text L3 E/Gnd Text E Displays the default current value (Phase A, Phase B , Phase C, Earth N or the four values simultaneously can be chosen). Choose a label (displayed with the associated measurement value ) for phase A. Possible choices: A, L1, or R (modified after entering the password) As above for phase B Possible choices are B, L2, or S. As above for phase C Possible choices are C, L3, or T. As above for earth phase Possible choices are N, E, or G. WARNING: This DISPLAY submenu does not exist in MiCOM P121. The default display is IA and A,B, C, N for the label of the different phases. Submenu CT RATIO CONFIGURATION CT Ratio Heading of the CT RATIO submenu. Line CT primary 1000 Choose the rated primary current of the line CT. Setting range: from 1 to 9999 � step 1 P12x/EN FT/Gd6 User Guide Page 18/63 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2.5.3 Line CT sec E/Gnd CT primary E/Gnd CT sec 1 1000 1 Choose the rated secondary current of the line CT. Setting value: either 1or 5. Choose the rated primary current of the earth CT. Setting range: from 1 to 9999 � step 1 Choose the rated secondary current of the earth CT. Setting value: 1 or 5. Submenus LED 5 to 8 The LED 5 to LED 8 configuration submenu is used to assign to a LED a protection function (the LED lights up when the protection function is active). The following table lists the protection functions that can be assigned to the LEDs (5 to 8) for each model of relay. Function P120 P121 P122 P123 Information I> X X X X Instantaneous first phase overcurrent threshold tI> X X X X Time delayed first phase overcurrent threshold I>> X X X X Instantaneous second phase overcurrent threshold tI>> X X X X Time delayed second phase overcurrent threshold I>>> X X X X Instantaneous third phase overcurrent threshold tI>>> X X X X Time delayed third phase overcurrent threshold Ie> X X X X Instantaneous first earth overcurrent threshold tIe> X X X X Time delayed first earth overcurrent threshold Ie>> X X X X Instantaneous second overcurrent earth threshold tIe>> X X X X Time delayed second earth overcurrent threshold Ie>>> X X X X Instantaneous third earth overcurrent threshold tIe>>> X X X X Time delayed third earth threshold Ie_d> X X Instantaneous first stage of derived earth overcurrent threshold tIe_d> X X Time delayed first stage of derived earth overcurrent threshold Ie_d>> X X Instantaneous second stage of derived earth overcurrent threshold tIe_d>> X X Time delayed second stage of derived earth overcurrent threshold I< X X Alarm threshold undercurrent tI< X X Time delayed undercurrent threshold Therm Trip X X Trip on Thermal overload Brkn Cond. X X Broken conductor detection CB Fail X X Detection of a Circuit Breaker failure (CB not open at the end of tBF timer) tI2> X X Time delayed first negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold User Guide P12x/EN FT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 19/63 Function P120 P121 P122 P123 Information tI2>> X X Time delayed second negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold. Input 1 X X X X Copy of the status of the Logic Input n�1 ("automat ctrl/inputs" menu) Input 2 X X X X Copy of the status of the Logic Input n�2 Input 3 X X Copy of the status of the Logic Input n�3 Input 4 X Copy of the status of the Logic Input n�4 Input 5 X Copy of the status of the Logic Input n�5 Recloser Run X Signal that Autoreclose cycle is working ("Autoreclose in progress" signal) Recloser int Blk X Autoreclose lock activated by the internal process of the autoreclose Recloser Ext Blk X Autoreclose lock activated by the input "block 79" t Aux 1 X X X X Copy of Aux1 Logic Input delayed by Aux1 time time (Aux1 logic input and aux1 time are set with "automat ctrl/inputs" menu) t Aux 2 X X X X Copy of Aux2 Logic Input delayed by Aux 2 time t Aux 3 X X Copy of Aux3 Logic Input delayed by Aux3 time t Aux 4 X Copy of Aux4 Logic Input delayed by Aux4 time t Aux 5 X Copy of Aux5 Logic Input delayed by Aux 5 time SOTF X Switch on to fault timer expired tIA> X Time delayed first threshold trip on phase A tIB> X Time delayed first threshold trip on phase B tIC> X Time delayed first threshold trip on phase C TCS alarm X X Trip Circuit broken alarm signal Equation A X X X Output of Boolean Equation A Equation B X X X Output of Boolean Equation B Equation C X X X Output of Boolean Equation C Equation D X X X Output of Boolean Equation D Equation E X X X Output of Boolean Equation E Equation F X X X Output of Boolean Equation F Equation G X X X Output of Boolean Equation G Equation H NOTES: X X X Output of Boolean Equation H Each parameter can be assigned to one or more LED's. One or more parameters (OR logic) can provocate each LED to light up. MiCOM S1 Studio setting: The LED 5 (6, 7 or 8) submenu contains up to 4 lines parameter settings. In the value column, each line represents a setting value. State "1" means that the corresponding parameter is associated to the LED. The corresponding parameters are displayed in the setting panel: from 00 (last digit) up to 0D (first digit). P12x/EN FT/Gd6 User Guide Page 20/63 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x Front panel setting: Press 2 to access the LED 5 CONFIGURATION submenu, then 6 twice (press 6 to access to others LEDs CONFIGURATION submenus). Select "Yes" to assignate a LED to a function. CONFIGURATION Led 5 Heading LED 5 submenu. 2.5.4 Led 5 Function Activate (select choice "Yes" or inhibit ("No") LED 5 No operation when: - an alarm is exceeded, - a threshold time delay has elapsed. Refer to previous tables for protection functions list. Submenu GROUP SELECT (P122 & P123 only) The submenu "GROUP SELECT" is used to select the active protection group CONFIGURATION Group Select Heading of the "GROUP SELECT" sub-menu. 2.5.5 Change Group Input = INPUT Setting Group 1 Setting choice: MENU or INPUT MENU is used to change settings group via HMI and/or RS485 port. If MENU is selected, the following menu is displayed: Select active setting protection group 1 or 2. Submenu ALARMS (P121, P122 and P123 only) CONFIGURATION Alarms Inst. Self-reset ? No MiCOM S1 label: Selfacknowledge instantly" Reset led on fault ? No MiCOM S1 label: "LED Acknowledge on Fault" INH Alarm tAux1 No INH Alarm tAux2 No Heading of the Alarms submenu. Setting choices: Yes or No. Setting choice Yes: the alarms that are instantaneous will be self reset when they come back to a normal value (below the threshold). Setting choice No: the alarms that are instantaneous will be need to be acknowledged by the user to be reset (1). Yes: the LED associated with an old alarm will be automatically reset when a new fault occurs. This is done to avoid a display of numerous alarms that are not active any more. No: the appearance of a new fault will not automatically reset LEDs associated with an old fault (1). Yes: auxiliary timer 1 output will not raise an alarm. Alarm LED stays OFF, no message will be displayed on the HMI. No: I< threshold will raise an alarm. As above with timer 2. User Guide P12x/EN FT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 INH Alarm tAux3 Yes INH Alarm tAux4 Yes INH Alarm tAux5 Yes INH Alarm Ctrl Trip Yes As above with timer 3 (1). Page 21/63 As above with timer 4 (2). As above with timer 5 (2). Control trip function assigned to the input. The default value is Yes. The next table summarises the behaviour of control trip function when a control trip function is received by the relay. Case RL1 assigned to "Ctrl Trip" "Ctrl trip" alarm inhibited Result: LED trip LED Alarm Alarm message on display Event "EVT_TC_TRIP_X1" generated in the event file Default recorded in the records/fault record menu RL1 activated No No Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Off Off On Off blinking Off blinking Off Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes 2.5.6 INH Alarm [79] Ext Block No As above for the autorecloser blocking by a logical input (external blocking) (2). INH Alarm I< No As above for the I< threshold. INH Alarm Equ. A No .../... As above for the logical equations (from A to H). INH Alarm Equ. H No (1) P122 and P123 only (2) P123 only Submenu CONFIGURATION INPUTS (P122 & P123 only) A digital input can be configured to be activated either on low level or on high level. Low level (or high level) depends of the application of the digital inputs. The user has to set under the Menu CONFIGURATION the auxiliary voltage (AC or DC) for the digital inputs. This setting is necessary because of the time filtering which is different in DC and AC. The inversion of the logic input in this menu inverts its allocated function status in the logic inputs allocation (AUTOMAT CTRL/INPUTS menu). For example: if EL 2 logic input is 1, then tAux1 = 0 when logic input is 1 and tAux1 = 1 when logic input is 0. CONFIGURATION Inputs Heading of the CONFIGURATION INPUTS submenu. P12x/EN FT/Gd6 User Guide Page 22/63 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2.5.7 Inputs 5 4 3 2 1 1 0 1 1 0 MiCOM S1 label: "Rising Edge / High Level" Voltage input DC P122 (3 inputs) and P123 only. This menu is used to assign active high or low functionality to each logic input. 0 = active low, 1 = active high Setting choice: AC or DC power supply for the digital input. The power supply for any input is the same as the power supply of the relay. Submenu OUTPUT RELAYS (P121, P122 and P123 only) CONFIGURATION Output Relays Fail Safe R. 87654321 0000000 Maintenance Mode No Relays CMD 8765W4321 000000000 Heading of the CONFIGURATION RELAYS MAINTENANCE submenu. P121 (4 relays), P123 (6 relays) and P123 (8 relays) This menu allows the user to invert each of the output relay contacts for the de-energised state. 1 = relay activated when driving signal is not active 0 = relay not activated when driving signal is not active P122 and P123 only Choose if you want to activate the MAINTENANCE MODE of the relay. If Yes is selected, output relays are disconnected from the protection and automation functions. P122 (6 relays + watchdog) and P123 (8 relays + Watchdog) only If the MAINTENANCE MODE is activated (set to Yes), this menu allows the user to activate each one of the output relay (from RL1 to RL8, W = Watchdog) 1 = relay activated 0 = relay not activated 2.5.8 Submenu PHASE ROTATION (P122 & P123 only) CONFIGURATION PHASE ROTATION Heading of the PHASE ROTATION sub-menu. PHASE ROTATION A-B-C Choose the phase rotation between either A-B-C or A-CB. 2.6 MEASUREMENTS Menu Under the MEASUREMENTS menu, the user can read the various measurement values. To access the MEASUREMENTS menu from the default display, press 2 then 6 2 times. MEASUREMENTS Heading of the MEASUREMENTS menu. Frequency 50.10 Hz IL1 640.10 A Displays the network frequency calculated from phase currents Displays the current value of phase A (True RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO submenu). User Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 IL2 IL3 I N Ie_d 629.00 A 634.50 A 3.15 A 0.00A As above for phase B. P12x/EN FT/Gd6 Page 23/63 As above for phase C. As above for current value. Displays the derived earth current value (1). I1 I2 RATIO I2/I1 103A 50A 50% In - fn RST = [C] 0.0A Thermal RST = [C] 67% Max & Average I RST = [C] Max IL1 Rms 127.36 A Max IL2 Rms 156.28 A Max IL3 Rms 139.01 A Average IL1 Rms 98.25 A Average IL2 Rms 97.88 A Average IL3 Rms 99.02 A MAX. SUBPERIOD RST = [C] MAX. SUBPERIOD IL1 Rms = 245A MAX. SUBPERIOD IL2 Rms = 240A MAX. SUBPERIOD IL3 Rms = 250A ROLLING AVERAGE RST = [C] Displays the positive sequence component (1). Displays the negative sequence component (1). Displays the ratio of I2/I1. This derived measurement is used by the Broken Conductor detection function (menu AUTOMAT. CTRL) (1). Displays the earth current In (True RMS value) minus the current value at the fundamental frequency (value of the harmonics). Press 0 to clear the value (password required) (1). Displays the % thermal state based on true RMS values. Press 0 to clear the % values (password required) (1). Allows the user to clear the maximum (peak) and average (rolling) memorised values of the current. Press 0 to clear these values (password required) (1). Displays the peak value for phase A. The value is the true RMS maximum value (1). As above for phase B (1). As above for phase C(1). Displays the rolling value for phase A. The value is the true RMS average value (1). As above for phase B (1). As above for phase C (1). Allows the user to clear the maximum subperiod values of the 3 currents (1). Displays the IA peak value demand. The value is the true RMS maximum value on a subperiod (1). As above for IB peak (1). As above for IC peak (1). Allows the user to clear the rolling average values of the 3 currents (1). P12x/EN FT/Gd6 User Guide Page 24/63 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2.7 2.7.1 ROLLING AVERAGE IL1 Rms = 0A ROLLING AVERAGE IL2 Rms = 0A Displays the IA average value demand. The value is the true RMS average value on a number of subperiod set in Record menu (1). As above for IB average value (1). ROLLING AVERAGE IL3 Rms = 0A As above for IC average value (1). Reclose Stats RST = [C] Allows the user to clear the statistics stored for the autoreclose function. Press 0 to clear these values (2). Total Recloses 16 Displays the total number of reclosings (2). Cycle 1 Recloses 1 Displays the total number of reclosings for cycle 1 (2). Cycle 2 Recloses 7 Displays the total number of reclosings for cycle 2 (2). Cycle 3 Recloses 5 Displays the total number of reclosings for cycle 3 (2). Cycle 4 Recloses 3 Displays the total number of reclosings for cycle 4. Total Trip & Lockout 2 (1) P122 and P123 only. Displays the total number of definitive trips (including autoreclose function for P123). When 52a input is connected, only the trip number increases when its logic state changes. When 52a input is not connected, every control trip order increases the trip number. The control trip orders are RL1 trip (fault), HMI opening order, MiCOM S1 opening order, rear com opening order and digital input opening order. COMMUNICATION Menu The COMMUNICATION menu content depends on the communication protocol of the relay. Four protocols are available: MODBUS, Courier, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3.0. MODBUS COMMUNICATION Menu COMMUNICATION Heading of the COMMUNICATION menu. Communication ? Yes Baud Rate 9600 bd Parity Stop Bits None 1 Relay Address 29 Activates or deactivates MODBUS RTU communication via the RS485 port on the rear terminals of the relay. Choose the baud rate of ModBus transmission. Select from: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 bd. Choose the parity in the ModBus data frame. Select parity: "Even", "Odd" or "None". Choose the number of stop bits in the ModBus data frame. Select stop bit: 0 or 1. This cell sets the unique address for the relay such that only one relay is accessed by master station software. Select an address from 1 to 255. User Guide P12x/EN FT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 25/63 2.7.2 Date format Private Choose the format of the date, either PRIVATE or IEC protocol. WARNING: A MODBUS NETWORK IS LIMITED TO 31 RELAY + 1 RELAY MASTER ADDRESSES ON THE SAME MODBUS SUB-LAN. Courier COMMUNICATION Menu COMMUNICATION Heading of the COMMUNICATION menu. 2.7.3 Communication ? Yes Relay Address 12 Activates Courier communication via the RS485 port on the rear terminals of the relay. This cell sets the unique address for the relay such that only one relay is accessed by master station software. Select an address from 1 to 255. IEC 60870-5-103 COMMUNICATION Menu COMMUNICATION Heading of the COMMUNICATION menu. 2.7.4 Communication ? Yes Data Bits 9600 bd Relay Address 29 DNP3 COMMUNICATION Menu Activates IEC 60870-5-103 communication via the RS485 port on the rear terminals of the relay. Choose the baud rate of IEC 60870-5-103 transmission. Select from: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bauds. This cell sets the unique address for the relay such that only one relay is accessed by master station software. Select from 1 to 255 using 8. Press 5 to validate your choice. COMMUNICATION Heading of the COMMUNICATION menu. Communication ? Yes Baud Rate 9600 bd Parity None Stop Bits 1 Relay Address 29 Activates MODBUS RTU communication via the RS485 port on the rear terminals of the relay. This cell controls the communication speed between relay and master station. It is important that both relay and master station are set at the same speed setting. Select from: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bauds. Choose the parity in the MODBUS frame. Select Even, Odd or None. Choose the number of stop bits in the MODBUS frame. Select 0 or 1. This cell sets the unique address for the relay such that only one relay is accessed by master station software. Select from 1 to 255. P12x/EN FT/Gd6 User Guide Page 26/63 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2.8 PROTECTION Menu The protection menu is divided into two groups for MiCOM P122 and P123: PROTECTION G1 for the first setting group and PROTECTION G2 for the second setting group. The different submenus are: 2.8.1 PROTECTION G1 / G2 82 [50/51] (1) 6 [50N/51N] (1) 6 [46] (2) 6 [49] (2) Phase OC 4 E/Gnd 4 Neg Seq OC 4 Therm OL 6 [37] (2) 6 [79] (3) 4 Undercurrent 4 Autoreclose (1) one submenu for P120 (2) P122 and P123 only (3) P123 only Under this PROTECTION menu, the user can program the parameters of the different phase or earth protection functions and define their associated setting (thresholds, time delay). Submenu [50/51] PHASE OC PROTECTION G1 [50/51] Phase OC I> ? No I>> ? No I>>> ? No Heading of the phase overcurrent protection submenu ("[50/51] PHASE OVERCURRENT"). Setting choice: Yes or No Yes: the first phase overcurrent threshold (I>) protection is enabled. The first phase overcurrent threshold protection submenu (see � 2.8.1.1) is displayed. No: the first phase threshold (I>) is not enabled, and the next menu is the "I>> ?" menu. Setting choice Yes or No Yes: the second phase overcurrent threshold (I>>) protection is enabled. The second phase overcurrent threshold protection submenu (see � 2.8.1.2) is displayed. No: the second phase overcurrent threshold (I>>) protection is not enabled, and the next menu is the "I>>> ?" menu. Setting choice Yes or No Yes: the third phase overcurrent threshold (I>>>) protection is enabled. The third phase overcurrent threshold protection submenu (see � 2.8.1.3) is displayed. No: the third phase overcurrent threshold (I>>>) protection is not enabled. 2.8.1.1 Submenu First phase overcurrent threshold (I>) protection I> ? "Yes" option is selected. Yes The first phase overcurrent threshold (I>) protection is enabled. I> Sets the value for the overcurrent threshold I>. The 4 In threshold setting range is from 0.05 to 25In. User Guide P12x/EN FT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 27/63 Delay Type DMT Selects the time delay type associated with I>. Setting choices are: - "DMT" (definite minimum time): see section a, - "IDMT" (inverse definite minimum time): section b, - "RI" (electromechanical inverse time curve): section c. a) Delay type = Definite Minimum Time Delay Type tI > t Reset DMT 40ms 0 ms "DMT" is selected Sets the time delay associated with I>. The setting range is from 0 to 150.0s (step 10ms). P122 and P123 only, Sets the reset time value from 0 to 600s (step 10ms) b) Delay type = Inverse Definite Minimum Time Delay Type Idmt IDMT IEC SI Tms 0,025 Reset Delay Type DMT Rtms 0.025 t Reset I> >> >>> Interlock 0 ms Yes "IDMT" is selected Selects the type of curve. Select choice from: - IEC SI, IEC STI, IEC VI, IEC EI, IEC LTI (IEC curve), - ICO2, IEEE MI, CO8, IEEE VI, IEEE EI (IEEE/ANSI curves), RC and BNP EDF. Sets the Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) value for the curve. The setting range is from 0.025 to 1.500 (step 0.001) P122 and P123 only, if "Idmt" = IEEE/ANSI or COx curve is selected only. Selects the reset delay time type. Select between DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time). P122 and P123 only, if "Reset Delay Type" = IDMT is selected. Sets the Reverse Time Multiplier Setting (RTMS) value associated with the IDMT reset time choice from 0.025 to 1.5 (step 0.001) P122 and P123 only, Sets the reset time value from 0 to 600 s (step 10 ms) Interlock of first threshold by the second and third thresholds, but only if first threshold trip is set to IDMT (if I>> or I>>> activated, I> submenu only). Setting choice: No, Yes c) Delay type = RI - electromechanical inverse time curve Delay Type K t Reset RI 2.500 60 ms Display of the I> inverse time delay (electromechanical RI curve). Selects the RI curve K value from 0.100 to 10 (step 0.100) P122 and P123 only, Sets the reset time value from 0 to 600 s (step 10 ms) 2.8.1.2 Submenu Second phase overcurrent threshold (I>>) protection This section presents the main specific points for this submenu (I>> = Yes). Refer to � 2.8.1.1 for details (setting ranges, setting choices and availabilities). P12x/EN FT/Gd6 User Guide Page 28/63 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 I>> ? I>> Delay Type Yes 4 In DMT "Yes" option is selected. The second phase overcurrent threshold (I>>) protection is enabled. Sets the value for the overcurrent threshold I>>, The threshold setting range is from 0.1 to 40 In (step 0.05) In. Selects the time delay type associated with I>>. Setting choices "DMT": see a, "IDMT": see b, "RI": see c. a) Delay type = Definite Minimum Time Delay Type tI >> t Reset DMT 0.040 0 ms "DMT" is selected Set the value for the time delay associated with I>>. Reset time value. 2.8.1.3 b) Delay type = Inverse Definite Minimum Time (P122 and P123 only) Identical to � 2.8.1.1, section b). c) Delay type = RI - electromechanical inverse time curve (P122 and P123 only) Identical to � 2.8.1.1, section c). Submenu Third phase overcurrent threshold (I>>>) protection I>>> ? Yes" option is selected. Yes The third phase overcurrent threshold (I>>>) protection is enabled. I>>> Sample No I>>> 10 In P122 and P123 only Select the mode of operation of the third threshold. I>>> operates on current sample base if you select (YES), or on Discrete Fourier Transformation base if you select (NO) Set the value for the third overcurrent threshold I>>> The threshold setting range is from 0.5 to 40 In (step 0.010 In) tI >>> 100 ms Set the time delay associated with I>>>. The setting range is from 0 to 150.0s (step 0.010s). 2.8.2 Submenu [50N/51N] E/GND (P121 - P122 - P123 only) PROTECTION G1 [50N/51N] E/Gnd Ie> ? No Heading of the earth overcurrent protection submenu. Setting choice: Yes or No Yes: the first earth overcurrent threshold (Ie>) protection is enabled. The first earth overcurrent threshold protection submenu (see � 2.8.2.1) is displayed. No: the first earth overcurrent threshold (Ie>) protection is not enabled, and the next menu is the "Ie>> ?" menu. User Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Ie>> ? No Ie>>> ? No Ie_d>? Yes/No Ie_d>>? Yes/No P12x/EN FT/Gd6 Page 29/63 Setting choice Yes or No Yes: the second earth overcurrent threshold (Ie>>) protection is enabled. The second earth overcurrent threshold submenu (see � 2.8.2.2) is displayed. No: the second earth overcurrent threshold (Ie>>) protection is not enabled, and the next menu is the "Ie>>> ?" menu. Setting choice Yes or No Yes: the third earth overcurrent threshold (Ie>>>) protection is enabled. The third earth overcurrent threshold protection submenu (see � 2.8.2.3) is displayed. No: the third earth overcurrent threshold (Ie>>>) protection is not enabled, and the next menu is the "Ie >>>>?" submenu. P122-P123 only. Setting choice Yes or No Yes: the first stage of derived earth overcurrent threshold (see � 2.8.2.4) is enabled. No: the derived earth overcurrent threshold is disabled. P122-P123 only. Setting choice Yes or No Yes: the second stage of derived earth overcurrent threshold (see � 2.8.2.5) is enabled. No: the derived earth overcurrent threshold is disabled. 2.8.2.1 Submenu First earth overcurrent threshold (Ie>) protection Ie> ? Ie> Yes 0.05 Ien Delay Type DMT "Yes" option is selected. The first earth overcurrent threshold (I>) protection is enabled. Sets the value for the earth overcurrent current threshold Ie>. The threshold setting range is from 0.002 to 1Ien (Cortec code C), from 0.01 to 8 Ien (Cortec code B) and from 0.1 to 40 Ien (Cortec code A). Selects the time delay type associated with Ie>. Setting choices are: - "DMT" (definite minimum time): see section a, - "IDMT" (inverse definite minimum time): section b, - "RI" (electromechanical inverse time curve): section c, - "RXIDG" for Netmanagements curves (available for 0.01 to 8 Ien range only): section d. a) Delay type = Definite Minimum Time Delay Type DMT tIe > 100 ms t Reset 0 ms "DMT" is selected Sets the time delay associated with Ie>. The setting range is from 0 to 150.0 s (step 10 ms). P122 and P123 only, Sets the reset time value from 0 to 600 s (step 10 ms) b) Delay type = Inverse Definite Minimum Time Delay Type IDMT "IDMT" is selected P12x/EN FT/Gd6 User Guide Page 30/63 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Idmt IEC SI Tms 0,025 Reset Delay Type DMT Rtms 0.025 t Reset Ie> >> >>> Interlock 0 ms Yes Selects the type of curve. Select choice from: - IEC SI, IEC STI, IEC VI, IEC EI, IEC LTI (IEC curve), - ICO2, IEEE MI, CO8, IEEE VI, IEEE EI (IEEE/ANSI curves), RC, BPN EDF. Sets the Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) value for the curve from 0.025 to 1.500 (step 0.001) P122 and P123 only, if "Idmt" = IEEE/ANSI curve is selected. Selects the reset delay time type. Select between DMT (Definitive Time) and IDMT (Inverse Time). P122 and P123 only, if "Reset Delay Type" = IDMT is selected. Sets the Reverse Time Multiplier Setting (RTMS) value associated with the IDMT reset time choice from 0.025 to 1.5 (step 0.001) P122 and P123 only, Sets the reset time value from 0 to 600 s (step 10 ms) Interlock of first threshold by the second and third thresholds, but only if first threshold trip is set to IDMT (if Ie>> or Ie>>> activated, Ie> submenu only). Setting choice: No, Yes c) Delay type = RI - electromechanical inverse time curve Delay Type K t Reset RI 2.500 60 ms Display of the I> inverse time delay (electromechanical RI curve). Selects the RI curve K value from 0.100 to 10 (step 0.005) P122 and P123 only, Sets the reset time value from 0 to 600 s (step 10 ms) d) Delay type = RXIDG for Netmanagements curves (P122 and P123, cortec B only) Delay type K RXIDG 0.3 t Reset 60 ms Displays the Ie> inverse time delay (RXIDG curve). Set the value for the coefficient k associated to the RXIDG curve. The setting range is from 0.3 to 1 (step 0.1). Set the value for the time reset from 0 to 600 s. 2.8.2.2 Submenu Second earth overcurrent threshold (Ie>>) protection This section presents the main specific points for this submenu (Ie>> = Yes). Refer to � 2.8.2.1 for details (setting ranges, setting choices and availabilities). Ie>> ? Ie>> Yes 0.002 Ien "Yes" option is selected. The second earth overcuurent threshold (Ie>>) protection is enabled. Sets the value for the second earth fault threshold Ie>>. The threshold setting range is from 0.002 to 1Ien (Cortec code C), from 0.01 to 8 Ien (Cortec code B) and from 0.1 to 40 Ien (Cortec code A). User Guide P12x/EN FT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 31/63 Delay Type DMT Selects the time delay type associated with Ie>>. Setting choices "DMT": see a, "IDMT": see b, "RI": see c, "RXIDG", see d. a) Delay type = Definite Minimum Time Delay Type DMT tIe >> 0.040 s t Reset 0 ms "DMT" is selected Set the value for the time delay associated with Ie>>. Reset time value. 2.8.2.3 b) Delay type = Inverse Definite Minimum Time (P122 and P123 only) Identical to � 2.8.2.1, section b). c) Delay type = RI - electromechanical inverse time curve (P122 and P123 only) Identical to � 2.8.2.1, section c). d) Delay type = RXIDG for Netmanagements curves (P122 and P123, cortec B only) Identical to � 2.8.2.1, section d). Submenu Third earth overcurrent threshold (Ie>>>) protection Ie>>> ? Yes Ie>>> Sample No Ie>>> 10 Ien tIe >>> 100 ms Yes" option is selected. The third earth overcurrent threshold (Ie>>>) protection is enabled. P122 and P123 only Select the mode of operation of the third earth threshold. Ie>>> operates on current sample base if you select (YES), or on Discrete Fourier Transformation base if you select (NO) Set the value for the third earth fault threshold Ie>>>. The threshold setting range is from 0.002 to 1Ien (Cortec code C), from 0.01 to 8 Ien (Cortec code B) and from 0.1 to 40 Ien (Cortec code A). Set the time delay associated with I>>>. The setting range is from 0 to 150.0s (step 0.010s). 2.8.2.4 Submenu first stage of the derived earth overcurrent threshold (Ie_d>) protection This section presents the main specific points for this submenu (tIe_d> = Yes). Ie_d> represents the vectorial sum of the three phases. Refer to � 2.8.2.1 for details (setting ranges, setting choices and availabilities). Ie_d> ? Yes Ie_d> Delay Type 0.5 Ien DMT "Yes" option is selected. The first stage of the derived earth overcurrent threshold (Ie_d>) protection is enabled. Sets the value for the first stage of the derived earth overcurrent Ie_d>. Selects the time delay type associated with Ie_d>. Setting choices "DMT": see a, "IDMT": see b, "RI": see c. P12x/EN FT/Gd6 User Guide Page 32/63 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 a) Delay type = Definite Minimum Time Delay Type DMT tIe_d> 0.040 s t Reset 0 ms "DMT" is selected Set the value for the time delay associated with Ie_d>. Reset time value. 2.8.2.5 b) Delay type = Inverse Definite Minimum Time Identical to � 2.8.2.1, section b). c) Delay type = RI - electromechanical inverse time curve Identical to � 2.8.2.1, section c). Submenu second stage of the derived earth overcurrent threshold (Ie_d>>) protection This section presents the main specific points for this submenu (tIe_d>> = Yes). Refer to � 2.8.2.1 for details (setting ranges, setting choices and availabilities). Ie_d>> ? Yes Ie_d>> Delay Type 0.5 Ien DMT "Yes" option is selected. The second stage of the derived earth overcurrent threshold (Ie_d>) protection is enabled. Sets the value for the second stage of the derived earth overcurrent Ie_d>. Selects the time delay type associated with Ie_d>. Setting choices "DMT": see a, "IDMT": see b, "RI": see c. a) Delay type = Definite Minimum Time Delay Type DMT tIe_d>> 0.040 s t Reset 0 ms "DMT" is selected Set the value for the time delay associated with Ie_d>>. Reset time value. b) Delay type = Inverse Definite Minimum Time Identical to � 2.8.2.1, section b). c) Delay type = RI - electromechanical inverse time curve Identical to � 2.8.2.1, section c). User Guide P12x/EN FT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2.8.3 Submenu [46] NEG SEQ (P122 & P123 only) PROTECTION G1 Page 33/63 [46] Neg Seq OC I2> ? No I2>> ? No Heading of the negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold (I2>) protection submenu. Setting choice: Yes or No Yes: the first negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold (I2>) protection is enabled. The first negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold submenu (see � 2.8.3.1) is displayed. No: the first negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold (I2>) is not enabled, and the next menu is the "I2>> ?" menu. Setting choice Yes or No Yes: the second negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold (I2>>) is enabled. The second negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold submenu (see � 2.8.1.2) is displayed. No: the second negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold (I>>) is not enabled. 2.8.3.1 Submenu First negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold (I2>) protection I2> ? Yes I2> 0.1 In Delay Type DMT "Yes" option is selected. The first negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold (I2>) is enabled. Sets the value for the first negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold I2>. The threshold setting range is from 0.1 to 40In (step 0.1In). Selects the time delay type associated with I2>. Setting choices are: - "DMT" (definite minimum time): see section a, - "IDMT" (inverse definite minimum time): see section b, - "RI" (electromechanical inverse time curve): section c. a) Delay type = Definite Minimum Time Delay Type tI2> t Reset DMT 0.040 0 ms "DMT" is selected Sets the time delay associated with I2>. The setting range is from 0 to 150.0 s (step 10 ms). Sets the reset time value from 0 to 600 s (step 10 ms) b) Delay type = Inverse Definite Minimum Time Delay Type Curve IDMT IEC SI Tms 0,025 "IDMT" is selected Selects the type of curve. Select choice from: - IEC SI, IEC STI, IEC VI, IEC EI, IEC LTI (IEC curve), - ICO2, IEEE MI, CO8, IEEE VI, IEEE EI (EEE/ANSI curve). Sets the Time Multiplier Setting (TMS) value for the curve. The setting range is from 0.025 to 1.500 (step 0.001) P12x/EN FT/Gd6 Page 34/63 t Reset 0 ms User Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Sets the reset time value from 0 to 600 s (step 10 ms) c) Delay type = RI - electromechanical inverse time curve Delay Type K t Reset RI 2.500 60 ms Display of the I2> inverse time delay (electromechanical RI curve). Selects the RI curve K value from 0.100 to 10 (step 0.100) P122 and P123 only, Sets the reset time value from 0 to 600 s (step 10 ms) 2.8.3.2 Submenu I2>> threshold I2>> ? I2>> tI2>> Yes 1 In 150 ms "Yes" option is selected. second threshold of the negative phase sequence overcurrent I2>> is enabled Set the value for the second threshold of the negative phase sequence overcurrent I2>>. 0.1 to 40 In (step 0.01 In). Set the time delay associated with I2>> from 0 to 150 s (step 10 ms). 2.8.4 Submenu [49] Therm OL (P122 & P123 only) PROTECTION G1 [49] Therm OL Therm OL ? Yes I > Te k Trip Alarm ? 0.5 In 10 mn 1.01 110 % Yes Alarm 90 % Heading of the [49] Therm OL (Thermal Overload) submenu. Setting choice Yes or No Yes: the thermal overload function is enabled. Then the following menu is displayed. No: the thermal overload function is not enabled, and no menu content is displayed. Sets the value for the thermal current threshold I> from 0.1 to 3.2In (step 0.01In). Sets value for the Te thermal time constant associated with the thermal overload formula from 1 min to 200mn (step 1mn). Sets the value for the k factor associated with the thermal overload function, from 1 to 1.5 (step 0.01). Set the percentage applicable to the thermal overload trip threshold, from 50% to 200% (step 1%). Setting choice Yes or No. Yes: the thermal overload alarm function is enabled. Then the following menu is displayed. No: the thermal overload function is not enabled and the next menu is not activated. Sets the percentage applicable to the thermal overload alarm threshold, from 50% to 200% (step 1%). User Guide P12x/EN FT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 35/63 2.8.5 Submenu [37] UNDERCURRENT Protection (P122 & P123 only) Undercurrent function will: - start as soon as the current of one phase is below I< threshold value (OR of the 3 phases current) - trip if the current of one phase - at least - remains below this threshold during more than tI<. I< starting could be inhibited when CB is open (52a) PROTECTION G1 [37] Under Current I < ? Yes I < 0.2 In tI < 200 ms Inhibition I< on 52A Yes Heading of the [37] undercurrent submenu Setting choice Yes or No Yes: the first undercurrent threshold (I<) protection is enabled. Then the following menu is displayed. No: the first undercurrent threshold (I<) protection is not enabled, and the next menu is not activated. Sets the value for the undercurrent threshold I<, from 0.02 to 1In (step 0.01In). Sets the time delay associated with I<, from 0 to 150 s (step 10ms). This function inhibits undercurrent protection on circuit breaker (52A) trip. Setting choice Yes or No. 2.8.6 Submenu [79] AUTORECLOSE (P123 only) The autoreclose function provides the ability to automatically control the autorecloser, with two, three, or four shot cycles. Each cycle implements a dead time and a reclaim time. During the autorecloser cycle, if the relay receives an order to change setting group, this order is kept in memory, and will only be executed after the timer has elapsed. Autoreclose function is available if: � a logical input is assigned to 52a state, � and trip output relay is not latched to the earth and/or phase protection. In addition to these settings, the user can fully link the autoreclose function to the protection function using the menus "PROTECTION G1 / Phase OC" and "PROTECTION/ E/Gnd". PROTECTION G1 [79] Autoreclose Heading of the [79] AUTORECLOSER submenu. Autoreclose ? Yes Setting choice Yes or No Yes: the autoreclose function is enabled. Then the "Ext CB Fail ?" menu is displayed. Immediately could appear the message:"Conflict Recloser". Do not worry, you are hardly beginning to set your ARC and some settings must be worked out. No: the autoreclose function is not enabled, and no menu is activated. P12x/EN FT/Gd6 Page 36/63 Ext CB Fail ? Yes Ext CB Fail Time .0.1 s Ext Block ? Yes User Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Allows the use of a dedicated input (CB FLT) to inform the autoreclose function of the state of the CB (failed or operational). This signal has to be assigned to a digital input by the Automatic Control inputs submenu Setting choice Yes or No. Yes: The CB will be declared fault and the autoreclose will move in the locked status when the Ext. CB Fail time will be elapsed and the Ext CB Fail will stand active. No: the Ext Block submenu is activated. If "Ext CB Fail"=Yes option is selected only. Set the value for the external CB failure time delay tCFE. The Ext. CB Fail timer will start when the tD will be expired. If during this time the signal Ext CB Fail will disappear, the ARC will continue with its programmed cycles. Once this set time has elapsed, the information Ext CB Fail is validated. Setting range is from 10ms to 600s (step 10ms). Setting choice: Yes or No Allows the use of a dedicated input (Block_79) to block the autoreclose function. If you set this item to Yes to make it active you have to assign to a digital input the function Block 79 by the inputs submenu in Automatic control function. With the Ext. Block actived (the relevant digital input supplied) the autoreclose will move to the locked status after a protection trip involved in the sequences matrix of the ARC. The dead time (tD1, tD2, tD3 and tD4) starts when the digital input connected to the 52a, auxiliary contact of the CB, is de-energised and the involved protection threshold reset. It means that CB has tripped. If on trip protection the CB opening signal (52a) is lacking, after a fixed time out of 2.00 s at 50 Hz or 1.67 s at 60 Hz, the ARC resets to the initial status. If on trip protection the 52a signal changes status but the protection threshold trip stands the tD timer will start when the protection trip threshold will disappear. In the above case NONE TIME OUT IS FORECASTED. The 52a signal has to assigned to a digital input by by the inputs submenu in Automatic control function. The 52a signal is in accordance with the CB status Auxiliary Contact status 52A 52B Active Inactive Inactive Active CB Status ------------------Circuit Breaker open Circuit Breaker closed Within the tD a further time window is active. This time window starts together to the td.It expires after 50ms. If within this time window a threshold involved in the trip of the CB and in the ARC cycle is intermittent the ARC will be lock. Dead Time tD1 50 ms Dead Time tD2 50 ms Sets the value for the First Cycle Dead Time (tD1). The Dead Time starts at the CB trip, when 52a input has disappeared. Setting range is from 50ms to 300s (step 10ms). As above for the second Cycle Dead Time (tD2) Setting range is from 50ms to 300s (step 10ms). User Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Dead Time tD3 50 ms Dead Time tD4 50 ms Min Dropoff Time tI> 50 ms Min Dropoff Time tI>> 50 ms Min Dropoff Time tI>>> 50 ms Min Dropoff Time tIE> 50 ms Min Dropoff Time tIE>> 50 ms Min Dropoff Time tIE>>> 50 ms Reclaim Time tR 0.02 s Inhib Time tI 0.02 s Phase Cycles 0 E/Gnd Cycles 0 CYCLES tI> 4321 1201 CYCLES tI>> 4321 1211 P12x/EN FT/Gd6 Page 37/63 As above for the third Cycle Dead Time (tD3) Setting range is from 50ms to 600s (step 10ms). As above for the fourth Cycle Dead Time (tD4) Setting range is from 50ms to 600s (step 10ms). Sets the value after a first trip This drop off time is used with an IDMT electromagnetic relay, and starts when the CB opens. The induction disk returns to its initial position during this additional time Setting range is from 50ms to 600s (step 10ms). As above for I>> Setting range is from 50ms to 600s (step 10ms). As above for I>>> Setting range is from 50ms to 600s (step 10ms). As above for IE> Setting range is from 50ms to 600s (step 10ms). As above for IE>> Setting range is from 50ms to 600s (step 10ms). As above for IE>>> Setting range is from 50ms to 600s (step 10ms). Set the Reclaimer time value (tR). The reclaim time, starts when the CB has closed. Setting range is from 20ms to 600s (step 10ms). After the reclaim time, if the circuit breaker does not trip again, the autoreclose function resets; otherwise, the relay either advances to the next shot that is programmed in the autoreclose cycle, or, if all the programmed reclose attempts have been accomplished, it locks out. If the protection element operates during the reclaim time following the final reclose attempt, the relay will lockout and the autoreclose function is disabled until the lockout condition resets. Set the value for the Inhibit Time (tI). The "Inhib Time tI" timer is used to block the autoreclose being initiated after the CB is manually closed onto a fault. The lockout condition can reset by a manual closing after the "Inhib Time tI". Setting range is from 20ms to 600s (step 10ms). Select the number of cycles associated with the phase autoreclose function, from 0 to 4 (step 1). Select the number of cycles associated with the earth autoreclose function, from 0 to 4 (step 1). 4321 are the cycles associated to the trip on tI> pick up 1201 are the actions to be executed after the tI> time delay has elapsed: 0 = no action on autorecloser: definitive trip (autoreclose will move in the lock status), 1 = trip on tI> pick-up, followed by reclosing cycle 2 = no trip on tI> pick-up: and this whatever the setting is in the "AUTOMAT. CRTL/Trip commands/Trip tI>" menu. 3 = autoreclose without trip (trip order is inhibited and no trip is performed from autoreclose function). As above for tI>>. P12x/EN FT/Gd6 Page 38/63 CYCLES tI>>> CYCLES tIe> CYCLES tIe>> CYCLES tIe>>> CYCLES tAux1> CYCLES tAux2 tAux3 tAux4 tAux5 4321 1110 4321 0111 4321 1121 4321 1111 4321 1112 4321 0111 1111 1111 1111 As above for tI>>>. User Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 As above for tIe>. As above for tIe>>. As above for tIe>>>. As above for tAux1>. As above for tAux2, tAux3, tAux4 and tAux5 User Guide P12x/EN FT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2.9 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu Page 39/63 2.9.1 Under the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu, the user can program the different automation functions available in the MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123. The different submenus are: AUTOMAT. CTRL 82 Trip (1) 6 Latch (1) 6 Blocking Commands 4 Functions 4 logic 1/2 6 Inrush (2) 4 blocking or (for P120) or (for P120) Trip Order 6 Latch 4 Order 6 Logic (2) 6 Output 4 select 1/2 4 relays 6 Latch out- (1) 6 Inputs 4 put Relays 4 6 Broken (2) 6 Cold (2) 6 CB Fail (2) 6 CB (2) 4 conductor 4 Load PU 4 4 Supervision 6 Sotf 4 (3) 6 Logic (1) 6 4 Equations 4 (1) P121, P122 and P123 only (2) P122 and P123 only (3) P123 only To access the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu, press 8 then 2 until the menu is reached. Submenu Trip Commands This submenu makes it possible to assign some or all the selected following thresholds to the trip output relay. Function Trip tI> Trip tI>> Trip tI>>> Trip tIe> Trip tIe>> Trip tIe>>> Trip tIe_d> Trip tIe_d>> Trip tI < P120 P121 P122 P123 INFORMATION and COMMENTS X X X X Time delayed first phase overcurrent threshold trip X X X X Time delayed second phase overcurrent thresholdt trip X X X X Time delayed third phase overcurrent threshold trip X X X X Time delayed first earth overcurrent threshold trip X X X X Time delayed second earth overcurrent threshold trip X Time delayed third earth overcurrent threshold trip X X Time delayed first stage of derived earth overcurrent threshold trip. X X Time delayed second stage of derived earth overcurrent threshold trip. X X Time delayed undercurrent threshold (tI<) trip. This information is generated in less than a cycle of the network frequency (50 or 60 Hz). P12x/EN FT/Gd6 Page 40/63 Function Trip tI2 > Trip tI2 >> Trip Thermal Trip Brkn.Cond Trip t Aux 1 Trip t Aux 2 Trip t Aux 3 Trip t Aux 4 Trip t Aux 5 Trip SOTF Ctrl Trip Trip CB Fail Trip Equ A Trip Equ B Trip Equ C Trip Equ D Trip Equ E Trip Equ F Trip Equ G Trip Equ H User Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P120 P121 P122 P123 INFORMATION and COMMENTS X X Time delayed first negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold (tI2>) trip. X X Time delayed second negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold (tI2>>) trip. X X Thermal overload trip threshold (Trip). X X Broken conductor detection signal. X X X Time delayed auxiliary input Aux 1. X X X Time delayed auxiliary input Aux 2. X X Time delayed auxiliary input Aux 3. X Time delayed auxiliary input Aux 4. X Time delayed auxiliary input Aux 5. X SOTF function to the trip output. When the tSOTF has elapsed, the trip command is ordered. X Control Trip function to the trip output relay RL1. X CB Fail function. X X X Logical output of Boolean Equation A. X X X Logical output of Boolean Equation B. X X X Logical output of Boolean Equation C. X X X Logical output of Boolean Equation D. X X X Logical output of Boolean Equation E. X X X Logical output of Boolean Equation F. X X X Logical output of Boolean Equation G. X X X Logical output of Boolean Equation H. AUTOMAT. CTRL Heading of the AUTOMAT.CTRL Trip Commands Heading of the Trip ORDER sub-menu. 2.9.2 Trip Order P120 Only Heading of the P120 submenu. Function Yes / No Setting choice Yes: Assign the corresponding time delay or function to the trip output relay RL1. Then the trip output relay (RL1) will be activated at the end of the corresponding time delay. Setting choice No: the trip output relay (RL1) will never be activated, even at the end of the corresponding time delay or function. Refer to previous table for protection functions list and comments. Submenu Latch of trip output relay by Function With this submenu the user can program the trip output relay associated with one or many thresholds so that it stays latched after the cause for activating these functions has disappeared. User Guide P12x/EN FT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 41/63 Function Latch tI> Latch tI>> Latch tI>>> Latch tIe> Latch tIe>> Latch tIe>>> Latch tIe_d> Latch tIe_d>> Latch tI < Latch tI2 > Latch tI2 >> Latch Thermal Latch Brkn.Cond Latch t Aux 1 Latch t Aux 2 Latch t Aux 3 Latch t Aux 4 Latch t Aux 5 Latch SOTF Latch CB Fail P120 P121 P122 P123 INFORMATION and COMMENTS X X X X Time delayed first phase overcurrent threshold X X X X Time delayed second phase overcurrent threshold X X X X Time delayed third phase overcurrent threshold X X X Time delayed first earth overcurrent threshold X X X Time delayed second earth overcurrent threshold X X X Time delayed third earth overcurrent threshold X X Time delay of first stage derived earth overcurrent threshold. X X Time delay of second stage derived earth overcurrent threshold. X X Time delayed undercurrent threshold X X Time delayed first negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold. X X me delayed second negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold X X Thermal overload information. X X Broken conductor function. X X X Aux1 delayed by Aux1 time X X X Aux2 delayed by Aux2 time X X Aux3 delayed by Aux 3 time X Aux4 delayed by Aux 4 time X Aux5 delayed by Aux 5 time (option) X SOTF function. X CB Fail function. AUTOMAT. CTRL Latch Functions Latch Order Function Yes Heading of the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. Heading of the submenu. P120 only Heading of the P120 submenu. Setting choice Yes: Latch the trip output relay associated with the corresponding protection function. The relay will remain latched after the fault has disappeared. Setting choice No: The trip output relay will be active when the relevant command is active. The relay will not be active if the relevant command is reset. Refer to previous table for protection functions list and comments. P12x/EN FT/Gd6 User Guide Page 42/63 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2.9.3 NOTE: To reset the latched output relay: P120 P121 P122 &P123 To reset the latched relays The active relay latched can The active relay latched can with MiCOM P120: be reset by: be reset by: When a relay associated to a - Either by resetting of the - Either by resetting of the time delay overcurrent alarm "tI> PHASE"* from alarm "LATCH RELAY threshold is latched, no the front panel by pushing TRIP" from the front panel dedicated alarm signaling that 0. by pushing 0. the relay has been latched displayed. is - The latched output can be or by a logic input assigned to this function or by a logic input assigned to this function reset by acknowledging the - or by remote command. - or by remote command. alarm message pressing keys Note: No alarm dedicated to 1 and 0. the latch of RL1 The latched relay can also be reset either by an opto input Note: The alarm "LATCH RELAY TRIP" is dedicated to the latch of RL1 or by a remote command. *: tI> or other function presented in the "AUTOMAT. CTRL/Latch functions" menu Submenu Blocking Logic Through the Blocking Logic submenu, the user can block each delayed threshold using a "Block Logic" input (refer to Inputs menu). MiCOM P122 & P123 relays have the submenu Blocking Logic 1 and Blocking Logic 2 available for setting. It is possible to enable or disable the "blocking" of most protection functions even if a logic input has been assigned to that function. Function tI> tI>> tI>>> tIe> tIe>> tIe>>> tIe_d> tIe_d>> tI2 > tI2 >> Thermal Brkn.Cond tAux 1 tAux 2 tAux 3 P120 P121 P122 P123 INFORMATION and COMMENTS X X X X Time delayed first phase overcurrent threshold X X X X Time delayed second phase overcurrent threshold X X X X Time delayed third phase overcurrent threshold X X X X Time delayed first earth overcurrent threshold X X X X Time delayed second earth overcurrent threshold X X X X Time delayed third earth overcurrent threshold X X Time delayed of first stage of derived earth overcurrent threshold. X X Time delayed of second stage of derived earth overcurrent threshold. X X Time delayed first negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold X X Time delayed second negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold. X X Trip threshold for thermal overload. X X Broken Conductor trip signal. X X X Aux1 Logic Input delayed by Aux1 time X X X Aux2 Logic Input delayed by Aux2 time X X Aux3 Logic Input delayed by Aux3 time User Guide P12x/EN FT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 43/63 Function tAux 4 tAux 5 P120 P121 P122 P123 INFORMATION and COMMENTS X Aux4 Logic Input delayed by Aux4 time X Aux5 Logic Input delayed by Aux5 time AUTOMAT. CTRL Blocking Logic Heading of the Blocking Logic submenu. 2.9.4 Block Function No Enables or disables blocking logic of the function on the level (logic state =1) of logic input "Block Logic" Refer to previous table for protection functions list. Inrush Blocking Logic submenu (P122 and P123 only) Through the Inrush Blocking Logic submenu, the user can set a 2nd harmonic blocking threshold and block each delayed overcurrent threshold by setting . MiCOM P122 & P123 relays have the submenu Inrush Blocking available for setting. It is possible to enable or disable the "blocking" of most protection functions even if a logic input has been assigned to that function. Blocking of a protection function can be prevented if "No" is selected in the relevant window (see below). Blocking of a protection function can be enabled if "Yes" is selected in the relevant window. Function I> I>> I>>> Ie> Ie>> Ie>>> Ie_d> Ie_d>> I2> I2>> P122 P123 INFORMATION and COMMENTS X X Instantaneous first phase overcurrent threshold X X Instantaneous second phase overcurrent threshold X X Instantaneous third phase overcurrent threshold X X Instantaneous first earth overcurrent threshold X X Instantaneous second earth overcurrent threshold X X Instantaneous third earth overcurrent threshold X X Instantaneous first stage of derived earth overcurrent threshold. X X Instantaneous second stage of derived earth overcurrent threshold. X X Instantaneous first negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold X X Instantaneous second negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold AUTOMAT. CTRL Blocking Inrush Blocking Inrush Yes Heading of the Inrush Blocking logic submenu. Setting choice Yes: The crossing of the Harmonic H2 ratio threshold on any phase activates the Inrush Blocking Logic function instantaneously. Setting choice No: The crossing of the Harmonic H2 ratio threshold doesn't activate the Inrush Blocking logic function. P12x/EN FT/Gd6 User Guide Page 44/63 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2.9.5 Inr. Harmonic 2 Ratio = 20% T Inrush reset = 0 ms Blocking Inrush Function No Set the value for the 2nd harmonic threshold ratio calculated as a percentage of the fundamental component from 10 to 35% (step 0.1%). Press 5 to validate your choice. Set the value for the Inrush tReset time. This provides a reset delay of the Inrush Blocking signal (logic state=1) once the 2nd harmonic level falls below the set threshold. The setting range is from 0.0s to 2 s (step 10ms). Use 8 to change setting and press 5 to validate your choice. Enables or disables Inrush blocking for the function. Refer to previous tables for protection functions list. Submenus Logic Select (P122 & P123 only) With the submenu Logic Select. 1 or Logic Select. 2, the user can assign each time delay threshold to the "Log Sel" input (refer to Inputs menu). Setting Yes or No enables or disables Logic Selectivity 1 of the following protection functions: AUTOMAT. CTRL Logic Select. 1 Heading of the Logic Select. 1 submenu. 2.9.6 Sel1 tI>> Yes/No Sel1 tI>>> Yes/No Sel1 tIe>> Yes/No Sel1 tIe>>> Yes/No Sel1 tIe_d> Yes/No Sel1 tIe_d>> Yes/No t Sel1 20 ms Outputs Relays submenu Time delayed second phase overcurrent threshold (tI>>). Time delayed third phase overcurrent threshold (tI>>>). Second earth fault time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>). Third earth fault time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>>). First stage of the derived earth overcurrent threshold (tIe_d>). Second stage of the derived earth overcurrent threshold (tIe_d>>). Set the selective scheme logic time delay t Sel1, from 0s to 150s (step 10ms). This submenu makes it possible to assign various alarm and trip thresholds (instantaneous and/or time delay) to a logic output. Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment, i.e. output signal trip (RL1) in the following list is assigned to output 3 (RL3), 7 (RL7) and 8 (RL8). Excepted from this option are the Watchdog (RL0) and the Tripping (RL1) outputs (refer to Trip Commands submenu). The total number of programmable logic outputs for the four relay models is listed in the table: Model Output relays P120 3 P121 3 P122 5 P123 7 RL2 relay is a change over relay. The others RL3 to RL8 are normally open relays. The following protection functions can be assigned to output relays using this submenu. User Guide P12x/EN FT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 45/63 Function Trip I> tI> I>> tI>> I>>> tI>>> Ie> tIe> Ie>> tIe>> Ie>>> tIe>>> Ie_d> tIe_d> Ie_d>> tIe_d>> tI< tI2> tI2>> Therm. Therm. Trip CB Alarm 52 Fail Brkn. Cond CB Fail P120 P121 P122 P123 INFORMATION and COMMENTS X X X X Output signal Trip (RL1). X X X X Instantaneous first phase overcurrent threshold (I>). X X X X Time delayed first phase overcurrent threshold (tI>). X X X X Instantaneous second phase overcurrent threshold (I>>). X X X X Time delayed second phase overcurrent threshold (tI>>). X X X X Instantaneous third phase overcurrent threshold (I>>>). X X X X Time delayed third phase overcurrent threshold (I>>>). X X X X Instantaneous first earth overcurrent threshold (Ie>). X X X X Time delayed first earth overcurrent threshold (tIe>). X X X X Instantaneous second earth fault overcurrent threshold (Ie>>). X X X X Time delayed second earth fault overcurrent threshold (tIe>>). X X X X Instantaneous third earth fault overcurrent threshold (Ie>>>). X X X X Time delayed third earth fault time delay overcurrent threshold (tIe>>>). X X First derived earth overcurrent threshold. X X Time delayed threshold of first derived earth overcurrent. X X Second derived earth overcurrent threshold. X X Time delayed threshold of second derived earth overcurrent. X X Time delayed undercurrent threshold X X Time delayed first negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold X X Time delayed second negative phase sequence overcurrent threshold X X Thermal alarm threshold to the output relays. X X Thermal trip threshold to the output relays. X X Circuit Breaker Alarm function signal (CB Open NB, Sum Amps(n), CB Open Time and CB Close Time). X X Trip circuit supervision (TCS) failure function signal. X X Broken conductor function signal X X Circuit breaker failure function signal P12x/EN FT/Gd6 User Guide Page 46/63 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Function CB Close P120 / P121 CB Close P122 CB Close P123 t Aux 1 t Aux 2 t Aux 3 t Aux 4 t Aux 5 79 Run 79 Trip 79 Int block 79 Ext block Order 1Comm. Order 2Comm. Order 3Comm. Order 4 Comm. Active Group SOTF CONTROL Trip CONTROL Close Input1 Input2 Input3 Input4 Input5 tIA> tIB> tIC> EQU. A P120 P121 P122 P123 INFORMATION and COMMENTS X X Circuit breaker closing order: Communication front face and rear port control of output relays (RL2 � RL3) X Circuit breaker closing order: "Ctrl Close" logic input, HMI, communication front face and rear port control of output relays (RL2 � RL5) X Circuit breaker closing order: Only "autoreclose" function controls relays RL2 to RL7 (see also "CONTROL close" function). X X X Aux1 auxiliary input delayed by tAux1 time. X X X Aux2 auxiliary input delayed by tAux2 time. X X Aux3 auxiliary input delayed by tAux3 time. X Aux4 auxiliary input delayed by tAux4 time. X Aux5 auxiliary input delayed by tAux5 time. X Signal that Autoreclose cycle is working ("Autorecloser in progress" signal). X Autoreclose final trip function. X Autoreclose lock activated by the internal process of the autoreclose X Autoreclose lock activated by the input "block 79" X X Remote command 1 X X Remote command 2. X X Remote command 3. X X Remote command 4. X X Active Group indication. X SOTF functionality � when the tSOTF has elapsed the assigned relay is activated. X Control trip command. X Control close command. Logic input, HMI, communication front face and rear port control the affected relay (1 to 8). Refer to "CB Close (P123)" function to see autoreclose control operation. X X X X Opto input 1. X X X X Opto input 2. X X Opto input 3 status. X Opto input 4 status. X Opto input 5 status. X First delayed threshold for phase A (tIA>) X First delayed threshold for phase B (tIB>). X First delayed threshold for phase C (tCI>). X X X Logic output of Boolean Equation A. User Guide P12x/EN FT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 47/63 Function EQU. B EQU. C EQU D EQU E EQU. F EQU. G EQU. H P120 P121 P122 P123 INFORMATION and COMMENTS X X X Logic output of Boolean Equation B. X X X Logic output of Boolean Equation C. X X X Logic output of Boolean Equation D. X X X Logic output of Boolean Equation E. X X X Logic output of Boolean Equation F. X X X Logic output of Boolean Equation G. X X X Logic output of Boolean Equation H. AUTOMAT. CTRL Output Relays Heading of the Output Relays submenu. 2.9.7 Function 8765432 1100010 Function Function 65432 00010 432 010 Assigning the corresponding protection function to the output relays; i.e. to output 3 (RL3) Setting choice: 1 assigns the output relay; 0 no assignment Refer to previous table for protection functions list. Submenu for P122. Submenu for P120 and P121. Latch of the auxiliary output relays (RL2 to RL8) This submenu (not available in P120 menu) makes it possible to latch the auxiliary output relays, relay by relay. AUTOMAT. CTRL Latch Output Relays Output 2 No Output 3 Yes Output 4 Yes Output 5 Yes Output 6 No Output 7 Yes Output 8 No Heading of the Latch Output Relays submenu. Latch the auxiliary output relay RL2. Latch the auxiliary output relay RL3. Latch the auxiliary output relay RL4. P122 and P123 only Latch the auxiliary output relay RL5. P122 and P123 only Latch the auxiliary output relay RL6. P123 only Latch the auxiliary output relay RL7. P123 only Latch the auxiliary output relay RL8. P12x/EN FT/Gd6 User Guide Page 48/63 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2.9.8 NOTE: To reset the latched auxiliary relays: P121 P122 &P123 The auxiliary output latched can be reset by: - Either by resetting of the - Either by resetting of the "OP alarm "LATCH RELAY PARAMETERS/Relay TRIP" from the front panel Status" from the front by pushing 0. panel by pushing 0. - or by a logic input - or by a logic input assigned to this function assigned to this function - or by remote command. - or by remote command. Inputs submenu Note: No alarm dedicated to Note: The alarm "LATCH the latch of the auxiliary RELAY TRIP" is dedicated to output relay the latch of RL1 This submenu makes it possible to assign a single function or multiple automation functions to each logic input. The following functions are available for mapping to a logic input: Label P120 P121 P122 P123 Function None X X X X No link/assignment Unlatch X X X X Unlocks latched output relays 52 a X X X X Position of the circuit breaker (open) 52 b X X X X Position of the circuit breaker (close) CB FLT X X X X External failure information from the CB Aux 1 X X X X Assign external information to input Aux1 Aux 2 X X X X Assign external information to input Aux2 Aux 3 X X Assign the input the external information Aux 3 Aux 4 X Assign the input the external information Aux 4 Aux 5 X Assign the input the external information Aux 5 Block Logic 1 X X X X Blocking logic 1 Or Blk Log 1 Block Logic 2 X X Blocking logic 2 Start Disturb X X Starting of the disturbance recording function Cold Load PU X X Assign cold load pick up Logic Select 1 X X Logic selectivity 1 Logic Select 2 X X Logic selectivity 2 Change setting X X Change of setting group (default setting group 1) Block [79] X Blocking of the autorecloser function [79] Reset X X Reset of the thermal state Trip Circuit X X Trip circuit supervision input Strt tBF X X Starting of the Breaker Fail Timer Reset Leds X X Reset of the "Trip" & "Alarm" leds Maint. Mode X X Maintenance Mode ON/OFF change User Guide P12x/EN FT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 49/63 Label SOTF Local Mode Synchro Ctrl Trip Ctrl Close P120 P121 P122 P123 Function X Switch on to fault (SOTF) logical input. X Local mode condition (if activated,any remote command to the output relays is forbidden) X X Assign a Time synchronisation input X X Assign a control trip function to the input. When activated, it is possible to order output relay(s) affected to the control trip function (P122: RL1 only, P123: RL1 to RL8). X X Assign a control close function to the input. When activated, it is possible to order output relays affected to the CB Close (P122) or control close (P123) function. For P123, this input can be started by the SOTF feature. NOTE: For P120: The external information Aux1 and Aux2 is used only for signalisation on the communication network. T Aux1 and t Aux2 are fixed and equal to 0 ms. Only one blocking logic function. AUTOMAT. CTRL 82 6 Inputs 4 82 Input 1 6... 4 6 Input 2 4 ... Input 4 6 Aux Times 4 2.9.8.1 Function assignement to a logic input AUTOMAT. CTRL Inputs Heading of the Inputs sub-menu. Input 1 52a Input 2 52b Input 3 Aux1 Input 4 Log Sel 1 Aux1 Time t Aux1 10s Aux2 Time t Aux2 10s Assigning label 52a to logic input 1. See the previous table for input choices. Assigning label 52b to logic input 2. See the previous table for input choices. Assigning label Aux1 to logic input 3. See the previous table for input choices. Assigning label Log Sel 1 to logic input 4. See the previous table for input choices. Displays setting value of timer assigned to logic input Aux1, from 0ms to 200s (steps of 10ms). As above for Aux2. P12x/EN FT/Gd6 Page 50/63 AUTOMAT. CTRL Inputs Aux3 Time t Aux3 10s Aux4 Time t Aux4 10s Aux5 Time t Aux5 10s User Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Heading of the Inputs sub-menu. P122 and P123 only A above for Aux3. P123 only A above for Aux4. P123 only A above for Aux5. 2.9.9 BROKEN CONDUCTOR submenu (P122 & P123 only) AUTOMAT. CTRL Broken Cond. Heading of Broken Conductor detector submenu. 2.9.10 Brkn. Cond. ? No Brkn. Cond Time tBC 1 s Ratio I2/I1 20 % Selection of the Broken Conductor function. If Yes is selected, the broken conductor detection is activated and the following menu is displayed: If No is selected, the Broken Conductor function is inactive. Displays delay timer setting (tBC) for the Broken Conductor function. When sensitive settings are used, it is probable that the element will operate for any unbalance condition occurring on the system (for example, during a single pole autoreclose cycle). A long time delay is necessary to ensure co-ordination with other protective devices. It is common to set the time delay to 60 seconds. Setting range from 0 to 14400s (steps of 1s). Displays value, in percent, for the Broken Conductor threshold to tolerate some margin and load variations, This threshold is the ratio between negative and positive phase sequence current. it is typical to set this value at 200% above this value. Setting range is from 20 to 100% by, in steps of 1%. COLD LOAD PICK-UP submenu (P122 & P123 only) The Cold Load PU (CLP) submenu allows the user to enable the cold load pick-up function. Selected threshold values can temporary be raised. TEXT tI> ? tI>> ? tI>>> ? tIe> ? tIe>> ? tIe>>> ? tI2> ? tI2>> ? P122 P123 INFORMATION and COMMENTS X X Time delayed I> threshold. X X Time delayed I>> threshold. X X Time delayed tI>>> threshold. X X Time delayed tIe> threshold. X X Time delayed tIe>> threshold. X X Time delayed tIe>>> threshold. X X Time delayed tI2> threshold. X X Time delayed tI2>> threshold. User Guide P12x/EN FT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 51/63 TEXT t Therm. ? tIe_d> tIe_d>> P122 P123 INFORMATION and COMMENTS X X Time delayed Thermal overload threshold X X Time delayed tIe_d> threshold X X Time delayed tIe_d>> threshold AUTOMAT. CTRL Cold Load PU Heading of the Cold Load PU submenu. 2.9.11 Cold Load PU ? Yes Selection of the cold load pick-up function. If Yes is selected, the following menu is displayed: If No is selected, the cold load pick-up function is inactive. CLPU Start Input Yes If "start input" is selected, the CLP will be started by digital input 52A (selected using the following menus), Setting choice: Yes or No CLPU Start auto No Selects the cold load pickup activation. If "Start auto" is selected, the CLP will start if the 3phases current grows from less than 5% In to more than In in less than 20 ms, Setting choice: Yes or No Note: If "start Input" + "Start auto" is selected, both modes are activated. Cold Load PU level 200 % Displays scaling value, in percent, for the cold load pick up assigned to the selected thresholds. This value is the amount by which the selected threshold is increased or decreased. Setting range is from 20% to 800%, in steps of 1%. Cold Load PU tCL = 400 ms Displays delay timer setting (tCL) for the Cold Load Pickup function from 0.1 to 3600s (step 10ms). The timer tCL controls the time for which the protections elements are altered. When tCL has elapsed, settings revert back to their original values. tCL is initiated thanks to a dedicated input signal (refer to "Automat. Ctrl/Inputs" menu), generated by connecting an auxiliary contact from the CB (52a or 52b) or starting device to the logic relevant input. CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE submenu (P122 & P123 only) With the CB Fail submenu, circuit breaker failure can be detected and associated parameters can be set. AUTOMAT. CTRL CB Fail Heading of the CB Fail submenu. CB Fail ? Yes I<= 0.1 In CB Fail Time tBF 40 ms Selection of the circuit breaker failure function. If Yes is selected, the following menu is displayed: If No is selected, the CB Fail function is inactive. Selection of the under current threshold associated to the CB failure detection function, from 0.02In to 1In (step 0.01In). Selection of the circuit breaker failure time delay from 10ms to 10s (step 10ms). P12x/EN FT/Gd6 Page 52/63 Block I> ? No Block Ie> ? Yes User Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Select the possibility to block the instantaneous signal I> in case of circuit breaker failure detection. Select the possibility to block the instantaneous signal Ie> in case of circuit breaker failure detection. User Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2.9.12 CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION sub-menu (P122 & P123 only) P12x/EN FT/Gd6 Page 53/63 With the CB Supervision submenu circuit breakers can be supervised and monitored, and associated parameters can be set. AUTOMAT. CTRL CB Supervision TC Supervision Yes tTrip Circuit tSUP No CB Open S'vision Yes CB Open Time No CB Close S'vision No CB Open Alarm ? Yes Yes CB Close Time CB Open NB = Amps(n) ? Yes Amps(n) ? No n t Open Pulse t Close Pulse AUTOMAT. CTRL CB Supervision TC Supervision Yes t Trip Circuit t SUP 200 ms CB Open S'vision Yes CB Open Time 100 ms CB Close S'vision Yes CB Close Time 100 ms CB Open Alarm ? Yes CB Open NB = 0 Amps(n) ? Yes Amps(n) ? 1000 E6 Heading of the CB Supervision submenu. Selection of the trip circuit supervision function. If Yes is selected, the "t Trip Circuit t SUP" menu is displayed. Displays the delay timer setting (tSUP) for TC supervision, from 0.1 to 10s (step 10ms). Selection of the time monitoring function of CB open operations. If Yes is selected, the "CB Open Time" menu is displayed. Displays monitoring time for CB open operations. from 0.05 to 1.0s (step 10ms). Selection of the time monitoring function of CB close operations. If Yes is selected, "CB Close" window is displayed: If No is selected the next window is CB Open Alarm. Displays monitoring time for CB close operations, from 0.050 to 1.0s (steps of 10 ms). Selection of the monitor function for maximum count of CB operations. If Yes is selected, the "CB Open NB" window is displayed. Displays alarm threshold for CB open count from 0 to 50000 (step 1). Selection of the monitoring function that continuously sums the current (in Amps or square Amps) interrupted by the CB. Setting choice: Yes, No. If Yes is selected, "Amps(n) ?" window is displayed. Displays alarm threshold for the summation of the current (in Amps or square Amps) interrupted by the CB, from 0 to 4000 E6 A (or A�) (step 1 E6). (E6 = 106) P12x/EN FT/Gd6 Page 54/63 n 1 t Open Pulse 100 ms t Close Pulse 100 ms User Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Displays the exponent for the summation (I A or I� A�). Setting choice for n: 1or 2 Displays and sets the tripping pulse time, from 0.1 to 5s, (step 10ms). Displays and sets the closing pulse time, from 0.1 to 5s (step 10ms). 2.9.13 Submenu SOTF (Switch on to Fault) (P123 only) With the Switch On To Fault (SOTF) submenu, it is possible to shorten the time to trip when for example the relay has detected a fault that is still present on a feeder after energising. Using this menu, when SOTF function is activated, it is possible to choose the origin of the circuit breaker closing command which will start the SOTF feature. One or several origins can be selected. The SOTF function can be set using "Automatic Ctrl" menu, "Trip Command", "Output relays" and "Inputs"submenus. AUTOMAT. CTRL SOTF Heading of SOTF submenu. Sotf? t Sotf I>>? Yes/No 0.10 s No I>>>? Ctrl close input No Yes/No SOTF Input Yes/No HMI closing order: Yes/No [79] closing Yes/No Front comm. order Yes/No Enables/Disables the SOTF function. If Yes is selected, the following menu is displayed. If No is selected, the SOTF submenu is not activated. Set the time delay value (tSotf) associated to the SOTF function , from 0 to 500ms (step 10ms). The SOTF/TOR tripping time delay is useful for some cases of serious transient or when three poles don't close at the same time, or when the CB doesn't close instantaneously. Setting choice Yes: The crossing of the I>> threshold activates the SOTF function. The timer t Sotf starts its countdown on crossing of the I>> threshold, and once elapsed, the relay issues a trip order. Setting choice No: The crossing of the I>> threshold doesn't activate the SOTF function. As above for I>>> threshold. Enables/disables the possibility to start the SOTF function by the dedicated logic input "Ctrl Close". This "Ctrl Close" input should be assigned to input 1, 2, 3 or 4 using "Automat. ctrl/Inputs" menu. Enables/disables the option to start the SOTF function by the dedicated logic input "SOTF". This "SOTF" input should be assigned to input 1, 2, 3 or 4 using "Automat. ctrl/Inputs" menu. Enables/disables the possibility to start the SOTF function by a user's manual closing order, using interface. Enables/disables the possibility to start the SOTF function by an internal autoreclose order. Enables/disables the possibility to start the SOTF function by a front port communication order. User Guide P12x/EN FT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 55/63 Rear comm. order Enables/disables the possibility to start the SOTF function Yes/No with an order sent to the rear port communication. 2.9.14 Submenu Logic Equations (P121, P122 & P123 only) 2.9.14.1 Parameters With the Logic Equations submenu, it is possible to form complex Boolean functions using NOT, AND and OR operators (indicated from highest to lowest priority). Up to 16 operands can be used in any single equation. The following logic signals are available for mapping to an equation: Function Null Not Null I> tI>> I>> tI> I>>> tI>>> Ie> tIe> Ie>> tIe>> Ie>>> tIe>>> I2> tI2> I2>> tI2>> Th. Al. Th. Tr. I< tI< Brk Co. Reclos. tAux 1 tAux 2 tAux 3 tAux 4 tAux 5 P121 P122 P123 Information X X X the condition is null (low level) X X X the condition is not null (high level X X X Instantaneous first phase overcurrent threshold X X X Time delayed second phase overcurrent threshold X X X Instantaneous second phase overcurrent threshold X X X Time delayed first phase overcurrent threshold X X X Instantaneous third phase overcurrent threshold X X X Time delayed third phase overcurrent threshold X X X Instantaneous first earth overcurrent threshold X X X Time delayed first earth overcurrent threshold X X X Instantaneous second earth overcurrent threshold X X X Time delayed second earth overcurrent threshold X X X Instantaneous third earth overcurrent threshold X X X Time delayed third earth threshold X X Instantaneous first phase negative sequence threshold X X Time delayed negative phase sequence (1st threshold) X X Instantaneous second phase negative sequence threshold X X Time delayed negative phase sequence (2nd threshold) X X Thermal alarm output signal (thermal alarm) X X Trip on Thermal overload (thermal trip) X X Instantaneous undercurrent threshold X X Time delayed undercurrent X X broken conductor. X Autoreclose final trip X X X Copy of the status of the Logic Input tAux 1 X X X Copy of the status of the Logic Input tAux 2 X X Copy of the status of the Logic Input tAux 3 X Copy of the status of the Logic Input tAux 4 X Copy of the status of the Logic Input tAux 5 P12x/EN FT/Gd6 Page 56/63 Function Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 79 e. bl 79 I bl Ie_d> tIe_d> Ie_d>> tIe_d>> TCS User Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P121 P122 P123 Information X X X Instantaneous digital input 1 X X X Instantaneous digital input 2 X X X Instantaneous digital input 3 X X X Instantaneous digital input 4 X X X Instantaneous digital input 5 X Autoreclose lock activated by the input "block 79" (External Blocking) X Autoreclose lock activated by the internal process of the autoreclose (Internal Blocking) X X Derived earth overcurrent threshold. X X Time delayed 1st derived earth overcurrent threshold. X X Derived earth overcurrent threshold. X X Time delayed 2nd derived earth overcurrent threshold. X X Trip circult alarm 2.9.14.2 Interface The Logic equation has the following structure: - "Equation A.00" to "Equation A.15" views are accessible using 4 and 6 keys, - Pressing 2 key will open "T Operate" menu. AUTOMAT. CTRL Logic Equations Equation A Equation A.00 6 = Null 4 82 Equation A.01 AND Null ... 82 Equation A.15 AND Null 82 T operate 0s T Reset 0s In order to modify an "Equation A.xx" menu: - Press 5 key to access to the menu (if necessary, enter password). Equation A.00 Boolean 6 4 Logic press 4 or 6 key to access to Boolean 8 2 8 2 operator or Logic signal press 8 or 2 key to modify the corresponding value. - Press 5 to validate or 0 to cancel the setting. User Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN FT/Gd6 Page 57/63 AUTOMAT. CTRL Logic Equations Equation A Heading of Equation A submenu. The following submenu is identical from A.01 to A.15. Equation A.00 = Null Boolean function (left lower part of the LED panel): selects the Boolean function associated to the logic signal. Presence or not presence of the corresponding logic signal can be selected and combined to the previous equation with an OR or AND condition. Setting choices: - for A.00: "=", "= Not" - for A.01 to A.15: "OR", "OR NOT", "AND" or "AND NOT", Note: AND operator has priority to OR operator (refer to the following note) Equation A.00 = Null Logic signal (right lower part): Is used to select the logic signal corresponding to the Boolean equation. Refer to the previous table to see the text corresponding to each signal. Setting Choice: Null and logic signals. T Operate The time of operation setting is used to set the minimum 0s time of truth of the selected conditions before validating the truth of the logic operation. Setting choice: from 0 to 600s, step 10ms T Reset The reset time sets a minimum time before the logic 0s operation is not true when at least one condition is not true. Setting choice: from 0 to 600s, step 10ms Example of Equation A settings: Equation A.00 "= not" "tAux 1" + Equation A.01 "and not" "tAux 2" means not tAux 1 and not tAux 2. Note: AND operator has priority on OR operator: - "A or B and C" means "A or (B and C)". - To obtain "A and (B or C)", select "A and B or A and C". P12x/EN FT/Gd6 User Guide Page 58/63 2.10 RECORDS Menu (P120, P122 and P123 only) MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Through the RECORDS menu, stored data, events, disturbances and monitoring information can be displayed and read. The different submenus are: RECORDS 82 CB (1) 6 Fault Record 6 Instantane- Monitoring 4 4 ous 6 Disturb 4 Record 6 Time Peak (1) 6 Rolling (1) 4 Value 4 Demand (1) P122 and P123 only 2.10.1 CB MONITORING submenu (P122, P123 only) Through the CB Monitoring submenu, it is possible to read and clear counter values associated with the circuit breaker. note: The following counters may be reset to zero, for example, following a maintenance inspection and overhaul. RECORD Heading the RECORD menu. CB Monitoring Heading the CB Monitoring submenu. CB Opening Time 95 ms CB Closing Time 115 ms CB Operations RST = [C] 5489 Amps (n) RST = [C] Amps (n) IA 4 E4 Amps (n) IB 2 E4 Amps (n) IC 8 E3 Displays the circuit breaker opening time (ms), measured between the trip command (Trip output relay) and the change of position of O/O (52a). Displays the circuit breaker closing time (ms), measured between the closing command (output auxiliary relay) and the change of position of O/O (52a). Displays the number of opening commands executed by the circuit breaker. To clear these values, press 0. Displays the summation of the current (in Amps or square Amps) interrupted by the CB. Stored current values for all 3 phases are cleared together. To clear these values, press 0. Displays the summation value of the current (in Amps or square Amps) for phase A interrupted by the circuit breaker. As above for phase B. As above for phase C. 2.10.2 Fault Record submenu The Fault Record submenu makes it possible to read up to twenty five stored fault records. Information about a fault is recorded when a threshold is crossed. User Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 RECORD fault Record Record Number 2 fault Time 12:05:23:42 fault Date 12/11/99 Active Set Group 1 Faulted Phase Phase A Threshold Magnitude I>> 1200 A IA Magnitude 1200 A IB Magnitude 500 A IC Magnitude 480 A In Magnitude 103 A P12x/EN FT/Gd6 Page 59/63 Heading of the fault Record submenu. Selection of the fault record number to be displayed (select either 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5). Displays the time when the fault was recorded. The format of the time is hh:mm:ss. In this example the fault was recorded at 12:05:23 pm (and 420ms). Displays the date when the fault was recorded. The format of the Date is DD/MM/YY. In this example, the fault was recorded on November 12th 1999. Displays the active setting group (1 or 2). Displays the phase, where a fault occurred, for the chosen fault record. (NONE, phase A, B, C, EARTH, AB, AC, BC, or ABC). Displays the origin of the fault that generated the trip order. Displays the magnitude value of the fault: Voltage, current, earth power. The value is based on the amplitude at 50 or 60 Hz. Displays the magnitude value of the phase A current at the time of the fault. As above for phase B. As above for phase C. As above for earth current. 2.10.3 INSTANTANEOUS submenu Through the INSTANANEOUS submenu, it is possible to read recorded values associated with the crossing of a threshold (start information). RECORDS Instantaneous Heading of the Instantaneous submenu. Number 5 Hour 13:07:15:53 Select the number of Instantaneous records to be displayed (maximum 5). Displays the time when the instantaneous record was recorded. The format of the time is hh:mm:ss: ms. In this example the fault was recorded at 1:07:15 pm and 530 ms. P12x/EN FT/Gd6 Page 60/63 Date 12/11/01 Origin Length Trip Ie> 57 ms No User Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Displays the date when the instantaneous record was recorded. The format of the Date is DD/MM/YY. In this example, the fault was recorded on November 12th 2001. Displays which threshold has been crossed. Displays the period of time during which the threshold has been exceeded. Displays if a trip followed the crossing of the threshold or not. 2.10.4 DISTURBANCE RECORD submenu The Disturb Record submenu makes it possible to set and read disturbance records. Each disturbance record consists of analog and digital data. Up to 9 seconds disturbance record(s) duration can be stored (5 x 3s, 4 x 3s, 3 x 5s, 2 x 7s or 1 x 9s). The beginning of the record can be adjusted with a selected pre-time. RECORD Disturb Record Heading of the Disturb Record submenu. 2.10.5 Records number ? 5 Pre-Time 0.2 s Post-Time 0.2 s Disturb Rec Trig ON INST. Setting choices: 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Sets the disturbance record length. This setting choice adjusts the number of records according to the record length. Setting choice allows 5 records of 3 seconds, 4 records of 3 seconds, 3 records of 5 seconds, 2 records of 7 seconds or 1 record of 9 seconds. (P122 and P123 only) Set the disturbance record pre-time, from 100ms to 3s (step 100ms). The pre-time adjusts the beginning of the disturbance record: In this example, the record starts 200ms before the disturbance. Its length is fixed (except P120). P120 only: Set the disturbance record post-time, from 100 ms to 3s (step 100ms). The total disturbance recording time is 3 seconds (pre-time + post-time). Select which criteria will start the disturbance record function. Setting choices are ON INST. (starts recording on instantaneous thresholds) or ON TRIP (starts recording after a trip happened). Time PEAK VALUE submenu (P122, P123 only) The Time PEAK VALUE submenu makes it possible to set parameters associated to this function. (Peak and Average values displayed in the Measurements menu) RECORD Time Peak Value Heading of the Time Peak Value submenu. Time Window 5 mn Set the value for the time window during which peak and average values are stored, Select choice: 5mn, 10mn, 15mn, 30mn, or 60mn. User Guide P12x/EN FT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 61/63 2.10.6 ROLLING DEMAND submenu (P122, P123 only) The Rolling Demand submenu makes it possible to set the values for rolling sub-period and number of the sub-period used for the calculation of the 3 phase Rolling Average and peak demand values, available in the Measurement menu. RECORDS Rolling Demand Heading of the Rolling Demand submenu. Sub period 1 mn Num of Sub Per 1 Set the window of time of the subperiod used to calculate rolling average values, from 1mn to 60mn (step 1mn) Select the number of sub-period used for the calculation of the average of these average values. P12x/EN FT/Gd6 Page 62/63 User Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 3. WIRING MiCOM P120 range of relays have the same terminal layout for common elements. The wiring diagram for each model is provided in the section P12x/EN CO. 3.1 Auxiliary supply The auxiliary power supply for the MiCOM P120, P121, P122 & P123 relays can be either direct current with a voltage range of 24-240 VDC,or alternative current with a voltage range of 48-250 VAC/ 50-60 Hz or 24-250Vdc/48-240Vac. The voltage range (Ua) is specified on the adhesive paper label under the top hinged cover on the front of the relay. The auxiliary power supply must be connected only to terminals 33 and 34. 3.2 Current measurement inputs MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 have 3 phase and 1 earth current inputs available for 1 and 5 Amps rated CTs. On each one of these relays, it is possible to combine 1 and 5 Amp current inputs together (i-e a mix between 1A for earth fault and 5A for phase connections) (refer to the wiring diagram). NOTE: All phase inputs must have the same rating (1 or 5 Amps). 3.3 Logic inputs The number of logic inputs depends on the relay model. The relays have programmable optoisolated logic inputs, which can be assigned to any available label or function. Logic inputs for each relay model: Model Logic inputs P120 2 P121 2 P122 3 P123 5 On the same MiCOM P12x relay, the user can mix different voltage levels as logic inputs are fully independent (e.g. Uaux = 48-250 Vdc, Input 1= 48 Vdc, Input 2-5= 110 Vdc). If the user sets the supply of the logic input as AC they are active from 24 to 240Vac. The automation functions that can be assigned to these logic inputs can be selected from the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. NOTE: Do not forget to select in the CONFIGURATION/Configuration Inputs Menu weither the voltage input is "AC" or "DC". . 3.4 Output relays The number of logic outputs depends on the relay model. The relays have configurable logic outputs, which can be assigned to any available function. The number of logic outputs available for each relay model is presented in the following table: Model Logic outputs P120 5 P121 5 P122 7 P123 9 The first logic output (RL0) is dedicated to indicate a relay fault (Watchdog, WD) and is not part of this table. The normally closed (NC) contact of the Watchdog (RL0) can not be configured. The other contacts can be configured to be activated on activation of the different functions available in the relay. A basic output matrix is included in the relay. Some logic outputs have changeover contacts (RL1 and RL2). The other relays (RL3, to RL 9) are normally open contacts. The protection and control functions that can be assigned to these output relays can be selected from the AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu. User Guide P12x/EN FT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 63/63 3.5 Communication 3.5.1 3.5.2 RS485 rear communication port All MiCOM relays have an RS485 rear communication port. The terminals 29-30-31-32 are dedicated to the RS485 communication port. See wiring diagrams in chapter P12x/EN CO of the Technical Guide. RS232 front communication port (P120, P121, P122, P123) MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123and P123 relays provide a RS 232 communication port. This port is dedicated to Setting software MiCOM S1. The cable between the relay and the PC is a standard RS 232 shielded-cable. The relay requires a RS232 cable with a 9-pin male connector. The RS232 cable has to be wired as indicated below: FIGURE 3: FRONT PANEL PORT COMMUNICATION RS232 CABLE WIRING A USB/RS232 cable can also be used to communicate to the relay. The MiCOM E2 USB/RS232 cable is a must for all MiCOM relays users. It can be used to: - Power MiCOM Px2x relays from the RS232 front port - When relays are not yet powered up before commissioning - When the auxiliary power supply of the relay is off or has failed - When no appropriate power supply is available (demonstration, exhibition ...) - When self-powered relays have tripped to do post-fault analysis (P124) - Access any MiCOM relays with MiCOM S1 through the PC USB port (retrieve events/disturbance, remote measurements access, download/upload settings files/PSL...) Menu Content Tables MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN HI/Gd6 MENU CONTENT TABLES Menu Content Tables MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 CONTENTS 1. MICOM P120 � V11 SOFTWARE 2. MICOM P121 � V14 SOFTWARE 3. MICOM P122 � V14 SOFTWARE 4. MICOM P123 � V14 SOFTWARE P12x/EN HI/Gd6 Page 1/21 3 5 8 15 P12x/EN HI/Gd6 Page 2/21 BLANK PAGE Menu Content Tables MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 DEFAULT DISPLAY IN = 10,05 A O P PARAMETERS O RDERS Password **** General Reset No Language English Description P120-2 Reference xxxx Software version XX.X Frequency 50 Hz Input 21 Status 01 Relay Status 4321 1011 Date 11/ 06/ 07 Time 14 : 15 : 34 Display Phase Text N CO N FIGURATIO N MEASUREMEN TS CO MMUN ICATIO N CT Ratio LED 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 Output relays Primary Led 1000 I> Fail 4321 Y/ N Safe R. 0000 tI> Y/ N l> > Y/ N Secondary tI> > Y/ N 1 I> > > Y/ N tI> > > Y/ N Input 1 Y/ N Input 2 Y/ N Frequency 50.01 Hz I N 10.05 A Communication? Yes Baud Rate 19200 Bd Parity None Stop bits 1 Relay Address 12 Date format = PRIVATE MiCOM P120 � V11 SOFTWARE 1. P12x/EN HI/Gd6 Page 3/21 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Menu Content Tables P12x/EN HI/Gd6 Page 4/21 Menu Content Tables MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Menu Content Tables MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2. MiCOM P121 � V14 SOFTWARE P12x/EN HI/Gd6 Page 5/21 P12x/EN HI/Gd6 Page 6/21 Menu Content Tables MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Menu Content Tables MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN HI/Gd6 Page 7/21 P12x/EN HI/Gd6 Page 8/21 3. MiCOM P122 � V14 SOFTWARE Menu Content Tables MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Menu Content Tables MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN HI/Gd6 Page 9/21 P12x/EN HI/Gd6 Page 10/21 Menu Content Tables MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Menu Content Tables MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN HI/Gd6 Page 11/21 P12x/EN HI/Gd6 Page 12/21 Menu Content Tables MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Menu Content Tables MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN HI/Gd6 Page 13/21 P12x/EN HI/Gd6 Page 14/21 Menu Content Tables MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Menu Content Tables MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 4. MiCOM P123 � V14 SOFTWARE P12x/EN HI/Gd6 Page 15/21 P12x/EN HI/Gd6 Page 16/21 Menu Content Tables MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Menu Content Tables MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN HI/Gd6 Page 17/21 P12x/EN HI/Gd6 Page 18/21 Menu Content Tables MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Menu Content Tables MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN HI/Gd6 Page 19/21 P12x/EN HI/Gd6 Page 20/21 Menu Content Tables MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Menu Content Tables MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN HI/Gd6 Page 21/21 Technical Data MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN TD/Gd6 TECHNICAL DATA AND CHARACTERISTIC CURVES Technical Data MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 CONTENT 1. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.5 1.5.1 1.6 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 8.1 8.1.1 8.2 8.2.1 8.3 8.3.1 8.4 8.4.1 8.5 8.5.1 8.6 8.6.1 8.6.2 9. 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 RATINGS Power Supply Frequency Current Inputs Phase and earth current transformers consumption P12x phase CT consumption P12x earth CT consumption Logic Inputs Supply Output Relay Characteristic INSULATION EMC TESTS ENVIRONMENT DEVIATION OF PROTECTION ELEMENTS DEVIATION OF AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS TIMERS DEVIATION OF MEASUREMENTS PROTECTION SETTING RANGES [50/51] Phase Overcurrent (P120, P121, P122 & P123) Protection Setting Ranges [50N/51N] Earth fault protection (P120, P121, P122 & P123) Protection Setting Ranges Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection (P122 & P123) Protection Setting Ranges Thermal Overload Protection (P122 & P123) Protection Setting Ranges Undercurrent Protection (P122 & P123) Protection Setting Ranges Multishot Autoreclose Function (P123) Multishot Autoreclose Settings Further timing AUTOMATION CONTROL FUNCTIONS Trip commands Latch functions Blocking logic (P122 & P123) Second Inrush blocking logic (P122 & P123) P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Page 1/44 3 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 9 10 11 11 12 12 12 12 13 14 14 15 15 15 15 15 16 17 18 18 18 18 18 P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Technical Data Page 2/44 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 9.5 Logic select (P122 & P123) 18 9.6 Output relays 19 9.7 Latch of the auxiliary output relays (P121, P122 & P123) 19 9.8 Inputs 19 9.8.1 Inputs assignation 19 9.8.2 Auxiliary times 19 9.9 Broken Conductor Detection (P122 & P123) 20 9.9.1 Broken Conductor Detection Setting Ranges 20 9.10 Cold Load Pickup (P122 & P123) 20 9.11 Circuit Breaker Failure (P122 & P123) 20 9.11.1 CB Fail Setting Ranges 20 9.12 Trip Circuit Supervision (P122 & P123) 21 9.12.1 Trip Circuit Supervision Setting Ranges 21 9.13 Circuit Breaker Control and Monitoring (P122 & P123) 21 9.13.1 Setting Ranges 21 9.14 SOTF/TOR Switch on to fault / Trip on reclose (P123) 21 9.14.1 Setting Ranges 21 9.15 Logic Equation (P121, P122 & P123) 21 9.15.1 Timer Setting Ranges 22 9.15.2 Available logical gates 22 9.15.3 Available signals 23 10. RECORDING FUNCTIONS (P120, P121, P122 & P123) 25 10.1 Event Records 25 10.2 Fault Records 25 10.3 Instantaneous recorder 25 10.4 Disturbance Records 25 10.4.1 Triggers; Data; Setting Ranges 25 11. COMMUNICATION 27 12. CURVES 28 12.1 General 28 12.1.1 Inverse Time Curves: 28 12.1.2 RXIDG Curves (P122/P123 only): 29 12.1.3 Reset Timer 29 12.2 Thermal Overload Curves 31 12.3 IEC Curves 32 12.4 RI Curves 38 12.5 IEEE/ANSI & CO Curves 39 12.6 Rectifier protection curve 45 12.7 RXIDG curve 46 12.8 Thermal overload curves 47 Technical Data MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Page 3/44 Information required with order (P120) Information required with order Versions MiCOM P12x � Overcurrent protection Order - No. 1 � 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 P12 0 0 0 2 Variant Earth or single Phase overcurrent Earth current input 0.1 to 40 Ion 0.01 to 8 Ion 0.002 to 1 Ion Auxiliary voltage 48 - 250 Vdc / 48 - 240 Vac 48 - 250 Vdc / 48 - 240 Vac 48 - 250 Vdc / 48 - 240 Vac 48 - 250 Vdc / 48 - 240 Vac 24 - 250 Vdc / 48 - 240 Vac Communication interface Modbus KBus / Courier IEC 60870-5-103 DNP3 Language French English / American Spanish German Italian Russian Polish Turkish Latest Major Software release V XX.X (2) Latest Minor Software release V XX.X (2) Mounting option None (default) (3) Pre-fixed HMI (no withdrawability) Sealed cover (3) Pre-fixed with sealed cover Digital input voltage 105 - 145 Vdc 24 - 250 Vdc (Special option for ENA UK) 110 Vdc -30% / +20% 220 Vdc -30% / +20% 24-250Vdc / 24-240Vdc 0 A B C H T V W Z 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 E ? ? 0 1 2 3 (1) Available only with larger LCD (2) Unless specified, the latest version will be delivered (3) Not available with "Auxiliary voltage � Digital input voltage code T P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Page 4/44 Information required with order (P121, P122 & P123) Technical Data MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Information required with order Versions MiCOM P12x � Overcurrent protection Order - No. 1 � 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 P12 0 0 Variant 3 Phase and Earth overcurrent Advanced � 3 Phase and Earth overcurrent Expert � 3 Phase and Earth overcurrent Earth current input 0.1 to 40 Ion 0.01 to 8 Ion 0.002 to 1 Ion Auxiliary voltage Digital input voltage 48 - 250 Vdc / 48 - 240 Vac 105 - 145 Vdc 48 - 250 Vdc / 48 - 240 Vac 24 - 250 Vdc (Special option for ENA UK) 48 - 250 Vdc / 48 - 240 Vac 110 Vdc -30% / +20% 48 - 250 Vdc / 48 - 240 Vac 220 Vdc -30% / +20% 24 - 250 Vdc / 48 - 240 Vac 24-250Vdc / 24-240Vdc Communication interface Modbus KBus / Courier IEC 60870-5-103 DNP3 Language French English / American Spanish German Italian Russian Polish Portuguese Dutch Czech Hungarian Greek Chinese (only available in phase II hardware with larger LCD display) Turkish Hardware version Text display Larger LCD display Latest Major Software release V XX.X (2) Latest Minor Software release V XX.X (2) Mounting option None (default) (3) Pre-fixed HMI (no withdrawability) Sealed cover (3) Pre-fixed with sealed cover 1 2 3 A B C H T V W Z 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E 2 3 ? ? 0 1 2 3 (1) Available only with larger LCD (2) Unless specified, the latest version will be delivered (3) Not available with "Auxiliary voltage � Digital input voltage code T Technical Data P12x/EN TD/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 5/44 1. RATINGS 1.1 Power Supply Nominal auxiliary voltage Vx Operating range Residual ripple Stored energy time Burden 48-250Vdc/48-240Vac 24-250Vdc/48-240Vac DC: � 20% of Vx AC: � 20%, +10% of Vx Up to 12% 50 ms for interruption of Vx Stand by: <3W DC or <8VA AC Max: <6W DC or <14VA AC 1.2 Frequency Frequency protection functions From 45 to 65Hz Nominal frequency 50/60Hz 1.3 Current Inputs Phase current inputs Earth current inputs Operating range Burden Phase Current Burden Earth Current Rrp (Impedance of relay phase current input at 30In) Rrn (Impedance of relay neutral current input at 30In) Thermal withstand 1 and 5A by connection 1 and 5A by connection Selected at order (Cortec) < 0.025 VA (1A) < 0.3 VA (5A) < 0.08 VA (1A) < 0.42 VA (5A) 25m 8m (1A input) (5A input) 87m 15m (1A input) (5A input) 1s @ 100 x rated current 2s @ 40 x rated current continuous @ 4 x rated current P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Page 6/44 1.4 1.4.1 Phase and earth current transformers consumption P12x phase CT consumption Technical Data MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 phase transformer 5A phase transformer 1A RMS voltage (V) Current (A) 1.4.2 P12x earth CT consumption earth transformer 5A RMS voltage (V) earth transformer 1A Current (A) 1.5 Logic Inputs Logic input type Logic input burden Logic input recognition time Independent optically insulated < 10 mAmps per input < 5ms Technical Data P12x/EN TD/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 7/44 1.5.1 Supply Ordering Code T Relay auxiliary power supply Nominal voltage range Vx 48 � 250 Vdc 48 � 240 Vac Special ENA (**) Operating voltage range 38.4 � 300 Vdc 38.4 � 264 Vac Logic Inputs Nominal Minimal Maximum Holding Voltage range polarisation polarisation current voltage current after 2 ms 24 � 250 Vdc 19,2 Vdc 24 � 240 Vac 19,2 Vac 35 mA 2.3 mA Maximum continuous withstand 300 Vdc 264 Vac H 48 � 250 Vdc 38.4 � 300 Vdc 48 � 240 Vac 38.4 � 264 Vac 129 Vdc 105 Vdc 3.0 mA @ 129 Vdc 145 Vdc V 48 � 250 Vdc 38.4 � 300 Vdc 48 � 240 Vac 38.4 � 264 Vac 110 Vdc 77 Vdc 7.3 mA @ 110 Vdc 132 Vdc W 48 � 250 Vdc 38.4 � 300 Vdc 48 � 240 Vac 38.4 � 264 Vac 220 Vdc 154 Vdc 3.4 mA @ 220 Vdc 262 Vdc Z 24 � 250Vdc 19.2 � 300 Vdc 24 � 250 Vdc 19.2 Vdc 48 � 240Vac 38.4 � 264 Vac 24 � 240 Vac 19.2 Vac 35 mA 2.3 mA 300 Vdc 264 Vac (**) Logic input recognition time for ENA approval. Dedicated filtering on 24 samples (15 ms at 50 Hz) 1.6 Output Relay Characteristic Contact rating Contact relay Make current Carry capacity Rated Voltage Breaking characteristic Breaking capacity AC Breaking capacity DC Operation time Durability Loaded contact Unloaded contact Dry contact Ag Ni Max. 30A and carrry for 3s 5A continuous 250Vac 1500 VA resistive 1500 VA inductive (P.F. = 0.5) 220 Vac, 5A (cos = 0.6) 135 Vdc, 0.3A (L/R = 30 ms) 250 Vdc, 50W resistive or 25W inductive (L/R=40ms) <7ms 10000 operation minimum 100000 operation minimum 2. INSULATION Dielectric withstand IEC 60255-5 : 2000 2 kV common mode 1 kV differential mode ANSI/IEEE C37.90-1989 1.5 kV rms AC for 1 minute, (reaffirmed 1994) across normally open contacts. Impulse voltage IEC 60255-5 : 2000 5 kV common mode 1 kV differential mode Insulation resistance IEC 60255-5 : 2000 > 1000 M P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Technical Data Page 8/44 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 3. EMC TESTS High Frequency Disturbance IEC 60255-22-1:1988 Electrostatic Discharge EN 61000-4-2: 1995 and IEC 60255-22-2: 1996 2.5kV common mode, Class III 1kV differential mode, Class III 8kV contact discharge, Class 4 15kV air discharge, Class 4 Fast Transient IEC 60255-22-4:2002, Class A 2kV 5kHz, terminal block comms. 4kV 2.5kHz, all circuits excluding comms. EN 61000-4-4:1995, Level 4 Surge EN 61000-4-5:1995 and IEC 60255-22-5:2002 4kV 5kHz, power supply 2kV 5kHz, all circuits excluding power supply. 4kV common mode, Level 4 2kV differential mode, Level 4 Conducted Emissions EN 55022: 1998 0.15 - 0.5MHz, 79dB�V (quasi peak) 66dB�V (average) 0.5 - 30MHz, 73dB�V (quasi peak) 60dB�V (average). Radiated Emissions EN 55022: 1998 30 - 230MHz, 40dB�V/m at 10m measurement distance 230 - 1GHz, 47dB�V/m at 10m measurement distance. Conducted Immunity EN 61000-4-6:1996 Level 3, 10V rms @ 1kHz 80% am, 150kHz to 80MHz Radiated Immunity EN 61000-4-3:2002 ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2:2004 Level 3, 10V/m 80MHz to 1GHz @ 1kHz 80% am 35V/m 80MHz to 1GHz @ 1kHz 80% am 35V/m 80MHz to 1GHz @ 100% pulse modulated front face only. Radiated immunity from digital telephones EN 61000-4-3:2002 Level 4, 30V/m 800MHz to 960MHz and 1.4GHz to 2GHz @ 1kHz 80% am ANSI Surge Withstand Capability IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1: 2002 4kV fast transient and 2.5kV oscillatory applied common mode and differential mode Magnetic Field Immunity IEC 61000-4-8: 1994 IEC 61000-4-9: 1993 IEC 61000-4-10: 1993 Level 5, 100A/m applied continuously, 1000A/m for 3s. Level 5, 1000A/m. Level 5, 100A/m at 100kHz and 1MHz. Technical Data P12x/EN TD/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 9/44 4. ENVIRONMENT Temperature IEC 60068-2-1 : 1993 IEC 60068-2-2: 1993 Storage �25 �C to +70 �C Operation: �25 �C to + 55 �C �25�C to 70� (*) (*) The upper limit is permissible for a single 6 hour duration within any 24 hour period. Humidity dam heat IEC 60068-2-78:2001 56 days at 93% RH and 40 �C Enclosure protection IEC 60-529: 2001 Dust IP50 (whole case), Front IP 52, Back IP 10 Sinusoidal Vibrations IEC 60255-21-1:1998 Response and endurance, class 2 Shocks IEC 60255-21-2:1998 Response and withstand, class 2 Shock withstand & Bump IEC 60255-21-2:1998 Response and withstand, class 1 Seismic IEC 60255-21-3:1993 Class 2 Corrosive Environments : Per IEC 60068-2-60: 1995, Part 2, Test Ke, Method (class) 3 Industrial corrosive environment/poor environmental control, mixed gas flow test. 21 days at 75% relative humidity and +30�C Exposure to elevated concentrations of H�S, NO�, Cl� and SO�. P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Technical Data Page 10/44 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 5. EU DIRECTIVE 5.1 EMC compliance 89/336/EEC 93/31/EEC Compliance with European Commission EMC Directive. Generic standards were used to establish conformity: EN50081-2: 1994 EN60952-2: 1995 5.2 Product safety 2006/95/EC (replacing 73/23/EEC from 01/2007) Compliance with European Commission Low Voltage Directive. Compliance is demonstrated by reference to generic safety standards: - EN61010-1: 1993/A2: 1995 - EN60950: 1992/A11: 1997 Technical Data P12x/EN TD/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 11/44 6. DEVIATION OF PROTECTION ELEMENTS Glossary I : Phase current Is : I>, I>>, I>>> & I< I2s : I2>, I2>> & I2>>> Ies : Ie>, Ie>> & Ie>>> DT : Definite time IDMT : Inverse definite minimum time Element Range Deviation Trigger Reset Time deviation Phase overcurrent elements I> & I>> & I>>> 0.1 to 40 � 2% from DT: Is � 2%from 0.1 0.95 Is �2% In(0.05 to 25 0.1 to 40In to 40In (Is 5% from 1.05 Is �2% In for I>) (5% from 0.05 to 0.1In) 0.05 to IDMT: 1.1Is �2%from 0.1In) 0.1 to 40In (1.1Is 5% from 0.05 to 0.1In) �2% +30...50ms �5% +30...50ms Earth fault overcurrent elements Ie> & Ie>> & Ie>>> 0.002 to 1Ien � 2% 0.01 to 8 Ien 0.1 to 40 Ien DT: Ies � 2% IDMT: 1.1Ies �2% 0.95 Ies �2% �2% +30...50ms 1.05 Ies �2% �5% +30...50ms Negative sequence phase overcurrent elements I2>, I2>> & I2>>> 0.1 to 40 In � 2% DT: I2s � 2% IDMT: 1.1I2s �2% 0.95 I2s �2% �2% +30...50ms 1.05 I2s �2% �5% +30...50ms Phase undercurrent element I< 0.02 to 1 In � 2% DT: I< � 2% 0.95 I< �2% �2% +30...50ms Broken conductor [I2/I1]. 20 to 100% � 3% DT: I2/I1 � 3% 0.95 I2/I1 �3% �2% +30...50ms Thermal overload I>, Alarm, Trip 0.10 to 3.2 In � 3% IDMT: I> � 3% 0.97 I>�3% �5% +100...200ms (I>: 0.15 to 3.2 In*) * The maximum error can be up to 13% when I> is set to minimum value 0.1 In. 7. DEVIATION OF AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS TIMERS Autoreclose timers tDs, tR, tI CB fail & CB monitoring timers Auxiliary timers tAUX1, tAUX2, tAUX3, tAUX4, tAUX5 Cold load pickup SOTF/TOR �2% +10...30ms �2% +10...30ms �2% +10...30ms �2% +20...40ms �2% +20...40ms 8. DEVIATION OF MEASUREMENTS Measurement Phase current Earth current Range 0.05 to 40 In 0.002 to 1Ien 0.01 to 8 Ien 0.1 to 40 Ien Deviation Typical �0.5% at In Typical �0.5% at Ien Typical �0.5% at Ien Typical �0.5% at Ien P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Technical Data Page 12/44 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 9. 9.1 9.1.1 PROTECTION SETTING RANGES [50/51] Phase Overcurrent (P120, P121, P122 & P123) - Phase current Fundamental only NOTE : When I> or I>> is associated to an IDMT curve, the maximum setting recommended should be 2In. Protection Setting Ranges [51] Phase OC I> ? I> Delay type tI> I> TMS I> Reset Delay Type I> RTMS I> tReset K (RI) I> >> >>> interlock I>> ? I>> Delay type tI>> I>> TMS I>> Reset Delay Type I>> RTMS I>> tReset K (RI) I>>> ? I>>> Sample I>>> tI>>> Setting Range Min Max Step No or Yes 0.05 In 25 In 0.01 In DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0 s 150 s 0.01 s 0.025 1.5 0.001 DT or IDMT 0.025 1.5 0.001 0.00 s 600 s 0.01 s 0.1 10 0.1 No or Yes No or Yes 0.5 In 40 In 0.05 In DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0 s 150 s 0.01 s 0.025 1.5 0.001 DT or IDMT 0.025 1.5 0.025 0.00 s 600 s 0.01 s 0.1 10 0.1 No or Yes or Peak No or Yes 0.5 In 40 In 0.05 In 0 s 150 s 0.01 s 9.2 [50N/51N] Earth fault protection (P121, P122 & P123) - Earth fault current Fundamental only - Earth fault current ranges See following table Technical Data P12x/EN TD/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 13/44 9.2.1 NOTE : When Ie> or Ie>> are associated to an IDMT curve, the maximum setting recommended should be the maximum of the range divided by 20. Protection Setting Ranges [Earth] OC High sensitivity current set Ie> Ie>> Ie>>> Med. sensitivity current set Ie> Ie>> Ie>>> Low sensitivity current set Ie> Ie>> Ie>>> Ie> ? Delay type tIe> Interlock Ie> >> >>> K (RI) Ie> TMS Ie> Reset Delay Type Ie> RTMS Ie> tReset Ie>> ? Delay type tIe>> K (RI) Ie>> TMS Ie>> Reset Delay Type Ie>> RTMS Ie>> tReset tIe>> Setting Range Min Max Step Cortec code P12-C-X---X 0.002 Ien 1 Ien 0.001 Ien 0.002 Ien 1 Ien 0.001 Ien 0.002 Ien 1 Ien 0.001 Ien Cortec code P12-B-X---X 0.01 Ien 2 Ien 0.005 Ien 0.01 Ien 8 Ien 0.005 Ien 0.01 Ien 8 Ien 0.005 Ien Cortec code P12-A-X---X 0.1 Ien 25 Ien 0.05 Ien 0.5 Ien 40 Ien 0.05 Ien 0.5 Ien 40 Ien 0.05 Ien No or Yes DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) or RXIDG (only for Cortec code P12-B-X---X) 0 s 150 s 0.01 s No or Yes 0.1 10 0.1 0.025 1.5 0.001 DT or IDMT 0.025 3.2 0.001 0.00 s 600 s 0.01 s No or Yes DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) or RXIDG (only for Cortec code P12-B-X---X) 0 s 150 s 0.01 s 0.1 10 0.1 0.025 1.5 0.001 DT or IDMT 0.025 3.2 0.001 0.04 s 600 s 0.01 s 0 s 150 0.01 s P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Page 14/44 [Earth] OC Ie>>> ? Ie>>> Sample tIe>>> Ie_d> ? Ie_d> Delay type tIe_d> K (RI) Ie_d> TMS Ie_d> Reset Delay Type Ie_d> RTMS Ie_d> tReset Ie_d>> ? Ie_d>> Delay type tIe_d>> K (RI) Ie_d>> TMS Ie_d>> Reset Delay Type Ie_d>> RTMS Ie_d>> tReset Technical Data MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Setting Range Min Max Step No or Yes No or Yes 0 s 150 s 0.01 s No or Yes 0.1 Ien 40 Ien 0.01 Ien DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) or RXIDG (only for Cortec code P12-B-X---X) 0 s 150 s 0.01 s 0.1 10 0.005 0.025 1.5 0.001 DT or IDMT 0.025 3.2 0.001 0.00s 600 s 0.01 s No or Yes 0.1 Ien 40 Ien 0.01 Ien DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) or RXIDG (only for Cortec code P12-B-X---X) 0 s 150 s 0.01 s 0.1 10 0.005 0.025 1.5 0.001 DT or IDMT 0.025 3.2 0.001 0.00 s 600 s 0.01 s 9.3 9.3.1 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection (P122 & P123) - Phase current: Fundamental only NOTE : When I2> is associated to an IDMT curve, the maximum setting recommended should be 2In. Protection Setting Ranges [46] Neg.Seq. OC I2> ? I2> Setting ranges Min Max Step No or Yes 0.1 In 40 In 0.01 In Technical Data MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Delay Type tI2> I2> TMS I2> Reset Delay Type I2> RTMS I2> tReset I2>> ? I2>> tI2>> DT or IDMT (IEC_STI, IEC_SI, IEC_VI, IEC_EI, IEC_LTI, C02, C08, IEEE_MI, IIEEE_VI, IEEE_EI, RI, RECT curve) 0 s 150s 0.01s 0.025 1.5 0.001 DT or IDMT 0.025 1.5 0.025 0.04 s 100 s 0.01 s No or Yes 0.1 In 40 In 0.01 In 0 s 150s 0.01s P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Page 15/44 9.4 9.4.1 Thermal Overload Protection (P122 & P123) - Phase Current: Protection Setting Ranges RMS [49] Therm. OL Therm. OL ? I Te K Trip Alarm ? Alarm Setting ranges No or Yes 0.1 In 3.2 In 0.01 1 mn 200 mn 1mn 1 1,5 0.01 50% 200% 1% No or Yes 50% 200% 1% 9.5 9.5.1 Undercurrent Protection (P122 & P123) - Undercurrent: - Phase current: Protection Setting Ranges Fundamental only Fundamental only [37] Under Current I< ? I< tI< Inhibition I< on 52A Setting ranges Min Max Step Yes or No 0.2 In 1 In 0.01 In 0 s 150 s 0.01 s Yes or No 9.6 Multishot Autoreclose Function (P123) Main shots: 4 independent shots. External logic inputs: 4 inputs (external CB fail, phase start, earth start, blocking order). Internal programmable trigger from phase and earth fault on all re-closing cycles. P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Page 16/44 External trigger from logic input. Programmable dead times and reclaim time setting. Technical Data MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 9.6.1 Multishot Autoreclose Settings [79] Autoreclose Autoreclose ? Ext. CB Fail ? Ext. CB Fail time Ext Block ? Maximum cycle number Time period Dead time tD1 tD2 tD3 tD4 Minimum drop off time tI> tI>> tI>>> tIe> tIe>> tIe>>> Setting range Min Max Step Yes or No Yes or No 0.01 s 600 s 0.01 s Yes or No 2 100 1 10mn 24h 10mn 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 300 s 300 s 600 s 600 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 50ms 50ms 50ms 50ms 50ms 50ms 600s 600s 600s 600s 600s 600s 10ms 10ms 10ms 10ms 10ms 10ms Reclaim Time tR Inhib time Phase Cycles E/Gnd Cycles Cycles tI> tI>> tI>>> tIe> tIe>> tIe>>> tAux1 tAux2 0.02 s 600 s 0.01 s 0 0 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 4 1 Settings 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 0 = no action on autorecloser : definitive trip 1 = trip on pick up of the protection element, followed by reclosing cycle 2 = no trip on pick up of the protection element also if this has been set in the CRTL/Trip Technical Data P12x/EN TD/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 17/44 9.6.2 commands/Trip menu. 3 = autoreclose without trip (trip order inhibited, no trip order from autoreclose function). Further timing Fixed time out for lacking of CB opening signal on trip protection: 2.00 s at 50 Hz 1.67 s at 60 Hz Time out for lacking of CB closing signal on close control after dead time: tClose Pulse(*): from 0.1 to 5.00 s in steps of 0.01 s (*) Setting available in CB monitoring menu. P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Technical Data Page 18/44 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 10. AUTOMATION CONTROL FUNCTIONS 10.1 Trip commands Assignation of the following thresholds to trip output relay: - all models: tI>, tI>>, tI>>>, tIe>, tIe>>, - P121, P122 & P123 additional functions: t Aux 1, t Aux 2, Equ A, Equ B, Equ C, Equ D, Equ E, Equ F, Equ G, Equ H, - P122 & P123 additional functions: tIe_d>, tIe_d>>, tI < , tI2 >, tI2 >>, Thermal , Brkn.Cond, t Aux 3, - P123 additional functions: tIe>>>, t Aux 4, t Aux 5, SOTF, Ctrl , CB Fail. 10.2 Latch functions Trip output relay programmable with one or many thresholds: - all models: tI>, tI>>, tI>>>, - P121, P122 & P123 additional functions: tIe>, tIe>>, tIe>>>, tAux1 and tAux2 - P122 & P123 additional functions: tIe_d>, tIe_d>>, tI <, tI2 >, tI2 >>, Thermal , Brkn.Cond and t Aux 3 - P123 additional functions: tAux 4, tAux 5, SOTF, CB Fail. 10.3 Blocking logic (P122 & P123) Possibility to block the following delayed thresholds: - all models: tI>, tI>>, tI>>>, tIe>, tIe>>, tIe>>>, - P121, P122 & P123 additional functions: tAux1 and tAux2 - P122 & P123 additional functions: tIe_d>, tIe_d>>, tI2 >, tI2 >>, Thermal , Brkn.Cond and t Aux 3, - P123 additional functions: tAux 4, tAux 5. 10.4 Second Inrush blocking logic (P122 & P123) Possibility to set a second harmonic blocking threshold and to block each delayed overcurrent threshold Blocking Inrush Blocking inrush Inrush harmonic ratio Inrush tReset time Setting range Min Max Step Yes or No 10% 35% 0.1% 0s 2s 10ms Thresholds: tI>, tI>>, tI>>>, tIe>, tIe>>, tIe>>>, Ie_d>, tIe_d>>, I2> and I2>> 10.5 Logic select (P122 & P123) Logic selectivity 1 and logic selectivity 2: this function is used to assign each time delay to threshold to the "Log Sel" input. Blocking Inrush Sel1 tI>> Sel1 tI>>> Setting range Min Max Yes or No Yes or No Step Technical Data MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Blocking Inrush Sel1 tIe>> Sel1 tIe>>> Sel1 tIe_d> Sel1 tIe_d>> T Sel1 Setting range Min Max Step Yes or No Yes or No Yes or No Yes or No 0s 500s 10ms P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Page 19/44 10.6 10.7 10.8 10.8.1 10.8.2 Output relays Alarm and trip threshold assignation to a logic output: 3 relays (P120, P121), 5 relays (P122) and 7 relays (P123). Assignable functions: - all models: Output signal trip (RL1), I>, tI>, I>>, tI>>, I>>>, tI>>>, Ie>, tIe>, Ie>>, tIe>>, Ie>>>, tIe>>>, CB Close, Input 1 and input 2 - P121, P122 & P123 additional functions: t Aux 1, t Aux 2, Equation A, B, C, D, E, F, G and H, - P122 & P123 additional functions: Ie_d>, tIe_d>, Ie_d>>, tIe_d>>, tI<, tI2>, tI2>>, Therm., Therm. Trip , CB Alarm, 52 Fail, Brkn. Cond , CB Fail , t Aux 3, Order 1Comm. Order 2Comm, Order 3Comm., Order 4 Comm., Active Group, Input3, CTS, - P123 additional functions: t Aux 4, t Aux 5, 79 Run, 79 Trip, 79 Locked, 79 Int block, 79 Ext block, SOTF Group, CONTROL Trip, CONTROL Close, Input4, Input5, tIA>, tIB> and tIC>. Latch of the auxiliary output relays (P121, P122 & P123) Possibility to latch output relays: - P121: Output 2 to 4, - P122: Output 2 to 6, - P123: Output 2 to 8. Inputs Inputs assignation Single function or multiple automation functions assignable to 4 logic inputs: - all models: None, Unlatch, 52 a, 52 b, CB FLT, Aux 1, Aux 2, Block Logic 1, - P122 & P123 additional functions: Aux 3, Block Logic 2, Start Disturb, Cold Load PU, Logic Select 1, Logic Select 2, Change setting, Reset, Trip Circuit, Strt tBF, Reset Leds, Maint. Mode, Synchro, Ctrl Trip, Ctrl Close - P123 additional functions: Aux 3, Aux 4, Block [79], SOTF and local mode Auxiliary times Auxiliary timers Aux1 time tAux1 Aux2 time tAux2 Aux3 time tAux3 Aux4 time tAux4 Setting range Min Max 0 200s 0 200s 0 200s 0 200s Step 10ms 10ms 10ms 10ms P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Technical Data Page 20/44 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Aux5 time tAux5 0 200s 10ms 10.9 10.9.1 Broken Conductor Detection (P122 & P123) Principle used: I2/I1 Functionality available for: (IA or IB or IC) > 10% In Broken Conductor Detection Setting Ranges Broken Conductor Brkn.Cond ? Ratio I2/I1 Brkn.Cond Time tBC Setting range Min Max Yes or No 20% 100% 0s 14400s Step 1% 1s 10.10 Cold Load Pickup (P122 & P123) Cold Load PU Cold Load PU ? CLPU Start input CLPU Start auto Cold load PU level Cold load PU tCL Setting range Min Max Yes or No Yes or No Yes or No 20% 800% 100ms 3600s 10.11 Circuit Breaker Failure (P122 & P123) 10.11.1 CB Fail Setting Ranges CB Fail CB Fail ? I< CB Fail Time tBF Block I> Block Ie> Setting range Min Max Yes or No 0.02 In 1In 10 ms 10 s No Yes No Yes Step 1% 10ms Step 0.01 In 0.01 s Yes or No Yes or No Technical Data P12x/EN TD/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 21/44 10.12 Trip Circuit Supervision (P122 & P123) 10.12.1 Trip Circuit Supervision Setting Ranges TC Supervision TC Supervision ? t trip circuit tSUP Setting range Min Max Yes or No 0.1 s 10 s Step 0.05 s 10.13 Circuit Breaker Control and Monitoring (P122 & P123) 10.13.1 Setting Ranges CB Supervision CB Open S'vision? CB Open time CB Close S'vision? CB Close time CB Open Alarm ? CB Open NB Amps(n) ? Amps(n) N tOpen Pulse(*) tClose Pulse(*) Setting range Min Max Step Yes or No 0.05 s 1 s 0.01 s Yes or No 0.05 s 1 s 0.01 s Yes or No 0 50000 1 Yes or No 0 E6 A 4000 E6 A 1E6 A 1 2 1 0.10 s 5 s 0.01 s 0.10 s 5 s 0.01 s (*)Note: The tOpen/Close Pulse is available in the P123 for the Local /Remote functionality 10.14 SOTF/TOR Switch on to fault / Trip on reclose (P123) 10.14.1 Setting Ranges SOTF SOTF? t SOTF I>> I>>> Ctrl close input SOTF input HMI closing order [79] closing Front comm. order Rear comm. order Setting range Min Max Yes or No 0 ms 500 ms Yes or No Yes or No Yes or No Yes or No Yes or No Yes or No Yes or No Yes or No Step 10ms 10.15 Logic Equation (P121, P122 & P123) The MiCOM P121, P122 and P123 relays integrate complete logic equations to allow customization of the product based on customer application. P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Technical Data Page 22/44 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Up to 8 independent Boolean equations can be used (from A to H). Every result of equation can be time delayed and assigned to any output relays, trip, trip latching and/or HMI LEDs. Up to 16 operands can be used (from 00 to 15). Within operands, there are two parts: - (1/2) : logical gates (NOT, OR, AND, NOT AND, NOT OR) - (2/2) : signals (I>, tI>>, Input1 ...etc) 10.15.1 Timer Setting Ranges Logic equat T delay EQU. A Toperat EQU. A Treset EQU. B Toperat EQU. B Treset EQU. C Toperat EQU. C Treset EQU. D Toperat EQU. D Treset EQU. E Toperat EQU. E Treset EQU. F Toperat EQU. F Treset EQU. G Toperat EQU. G Treset EQU. H Toperat EQU. H Treset 10.15.2 Available logical gates Logical gates NOT OR (by default) AND AND NOT OR NOT Setting range Min 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s Max 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s 600 s Availability (1/2) A00 B00 C00 D00 E00 F00 G00 H00 A01 to A15 B01 to B15 C01 to C15 D01 to D15 E01 to E15 F01 to F15 G01 to G15 H01 to H15 Step 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s Technical Data P12x/EN TD/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 23/44 10.15.3 Available signals With the Logic Equations submenu, 16 operands can be used in any single equation. The following logic signals are available for mapping to an equation: TEXT Null Not Null I> I>> I>>> tI> tI>> tI>>> Ie> Ie>> Ie>>> tIe> tIe>> tIe>>> Aux 1 Aux 2 Aux 3 Aux 4 Aux 5 I2> I2>> tI2> tI2>> Thermal Alarm Therm Trip I< tI< Brk Co. Reclos. Aux 1 Aux 2 Aux 3 Aux 4 Aux 5 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Signals (2/2) Condition is Null Condition is not Null Instantaneous first phase threshold Instantaneous second phase threshold Instantaneous third phase threshold Time delayed first phase threshold Time delayed second phase threshold Time delayed third phase threshold Instantaneous first earth threshold Instantaneous second earth threshold Instantaneous third earth threshold Time delayed first earth threshold Time delayed second earth threshold Time delayed third earth threshold Copy of the status of the Logic Input Aux 1 Copy of the status of the Logic Input Aux 2 Copy of the status of the Logic Input Aux 3 Copy of the status of the Logic Input Aux 4 Copy of the status of the Logic Input Aux 5 Instantaneous first phase negative sequence threshold Instantaneous second phase negative sequence threshold Time delayed negative phase sequence (1st threshold) Time delayed negative phase sequence (2nd threshold) Thermal alarm output signal Trip on Thermal overload Instantaneous undercurrent threshold Time delayed undercurrent broken conductor. Autoreclose final trip Copy of the status of the Logic Input Aux 1 Copy of the status of the Logic Input Aux 2 Copy of the status of the Logic Input Aux 3 Copy of the status of the Logic Input Aux 4 Copy of the status of the Logic Input Aux 5 Instantaneous digital input 1 Instantaneous digital input 2 Instantaneous digital input 3 P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Page 24/44 Input 4 Input 5 79 e. b1 79 I b1 Ie_d> tIe_d> Ie_d> tIe_d> TCS Technical Data MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Instantaneous digital input 4 Instantaneous digital input 5 Autoreclose lock activated by the input "block 79" (External Blocking 1) Autoreclose lock activated by the internal process of the autoreclose (Internal Blocking) First stage of derived earth overcurrent threshold. Time delayed of first stage of derived earth overcurrent threshold. Second stage of derived earth overcurrent threshold. Time delayed of second stage of derived earth overcurrent threshold. Trip circult alarm Technical Data P12x/EN TD/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 25/44 11. RECORDING FUNCTIONS (P120, P121, P122 & P123) 11.1 Event Records Capacity Time-tag Triggers 250 events 1 millisecond Any selected protection alarm and threshold Logic input change of state Setting changes Self test events 11.2 Fault Records Capacity Time-tag Triggers Data 25 faults 1 millisecond Any selected protection alarm and threshold Fault date Protection thresholds Setting Group AC inputs measurements (RMS) Fault measurements 11.3 Instantaneous recorder Capacity Time-tag Triggers Data 5 starting informations (instantaneous 1 millisecond Any selected protection alarm and threshold date, hour origin (any protection alarm) length (duration of the instantaneous trip yes or no 11.4 Disturbance Records 11.4.1 Triggers; Data; Setting Ranges Disturbance Records P120, P122, P123 Triggers Any selected protection alarm and threshold, logic input, remote command Data AC input channels digital input and output states frequency value Default value Setting range Min Max Step Records number 5 1 5 1 Pre-Time 0.1s 0.1s 2.9 / 4.9 / 0.1 6.9 or 8.9 Post-Time (P120 only) 0.1 0.1 3 0.1 Disturb rec Trig ON TRIP ON TRIP or ON INST. P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Page 26/44 Trigger Technical Data MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Any selected protection alarm and threshold Logic input Remote command Technical Data P12x/EN TD/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 27/44 12. COMMUNICATION Type Relay Port position RS485 Rear port Physical Link Connectors Screened twister pair Screws or snap-on RS232 Front port Screened (P120, P121, twister pair P122 & P123) Sub�D 9 pin female connector Data Rate Protocol 300 to 38400 baud (programmable) 300 to 38400 baud (programmable) ModBus RTU, Courier, IEC60870-5-103, DNP3.0 ModBus RTU P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Technical Data Page 28/44 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 13. 13.1 13.1.1 CURVES General Although the curves tend towards infinite when the current approaches Is (general threshold), the minimum guaranteed value of the operating current for all the curves with the inverse time characteristic is 1.1Is (with a tolerance of � 0.05Is). Inverse Time Curves: The first stage thresholds for phase (earth) overcurrent can be selected with an inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic. The time delay is calculated with a mathematical formula. In all, there are eleven IDMT characteristics available. The mathematical formula applicable to the first ten curves is: ( ) t = T � I K IS -1 + L Where: t Operation time K Factor (see table) I Value of measured current Is Value of the programmed threshold (pick-up value) Factor (see table) L ANSI/IEEE constant (zero for IEC and RECT curves) T Time multiplier setting from 0.025 to 1.5 Type of curve Short time inverse Standard inverse Very inverse Extremely inverse Long time inverse Short time inverse Moderately Inverse Long time inverse Very inverse Extremely inverse Rectifier protection Standard Schneider Electric IEC IEC IEC Schneider Electric C02 ANSI/IEEE C08 ANSI/IEEE ANSI/IEEE RECT K factor 0.05 0.14 13.5 80 120 0.02394 0.0515 5.95 19.61 28.2 45900 The RI curve has the following definition: ( ) t = K 0.339 1 - 0.236 I Is K setting is from 0.10 to 10 in steps of 0.05. The equation is valid for 1.1 I/Is 20. factor 0.04 0.02 1 2 1 0.02 0.02 2 2 2 5.6 L factor 0 0 0 0 0 0.01694 0.114 0.18 0.491 0.1217 0 Technical Data P12x/EN TD/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 29/44 13.1.2 13.1.3 RXIDG Curves (P122/P123 only): RXIDG curves can be selected on P122 & P123 with medium earth current sensitivity (corresponding to Cortec model number P12-B-X---X). The first and second earth thresholds can be selected with dedicated RXIDG curves. The curves available follow the formula : t = 5.8 � 1.35 * ln ( 1/ (k * Is/I)) Where: t = tripping time k = coefficient (from 0.3 to 1, by steps of 0.1) IS = value of the programmed threshold (Pick-up value) I = value of measured current In order to be compliant with the Netmanagement specifications the relay must be used with : - An earth current range 0.01 Ion to 8 Ion - A rated current wiring 1A - A core balanced CT with a ratio 25/1. Reset Timer The first stage threshold for phase and earth overcurrent protection is provided with a timer hold facility "t Reset". The value that is set for this reset timer corresponds to the minimum time during which the current value needs to be lower than 95% of the phase (or earth) threshold before the corresponding phase (or earth) time delay is reset. NOTE: There is an exception to this rule when the protection triggers. In fact, in this case, the time delays (tI> and tIe>) are immediately reset. The value of the Reset Timer depends on the type of timer associated to the pick up first phase (or earth) threshold. Type of timer associated to the first & second phase (earth) threshold DMT Rectifier, IDMT IEC or RI RXIDG (*) IDMT IEEE or CO P120, P121 0 ms 50 ms 50 ms Reset Timer P122, P123 0 ms Settable from 0 to 600 ms Settable from 0 to 600 ms Settable from 0 to 600 ms or Inverse Time (choice of 5 IEEE curves) (*) first and second earth threshold only Reset timer on P122 & P123 relays: The first stage threshold for phase and earth overcurrent protection, negative sequence overcurrent on P122 and P123 are provided with a timer hold facility "t Reset". It may be set to a definite time value or to an inverse definite minimum time characteristic (IEEE/ANSI curves only). This may be useful in certain applications, for example when grading with upstream electromechanical overcurrent relays that have inherent reset time delays. The second and third stage thresholds for the earth fault overcurrent protection only have a definite time reset. A possible situation where the reset timer may be used is to reduce fault clearance times where intermittent faults occur. P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Technical Data Page 30/44 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 An example may occur in a cable with plastic insulation. In this application it is possible that the fault energy melts the cable insulation, which then reseals after clearance, thereby eliminating the cause for the fault. This process repeats itself to give a succession of fault current pulses, each of increasing duration with reducing intervals between the pulses, until the fault becomes permanent. When the reset time of the overcurrent relay is set to minimum the relay will be repeatedly reset and will not be able to trip until the fault becomes permanent. By using the reset timer hold function the relay will integrate the fault current pulses, thereby reducing fault clearance time. The mathematical formula applicable to the five curves is: ( ) t = T � 1 - K I IS Where: t Reset time K Factor (see table) I Value of the measured current Is Value of the programmed threshold (pick-up value) Factor (see table) T Reset time multiplier (RTMS) setting between 0.025 and 1.5. Type of curve Short time inverse Moderately inverse Long time inverse Very inverse Extremely Inverse Standard C02 ANSI/IEEE C08 ANSI/IEEE ANSI/IEEE K factor 2.261 4.850 5.950 21.600 29.100 factor 2 2 2 2 2 Technical Data P12x/EN TD/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 31/44 13.2 Thermal Overload Curves The thermal time characteristic is given by: e -t = (I� - (kxIFLC)�) (I� - Ip�) Where: t = Time to trip, following application of the overload current, I = Heating and cooling time constant of the protected plant equipment I = Largest phase current IFLC = Full load current rating (relay setting 'Thermal Trip') k = 1.05 constant, allows continuous operation up to < 1.05 IFLC IP = Steady state pre-loading current before application of the overload The time to trip varies depending on the load current carried before application of the overload, i.e. whether the overload was applied from "hot" or "cold". Curves of the thermal overload time characteristic are given in Technical Data. The mathematical formula applicable to MiCOM Relays is the following t Trip = Te In K� - K � - trip Where : t Trip = Time to trip (in seconds) Te = Thermal time constant of the equipment to be protected (in seconds) K = Thermal overload equal to Ieq/k I> with: Ieq = Equivalent current corresponding to the RMS value of the largest phase current I> = Full load current rating given by the national standard or by the supplier k = Factor associated to the thermal state formula alarm = Initial thermal state. If the initial thermal state = 30% then =0.3 trip = Trip thermal state. If the trip thermal state is set at 100%, then trip = 1 The settings of these parameters are available in the various menus. The calculation of the thermal state is given by the following formula: +1 = Ieq kxI > � 1- e -t Te + e -t Te being calculated every 20ms. P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Page 32/44 The following curves are given for indication only. 13.3 IEC Curves Technical Data MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Technical Data MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Page 33/44 P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Page 34/44 Technical Data MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Technical Data MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Page 35/44 P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Page 36/44 Technical Data MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Technical Data MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Page 37/44 P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Page 38/44 13.4 RI Curves Technical Data MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Technical Data MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 13.5 IEEE/ANSI & CO Curves P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Page 39/44 P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Page 40/44 Technical Data MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Technical Data MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Page 41/44 P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Page 42/44 Technical Data MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Technical Data MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Page 43/44 P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Page 44/44 Technical Data MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Technical Data MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 13.6 Rectifier protection curve P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Page 45/44 P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Page 46/44 13.7 RXIDG curve Technical Data MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Technical Data MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 13.8 Thermal overload curves P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Page 47/44 P12x/EN TD/Gd6 Page 48/44 BLANK PAGE Technical Data MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Getting Started MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN GS/Fc6 GETTING STARTED Getting Started MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 CONTENT 1. 1.1 1.2 2. 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.2 3. 3.1 3.1.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 3.4.5 3.4.6 3.4.7 3.4.8 3.5 4. ENERGISING THE RELAY System Connections Auxiliary Power Supply Connections USER INTERFACE AND MENU STRUCTURE User interfaces and menu structure "Default settings" alarm Password protection Setting the language Setting Date and time Menu navigation Menu structure LOCAL CONNECTION TO A PC Configuration REMOTE connection Products plugged in the same panel Communication between distant products MiCOM S1 Studio relay communications basics Data Model Management "Quick Connection" to the relay using MiCOM S1 Studio Create a system Create a new substation Create a new voltage level Create a new bay Create a new device Open Settings File Withdrawing Module from Case COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION P12x/EN GS/Fc6 Page 1/24 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 7 7 7 8 8 9 9 12 15 16 17 17 17 19 21 23 P12x/EN GS/Fc6 Page 2/24 BLANK PAGE Getting Started MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Getting Started P12x/EN GS/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 3/24 1. ENERGISING THE RELAY To energise the relay correctly, follow the following instructions carefully. 1.1 System Connections 1. Check the wiring scheme of your installation. 2. Check that the contacts of output relay RL1 are included in your trip circuit. 1.2 Auxiliary Power Supply Connections Connect a DC or AC (according to nominal supply rating Ua) voltage power supply. POSITIVE Vaux TO TERMINAL 33 NEGATIVE Vaux TO TERMINAL 34 Turn on the auxiliary power supply and set to approximately rated voltage as shown on the front panel of the relay. The display should show: IA Displays the A phase current (true RMS value) taking into 1.00 A account the phase CT ratio (CONFIGURATION/CT RATIO submenu). LEDs should be in the following configuration: - Green LED L3 "Healthy" (Vaux) is iluminated - All the other LEDs should be off. P12x/EN GS/Fc6 Page 4/24 2. USER INTERFACE AND MENU STRUCTURE Getting Started MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the safety section/safety guide SFTY/4LM/D11 or later issue, the technical data section and the ratings on the equipment rating label. Refer to "GETTING STARTED" (GS) section for the description of the following procedures (interfaces and menu). Before the initial operation of the relay, some of the parameter settings must be checked or modified (otherwise, "Setting alarm" is displayed). Lift the upper and lower hinged covers and remove the transparent cover over the front panel. When the keypad is exposed, it provides full access to the menu options of the relay. The relevant information is displayed on the LCD. User interfaces and menu structure The settings and functions of the MiCOM relay can be accessed both from the front panel keypad and LCD, and via the front and rear communication ports. Information on each of these methods is given in this section to describe how to start using the relay. The front panel of the relay includes a keypad, a 16-character alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD) and 8 LEDs. "Default settings" alarm When the relay is powered ON, it checks its memory contents. If the default settings are loaded, an alarm is raised and The ALARM yellow LED lights up. To suppress this message and to reset the watch dog, change one parameter in the relay's menu: - Press the 2 button, - Modify, for instance, the password or the language ("OP parameters" menu. Password protection Password protection is applicable to most of the relay parameter settings, especially to the selection of the various thresholds, time delays, communication parameters, allocation of logic inputs and logic outputs. The password consists of four capital characters. When leaving the factory, the password is set to AAAA. The user can define any combination of four characters. Should the password be lost or forgotten, the modification of stored parameters is blocked. It is then necessary to contact the manufacturer or his agent and by specifying the serial number of the relay, a stand-by password specific to the relay concerned may be obtained. NOTE: The programming mode is indicated with the letter "P" on the right hand side of the display on each menu heading. The letter "P" remains present as long as the password is active (5 minutes if there is no action on the keypad). - Go to the "OP. Parameters" menu by pressing 2 and then to the "password" menu by pressing 2, - Enter the current password (default password = "AAAA") and validate with 5 (this operation is not necessary if the password has been entered some minutes ago), - Enter the new password character by character, using 2 and 8 arrows to change a letter (maintain the key pressed to scroll through the letter in the alphabet). Use 4 and 6 arrows to select another character: a flashing cursor will indicate which character field of the password may be entered., - Validate using 5 or cancel using 0. If the password is correct, the following message is displayed on the LCD: PASSWORD OK Getting Started P12x/EN GS/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 5/24 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 As soon as the password has been entered, no setting change will be accepted via the remote or local communication port (RS485 or RS232). Alternatively, the password can be entered by using the Password window in the OP.PARAMETERS menu. This password entry procedure is the same as above. NOTE: In case of loss of password a back up password can be provided contacting Schneider Electric. Setting the language - Go to the "OP. Parameters" menu by pressing 2 and then to the "Language" menu by pressing 2, 2, - If necessary, enter the current password and validate with 5, - Select the language using 8 or 2 arrows, and validate with 5, - Validate using 5 or cancel using 0. Setting Date and time - Go to the "OP. Parameters" menu by pressing 2 and then to the "Date" menu by pressing 2 (x9), - If necessary, enter the current password and validate with 5, - Set the date using 8 or 2 arrow, and validate with 5 (10/11/08 means November 10th 2008), Note: when you modify the date, the first digit for the day or the month can be selected according to the second digit. For instance, if 13/09/08 is displayed, you cannot select 33 for the day, or 29 for the month. - Validate using 5 or cancel using 0. - Select the "Time " menu by pressing 2 key, - Set the date using 2 or 8 arrow, and validate with 5 (14:21:42 means 2:21:42 pm) Menu navigation A simple menu structure (refer to P12y/EN GS section) allows setting and reading of parameters and functionality. The keypad provides full access to the menu options, with informations displayed on the LCD. - Press 4, 6, 8 and 2 keys for menu navigation: � Press 4 or 6 keys to navigate from a menu heading to another menu heading (refer to the figure below), � Press 2 key to access to a sub menu, then navigate using 2 or 8 keys. - Maintain these keys pressed to scroll through the menu, - If necessary, modify a parameter by pressing 5 key. � Modify the corresponding parameter using arrows, � Validate using 5, or cancel using 0. P12x/EN GS/Fc6 Page 6/24 2.2 Menu structure The menu structure is shown below. DEFAULT DISPLAY IA = 1245 A O P PARAMETERS O RDERS Getting Started MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 CO N FIGURATIO N MEASUREMEN TS RECO RDS AUTOMAT. CTRL PROTECTION G1/ G2 CO MMUN ICATIO N Refer to P12x/EN HI section for the detail of the menu. Getting Started MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 3. LOCAL CONNECTION TO A PC 3.1 Configuration P12x/EN GS/Fc6 Page 7/24 For a local connection between a PC and the relay, a serial cable with metallic shield should be used. The wiring of the RS232 cable must be as shown in the following drawing. 3.1.1 A USB/RS232 cable can also be used to communicate to the relay REMOTE connection The figure shows the recommended way to connect a RS485 cable to the relay to build a local network. P12x/EN GS/Fc6 Page 8/24 3.2 Products plugged in the same panel Getting Started MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 3.3 Communication between distant products Getting Started P12x/EN GS/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 9/24 3.4 3.4.1 MiCOM S1 Studio relay communications basics MiCOM S1 Studio is the universal MiCOM IED Support Softwares and provides users a direct and convenient access to all stored data in any MiCOM IED using the EIA(RS)232 front communication port. MiCOM S1 Studio provides full access to: - MiCOM Px20, Px30, Px40 relays - MiCOM Mx20 measurements units The following sections give the main procedures to connect and to use MiCOM S1 Studio. Before starting, verify that the EIA(RS)232 serial cable is properly connected to the EIA(RS)232 port on the front panel of the relay. Please follow the instructions in section 3.1 to ensure a proper connection is made between the PC and the relay before attempting to communicate with the relay. This section is intended as a quick start guide to using MiCOM S1 Studio, and assumes you have a copy of MiCOM S1 Studio installed on your PC. Please refer to the MiCOM S1 Studio User Manual for more detailed information. Data Model Management The settings and parameters of the protection relay can be extracted from the relay or loaded usin Fata Model manager. The Data Model Manager can load any model from Local file, CD ROM or Internet server (if connected). The Data Model Manager is used to add or to remove data models, to export and to import data model files. It is necessary to close MiCOM S1 Studio when the Data Model Manager is opened. To Open Data Model manager, click on the icon: "Data Model Manager" in the "Programs" menu. . Select "MiCOM S1 Studio" then P12x/EN GS/Fc6 Page 10/24 The following panel is displayed: 1 Getting Started MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2 Select the "Add" option to add the new data model then click on the "next" button. The next panel is used to select the model source (CD ROM, local folder or Schneider Electric FTP server [DEFAULT FTP]). Select the model source and click on the "next" button. 1 2 Note: the following procedure is given with FTP server selected. Getting Started P12x/EN GS/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 11/24 The Data Model Manager loads data models details then displays automatically the language selection option panel. Select the menu language and click the "next" button. 1 2 The data models panel is displayed. Select the data model for your product (for instance, to download P12x data models, Open the "Px10/Px20/Px20C/M/Modulex" sub-menu (click on "+" then select data model according to your product). When data models are selected, the Data Model Manager panel displays the selected models size to download. 1 2 3 P12x/EN GS/Fc6 Getting Started Page 12/24 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Click on "Install button". The model files are downloaded and updated in the system. 3.4.2 When installation has beeen completed, close the Data Model Manager. This Data Model is used with MiCOM S1 Studio when a system is opened or created. To open this default setting file, refer to � 3.4.8. "Quick Connection" to the relay using MiCOM S1 Studio To start MiCOM S1 Studio, click on the icon: In the "Programs" menu, select "MiCOM S1 Studio". The MiCOM S1 Studio launcher screen is displayed: Toolbar Studio Explorer & Properties views Start page Search results view Click on the Quick Connect button at the top left of the application Getting Started MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN GS/Fc6 Page 13/24 Create a new system or open an existing one: P12x/EN GS/Fc6 Page 14/24 Select "Px20 Series" from the presented options Getting Started MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Select a port from the presented options Upon a successful connection a dialog will be displayed showing device type, model number and plant reference. Options for language, device name and comment are also available The device is displayed in the Studio Explorer panel. Getting Started P12x/EN GS/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 15/24 3.4.3 Create a system In MiCOM S1 Studio, a System provides a root node in the Studio Explorer from which all subsequent nodes are created. Add substations, bays, voltage levels and devices to the system. If a system is no longer needed, delete it using the delete command. The use of Quick Connect will automatically create a default system, if one does not already exist. Systems are not opened automatically, unless Reopen last System at start-up is checked in Preferences. To create a new system: - By default, the window displays the message "create new or open existing system": click on "new to create a new system. - If a system is loaded in the "Studio Explorer" window, right-click on the panel background and select New System or select the corresponding icon on Studio Explorer's toolbar. The following window is displayed: Enter the name of the system, and the path to save the system file. P12x/EN GS/Fc6 Page 16/24 The new System is displayed in the Studio Explorer panel: Getting Started MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Note: In the Studio Explorer panel, if an item is selected, its properties are displayed in the "Properties" panel 3.4.4 Create a new substation Select the system: the menu bar is updated with "new device", "new substation", "close", "delete", "paste", "properties" and "options" icons. Click on "new substation" icon (or select the menu using right-click). The following window is displayed: The new substation is displayed and the menu bar is updated when a substation is selected: Getting Started MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN GS/Fc6 Page 17/24 3.4.5 Click on "Import SCL" button to import a Substation Configuration File. To create a substation configuration, click on "new voltage level" button. Create a new voltage level Select the substation and click on "new station level" button (or select the menu using rightclick). In the "Create a new voltage level", enter the voltage level of the station. The "new voltage level" is displayed and the "new bay" icon is displayed. 3.4.6 Create a new bay Select the substation and click on "new bay" button (or select the menu using right-click). In the "Create new bay..." window, enter the bay indication, Th new bay is displayed. 3.4.7 Create a new device Click on "new device" button (or select the menu using right-click). Select the device type and, if necessary, the communications protocole mode that will be used to send the file to the device. P12x/EN GS/Fc6 Page 18/24 Getting Started MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Select the device type, click "next" button. Select the model and click "next" button. Getting Started MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Enter the name and add a description of the device: P12x/EN GS/Fc6 Page 19/24 The new device is created and displayed. 3.4.8 Open Settings File To open an existing file: - If the file is saved or if the relay is not connected: open the Settings folder and open the Settings file, - If the relay is connected, extract the settings from the relay: click on the "Extract Settings" command or right click on the Settings folder P12x/EN GS/Fc6 Getting Started Page 20/24 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 To open default settings: - Click on "Open Default Settings File" Option in the File menu. - Select the device type then the communication protocol. - Select the device type and click on the "Next" button: - Select the Model and click on the "Finish" button. The default settings are displayed. Getting Started MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 3.5 Withdrawing Module from Case Remove the top and bottom hinged covers: P12x/EN GS/Fc6 Page 21/24 Depose the four retaining screws in the top and the bottom side of the relay. These screws retain the relay to the case. P12x/EN GS/Fc6 Getting Started Page 22/24 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Insert a 3mm screwdriver into the hole situated under the upper hinged cover above the LCD: Turn the lock pin 90� to the left: Insert the screwdriver into the second hole under the lower hinged cover, and the lower lock pin is turned 90� to the right. By this turning action, push slightly forward the module and extract it by pulling on both sides of the front panel. Getting Started P12x/EN GS/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 23/24 4. COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION If you need information pertaining to the operation of this MiCOM product that you have purchased, please contact your local Schneider Electric agent or the Customer Care Service (www.schneider-electric.com). Do not forget to give the serial number and reference of the MiCOM product. The MiCOM product reference and serial numbers are documented under the upper hinged cover on the front of the relay. For more precise information, refer to the section "Relay Identification" in this chapter. PLEASE GIVE THE FOLLOWING DATA WHEN MAKING A CALL TO Schneider Electric - CORTEC code of the MiCOM relay - Serial number of the MiCOM relay - Order reference - Operator reference P12x/EN GS/Fc6 Page 24/24 BLANK PAGE Getting Started MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Application Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN AP/Fc6 APPLICATION GUIDE Application Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 CONTENTS P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Page 1/71 1. 1.1 2. 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.6 2.6.1 2.7 3. 3.1 3.2 3.2.1 4. 5. 6. 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.3.1 6.4 INTRODUCTION 5 Protection of Underground and Overhead Lines 5 EARTH AND PHASE CURRENT OVERCURRENT FUNCTIONS 6 Instantaneous function (50/50N) (P122 and P123 relays) 7 Derived earth overcurrent threshold (Ie_d> and Ie_d>>, P122 and P123 only) 7 Ie>...Ie>>...Ie>>> Interlock 8 DMT thresholds 8 IDMT thresholds 8 Inverse time curves 8 RXIDG curves 9 Reset timer 9 Reset timer (P122 & P123 only) 10 Time graded protection 11 TRANSFORMER INRUSH CURRENT (P122 & P123 ONLY) 12 Overview 12 Operation 12 Principle 14 BUSBAR PROTECTION ON RADIAL SYSTEMS 15 BLOCKING LOGIC FUNCTION (BLOCKED OVERCURRENT PROTECTION) 16 RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT 17 Introduction 17 High impedance principle 18 Setting guide 19 CT requirements for High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault Protection 20 Use of METROSIL non linear resistors 20 P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Application Guide Page 2/71 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 6.4.1 Metrosil units for relays with 1A CT 21 6.4.2 Metrosil units for relays with 5A CT 22 7. RECTIFIER PROTECTION 23 8. BACK-UP DIAGRAM USING � TRANSFERRED SELECTIVE TRIPPING � 25 9. REMOTE PROTECTION STAND-BY DIAGRAM 26 10. 1 � BREAKER SCHEME 27 11. THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION (P122 & P123 ONLY) 28 11.1 Time Constant Characteristic 28 11.2 Setting Guidelines 30 12. COLD LOAD PICK-UP (P122 & P123 ONLY) 31 12.1 Exemple of application for earth Fault Protection applied to Transformers 32 13. SWITCH ON TO FAULT / TRIP ON RECLOSE PROTECTION (P123 ONLY) 33 13.1 General 33 13.2 SOTF/ TOR description 33 14. LOCAL / REMOTE MODE (P123 ONLY) 34 14.1 General 34 14.2 Setting 34 15. AUXILIARY TIMERS (P121, P122 & P123 ONLY) 35 16. SETTING GROUP SELECTION (P122 & P123 ONLY) 36 17. MAINTENANCE MODE 37 18. SELECTIVE SCHEME LOGIC (P122 & P123 ONLY) 38 19. LOGIC EQUATIONS (P121, P122 & P123 ONLY) 39 20. NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (P122 & P123 ONLY) 40 20.1 I2> and I2>> Setting Guidelines 40 21. BROKEN CONDUCTOR DETECTION (P122 & P123 ONLY) 41 21.1 Example of Setting 42 22. DESCRIPTION AND SETTING GUIDE OF THE AUTORECLOSE FUNCTION (P123 ONLY) 43 22.1 Introduction 43 22.2 Description of the function 44 Application Guide P12x/EN AP/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 3/71 22.2.1 Autorecloser activation 44 22.2.2 Logic Inputs 44 22.2.3 Autoreclose Logic Outputs 45 22.2.4 Autoreclose logic description 45 22.2.5 Autoreclose Inhibit Following Manual Close 46 22.2.6 Recloser lockout 46 22.2.7 Setting group change lockout 46 22.2.8 Rolling demand 46 22.3 Setting Guidelines 46 22.3.1 Number Of Shots 46 22.3.2 Dead Timer Setting 47 22.3.3 Minimum drop-off time setting 47 22.3.4 Reclaim Timer Setting 49 22.3.5 Autoreclose setting guideline 50 23. CIRCUIT BREAKER STATE MONITORING 54 24. CIRCUIT BREAKER CONDITION MONITORING (P122 & P123 ONLY) 55 24.1 Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring Features 55 24.2 Setting guidelines 55 24.2.1 Setting the In Thresholds 55 24.2.2 Setting the Number of Operations Thresholds 56 24.2.3 Setting the Operating Time Thresholds 56 25. UNDERCURRENT PROTECTION FUNCTION (P122 & P123 ONLY) 57 26. CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION: CBF (P122 & P123 ONLY) 58 26.1 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection mechanism 58 26.2 Typical settings 61 26.2.1 Breaker Fail Timer Settings 61 26.2.2 Breaker Fail Undercurrent Settings 61 27. TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION (P122 & P123 ONLY) 62 27.1 Trip Circuit Supervision mechanism 62 27.2 External resistor R1 calculation 65 P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Application Guide Page 4/71 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 28. REAL TIME CLOCK SYNCHRONISATION VIA OPTO-INPUTS 66 29. EVENT RECORDS 68 30. FAULT RECORDS 68 31. INSTANTANEOUS RECORDER 68 32. DISTURBANCE RECORDER 68 33. ROLLING AND PEAK VALUE DEMANDS (P122 & P123 ONLY) 69 33.1 Rolling demand 69 33.2 Peak value demand 70 34. CT REQUIREMENTS 70 34.1 Definite time / IDMT overcurrent & earth fault protection 70 34.2 Instantaneous overcurrent & earth fault protection 70 34.3 Definite time / IDMT sensitive earth fault (SEF) protection 71 34.4 High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault Protection 71 Application Guide P12x/EN AP/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 5/71 1. INTRODUCTION 1.1 Protection of Underground and Overhead Lines The secure and reliable transmission and distribution of power within a network is heavily dependent upon the integrity of underground cables and overhead lines, which link the various sections of the network together. Therefore the associated protection system must also provide both secure and reliable operation. The most common fault conditions, on underground cables and overhead lines, are short circuit faults. These faults may occur between the phase conductors but will most often involve one or more phase conductor becoming short-circuited to earth. Faults caused by short circuits require the fastest faulted conductor clearance times but at the same time allowing for suitable co-ordination with other downstream protection devices. Fault sensitivity is an issue common to all voltage levels. For transmission systems, towerfooting resistance can be high. Also, high resistance faults might be prevalent where lines pass over sandy or rocky terrain. Fast, discriminative faulted conductor clearance is required for these fault conditions. The effect of fault resistance is more pronounced on lower voltage systems, resulting in potentially lower fault currents, which in turn increases the difficulty in the detection of high resistance faults. In addition, many distribution systems use earthing arrangements designed to limit the passage of earth fault current. Earthed methods as such as using resistance, Petersen coil or insulated systems make the detection of earth faults arduous. Special protection equipment is often used to overcome these problems. Nowadays, the supply continuity in the energy distribution is of paramount importance. On overhead lines most of faults are transient or semi-permanent in nature. In order to increase system availability multi-shot autoreclose cycles are commonly used in conjunction with instantaneous tripping elements. For permanent faults it is essential that only the faulted section of the network is isolated. High-speed, discriminative fault clearance is therefore a fundamental requirement of any protection scheme on a distribution network. Power transformers are installed at all system voltage levels and have their own specific requirements with regard to protection. In order to limit the damage incurred by a transformer under fault conditions, fast clearance of the windings with phase to phase and phase to earth faults is a primary requirement. Damage to electrical plant equipment such as transformers, cables and lines may also be incurred by excessive loading conditions, which leads directly to overheating of the equipment and subsequent degradation of their insulation. To protect against such fault conditions, protective devices require thermal characteristics too. Uncleared faults, arising either from the failure of the associated protection system or of the switchgear itself, must also be considered. The protection devices concerned should be fitted with logic to deal with breaker failure and relays located upstream must be able to provide adequate back-up protection for such fault conditions. Other situations may arise on overhead lines, such as broken phase conductors. Traditionally, a series fault has been difficult to detect. With today's digital technology, it is now possible to design elements, which are responsive to such unbalanced system, conditions and to subsequently issue alarm and trip signals. On large networks, time co-ordination of the overcurrent and earth fault protection relays can often lead to problematic grading situations or, as is often the case, excessive fault clearance times. Such problems can be overcome by relays operating in blocked overcurrent schemes. P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Application Guide Page 6/71 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2. EARTH AND PHASE CURRENT OVERCURRENT FUNCTIONS MiCOM P120 range of relays provide definite and independent time delay overcurrent protection. Each phase current and earth current input has three thresholds. The first and second thresholds can be set as definite delay time or inverse delay time using the IEC, IEEE/ANSI, CO, RI and RECT curves. Their parameters are shown in the Technical Data chapter of this Technical Guide. The third threshold can be set as definite delay time only, but can be set to work on the peak of the current measured. In a similar way, the earth fault elements has three different thresholds, that besides can be set independently of the settings chosen for the phases. The instantaneous thresholds are represented by the symbol "I>" for the first threshold, "I>>" and "I>>>" for the second and third instantaneous thresholds ("Ie>", "Ie>>" and "Ie>>>" for earth thresholds, and Ie_d>, Ie_d>> for derived earth currents). The time delayed thresholds are represented by the symbol "tI>" for the first threshold, "tI>>" and "tI>>>" for the second and third time delay thresholds ("tIe>", "tIe>>" and "tIe>>>" for the time delay earth fault thresholds, and tIe_d_> and tIe_d>> for time delayed derived earth currents). The protection elements trip when the following conditions are realized: - The phase current exceeds the set overcurrent threshold. - The time delay has elapsed. - The blocking logic (if used) is not activated. The following diagrams show the functionality for each threshold. With: FIGURE 1: LOGIC OF PHASE THRESHOLDS I>, I>> AND I>>> Max I> = [IA>] OR [IB>] OR [IC>] Max I>> = [IA>>] OR [IB>>] OR [IC>>] Application Guide P12x/EN AP/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 7/71 Max I>>> = [IA>>>] OR [IB>>>] OR [IC>>>] The logic associated to the earth fault threshold is identical to the one described above. The different thresholds I> & tI>, I>> & tI>> and I>>> & tI>>> are respectively replaced by thresholds Ie> & tIe>, Ie>> & tIe>>, Ie>>> & te>>>. Ie_d> & tIe_d> and Ie_d>> & tIe_d>>. Thanks to the �Blocking Logic� function, it is possible to freeze the timer as long as the "Block Logic" signal is active. As soon as the blocking "Block Logic" signal disappears, if the overcurrent value is still over the set threshold, the time delay resumes its countdown considering the value prior to the activation of the blocking function as its new initial value. This allows a faster clearance of the fault after a reset of the "Block Logic" signal. 2.1 Instantaneous function (50/50N) (P122 and P123 relays) In order to ensure fast tripping on highly saturated current signal, it has been decided that I>>> and Ie>>> should operate on a current sample base in addition to the Discrete Fourier transformation bases (see User Guide chapter). Both algorithms can operate on a highly saturated current signal. However with a high X/R ratio, it is recommended to use the sample base method. As soon as a phase (or earth) threshold is running, the instantaneous output associated with this threshold is activated. This output indicates that the protection element has detected a phase (or earth) fault and that the time delay associated with the threshold has started. This time delay can be blocked via the logic input "Block Logic" associated with this threshold. If this blocking input is activated by an output contact of a downstream relay, the logic that will lead to the trip command is then blocked only if the relay that is the closest to the fault can see and therefore eliminate the fault. This principle is known as �Blocking logic� or �Blocking�. It is described in more detail in this document. 2.2 Derived earth overcurrent threshold (Ie_d> and Ie_d>>, P122 and P123 only) The derived earth current is the vectorial summation: IA + IB + IC : IA + IB + IC = Ie_d>. The Ie_d> can be set as definite delay time or inverse delay time using the IEC, IEEE/ANSI, CO, RI and RECT curves. Their parameters are shown in the Technical Data chapter of this Technical Guide. As soon as Ie_d> or Ie_d>> threshold is running, the instantaneous output associated with this threshold is activated. This output indicates that the protection element has detected an earth fault and that the time delay associated with the threshold has started. This time delay can be blocked via the logic input "Block Logic" associated with this threshold. If this blocking input is activated by an output contact of a downstream relay, the logic that will lead to the trip command is then blocked only if the relay that is the closest to the fault can see and therefore P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Application Guide Page 8/71 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 eliminate the fault. This principle is known as �Blocking logic� or �Blocking�. It is described in more detail in this document. 2.3 Ie>...Ie>>...Ie>>> Interlock For P122 and P123 relays: The choice of this functionality is available when the IDMT delay trip time is selected for the first earth threshold. The following figures show the window where this functionality can be or not to be actived. The 2nd and 3rd threshold pickup can suspend 1st threshold output control to save selectivity.Below the trend of the delay trip time of the first threshold is shown for both cases Yes or No. 2.4 2.5 2.5.1 DMT thresholds The three phase (earth) overcurrent thresholds can be selected with a time constant delay. The time to operate is equal to the time delay set, plus the time for the output contact to operate (typically about 20 to 30 ms ; 20ms for a current exceeding or equal to 2 times the threshold) and the time required to detect the overcurrent state (maximum 20ms at 50Hz). For DMT curves, a reset timer "tReset" is associated with the first and second thresholds (phase and earth elements). IDMT thresholds Inverse time curves The first and second phases (earth) overcurrent threshold can be selected with a dependent time characteristic. The time delay is calculated with a mathematical formula. There are eleven inverse time characteristics available. The mathematical formula applicable to the first ten curves is: t=T x ((I/IsK)�1+L ) Where: t = Tripping time K = Coefficient (see table) I = Value of measured current Application Guide P12x/EN AP/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 9/71 2.5.2 2.6 IS = Value of the programmed threshold (Pick-up value) = Coefficient (see table) L = ANSI/IEEE coefficient (zero for IEC curves) T = Time multiplier between 0.025 and 1.5 Type of curve Short Time Inverse Standard inverse Very inverse Extremely inverse Long time inverse Short Time Inverse Moderately Inverse Long Time Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Rectifier Protection Standard IEC IEC IEC ALSTOM C02 ANSI/IEEE C08 ANSI/IEEE ANSI/IEEE K factor 0.05 0.14 13.5 80 120 0.02394 0.0515 5.95 19.61 28.2 45900 factor 0.04 0.02 1 2 1 0.02 0.02 2 2 2 5.6 The RI curve (electromechanical) is given by the following formula: L factor 0 0 0 0 0 0.01694 0.114 0.18 0.491 0.1215 0 t = K 0.339 1 - 0.236 /( I / Is) With K that can be adjusted from 0.10 to 10 in steps of 0.05. This equation is valid for 1.1 (I/Is) 20. Although the curves tend towards infinite when the current approaches Is, the minimum guaranteed value of the operating current for all the curves with the inverse time characteristic is 1.1Is (with a tolerance of 0,05Is), except rectifier protection curve for which the minimum value is 1.6 Is �0.05 Is. RXIDG curves RXIDG curves can be selected on P122 & P123 with medium earth current sensitivity (corresponding to Cortec model number P12-B-X---X). The first and second earth thresholds can be selected with dedicated RXIDG curves. The curves available follow the formula: t = 5.8 � 1.35 * ln ( 1/ (k * Is/I)) Where: t = tripping time k = coefficient (from 0.3 to 1, by steps of 0.1) IS = value of the programmed threshold (Pick-up value) I = value of measured current In order to be compliant with the Net management specifications the relay must be used with: - An earth current range 0.01 Ion to 8 Ion - A rated current wiring 1A - A core balanced CT with a ratio 25/1. Reset timer The first phase overcurrent threshold [I>/tI>] ([Ie>/tIe>] for the earth) has a reset timer. P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Application Guide Page 10/71 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 The value that is set for this reset timer corresponds to the minimum time during which the current value needs to be lower than 95% of the phase (or earth) threshold before the corresponding phase (or earth) time delay is reset. NOTE: This rule doesn't apply when the protection triggers. When the protection triggers, the time delay tI> (or tIe>) is immediately reset. The value of this reset timer depends on the type of timer associated with the first phase (Earth) threshold. 2.6.1 Type of timer associated with the first & second phase (earth) threshold DMT (see note below) Rectifier, IDMT IEC or RI RXIDG IDMT IEEE or CO P120, P121 0 ms 50 ms - 50 ms Reset Timer P122, P123 0 ms to 600 s Setting range from 0 to 600 s Setting range from 0 to 600 s Setting range from 0 to 600 s or Inverse Time (Choice of 5 IEEE curves) (*) first and second earth threshold only Reset timer (P122 & P123 only) For the first phase and earth overcurrent stages, MiCOM P122 and P123 have a timer hold facility "tReset", which can be set to a definite time value or to an inverse time characteristic (IEEE/ANSI curves only). This may be useful for some applications, for example when grading with upstream electromechanical overcurrent relays which have inherent reset time delays. This timer hold facility used to reduce the time to clear a fault is also useful in situations where intermittent faults occur. This may occur for example in a plastic insulated cable. In this case, the fault energy may provocate the cable insulation to melt and reseal, thereby extinguishing the fault. This process repeats itself a couple of times giving a succession of fault current pulses, each one of increasing duration with reducing intervals between the pulses, until the fault becomes permanent. When the reset time of the overcurrent relay is minimum the relay will be repeatedly reset and not be able to trip until the fault becomes permanent. By using the Timer Hold facility, the relay will integrate the fault current pulses, thereby reducing fault clearance time. The reset timer "tReset" for MiCOM P122 & P123 can be found in the following menu: - If the first phase (earth) threshold is selected with an IDMT IEC or RI curve, the reset timer "tReset" with DMT characteristic can be set under the menu: - Protection /[50/51] Phase OC/tReset for the phase. - Protection /[50N/51N] E/Gnd/tReset for the earth. - If the first phase (earth) threshold is selected with an IDMT IEEE or CO curve, the reset timer "tReset" with a DMT or IDMT characteristic can be set under the menu: - Protection /[50/51] Phase OC/Type Tempo Reset for the phase - Protection /[50N/51N] E/Gnd/Type Tempo Reset for the earth. Reset Time "tReset" with an IDMT characteristic: The mathematical formula applicable to the five curves is: t = T 1 - K (I Is ) Application Guide P12x/EN AP/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 11/71 Where: t = Reset time K = Coefficient (see table) I = Value of the measured current IS = Value of the programmed threshold (pick-up value) = Coefficient (see table) T = Reset Time Multiplier (Rtms) between 0.025 and 3.2 Type of curves Short time inverse Moderately Inverse Long time Inverse Very inverse Extremely inverse Standard C02 ANSI/IEEE C08 ANSI/IEEE ANSI/IEEE K factor 2.261 4.85 5.95 21.6 29.1 factor 2 2 2 2 2 2.7 Time graded protection Inverse definite minimum time relays are time graded in such a way that the relay closer to the fault operates faster than the upstream relays. This is referred to as relay co-ordination because if the relay nearest to the fault does not operate, the next relay will trip in a slightly longer time. The time grading steps are typically 400 ms, the operation times becoming progressively longer with each stage. When difficulty is experienced in arranging the required time grading steps, the use of a blocked overcurrent scheme should be considered (described in a later section). NOTE: The dynamic range of measurement is typically 1000 times minimum setting. P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Application Guide Page 12/71 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 3. TRANSFORMER INRUSH CURRENT (P122 & P123 only) The inrush blocking function assumes stability protection during transformer energising based on harmonic 2 presence. In applications where the sensitivity of overcurrent thresholds need to be set below the prospective peak inrush current, the inrush block function can be used to block the overcurrent, earth fault and negative sequence overcurrent stages. During transformer inrush conditions, the second harmonic component of the inrush current may be as high as 70%. In practice, the second harmonic level may not be the same for all phases during inrush and therefore the relay will provide an Inrush Blocking signal for any phase above the set threshold. In general, a setting of 15% to 20% for the Inrush harmonic 2 ratio can be applied in most cases taking care that setting it too high, inrush blocking may not operate for low levels of second harmonic current which may result in the O/C element tripping during transformer energization. Similarly applying a too low a setting, inrush blocking may prevent tripping during some internal transformer faults with significant second harmonic current. 3.1 Overview Inrush Blocking function operates by measuring ratio of second to fundamental harmonic current. It could be used as "blocking logic" of I >, I >>, I >>>, I0 >, I0 >>, I0 >>>, Ie _d>, Ie_d>>, I2 >, I2 >> or I2 >>> in case the harmonic 2 ratio is higher than the settable threshold. Indeed, inrush blocking functions will reset selected protection function starting. The minimum duration of overcurrent threshold inhibition (tReset) can be also set. This value depends on the transformer power transient inrush duration: between 0.1 second (for a 100kVA transformer) to 1.0 second (for a large unit). It is used to avoid any maloperation during a fixed duration in case of too sensitive setting. 3.2 Operation For each of the three phases currents (IA, IB, IC), the harmonic restraint function compares the ratio of harmonic 2 to fundamental with the setting ratio (adjustable from Harmonic 2 / Fundamental = 10 % up to 35 % step 0.1%). Minimum fundamental current value required for operation of Inrush Blocking function. There is 0.2In, and there is no upper limit to disable this feature. However, in transformer protection, the high set overcurrent stage shall not be controlled by this Inrush Blocking feature; this enables detection of all high current faults without inrush blocking. Inrush Blocking feature will block selected protection stages, any time inrush conditions occurs on the line (Ratio of 2nd Harmonics measured > Inrush H2 settings ratio), and will be at least active during tReset. Application Guide P12x/EN AP/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Operating Inrush current is settable from 10% to 35% of fundamental current. Page 13/71 "tReset" timer defines the minimum duration of overcurrent threshold inhibition (0-2s, settable). The timer starts as soon as operating inrush current drops below the threshold. Under inrush condition, the following selectable protection stages will be blocked: Note: Inrush Blocking in P122 and P123 relays is not phase selective. On occurrence of inrush condition, in any phase, selected protection stages in all 3 phases will be blocked. P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Page 14/71 3.2.1 Principle Application Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Application Guide P12x/EN AP/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 15/71 4. BUSBAR PROTECTION ON RADIAL SYSTEMS The use of non-directional overcurrent relays to protect a busbar is based on the following hypotheses: - The network is a radial system, - The incoming and outgoing feeders are clearly defined, the incomers being always considered as suppliers of energy and feeders as loads. Under these circumstances, the busbar is effectively protected using the interlocking principle (Figure 2). FIGURE 2: BLOCKED OVERCURRENT FOR BUSBAR PROTECTION The instantaneous overcurrent signals of the feeders protection are grouped together and wired to the � Blocking logic � logic input of the relay protecting the incomer. The blocking function is programmed to inhibit either the first or first two thresholds. The third I>>> threshold picks up at a high value (>10 In) with a short time delay (<60 ms). If a fault appears on the network, the relay protecting the associated feeder will immediately (in less than 30 ms) send a blocking order to the relay protecting the incomer. After the fault has been cleared (by opening the circuit breaker), the blocking order is removed and the relay protecting the incomer is unblocked. As the fault current is no longer present, the timer is reinitialised. If the fault appears on the busbar, the fault current exceeds by far the value of the third threshold (I>>>). As this third threshold is not blocked by the blocking logic of relays protecting the incomers, the trip order is sent in less than 60 ms and the busbar is de-energised. P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Application Guide Page 16/71 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 5. BLOCKING LOGIC FUNCTION (BLOCKED OVERCURRENT PROTECTION) This type of protection can be applied to radial feeder circuits where there is little or no back feed. For parallel feeders, ring circuits or where there can be a back feed from generators, directional relays should be considered. The blocking logic function allows the upstream IDMT relay to be blocked by the start output of a downstream relay that has detected the presence of fault current above its threshold. Thus both upstream and downstream relays can have the same current and time settings, and the blocking feature will automatically provide grading. If the breaker fail protection is active, the blocking order on the upstream relay will be removed if the down-stream circuit breaker fails to trip. Thus for a fault downstream from relay C, the start output from relay C will prevent relay B from operating and the start output of relay B will prevent relay A from operating. Thus all 3 relays could have the same time and current threshold settings and the grading would be obtained by the blocking signal received from a relay closer to the fault. This gives a constant, close time grading, but there will be no back-up protection in the event of pilots being short circuited. However, in practice it is recommended to set the upstream relay to a value that is 10% higher than the downstream relay setting. This ensures that the downstream relay successfully blocks the upstream relay when required. FIGURE 3: BLOCKING LOGIC To assign the "Blocking Logic" functions, go under the AUTOMAT CTRL/Blocking Logic menu. MiCOM P120 & P121 relays have only one blocking logic function. MiCOM P122 & P123 relays have two blocking functions, which can be used to block the Earth and Phase thresholds. Application Guide P12x/EN AP/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 17/71 6. RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 provide Restricted Earth Fault protection. It should be noted that: The algorithms implemented in P120 and P121 for the first and second thresholds (I>, I0> and I>>, I0>>) are similar to the ones implemented in the P122 and P123 for the same thresholds. However the algorithm of the third threshold (I>>> and I0>>>) of P120 and P121 is different to the one of P122 and P123. In fact, the algorithm of the third threshold of the P122 and P123 is based on a current sample base in addition to the Discrete Fourier Transformation base. This implementation allows to trip faster on highly saturated current signals. The third threshold of P120 and P121- as it is for the first and second threshold of P120, P121, P122 and P123 products - is based on the Fourier transformation; This explains the outstanding results obtained by the third threshold of P122 and P123 compared to the other thresholds regarding the high impedance restricted earth fault application. So for: � P122 and P123: The user can use all the thresholds for REF application. Note that the results of the third threshold will be greater due to the fact that a sample base algorithm is used. � P120 and P121: The user can use all the threshold for REF application. The results of the third threshold will be similar to one of the first and second threshold (since all the thresholds are based on Discrete Fourier Transformation). NOTE: For P122 and P123, the maximum internal fault level for the third threshold (for the 0.002 to 1In range) must not exceed 20In. 6.1 Introduction The restricted earth fault relay is a high impedance differential scheme which balances zero sequence current flowing in the transformer neutral against zero sequence current flowing in the transformer phase windings. Any unbalance for in-zone fault will result in an increasing voltage on the CT secondary and thus will activate the REF protection. This scheme is very sensitive and can then protect against low levels of fault current in resistance grounded systems where the earthing impedance and the fault voltage limit the fault current. In addition, this scheme can be used in a solidly grounded system. It provides a more sensitive protection, even though the overall differential scheme provides a protection for faults over most of the windings. The high impedance differential technique ensures that the impedance of the circuit is of sufficiently high impedance such that the differential voltage that may occur under external fault conditions is lower than the voltage required to drive setting current through the relay. This ensures stability against external fault conditions and then the relay will operate only for faults occurring inside the protected zone. P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Application Guide Page 18/71 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 6.2 High impedance principle High impedance schemes are used in a differential configuration where one current transformer is completely saturated and the other CTs are healthy. FIGURE 4: HIGH IMPEDANCE SCHEME PRINCIPLE The voltage applied across the relay is: Vr=If (RCT + 2RL) If : Maximum secondary external fault current. RCT : Resistance of the Current transformer secondary winding. RL : Resistance of a single wire from the relay to the CT. A stabilizing resistor R ST can be used in series with the relay circuit in order to improve the stability of the relay under external fault conditions. This resistor will limit the spill current under Is. Vs=Is (RST) Is: Current relay setting Vs: Stability Voltage setting Note that the relay consumption has been taken into account. The general stability conditions can be obtained when: Vs> K.If (RCT + 2RL) Where K is the stability factor. This stability factor is influenced by the ratio Vk/Vs which in turns governs the stability of the REF protection element for through faults . Vk = The Knee point voltage of the CT. To obtain a high speed operation for internal faults, the Knee point voltage Vk of the CT must be significantly higher than the stability voltage Vs . A ratio of 4 or 5 would be appropriate. For MiCOM P121, P122 and P123, we found the following results: K= 1 for Vk/Vs less or equal to 16 and K= 1.2 for Vk/Vs > 16. NOTE: The maximum internal fault level for stage 3 of 0.002 to 1In board must not exceed 20In. Application Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Page 19/71 FIGURE 5: CT CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR HIGH IMPEDANCE REF APPLICATION 6.3 Setting guide The characteristics of the relay and the value of K influence the stability of the scheme as explained here above. The typical setting values shall be chosen to provide a primary operating current less than 30 % of the minimum earth fault level for a resistance earthed system. For a solidly earthed system, the typical setting shall provide an operating current between 10 and 60 % of the rated current. The primary operating current, at the secondary, depends on the following factors: - Current Transformer ratio - Relay operating current IS - Number of CT in parallel with the relay element (n) - The inrush current of each CT (Ie) at the stability voltage - Iop= CTRatio .(Is + n.Ie) Current setting should be selected for a high impedance element so that the primary current reaches its nominal current with a given CT, according to the following equation: Is < {(Iop / CTRatio) - n.Ie} It is also possible to determine the maximum inrush current of the CT to reach a specific primary operating current with a given relay setting. The setting of the stabilising resistor must be calculated according to the above formula, where the setting depends on the required stability voltage setting Vs and the relay setting Is Vs Is = k I f (R CT+2R L) Is For MiCOM P12x, Is is equivalent to Ie>, so the above equation becomes: Vs Ie> = k I f (RCT+2RL) Ie> with K= 1 for Vk/Vs less or equal to 16 and K= 1.2 for Vk/Vs > 16. P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Application Guide Page 20/71 So MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 6.3.1 6.4 R ST = k I f (RCT+2RL) Ie> with Vk 4.Is.RST (A typical value to ensure the high speed operation for an internal fault). CT requirements for High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault Protection The High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault element shall remain stable for through faults and operate in less than 40ms for internal faults provided that the following equations are met in determining CT requirements and the value of the associated stabilising resistor: Rs = [k* (If) * (RCT + 2RL)] / IS VK 4 * Is * Rs with K= 1 for Vk/Vs less or equal to 16 and K= 1.2 for Vk/Vs > 16. Use of METROSIL non linear resistors Metrosils are used to limit the peak voltage developed by the current transformers under internal fault conditions, to a value below the insulation level of the current transformers, relay and interconnecting leads, which are normally able to withstand 3KV peak. The following formula should be used to estimate the peak transient voltage that could be induced by an internal fault. This peak voltage depends on: - CT Knee point (VK) - Voltage that would be induced by an internal fault if CT doesn't saturate (Vf) This prospective voltage itself depends on: - Maximum internal fault secondary current - CT ratio - CT secondary winding resistance - CT lead resistance to the common point - Relay lead resistance - Stability resistor value � Vp = 2 {2.VK (Vf - Vk)} Vf = I'f.(Rct + 2RL + RST) Where - Vp: peak voltage developed by the CT under internal fault conditions Vf: maximum voltage that would be produced if CT saturation did not occur Vk: current transformer Knee point voltage I'f: is the maximum internal secondary fault current Rct: current transformer secondary winding transformer RL: maximum lead burden from CT to relay RST: Relay stabilising resistor. When the value given by the formula is greater than 3KV peak, it is necessary to use Metrosils. They are connected across the relay circuit and they allow to shunt the secondary current output of the current transformer from the relay in order to prevent very high secondary voltages. Application Guide P12x/EN AP/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 21/71 6.4.1 Metrosils are externally mounted and have annular discs shape. Their operating characteristics is according to the formula: V = C.I0.25 Where - V: Instantaneous voltage applied to the non-linear resistor (Metrosil) C: Constant of the non-linear resistor (Metrosil) I: Instantaneous current through the non-linear resistor (Metrosil) With the sinusoidal voltage applied across the Metrosil, the RMS current would be approximately 0.25 times the peak current. This current value can be calculated as follows: 4 Irms = 0.52Vs(rmCs). 2 Where - Vs(rms): RMS value of the sinusoidal voltage applied across the Metrosil. This is due to the fact that the current waveform through the Metrosil is not sinusoidal but appreciably distorted. For satisfactory application of the non-linear resistor (Metrosil), its characteristics should comply with the following requirements: - At the relay voltage setting, the non-linear resistor (Metrosil) current should be as low as possible, but no greater than approximately 30mA rms for 1A current transformers and approximately 100mA rms for 5A current transformer. - At the maximum secondary current, the non-linear resistor (Metrosil) should limit the voltage to 1500V rms or 2120V peak for 0.25 second. At higher relay voltage settings, it is not always possible to limit the fault voltage to 1500V rms, so higher fault voltage may have to be tolerated. The following tables show the typical types of Metrosil that will be required, depending on relay current rating, REF voltage setting etc. Metrosil units for relays with 1A CT The Metrosil units with 1A CTs have been designed to comply with the following restrictions: - At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should be less than 30mA rms. - At the maximum secondary internal fault current, the Metrosil unit should limit the voltage to 1500V rms if possible. The Metrosil units normally recommended to be used with 1Amp CTs are shown in the following table: Relay Voltage setting Up to 125V rms 125 to 300V rms Nominal Characteristics C 450 0.25 900 0.25 Recommended Metrosil Type Single pole Relay Triple pole relay 600A/S1/S256 600A/S1/S1088 600A/S3/1/S802 600A/S3/1/S1195 NOTE: Single pole Relay Metrosil Units are normally supplied without mounting brackets unless otherwise specified by the customer. P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Application Guide Page 22/71 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 6.4.2 Metrosil units for relays with 5A CT These Metrosil units have been designed to comply with the following requirements: - At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should be less than 100mA rms (the actual maximum currents passed by the units shown below their type description) - At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit should limit the voltage to 1500V rms for 0.25 second. At the higher relay settings, it is not possible to limit the fault voltage to 1500V rms, hence higher voltage have to be tolerated ( indicated by * ,** , *** ). The Metrosil units normally recommended for the used with 5 Amps CTs and single pole relays are shown in the following table: Secondary Recommended Metrosil Type Internal fault current Relay Voltage Setting Amps rms 50A 100A 150A Up to 200V rms 600A/S1/S1213 C= 540/640 35mA rms 600A/S2/P/S1217 C= 470/540 35mA rms 600A/S3/P/S1219 C= 430/500 100mA rms 250V rms 600A/S1/S1214 C= 670/800 40mA rms 600A/S2/P/S1215 C= 570/670 75mA rms 600A/S3/P/S1220 C= 520/620 100mA rms 275V rms 600A/S1/S1214 C= 670/800 50mA rms 600A/S2/P/S1215 C= 570/670 100mA rms 600A/S3/P/S1221 C= 570/670** 100mA rms 300V rms 600A/S1/S1223 C= 740/870* 50mA rms 600A/S2/P/S1196 C= 620/740* 100mA rms 600A/S3/P/S1222 C= 620/740*** 100mA rms NOTE: * 2400V peak ** 2200V peak *** 2600V peak In some cases, single disc assemblies may be acceptable, contact Schneider Electric for detailed information. The Metrosil units used with 5 Amps CTs can also be used with triple pole relays and consist of three single pole units mounted on the same central stud but electrically insulated from each other. To order these units please specify "Triple pole Metrosil type", followed by the single pole type reference. Application Guide P12x/EN AP/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 23/71 7. RECTIFIER PROTECTION Rectifiers require a specific inverse time protection curve. Protecting a rectifier is different from protecting conventional overcurrent applications. In fact, a large number of rectifiers can withstand relatively long periods of overcharge without being damaged. To give an idea, they can generally withstand 150 % of the load for 2 hours and 300 % for 1 minute. A typical application is shown on the diagram below. FIGURE 6: PROTECTION FOR SILICON RECTIFIERS FIGURE 7: MATCHING CURVE TO LOAD AND THERMAL LIMIT OF RECTIFIER P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Application Guide Page 24/71 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 The current threshold I> should be set to the rated rms value of the current that flows into the transformer when the rectifier is delivering its rated load. The relay will give a start indication when the current exceeds this setting but this is of no consequence because this function is not used in this application. The rectifier curve should be an inverse time curve and should cut-off currents below 1.6 times allowing the rectifier to carry 150% overload for long periods. If this is not acceptable, the I> setting can be adjusted to move the cut-off point relative to the current scale. The operation time can be modified by adjusting the time multiplier setting (TMS) so that the time lies between limiting characteristic of the rectifier and the tolerated load area. Typical settings for the TMS area: Light industrial service TMS = 0.025 Medium duty service TMS = 0.1 Heavy duty traction TMS = 0.8 The high set is typically set at 8 times the rated current as this ensures HV AC protection will discriminate with faults covered by the LV protection. However, the high set could be set to 4 or 5 times the rated current if the AC protection is not trustworthy. Use of the thermal element to provide protection between 70% and 160% of rated current could enhance the protection. It is also common practice to provide restricted earth fault protection for the transformer feeding the rectifier. Refer to the corresponding section dealing with restricted earth fault protection. Application Guide P12x/EN AP/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 25/71 8. BACK-UP DIAGRAM USING � TRANSFERRED SELECTIVE TRIPPING � In this application, the relay protecting the incomer can trip the circuit breaker of the faulty feeder via the watchdog contact of the relay protecting the faulty feeder. Figure 8 illustrates this example: FIGURE 8: EXAMPLE OF A BACK-UP DIAGRAM USING " TRANSFERRED SELECTIVE TRIP" Thus, a fault occurring on a feeder can be cleared tripping the circuit breaker of the faulty feeder, even if the relay protecting this feeder failed to operate. Without this function, the fault would normally be cleared by the opening of the circuit breaker of the incomer. This would lead to a total loss of operation on the affected busbar. The relay protecting the incomer has two time delay output contacts available (among others): - 3rd threshold: tI>>> time delay at 60ms (active threshold for the high phase faults) - 2nd threshold: tI>> time delay selectively greater than for the third threshold, i.e. 360ms. The output contact associated with the 2nd threshold is wired in serie with the watchdog contact of the downstream relays, so that it can activate the trip coil of the circuit breakers of the feeders. Regarding the output contact associated with the 2nd and 3rd threshold, this contact is directly wired to the trip coil of the incomer circuit breaker. Case n�1 all relays operate normally: In this case, watchdog contacts of all the relays are open. Thus, for a phase fault on the busbar, threshold tI>> or tI>>> of the P121 located on the incomer will clear the fault. For a phase fault on one of the feeder, the thresholds tI>> and tI>>> of the relay located on the incomer being selectively set to higher values than the ones set for the phase thresholds of downstream relays, the fault shall be cleared selectively by the relay of the faulty feeder (selectivity between the relay of the incomer and relays of the feeders is ensured thanks to intervals of selectivity correctly chosen, or thanks to a suitable blocking diagram). P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Application Guide Page 26/71 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Case n�2 the relay supervising one of the feeders is faulty: In this case, the watchdog contact of this relay is closed. Thus, for a phase fault on the busbar, thresholds tI>> and tI>>> activate their associated output contact. However, threshold tI>> will clear the fault as this threshold has been set to a lower value than the threshold tI>>>. For a phase fault on one of the `healthy' feeders, thresholds tI>> and tI>>> of the relay located on the incomer being selectively set to higher values than the ones set for the phase thresholds of the downstream relays, the fault shall be cleared selectively by the relay of the faulty feeder (selectivity between the relay of the incomer and relays of the feeders is ensured thanks to intervals of selectivity correctly chosen or thanks to a suitable blocking diagram). For a phase fault on the feeder of the failed relay, the threshold tI>> of the relay located on the incomer operates via the watchdog contact of the faulty relay on the trip coil of the circuit breaker of the faulty feeder. This threshold being selectively set to a value lower than the threshold tI>>> (which operates directly on the coil of the incomer circuit breaker ), the fault is therefore selectively cleared. 9. REMOTE PROTECTION STAND-BY DIAGRAM MiCOM P121, P122 and P123 relays can be used as a HV distance back-up protection (Figure 9). Depending on the type of selectivity required, 51/51N function of P121, P122 and P123 needs to be set either as time constant or as time dependent. The value of the time delay of I>/Ie> is set to a value that is compatible with thresholds Z2 or Z3 (2nd and 3rd distance protection zone). FIGURE 9: ASSISTANCE OF REMOTE PROTECTION BY A MiCOM P121 PROTECTION The �Equipment default � contact of the distance protection (case of a numerical protection) can be wired to a MiCOM P121, P122 and P123 relays to optimise the time to trip. Application Guide P12x/EN AP/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 27/71 10. 1 � BREAKER SCHEME For HV/EHV stations with a 1 � circuit breaker scheme (Figure 10), the zone between the two circuit breakers and the switch section needs to be protected with a standard ANSI 50 protection. The time to trip is an essential criteria to be considered when choosing this protection. MiCOM P121, P122 or P123 relays are perfectly suited for this application. The time delay of the first threshold (tI>) is set to a low value (typically 100 ms above the circuit breaker failure time). This will allow the relay to be blocked by the close contact of the associated switch. FIGURE 10: 1 � BREAKER SCHEME P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Page 28/71 Application Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 11. THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION (P122 & P123 ONLY) Thermal overload protection can be applied to prevent damages to the equipment of the electrical plant when operating at temperatures that are above the values designed for maximum withstand. A prolonged overloading causes excessive heating, which may result in premature deterioration of the insulation, or in extreme cases, insulation failure. MiCOM P122 & P123 relays incorporate a current based thermal replica, using load current to reproduce the heating and cooling of the equipment to be protected. The element thermal overload protection can be set with both alarm and trip stages. The heating within any plant equipment, such as cables or transformers, is of resistive type (I�R x t). Thus, the quantity of heat generated is directly proportional to the current squared (I�). The thermal time characteristic used in the relay is based on current squared, integrated over time. MiCOM P122 & P123 relays automatically use the highest phase current as input information for the thermal model. Protection equipment is designed to operate continuously at a temperature corresponding to its full load rating, where heat generated is balanced with heat dissipated by radiation etc. Over-temperature conditions therefore occur when currents in excess of rating are allowed to flow for a certain period of time. It can be shown that temperatures during heating follow exponential time constants and a similar exponential decrease of temperature occurs during cooling. In order to apply this protection element, the thermal time constant (Te) of the plant equipment to be protected is therefore required. The following sections will show that different plant equipment possesses different thermal characteristics, due to the nature of their construction. 11.1 Time Constant Characteristic This characteristic is used to protect cables, dry type transformers (e.g. type AN), and capacitor banks. The thermal time characteristic is given by: ( ) ( ) ( ) e - t = I2 - k IFLC I2 - I 2 p 2 Where: t = Time to trip, following application of the overload current, I = Heating and cooling time constant of the protected plant equipment I = Largest phase current IFLC = Full load current rating (relay setting `Thermal Trip') k = 1.05 constant, allows continuous operation up to < 1.05 IFLC IP = Steady state pre-loading current before application of the overload The time to trip varies depending on the load current carried before application of the overload, i.e. whether the overload was applied from "hot" or "cold". Curves of the thermal overload time characteristic are presented in the chapter P12x/EN TD/C55 of the Technical Guide. Application Guide P12x/EN AP/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 29/71 Mathematical formula applicable to the MiCOM Relays: The calculation of the Time to Trip is given by: Ttrip = Te In K 2 - K 2 -trip With: Ttrip = Time to trip (in seconds) Te = Thermal time constant of the protected element (in seconds) K = Thermal overload equal to Ieq/k I > Ieq = Equivalent current corresponding to the RMS value of the largest phase current. I > = Full load current rating given by the national standard or by the supplier. k = Factor associated to the thermal state formula. = Initial thermal state. If the initial thermal state = 30% then = trip = Trip thermal state. If the trip thermal state is set at 100%, then trip = 1 The settings of these parameters are available in the menus: PROTECTION G1/ [49] Therm OL PROTECTION G2/ [49] Therm OL The calculation of the thermal state is given by the following formula: +1 = I eq k I 2 1 - e -t Te + e -t Te being calculated every 20ms. P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Application Guide Page 30/71 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 11.2 Setting Guidelines The current setting is calculated as: Thermal Trip (trip) = Permissible continuous loading of the plant equipment / CT ratio. Typical time constant values are given in the following tables. The `Time Constant' parameter is given in minutes. Paper insulated lead sheathed cables or polyethylene insulated cables are placed above the ground or in conduits. The table shows in minutes, for different cable rated voltages and conductor cross-sectional areas: CSA mm2 25 - 50 70 - 120 150 185 240 300 6 -11 kV 22 kV 33 kV 10 15 40 15 25 40 25 40 40 25 40 60 40 40 60 40 60 60 Time constant (minutes) 66 kV 60 60 60 60 90 Other plant items: Dry-type transformers Air-core reactors Capacitor banks Overhead lines Busbars Time constant (minutes) 40 60 - 90 40 10 10 60 Limits Rating < 400 kVA Rating 400 - 800 kVA Cross section 100 mm2 Cu or 150mm� Al An alarm can be raised when reaching a thermal state corresponding to a percentage of the trip threshold. A typical setting might be `Thermal Trip' = 70% of thermal capacity. Application Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Page 31/71 12. COLD LOAD PICK-UP (P122 & P123 ONLY) The Cold Load Pick-up feature allows selected settings of MiCOM P122 and P123 relays to be changed to react to temporary overload conditions that may occur during cold starts. This condition may happen by switching on large heating loads after a sufficient cooling period, or loads that draw high initial starting currents. When a feeder is energised, the current levels that flow for a period of time following energising may differ greatly from the normal load levels. Consequently, overcurrent settings that have been applied to give short circuit protection may not be suitable during this period. The Cold Load Pick-up (CLP) logic raises the settings of selected stages for a set duration (tCL). This allows the protection settings to be set closer to the load profile. Cold load pick-up cannot restart until the end of tCL duration. The CLP logic provides stability, without compromising protection performance during starting. The CLP can be started by digital logic Input 52A and/or internal threshold detection by (Not I< & I>) and/or internal threshold detection by (Not I0< & I0>). If the CB positions are not available, to detect the Cold Load Pick-up start, a new internal threshold is created named autostart. To detect the Cold Load Pick-up, the three phases current should be under 5% of In. When the current grows up to In or more, with a time of less than 200 ms, an internal edge detection is created. In > Internel Virtual threshold 5% In CLP does not start IB IA IC Time more than 200ms IA IB IC In > One phase is upper than 5% of In at start. Internel Virtual threshold 5% In T<200ms CLP starts T<200ms IA IB IC In > �P3942ENa - phase A AND phase B AND phase C < 5% In - Phase A > In, in less than 200ms Internel Virtual threshold 5% In T<200ms P3942ENa P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Page 32/71 The following diagram shows the logic start of CLP Setting Cold load Pick-up 52A Actif Selectable In the menu CLP Ext. CB 52A Position Digital logic Input = 52A & C.L.P. not in progress Setting Cold load Pick-up Auto-detection Actif Selectable in the menu CLP A edge detection I under 5% to I more than In and & less than 200ms. C.L.P. not in progress Application Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 >1 Start C.L.P. P3941ENa 12.1 Exemple of application for earth Fault Protection applied to Transformers Where an earth fault relay is residually connected on the primary side of a delta-star transformer, no time delay is required for co-ordination purposes, due to the presence of the delta winding. However, a nominal time delay or stabilising resistor is recommended, to ensure transient stability during transformer energising. The CLP logic may be used in a similar manner to that previously described for the motor application. This method will not provide stability in the event of asymmetric CT saturation (as a result of an unbalanced fault condition). In this case, use a stabilising resistor. Application Guide P12x/EN AP/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 33/71 13. SWITCH ON TO FAULT / TRIP ON RECLOSE PROTECTION (P123 ONLY) 13.1 General In some feeder applications, fast tripping may be required if a fault is still present on the feeder after the reclose of the circuit breaker (Close on to fault). Some faults may not be cleared after a reclose due to the fact that the conditions that led to the fault have not been removed from the feeder after a reclosing cycle or a manual trip, or due to earthing clamps left on after a maintenance visit. In these cases, it may be desirable to clear the fault condition in a quicker time, rather than to wait for the trip delay time DMT or IDMT associated with the involved protection to elapse. In the case of a CB being manually closed, a switch on to an existing fault may occur. This situation is particularly critical because the overcurrent protection would not clear the fault until the set time delay has elapsed. It is then desirable to clear the fault as fast as possible. Activation and setting of the SOTF/TOR (Switch On To Fault/ Trip On Reclose) function can be done under the AUTOMATIC CTRL/SOTF submenu. The crossing of I>> and I>>> thresholds initiate the SOTF function. 13.2 SOTF/ TOR description The following signals can activate the SOTF/TOR function: - "Ctrl close" logical input, - manual closing ordered by HMI, - command generated by a digital input labelled "SOTF", - front communication order, - rear communication order, - close ordered by autorecloser, The following diagram illustrates this functionality. FIGURE 11: LOGIC DIAGRAM OF THE SOTF P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Application Guide Page 34/71 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 When at least one of the selected signals has been detected, a fixed timer starts and lasts 500ms. Once this fixed timer has elapsed and I>> or I>>> thresholds have been crossed, the configurable timer named "tSotf" starts. This configurable timer is particularly useful in applications where selectivity for fault occurring in stage two or three is requested. This timer is also useful for cases where serious transient happen, where the three poles of the CB do not close at the same time and in cases where the CB may not instantaneously close. This "tSotf" can also be considered a trip delay time that substitutes the trip timer of the threshold that has been crossed so that the time to trip is accelerated. If a trip due to switch on to fault occurs during the reclaim time of the ARC, the trip will be definitive and the ARC will be locked. If the I>> and I>>> reset during the settable timer "tSotf", the SOTF/TOR function is reset. 14. LOCAL / REMOTE MODE (P123 ONLY) 14.1 General The goal of this feature is to be able to block commands sent remotely through communication networks (like setting parameters, control command, etc.), to prevent any accidents or maloperation during maintenance work performed on site. A digital input labelled "LOCAL MODE" is assigned to this feature. In Local mode, only the synchronising time signal is allowed. Commands sent remotely (CTRL TRIP and CTRL CLOSE) as well as commands sent by the autoreclose function (CB Close) can be set to activate their own dedicated output relay (and not necessarily the same output relay as the protection trip output RL1). 14.2 Setting In the "AUTOMATIC CTRL/Trip Commands" menu, TC item uses the "CTRL TRIP" function to open the CB. In the "AUTOMATIC CTRL/Output relays" menu, the "CTRL TRIP" and "CTRL CLOSE" functions are assigned to remotely open and close the CB. The "CB CLOSE" relay is assigned to close the CB by Autoreclose. In order to keep the functionality of previous firmware versions, the user will have to assign both "TRIP" and "CTRL TRIP" information to relay RL1, and to assign both "CTRL CLOSE" and "CB CLOSE" information to the same auxiliary relay. Here is an example of application. In the following scheme, the user may assign the different signals to different relays: "TRIP" signal may be assigned to the trip relay RL1, the "CTRL TRIP" signal to the auxiliary relay number 2, the "CB CLOSE" signal to the auxiliary relay number 3 and the "CTRL CLOSE" to the auxiliary relay number 4. When the "Local" input is energised, all remote commands are blocked. When the "Local" input is de-energised, remote control commands can be issued. Application Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Page 35/71 FIGURE 12: EXAMPLE OF LOCAL/REMOTE APPLICATION 15. AUXILIARY TIMERS (P121, P122 & P123 ONLY) Five auxiliary timers tAux1, tAux2, tAux3 (P122/P123 only), tAux4 and tAux5 (P123 only) are available and associated to Aux1, Aux2, Aux3, Aux4 and Aux5 logic inputs (refer to "AUTOMAT. CRTL/INPUTS" menu). When these inputs are energised, the associated timers start and, when the set time has elapsed, the associated output relays close (refer to "AUTOMAT. CRTL/OUTPUTS" menu). Time delays can be independently set from 0 ms to 200 s. NOTE: It is possible to allocate logic inputs of the MiCOM P120 to the external information Aux1 and Aux2. Therefore, these inputs cannot command output relays. Moreover, the tAux1 and tAux2 timers are fixed and equal to 0. Thus the Aux1 and Aux2 inputs can only be used for indication on the communication network. P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Application Guide Page 36/71 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 16. SETTING GROUP SELECTION (P122 & P123 ONLY) MiCOM P122 and P123 relays have two setting groups associated to the protection functions named PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2. Only one group is active. Switching between the groups can be done via: - the relay front panel interface (CONFIGURATION/GROUP SELECT/ SETTING GROUP 1 or 2), - a dedicated logic input (AUTOMAT. CTRL/INPUT X/CHANGE SET) where X is the chosen logic input, - through the communications port (refer to Mapping Database for detailed information). To avoid any false trip, the change of setting group is only carried out when no protection function is running (except the thermal overload function). If a setting group change is received during any protection or automation function, it is stored and executed after the last timer has elapsed. The user can check which one of the active group is active looking under the OP PARAMETERS menu. The user can also assign the active group to an output relay. Using a normally open contact, this means that: - an open contact will indicate that the active group is Group 1 - a close contact will indicate that the active group is Group 2 Change of setting group done by a digital input It is possible to change the setting group via the activation of a digital input (on level). Warning: if the digital input that has been assigned to the change of setting group operates on level (low or high), it is not possible to change the setting group via remote communication or front panel. SWITCH BETWEEN ACTIVE GROUPS: When powering on the relay, the group selected (Group 1 or Group 2) corresponds to the state of the logic input. This means: A - With a Logic input configuration = 0 Group 1 = logic Input is not active Group 2 = logic Input is active If the programmed logic input is supplied with +V, then the active group will be G1. If the programmed logic input is not supplied with +V , then the active group will be G2. B - With a Logic input configuration = 1 Group 1 = logic Input is not active Group 2 = logic Input is active If the set logic input is energized with +V, then the active group will be G2. If the set logic input is not energized with +V, then the active group will be G1. Application Guide P12x/EN AP/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 37/71 Priority When changing parameters through the front panel, the priority is given to the user that takes local control of the relay when entering a password. Change of setting group done via a remote command is not allowed for as long as the password is active (5mn). ORIGIN OF THE ORDER FRONT PANEL LOGIC INPUT REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS PRIORITY LEVEL MAXIMUM MEDIUM MINIMUM 17. MAINTENANCE MODE This menu allows the user to verify the operation of the protection functions without actually sending any external command (Tripping or signalling). The selection of the maintenance mode is possible by logic input, control command (rear or front port), or by front panel interface. The end of maintenance mode is done by logic input, by control command or on the front panel interface time out (5 minutes) and by turning off the power supply. Maintenance Mode YES When this menu is activated (set to YES), the Alarm led will start to flash and the alarm message "MAINTENANCE MODE" will be displayed. In this case, all the output contacts are blocked, and no command can be issued to these contacts, even if a protection threshold associated to one of these output contacts has been crossed. (If a protection threshold is crossed, all associated LEDs will be ON, even the TRIP LED, if the threshold is associated to the RL1). RELAYS 8765W4321 CMD 000000000 This window allows the user to verify the external wiring to the relay output contacts. To do this, the user just has to assign a 1 to any of the output contacts, and this will close the contact and the continuity of the wiring can be verified. P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Application Guide Page 38/71 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 18. SELECTIVE SCHEME LOGIC (P122 & P123 ONLY) The following figure describes the use of non-cascade protection schemes using the start contacts from downstream relays to block operation of upstream relays. In the case of Selective Overcurrent Logic (SOL), the start contacts are used to increase the time delays of upstream relays, instead of blocking them. This provides an alternative approach to achieving a non-cascade type of overcurrent scheme. It may be more familiar to some utilities than the blocked overcurrent arrangement. FIGURE 13: TYPICAL SCHEME LOGIC The SOL function temporarily increase the time delay settings of the second and third stages of phase overcurrent, derived and measured earth fault and sensitive earth fault protection elements. This logic is initiated by energising the appropriate logic input (Log Sel1 or Log Sel2) as selected in AUTOMAT.CRTL/INPUTS menu. To allow time for a start contact to initiate a change of setting, the time settings of the second and third stages should include a nominal delay. Guidelines for minimum time settings are identical to those given for blocked overcurrent schemes. The tSel1 and tSel2 timers can be independently set from 0 to 150 s. Application Guide P12x/EN AP/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 39/71 19. LOGIC EQUATIONS (P121, P122 & P123 ONLY) The logic equations can be used to construct complex Boolean logic using the following operators: AND NOT, OR NOT, AND, OR. An example logic implementation using Equation A is shown below: The time of operation (tOperation) setting sets the minimum time of truth of a condition before validating the truth of the logic operation. The reset time (tReset) sets a minimum time before the logic operation is not true when at least one condition is not true. The following logic diagram illustrates the tOperation and tReset operation with the following equation: Equation A.00 "= not" "tAux 1" + Equation A.01 "and not" "tAux 2" this equation means not tAux 1 and not tAux 2. P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Application Guide Page 40/71 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 20. NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (P122 & P123 ONLY) In traditional phase overcurrent protection schemes, overcurrent thresholds must be set above maximum load current levels. This limits the sensibility of the relay. Most protection schemes also use an earth fault element using residual current, which improves sensitivity for earth faults. However, it can happen that some faults occur and stay undetected by such schemes. Any unbalanced fault condition will produce negative sequence current. Thus, a negative phase sequence overcurrent element can detect both phase-to-phase and phase to earth faults. This section describes how negative phase sequence overcurrent protection may be applied in conjunction with standard overcurrent and earth fault protection in order to solve some problems of application. � Negative phase sequence overcurrent elements is more sensitive to resistive phase-tophase faults, whereas phase overcurrent elements may not operate. � In some applications, an earth fault relay may not be able to detect a residual current because of the configuration of the network. For example, an earth fault relay connected on the delta side of a delta-star transformer is unable to detect earth faults on the star side. However, negative sequence current will be present on both sides of the transformer in any fault condition, independently of the transformer configuration. Therefore, negative phase sequence overcurrent element may be used to provide timedelayed back-up protection for any uncleared asymmetrical faults. � Where fuses are used to protect motors on rotating machines, a blown fuse produces a large amount of negative sequence current. This is a dangerous condition for the machine because negative phase sequence current generates overheating. Then, a negative phase sequence overcurrent element may be used to back-up motor protection relays. � It may also be required to trigger an alarm to announce the presence of negative phase sequence currents in the system. Operators are then prompted to investigate the cause of the unbalance. The negative phase sequence overcurrent elements have a current pick up settings I2> and I2>>, and can be time-delayed using configurable timers tI2> and tI2>>. 20.1 I2> and I2>> Setting Guidelines I2> and I2>> thresholds can be set under the PROTECTION G1 (2)/[46] Neg Seg 0C menu. The current pick-up threshold I2> must be set to a value that is higher than the normal negative phase sequence current because of the normal unbalance conditions on the network. This can be done practically during the commissioning, using the MEASUREMENTS menu of the relay to display the negative phase sequence current value. Then, this value has to be increased by 20%. Where negative phase sequence element is used to clear particular cases of uncleared asymmetric faults, the threshold setting have to be calculated based on a fault analysis of that particular system, due to the complexities involved. However, to ensure that the protection element will operate, the current pick-up value has to be set to approximately 20% below the lowest calculated negative phase sequence fault current for a specific remote fault. Application Guide P12x/EN AP/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 41/71 It is essential to set correctly the time delay associated to this function. It should also be noted that this element is used primarily as a back-up protection to other protective devices or to provide an alarm. Therefore, this function is usually set with a long time delay. Care must be made to ensure that the time delay is set above the operating time of any other protection device (at minimum fault level) present on the system and that may react to unbalanced faults, such as: � Phase overcurrent elements � Earth fault elements � Broken conductor elements � Negative phase sequence influenced thermal protection elements tI2> and tI2>> timers associated to I2 threshold can be set under the menu PROTECTION 7G1(2)/[46] Neg Seg OC. 21. BROKEN CONDUCTOR DETECTION (P122 & P123 ONLY) Most of the faults that affect a power system occur between one phase and the earth or between two phases and the earth. These faults are shunt faults and are caused by lightning discharges and other overvoltages generating flashovers. They may also arise from birds on overhead lines or mechanical damage on underground cables, etc. Such faults lead the current to increase appreciably and therefore they can easily be detected in most applications. Open circuit faults are a different type of faults that can happen in electrical networks. These faults can be caused by broken conductors, blown fuses or misoperation of a pole of a circuit-breaker. Series faults will not lead to an increase in phase current and therefore they can not be easily detected by common overcurrent relays. However, this type of faults produce an unbalance that creates negative phase sequence current, which can be detected. The use of negative phase sequence overcurrent is then recommended to detect such faulty conditions. However, on lightly loaded lines, the value of the negative sequence current caused by a faulty condition may be very close to, or even inferior, to the full load steady state unbalance generated by CT errors, load unbalance, etc. As a consequence, a negative sequence protection element would not work for low level of loads. As a solution, MiCOM P122 and P123 have a protection element that measures the ratio between the negative and the positive phase sequence current (I2/I1). Using this ratio instead of the measure of I2 only, the relay will be able to detect a faulty condition independently on the level of load on the network, since the ratio is approximately constant with variations in load current. It is then possible to get a more sensitive setting. NOTE: the Broken conductor function is inhibited if the current value flowing in each one of the three phases is inferior to 10% of the nominal current. Setting Guidelines On single point earthed power systems, there is a low zero sequence current flow and the ratio I2/I1 that flows is close to100%. On multiple earthed power systems, (assuming that the impedances in each sequence network are equals), the ratio I2/I1 will be equal to 50%. P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Application Guide Page 42/71 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 It is possible to calculate the ratio of I2/I1 corresponding to various system impedances, according to the following equations: I1F = Eg(Z2+Z0) Z 1Z 2+Z 1Z 0+Z 2Z 0 I2F = -EgZ0 Z1Z2+Z1Z0+Z2Z0 Where: Eg = System Voltage Z0 = Zero sequence impedance Z1 = Positive sequence impedance Z2 = Negative sequence impedance Therefore: I2F = Z0 I1F Z0+Z2 As a consequence, for an open circuit in a particular part of the system, I2/I1 can be determined from the ratio between the zero sequence and the negative sequence impedance. It must be noted however, that this ratio may vary depending on the location of the fault. It is therefore desirable to apply a setting that is as sensitive as possible. Practically, the levels of standing negative phase sequence current present on the system guide the choice of this minimum setting. A system study, or the use of measurement data of the relay during commissioning stage are two ways to determine this minimum setting. If the latter method is chosen, it is important to take measurements during maximum load conditions, to be sure that all single phase loads are taken into account. A time delay (tBC) is necessary to ensure co-ordination with other protective devices. 21.1 Example of Setting The following information comes from a the relay commissioning report; Ifull load = 500A I2 = 50A Then: I2/I1 = 50/500 = 0.1 To tolerate some margin and load variations, it is typical to set this value at 200% above this value: Therefore, RATIO I2/I1 = 20% Set tBC at 60s to allow short circuits to be cleared by time delayed protections. Application Guide P12x/EN AP/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 43/71 22. DESCRIPTION AND SETTING GUIDE OF THE AUTORECLOSE FUNCTION (P123 ONLY) 22.1 Introduction An analysis of faults on overhead line network has shown that: - 80-90% are transient in nature, - the remaining 10-20% of faults are either non-permanent (arcing fault) or permanent. A transient fault is a self clearing `non-damage' fault. This type of fault can be isolated and cleared by the immediate tripping of one or more circuit breakers, and does not reappear when the line is re-energised. The most common cause of transient faults are lightning, insulator flashover, clashing conductors and debris blown by the wind. The immediate trip will not clear a non-permanent or permanent fault, and the use of the recloser may be necessary to clear it. A small tree branch falling on the line could cause a non-permanent fault. Permanent faults could caused by broken conductors, transformer faults, cable faults or machine faults which must be located and repaired before the supply can be restored. Most of the time, if the faulty line is immediately tripped, and the fault arc has sufficient time to de-ionise, reclose of the circuit breakers will result in the line being successfully re-energised. Autoreclose schemes are used to automatically reclose a switching device once a time delay has elapsed and starting after the CB has opened. On HV/MV distribution networks, the autoreclose function is used mainly for radial feeders where system stability problems do not generally arise. Using the autoreclose minimises time of interruption and reduces operating costs. Automatic autorecloser allows a substation to operate unattended:the number of visits to manually reclose a circuit breaker is substantially reduced. This feature constitutes therefore an important advantage for substations supervised remotely. On circuits using time graded protection, the automatic autorecloser allows the use of instantaneous protection to give a high speed first trip. With fast tripping, the duration of the power arc resulting from an overhead line fault is reduced to a minimum, thus lessening the chance of damage and to develop the transient fault into a permanent fault. Using short time delay protection prevents blowing of fuses and reduces circuit breaker maintenance by eliminating pre-arc heating when clearing transient faults. The next figure shows an example of 4 autoreclose cycles (maximum numbers of allowed cycles) to the final trip (td1, td2, td3, td4 = dead time 1, 2, 3 and 4 timers, tr = Reclaim time, O = CB open and C = CB closed). FIGURE 14: TYPICAL AUTORECLOSE CYCLES P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Application Guide Page 44/71 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 22.2 22.2.1 22.2.2 When short time delay protection is used with autoreclose, the scheme is normally arranged to block the instantaneous protection after the first trip. Therefore, if the fault persists after reclosing, time graded protection will give discriminative tripping with fuses or other protection devices, resulting in the isolation of the faulted section. However, for certain applications, where the majority of the faults are likely to be transient, it is not uncommon to allow more than one instantaneous trip before the instantaneous protection is blocked. Some schemes allow a number of re-closings and time graded trips after the first instantaneous trip, which may result in the burning out and clearance of non-permanent faults. Such an approach may also be used to allow fuses to operate in teed feeders where the fault current is low. Any decision to apply the autoreclose function would be influenced by all data known on the frequency of transient faults (for instance feeders which consist partly of overhead lines and partly of underground cables). When a significant proportion of the faults are permanent, the advantages of the autoreclose are small, particularly since re-closing on to a faulty cable is likely to aggravate the damage. Description of the function Autorecloser activation The autoreclose function is activated using "AUTOMAT. CTRL/ PROTECTION G1" menu. The same settings apply for the Menu PROTECTION G2. The autoreclose function of the MiCOM P123 is available only if the following conditions are verified: � The auxiliary contact of the CB status 52a must be connected to the relay. Refer to the "AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs" menu � The trip output relay RL1 must not be latched to the earth and/or phase protection function. Refer to the "AUTOMAT. CTRL/Latch functions" menu NOTE: If the auxiliary supply is lost during an autoreclose cycle, the autoreclose function is totally disabled. In addition to Autoreclose settings, the user will be able to fully link the autoreclose function to the protection function using the menus "PROTECTION G1/Phase OC" and "PROTECTION/E/Gnd". Logic Inputs The autoreclose function has four inputs that can be assigned to the autoreclose logic. These inputs can be opto-isolated inputs configured for that under the "AUTOMAT. CTRL" menu. External contacts can then be wired to be used as an input and influence the autorecloser scheme. These 4 inputs are : - one external CB fail, - two external starting orders, - one external blocking order. The following table gives the "AUTOMAT.CTRL/Inputs" menu assigned to the autoreclose logic input. The second column presents the menu disabling the function if not assigned in the "PROTECTION G1/Autoreclose" menu (Setting = No). "Inputs" menu Enabled with: External CB Fail CB FLT EXT CB FLT External starting orders Aux 1 Aux 2 CYCLES tAux1 * CYCLES tAux2 * External blocking order Block-79 Ext Block ? * These two external orders can be independently disabled. Application Guide P12x/EN AP/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 45/71 22.2.2.1 External CB fail Most of circuit breakers provide one trip-close-trip cycle. A delay time is necessary to return to the nominal state of the CB (for example, the spring that allows the circuit breaker to close should be fully charged). The state of the CB can be checked using an input assigned to the "CB FLT" function. If on completion of the "Ext CB Fail time" (tCFE), the "CB FLT" indicates a failed state of the CB, a lockout occur and the CB remains open. 22.2.2.2 External starting orders Two independent and programmable inputs (Aux 1 and Aux 2) can be used to initiate the autorecloser function from an external device (such as an existing overcurrent relay). These logic inputs may be used independently and also in parallel with the MiCOM P123 Overcurrent settings. 22.2.2.3 Internal and external blocking orders The autoreclose can be blocked by an internal or an external control. It can be used when a protection is needed without requiring the use of the autorecloser function. The external block is the "Block 79" input. The internal block can be a final trip, a number of A/R rolling demand valid or an A/R conflict. A typical example is on a transformer feeder, where the autoreclose may be initiated from the feeder protection but need to be blocked from the transformer protection side. 22.2.3 Autoreclose Logic Outputs The following output signals can be assigned to a LED (see "CONFIGURATION / Led" menu) or to the output relays (see "AUTOMAT.CTRL/Output Relays" menu) to provide information about the status of the autoreclose cycle. - Autoreclose in progress - Final Trip. The following table gives the "CONFIGURATION/Led" and the "AUTOMAT.CTRL/Output Relays" menus used to assign the autoreclose output signal. Autoreclose in progress Final Trip LED menu Recloser Run Recloser Blocked Output relays menu 79 run 79 Locked 22.2.3.1 Autoreclose in progress The "Autoreclose in progress" signal is present during the complete reclose cycles from protection initiation to the end of the reclaim time or lockout. 22.2.3.2 Final trip The "Final trip" signal indicates that a complete autoreclose cycle has been completed and that the fault has been cleared. The "Final trip" signal can be reset after a manual closing of the CB after the settable "inhibit time (tI)". 22.2.4 Autoreclose logic description The autoreclose function provides the ability to automatically control the autorecloser (two, three or four shot cycle, settable using "Phase Cycles" and "E/Gnd Cycles" menu). Dead times for all the shots (reclose attempts) can be independently adjusted. The number of shots is directly related to the type of faults likely to occur on the system and the voltage level of the system (for instance medium voltage networks). P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Application Guide Page 46/71 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 22.2.5 22.2.6 22.2.7 22.2.8 22.3 22.3.1 The Dead Time (tD1, tD2, tD3 and tD4) and the minimum drop-off time start when the CB has tripped (when the 52a input has disappeared). Dead Time is adjusted to start autoreclose when circuit breaker is closed. At the end of the relevant dead time, "CB FLT" input is sent (see � 22.2.2.1). The reclaim time (tR) starts when the CB has closed. If the circuit breaker does not trip again, the autoreclose function resets at the end of the reclaim time. If the protection operates during the reclaim time, the relay either advances to the next shot that is programmed in the autoreclose cycle, or it locks out (see � 22.2.6). The total number of reclosures is displayed under the "MEASUREMENTS/Reclose Stats" menu. Autoreclose Inhibit Following Manual Close The "Inhib Time tI" timer can be used to block the autoreclose being initiated after the CB is manually closed onto a fault. The Autoreclose is blocked during the "Inhib Time tI" following manual CB Closure. Recloser lockout If the protection element operates during the reclaim time, following the final reclose attempt, the relay will lockout and the autoreclose function is disabled until the lockout condition resets. The lockout condition can reset by a manual closing after the "Inhib Time tI". The Autoreclose can also be locked out using a "CB FLT" input. This information can be issued from the "not charged" or "Low gas pressure" indications of CB springs. Note that Autoreclose can also be locked by: � The fact that the CB doesn't open after tBf delay (CB Fail) � An operating time that is above programmed thresholds. Setting group change lockout The change of setting groups on MiCOM P122 and P123 is only possible if there are no protection or automation functions running (except the thermal overload function). During the autorecloser cycle, if the relay receives an order to change setting groups, this order is kept in memory, and will only be executed after the timer has elapsed. Rolling demand This specific counter avoids a frequent operation of a CB in case of frequent intermittent fault. The numbers of shoot can be adjusted from 1 to 100 in the cell "Max cycles nb", settable in a time period from 10min to 24 hours. The rolling demand is used when a definite number of successfully recloses are made on a definite time. Setting Guidelines Number Of Shots There is no perfect rule to define the number of shots for a particular application. For medium voltage systems it is common to use two or three autoreclose shots, and, for specific applications, four shots.Using four shots, final dead time can be set for a time long enough to allow thunderstorms to stop before definitive final reclose. This scheme prevents unnecessary lockout caused by consecutive transient faults. Typically, the first trip, and sometimes the second, are caused by the instantaneous protection. Since 80% of faults are transient, the following trips will be time delayed, and all will have increasing dead times to clear non-permanent faults. Application Guide P12x/EN AP/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 47/71 22.3.2 22.3.3 In order to determine the number of shots required; the first factor is the ability for the circuit breaker to perform several trip-close operations in a short time and, the effect of these operations on the maintenance period. If a moderate percentage of non-permanent faults is present in a system, two or more shots are justified. If fused `tees' are used and the fault level is low, the timer of the fuses may not discriminate with the main IDMT relay: several shots are usefull. This would not warm up the fuse to a such extent that it would eventually blow before the main protection operated. Dead Timer Setting Load, circuit breaker, fault de-ionising time and protection reset are taken into consideration when setting the dead timer. Minimum drop-off time setting If an electromagnetic relay is used (working on the principle of disc in the electromagnetic field due to eddy current generated in the disc), an additional dead time (Min Drop-off Time), depending of the tripping cause, is settable, This function includes the choice to select an IDMT curve on the relay reset time, setting the drop-off time on phase and neutral autoreclose cycles. This drop-off time blocks the next cycle if this one not elapsed. A next cycle can be start if the dead time is elapsed and treset elapsed to. note: this function is currently used with IDMT curve. If dead time > Drop-off time, the relay will close the CB at the end of dead time. If dead time < Drop-off time, the relay will close the CB at the end of dropp-off time. P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Application Guide Page 48/71 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 22.3.3.1 Load It is very difficult to optimize the dead time due to the great diversity of load on a system. However, it is possible to study each type of load separately and thereby be able to define a typical dead time. The most common types of loads are synchronous or induction motors and lighting circuits. Synchronous motors tolerate only extremely short interruptions of supply without loss of synchronism. In practice, the dead time should be sufficient to allow the motor no-volt device to operate. Typically, a minimum dead time of 0.2-0.3 seconds is recommended. Induction motors, on the other hand, can withstand supply interruptions, up to a maximum of 0.5 seconds and re-accelerate successfully. In general dead times of 3-10 seconds are normally satisfactory, but there may be special cases for which additional time is required to allow the reset of manual controls and safety devices. Loss of supply of lighting circuits, such as street lighting, can lead to important safety problems (car circulation). Regarding domestic customers, the main consideration is linked to the inconvenience caused. The number of minutes lost per year to customers will be reduced on feeders using the autorecloser and will also be affected by the dead time settings used. 22.3.3.2 Circuit Breaker For high speed autoreclose, the minimum dead time of the power system depends on the minimum time delay imposed by the circuit breaker during a trip and reclose operation. Since a circuit breaker is a mechanical device, it has an inherent contact separation time. This operating time for a modern circuit breaker is usually within the 50-100ms range, but could be longer with older designs. Note: The closing pulse time delay (adjusted using `AUTOMAT. CTRL / CB Supervision / tClose Pulse' setting) should be higher than the time delay necessary to close the CB (mechanical closing and CB Closing loop). In the same way, the opening pulse time delay (`AUTOMAT. CTRL / CB Supervision / tOpen Pulse' setting) should be higher than the time delay necessary to open the CB. Otherwise, the autorecloser can be locked. After a trip, the mechanism need some time to reset before applying a close pulse. This reset time varies depending on the circuit breaker, but lasts typically 0.1 seconds. Once the circuit breaker has reset, the breaker can start to close. The period of time between the energisation of the closing mechanism and the making of the contacts is called closing time. Because of the time constant of a solenoid closing mechanism and the inertia of the plunger, a solenoid closing mechanism may take 0.3s. A spring operated breaker, on the other hand, can close in less than 0.2 seconds. Where high speed reclosing is required, for the majority of medium voltage applications, the circuit breaker mechanism dictates itself the minimum dead time. However, the fault deionising time may also have to be considered. High speed autoreclose may be required to maintain stability on a network that has two or more power sources. For high speed autoreclose, the system disturbance time should be minimised using fast protection, <50 ms, such as distance or feeder differential protection and fast circuit breakers < 100 ms. Fast fault clearance can reduce the time for the fault arc to deionise. To ensure stability between two sources, a dead time of <300 ms is typically required. Considering only the CB, this minimum time corresponds to the reset time of the the mechanism plus the CB closing time. Thus, a solenoid mechanism is not adapted for high speed autoreclose due to the fact that the closing time is generally too long. 22.3.3.3 Fault De-ionising Time For high speed autoreclose, the time to de-ionise faults may be the factor the most important when considering the dead time. This is the time required for the ionised air to disperse around Application Guide P12x/EN AP/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 49/71 the fault position so that the insulation level of the air is restored. This time may be around the following value: De-ionising time = (10.5 + ((system voltage in kV)/34.5)) / frequency For 66 kV = 0.25 s (50Hz) For 132 kV = 0.29 s (50 Hz) 22.3.3.4 Protection Reset It is essential that the protection fully resets during the dead time, so that correct time discrimination is maintained after reclose on to a fault. For high speed autoreclose, instantaneous reset of protection is required. Typical 11/33kV dead time settings in the UK are as follow: 1st dead time = 5 - 10 seconds 2nd dead time = 30 seconds 3rd dead time = 60 - 100 seconds 4th dead time (uncommon in the UK, however used in South Africa) = 60 - 100 seconds 22.3.4 Reclaim Timer Setting The following factors influence the choice of the reclaim timer: � Supply continuity - Large reclaim times can result in unnecessary lockout for transient faults. � Fault incidence/Past experience - Small reclaim times may be required where there is a high incidence of lightning strikes to prevent unnecessary lockout for transient faults. � Charging time of the spring or resetting of electromagnetical induction disk relay - For high speed autoreclose, the reclaim time may be set longer than the spring charging time to ensure that there is sufficient energy in the circuit breaker to perform a trip-closetrip cycle. For delayed autoreclose, this setting is of no need as the dead time can be extended by an extra CB healthy check window time if there is insufficient energy in the CB. If there is insufficient energy after the check window time the relay will lockout. � Switchgear Maintenance - Excessive operation resulting from short reclaim times can mean shorter maintenance periods. A minimum reclaim time of 5s may be needed to give sufficient time to the CB to recover after a trip and close before it can perform another trip-close-trip cycle. The reclaim time must be long enough to allow any time delayed protection leading to autoreclose to operate. Failure to do so can cause the autoreclose scheme to reset too soon and the reactivation of the instantaneous protection. If that were the case, a permanent fault would look like some transient faults, caused by continuous autorecloses. Applying a protection against excessive fault frequency lockout is an additional precaution that can solve this problem. It is possible to obtain short reclaim times to obtain less lockouts of the CB by blocking the reclaim time from the protection start signals. If short reclaim times are to be used, then the switchgear rating may dictate the minimum reclaim time. Sensitive earth fault protection is used to detect high resistance earth faults. The time delay of such protections is usually a long time delay, typically about 10-15s. If autoreclose is generated by the SEF protection, this timer must be taken into account when deciding the value of the reclaim time, if the reclaim time is not blocked by an SEF protection start signal. Sensitive earth faults, caused by a broken overhead conductor in contact with dry ground or a wood fence are rarely transient faults and may be dangerous to people. It is therefore common practice to block the autoreclose using the sensitive earth fault protection and lockout the circuit breaker. P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Application Guide Page 50/71 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Where motor-wound spring closed circuit breakers are used, the reclaim time must be at least as long as the spring winding time for high speed autoreclose to ensure that the breaker can perform a trip-close-trip cycle. A typical 11/33kV reclaim time is 3-10 seconds, this prevents unnecessary lockout during thunderstorms. However, times up to 60-180 seconds maybe used. 22.3.5 Autoreclose setting guideline 22.3.5.1 General setting SETTING CONDITION FOR THE ARC FUNCTIONALITY "PROTECTION Gx / [79] AUTORECLOSE" "Autoreclose" Yes "Phase Cycles" or/and "E/GND Cycles" At least 1 "Cycles xxxx" "AUTOMA. CTRL / INPUTS" One of the digital inputs. The relevant input must be configured as Active High 1234 0111 52a If the cycle = 0 none autoreclose available Max number cycle: max. 4 cycles This input must be in accordance with the CB position: HIGH with CB close, LOW with CB opened. "AUTOMA. CTRL / OUTPUTS RELAYS" "CB Close & SOTF" One of the relays from 2 to 8 CB Close This relay must be only assigned to this function. Application Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Page 51/71 22.3.5.2 Trip and reclose (normal operation) Autoreclose starts only if tripping order (RL1) has been performed (Trip & Start). Red LED of trip will always come whenever autoreclose starts. "PROTECTION Gx / [79] AUTORECLOSE" "Autoreclose" Yes "Phase Cycles" or/and "E/GND Cycles" At least 1 Cycles tI>, tI>>, tI>>>, tIe>, tIe>>, tIe>>>, tPe/IeCos>, tPe/IeCos>> 1234 0111 If the cycle = 0 none autoreclose available Max number cycle: max. 4 cycles "AUTOMA. CTRL / TRIP COMMANDS" Trip Commands At least a trip Overcurrent and/or earth fault command. overcurrent trip thresholds (One of them is enough) P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Page 52/71 Application Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 22.3.5.3 Autoreclose only (external trip) Since v11.B version, it is now possible to inhibit trip order (tick Trip & Inhib trip) in the settings file to work like a standalone autorecloser (see the next figure). In the following configuration : - tAux is removed from Trip commands, - No trip is performed from autoreclose function, - Trip LED will remain OFF. "PROTECTION Gx / [79] AUTORECLOSE" "Autoreclose" "Phase Cycles" or/and "E/GND Cycles" Yes At least 1 "Cycles tAux1" "Cycles tAux2" If the cycle = 0 none autoreclose available For each cycle used, enable "trip and start cycle" AND "Inhib trip on cycle" To achieve "autoreclose only" setting, external start should be wired on a digital input. This digital input should be assigned to tAux1 and/or tAux2. "AUTOMA. CTRL / INPUTS" Automat control inputs Aux Select on Automat control input Aux Application Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Page 53/71 Within Autorecloser menu, both "strip and start" and "inhib trip" should be selected for tAux1 and/or tAux2 To avoid any trip when tAux is ON, ensure that tAux is not selected in trip command menu. "AUTOMA. CTRL / TRIP COMMANDS" Trip Commands Trip command Untick the corresponding tAux without tAux P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Page 54/71 Application Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 23. CIRCUIT BREAKER STATE MONITORING An operator at a remote location requires a reliable indication of the state of the switchgear. Without an indication that each circuit breaker is either open or closed, the operator has insufficient information to decide on switching operations. The MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 relays incorporate a circuit breaker state monitoring, giving an indication of the position of the circuit breaker. This indication is available either on the relay front panel (P122 - P123 only) or via the communication network. The positions of the CB can be selected under the "AUTOMAT.CTRL/Inputs" and "CONFIGURATION/Led menu". Further, the MiCOM P122 and P123 relays are able to inform the operator that the CB has not opened following a remote trip command (refer section "CB FAIL protection"). Application Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Page 55/71 24. 24.1 24.2 24.2.1 CIRCUIT BREAKER CONDITION MONITORING (P122 & P123 ONLY) Periodic maintenance of circuit breakers is generally based on a fixed time interval, or a fixed number of fault current interruptions. The relays record the following controls and statistics related to each circuit breaker trip operation: - delay timer setting, - monitoring time for CB open and close operations, - CB open count, - summation of the current interrupted by the CB, - exponent for the summation, - tripping and closing pulse time Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring Features For each circuit breaker trip operation the relay records statistics as shown in the following table taken from the relay menu. The "RECORDS/CB Monitoring" menu cells shown are counter values only. The circuit breaker condition monitoring counter increases when it receives: - the digital input 52A switches (RL1 trip), - an HMI (or MiCOM S1 Studio) opening order - a rear com opening order, - a digital input opening order. In cases where the breaker is tripped by an external protection device it is also possible to update the CB condition monitoring. This is achieved by allocating one of the logic inputs or via the communication to accept a trigger from an external device. Setting guidelines Setting the In Thresholds Where overhead lines are prone to frequent faults and are protected by oil circuit breakers (OCB's), oil changes account for a large proportion of the life cycle cost of the switchgear. Generally, oil changes are performed at a fixed interval of circuit breaker fault operations. However, this may result in premature maintenance where fault currents tend to be low, and hence oil degradation is slower than expected. The In counter monitors the cumulative severity of the duty placed on the interrupter allowing a more accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition to be made. For OCB's, the dielectric withstand of the oil generally decreases as a function of I2t. This is where `I' is the fault current broken, and `t' is the arcing time within the interrupter tank (not the interrupting time). As the arcing time cannot be determined accurately, the relay would normally be set to monitor the sum of the broken current squared, by setting n = 2. For other types of circuit breaker, especially those operating on higher voltage systems, practical evidence suggests that the value of n = 2 may be inappropriate. In such applications n' may be set to 1. An alarm in this instance may be indicative of the need for gas/vacuum interrupter HV pressure testing, for example. It is imperative that any maintenance programme must be fully compliant with the switchgear manufacturer's instructions. P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Application Guide Page 56/71 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 24.2.2 24.2.3 Setting the Number of Operations Thresholds Every operation of a circuit breaker results in some degree of wear for its components. Thus, routine maintenance, such as oiling of mechanisms, may be based upon the number of operations. Suitable setting of the maintenance threshold will allow an alarm to be raised, indicating when preventative maintenance is due. Should maintenance not be carried out, the relay can be set to lockout the autoreclose function on reaching a operations threshold. This prevents further reclosure when the circuit breaker has not been maintained to the standard demanded by the switchgear manufacturer's maintenance instructions. Certain circuit breakers, such as oil circuit breakers (OCB's) can only perform a certain number of fault interruptions before requiring maintenance attention. This is because each fault interruption causes carbonising of the oil, degrading its dielectric properties. Setting the Operating Time Thresholds Slow CB operation is also indicative of the need for mechanism maintenance. Therefore, alarm is provided and is settable in the range of 100 ms to 5 s. This time is set in relation to the specified interrupting time of the circuit breaker. Application Guide P12x/EN AP/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 57/71 25. UNDERCURRENT PROTECTION FUNCTION (P122 & P123 ONLY) MiCOM P122 & P123 relays include 2 undercurrent elements. One is dedicated for the CB fail detection (see CB failure protection section). The other one can be used to provide additional protective functions to prevent damage/further damage to the power system. This function allows typical applications such as loss of load. FIGURE 15: UNDERCURRENT PROTECTION LOGIC The undercurrent protection function is available only if the auxiliary contact of the CB status is connected to the relay. A logic input should be energised via the 52a contact of the CB. In this way a logic input (1 to 5 for P123, 1 to 3 for P122) is allocated to the 52a function. See the AUTOMAT. CTRL/ Inputs x menu. An alarm is given when: - at least one of the 3 phase current is detected under the threshold I< - and the CB is closed. When the alarm condition is present and lasts longer than the set time tI<, one or more output relay can be energised. See the AUTOMAT. CTRL/trip commands/Trip tI< menu to assign tI< to the trip output relay RL1. See the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Output Relays/ tI< menu to assign tI< to the auxiliary output relay RL2 to RL8 (to RL6 for P122). I< threshold can be set under the PROTECTION G1(2)/Undercurrent/ I< menu from 2% to 100% of the rated current In. tI< time can be set under the PROTECTION G1(2)/Undercurrent/ tI< menu from 0 to 150s. P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Application Guide Page 58/71 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 26. CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION: CBF (P122 & P123 ONLY) When a fault is detected, one or more main protection elements will issue a trip order to the associated circuit breaker(s). To isolate the fault, and prevent (heavier) damage on the power system it is essential that the circuit breaker operates correctly. On power systems, a fault that is not clear quickly enough threatens the stability of the system. It is therefore common practice to install circuit breaker failure protection, which monitors that the circuit breaker has opened within a reasonable period of time. If the fault current has not been eliminated after the set time delay, the breaker failure protection (CBF) will send a signal. The CBF protection can be used to back-trip upstream circuit breakers to ensure that the fault is correctly isolated. The CBF protection can also eliminate all blocking orders associated to logic selectivity. FIGURE 16: CB FAIL PRINCIPLE 26.1 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection mechanism Hereafter is described how the CB failure protection available in MiCOM P122 & P123 relays works. The t BF timer is initiated when a trip order is given to the output relay RL1. Note that the trip order can be issued either by a protection element, or by a logic input. Then the relay monitors the current signal of each phase and compares each phase current signal with the bandzone made by the undercurrent I< threshold. This threshold value can be set under the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB FAIL menu. Once the t BF timer has been initiated, the relay detects the first time that the current goes out of the I< bandzone. When the relay detects this transition, it initiates an other timer. This timer is of fixed duration and equivalent to 20 samples. The relay sampling rate being 32 samples by cycle, this timer is of 12,5 ms duration for system at 50 Hz and 10,4 ms for a system at 60 Hz. During this period of time, the relay is checking if the current goes out the I< bandzone again. In case that the current is not eliminated, the current signal should again go out the I< bandzone, and this after half a cycle, i-e 16 samples (10ms at 50Hz). Each time the relay detects that the current goes out the I< bandzone, the relay re-initiates again the timer ( of a 20 samples). In this 20 samples time window, the relay checks that the current signal going out the I< bandzone is in opposite way than the first one. � If there is no current signal going out in opposite way compared to the first one, the relay considers that there is an opened CB pole condition. The � CB pole open � internal signal is initiated. Application Guide P12x/EN AP/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 59/71 � If there is a current signal going out in opposite way compared to the first one, the relay considers that the pole of the CB is not yet open. The � CB pole closed � internal signal is maintained. Once the t BF time delay has elapsed, the relay checks the internal state of each pole of the circuit breaker. If one or several internal poles are not opened, the relay then declares that the CB has failed. The "CB FAIL" message is displayed. Note that it is possible to initiate the CB fail detection function by a digital input without having any trip order being given by the relay. In this case, the tBF timer starts its countdown when receiving this digital input signal. If the CB is not opened (by an another protection relay) once the tBF has elapsed, the relay declares that the CB has failed. The user can associate the digital input to the "CB Fail detection" under the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs menu. Figure 17 hereafter shows the start of the CB Fail detection after a trip order was sent: FIGURE 17: CB FAIL DETECTION PRINCIPLE Figure 18 hereafter shows the normal opening of the CB before tBF has elapsed. In this case, no CB fail alarm is given. FIGURE 18: CB OPEN BEFORE tBF EXPIRED P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Application Guide Page 60/71 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Figure 19 hereafter shows a CB failure condition. After the t BF timer elapses, the relay doesn't detect the opening of the CB pole. Therefore, a CB FAIL signal is given. FIGURE 19: CB NOT YET OPEN BEFORE tBF EXPIRED Figure 20 hereafter shows an other case of normal CB operation. Once the fault is cleared, the phase current signal takes time to decrease due to the de-magnetisation of the phase CT. It is a typical case for TPY class CTs which are built with air gap in their magnetic core. Before the drop off of the t BF timer, the relay has detected an opening of the CB pole, thus no CB failure signal is given as it is required. A basic Breaker Failure element based on an simple undercurrent element would detect a false CB failure condition as the current signal value is outside the I< bandzone at the t BF timer drop off. NOTE: Both � CB pole closed � and � CB pole opened � internal signals mentioned in the above diagrams are derived from the Circuit Breaker Failure function algorithm. They are not affected by the status of the relay opto-inputs wired to the 52a and 52b CB auxiliary contacts. FIGURE 20: DE-ENERGIZATION OF THE CT PHASE Application Guide P12x/EN AP/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 61/71 The selection in the relay menu is grouped as follows: MENU TEXT CB Fail ? tBF I< SETTING RANGE MIN MAX No Yes 0.03 s 10 s 0.02 In In STEP SIZE 10 ms 0.01 In 26.2 Typical settings 26.2.1 Breaker Fail Timer Settings A typical timer setting used with a 2 � cycle circuit breaker is around 150 ms. 26.2.2 Breaker Fail Undercurrent Settings The phase undercurrent settings (I<) must be set to a value that is under the load current, to ensure that I< operation indicates that the circuit breaker pole is open. A typical setting for overhead line or cable circuits is 20% In, with 5% In common for generator circuit breaker CBF. NOTE: The reset time of P122 and P123 is around 15 ms. P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Application Guide Page 62/71 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 27. TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION (P122 & P123 ONLY) The trip circuit extends beyond the relay enclosure and passes through more components, such as fuse, wires, relay contacts, auxiliary switch contact and so on. These complications, coupled with the importance of the circuit, have directed attention to its supervision. The simplest arrangement for trip circuit supervision contains a healthy trip lamp in series with a resistance placed in parallel with a trip output relay contacts of the protection device. However, this solution has limitations as no alarm can be generated. Following paragraphs describe typical application examples. 27.1 Trip Circuit Supervision mechanism The Trip Circuit Supervision function included in the MiCOM P122 and P123 relays is described below: WARNING 1: SINCE HARDWARE 5 (NAMED ALSO PHASE II), THE VALUES USED IN THE CALCULATION OF THE EXTERNAL RESISTOR NEEDED FOR THE TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION HAVE CHANGED. WARNING 2: THE POLARISATION CURRENT OF THE LOGIC INPUT MUST BE 3.5mA DURING 2ms (MINIMUM). THE HOLDING CURRENT AFTER THESE 2ms SHOULD BE 2.3mA (SEE P12x/EN TD CHAPTER FOR SPECIFIC POLARISATION RANGES ACCORDING TO NOMINAL RANGE). A logic input is programmed to the AUTOMAT. CTRL/CB Supervision/TC Supervision function. The logic input is associated to the label Trip Circ within the AUTOMAT. CTRL/Inputs menu. Then, this logic input is wired in the trip circuit according to one of the typical application diagrams shown in the following example. When the function TC Supervision is set to "Yes" under the CB Supervision sub-menu, the relay checks continuously on trip circuit continuity whatever the CB status is CB opened or CB closed. The function TC Supervision is enabled when the trip logic output (RL1) is not energised. The function TC Supervision is not enabled when the trip logic output (RL1) is energised. Note: If RL1 is energised, the "Trip Circuit Super" alarm message is displayed in order to inform that the TC Supervision is not enabled. A 52 Fail (trip circuit failure) signal is generated if the logic input detects no voltage signal during a time longer than the settable timer tSUP. See Chapter P12x/EN FT (User Guide) and Chapter P12x/EN TD (Technical Data) for the settings. As this function is disabled when the trip logic output (RL1) is energised, this function is suitable for use with the enabled relay latching logic. The tSUP timer can be set according to the following table: MENU TEXT TC Supervision ? tSUP SETTING RANGE MIN MAX Yes No 100ms 10s STEP SIZE 50ms Application Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Page 63/71 FIGURE 21: TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION PRINCIPLE DIAGRAM Three examples of application are given below. Example 1 In this example only the 52a auxiliary contact is available, the MiCOM relay monitors the trip coil whatever the CB status is (CB open or CB closed ). However, this configuration is not recommended because the 52a contact and associated circuit is not monitored. FIGURE 22: TRIP COIL MONITORING Example 2 In this example both 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts are available; the MiCOM P122 and P123 relays monitor the complete trip circuit when the CB is closed and a part of the trip circuit when the CB is open. In this case it is necessary to insert a resistor R1 in series with 52b, if either the output (RL1) trip is latched or it stays involuntarily closed, or a long time trip pulse is programmed (See P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Application Guide Page 64/71 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 section 27.2 for R1 calculation). Otherwise, a short circuit of DC trip supply would occur during tripping sequence. In this example, the protection is limited: the coil is only monitored when CB is closed. FIGURE 23: TRIP COIL AND AUXILIARY CONTACTS MONITORING Example 3 In this example both 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts are available, the MiCOM P122 and P123 relays monitor the complete trip circuit whatever the CB status (CB open or CB closed). In this case it is necessary to insert a R1, if either the output (RL1) trip is latched, or it stays involuntarily closed, or a long time trip pulse is programmed (See section 27.2 for R1 calculation). Otherwise, a short circuit of DC trip supply would occur during tripping sequence. Application Guide MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Page 65/71 FIGURE 24: TRIP COIL AND AUXILIARY CONTACTS MONITORING WHATEVER THE POSITION OF THE CB 27.2 External resistor R1 calculation The calculation of the R1 resistor value will take into account that a minimum current is flowing through the logic input. This minimum current value is a function of the relay auxiliary voltage range (Ua). Remarks: � The presence of auxiliary relays, such an anti-pumping system for instance, in the trip circuit must be taken into account for the R1 resistance values specification. � It is assumed the maximum variations of the auxiliary voltage value are �20%. Ordering Code T Relay auxiliary power supply Nominal voltage range Vx 48 � 250 Vdc 48 � 240 Vac Special EA (**) Operating voltage range Nominal Voltage range 38.4 � 300 Vdc 24 � 250 Vdc 38.4 � 264 Vac 24 � 240 Vac Logic Inputs Minimal Maximum Holding polarisation polarisation current voltage current after 2 ms 19,2 Vdc 19,2 Vac 35 mA 2.3 mA Maximum continuous withstand 300 Vdc 264 Vac H 48 � 250 Vdc 38.4 � 300 Vdc 48 � 240 Vac 38.4 � 264 Vac 129 Vdc 105 Vdc 3.0 mA @ 129 Vdc 145 Vdc V 48 � 250 Vdc 38.4 � 300 Vdc 48 � 240 Vac 38.4 � 264 Vac 110 Vdc 77 Vdc 7.3 mA @ 110 Vdc 132 Vdc W 48 � 250 Vdc 38.4 � 300 Vdc 48 � 240 Vac 38.4 � 264 Vac 220 Vdc 154 Vdc 3.4 mA @ 220 Vdc 262 Vdc P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Application Guide Page 66/71 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 (**) Logic input recognition time for EA approval. Dedicated filtering on 24 samples (15 ms at 50 Hz) 1 - Case of example No 2: The R1 resistor maximum value (in Ohm) is defined by the following formula: R1 0,8 Ua - Umin Ohm Imin Where: Ua = Umin = Imin = auxiliary voltage value (in this case a DC voltage; range is given on label under the top hinged cover). internal minimum voltage value needed for the opto logic input to operate. minimum current value needed for the opto logic input to operate. The R1 resistor withstand value (in Watt) is defined below: 2 - Case of example No 3: PR1 2 (1,2 Ua R1 )2 W The R1 resistor maximum value (in Ohm) is defined by the following formula: Where: R1 0,8 Ua - Umin Imin - RCoil Ohm Ua = Umin = Imin = Rcoil = auxiliary voltage value (in this case a DC voltage; range is given on label the top hinged cover). internal minimum voltage value needed for the opto logic input to operate. minimum current value needed for the opto logic input to operate. Trip coil resistance value. The R1 resistor withstand value (in Watt) is defined below: under PR1 2 (1,2 Ua ) (R1 + RCoil 2 ) W If the trip contact is latched or temporarily by-passed, the continuous current through the tripping coil is: ICONTINUOUS = (1.2 � Ua) R1 + RCOIL If the value is above admissible continuous current through the tripping coil, trip contact latching must not be made and by-passing trip contact should never be made. 28. REAL TIME CLOCK SYNCHRONISATION VIA OPTO-INPUTS In modern protective schemes it is often desirable to synchronize the relay's real time clock so that events from different relays can be placed in chronological order. This can be done using the communication interface connected to the substation control system or via an optoinput. Any of the available opto-inputs on the P12x relay can be selected for synchronization. Pulsing this input will result in the real time clock snapping to the nearest minute. The recommended pulse duration is 20ms to be repeated no more than once per minute. An example of the time synchronization function is shown. Time of "Sync. Pulse" Corrected Time Application Guide P12x/EN AP/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 67/71 19:47:00.000 to 19:47:29.999 19:47:30.000 to 19:47:59.999 19:47:00.000 19:48:00.000 NOTE: The above assumes a time format of hh:mm:ss P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Application Guide Page 68/71 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 29. EVENT RECORDS The relay records and time tags up to 250 events and stores them in a non-volatile (flash) memory. This allows the system operator to analyse the sequence of events that occurred within the relay after a particular power system condition, or switching sequence, etc. When the available space is exhausted, the new fault automatically overwrites the oldest fault. The real time clock within the relay times tag each event, with a resolution of 1ms. The user can view event records either via the front panel interface, via the EIA (RS) 232 port, or remotely, via the rear EIA (RS) 485 port. 30. FAULT RECORDS Each time any of the programmed thresholds are crossed, a fault record is created and stored in memory. The fault record tags up to 25 faults and stores them in a non-volatile (flash) memory. This allows the system operator to identify and analyse network failures. When the available memory space is exhausted, the new fault automatically overwrites the oldest fault. The user can view actual fault record under the RECORD/Fault Record menu, where he can select to display up to 25 stored records. These records are fault flags, fault measurements, etc. Also note that the time stamp displayed in the fault record itself will be more accurate than the corresponding time stamp given in the event record. This is due to the fact that events are logged some time after the actual fault record happens. The user can view event records either via the front panel interface, via the EIA (RS) 232 port, or remotely, via the rear EIA (RS) 485 port. 31. INSTANTANEOUS RECORDER Each time any of programmed thresholds are crossed, an instantaneous record is created and displayed under the RECORDS/Instantaneous menu. The last five starting information with the duration of the information are available. The following information is displayed under the RECORDS/Fault Record menu: number of faults, hour, date, origin (crossing of I>, I>>, I>>> or Ie>, Ie>> or Ie>>> thresholds), duration of the instantaneous, and if the crossing of the threshold lead to a trip or not. 32. DISTURBANCE RECORDER The integral disturbance recorder has a memory space specifically dedicated for storage of disturbance records. The disturbance records that may be stored are 3, 5, 7 or 9 seconds length each. When the available memory space is exhausted, the new record automatically overwrites the oldest record. The recorder stores actual samples that are taken at a rate of 32 samples per cycle. Each disturbance record consists of analogue and digital channels. (Note that the relevant CT ratios for the analogue channels are also extracted to enable scaling to primary quantities). The total disturbance recording time is 5 records of 3 seconds, or 4 � 3s, or 3 � 5s, or 2 � 7s or 1 � 9s. The disturbance record starts with the disturbance. If the pre-time time is set to 100ms, the record starts 100 ms before the disturbance. Application Guide P12x/EN AP/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 69/71 33. ROLLING AND PEAK VALUE DEMANDS (P122 & P123 ONLY) MiCOM P122 and P123 relays can store the 3 phases rolling average and maximum subperiod values. The description and principle of calculation are presented hereafter. 33.1 Rolling demand Calculation of the rolling demand value for IA, Ib and IC currents is done the following way: � Calculation of the average of the RMS values on a "Rolling Sub Period" period. The width of the period "Rolling Sub Period" can be set under the "RECORDS/Rolling Demand/Sub Period" menu. Setting range: from 1 to 60 minutes. � Storage of these values in a sliding window. Calculation of the average of these average values (sliding window values) on the number of "Num of Sub Periods" periods. The number of Sub Period "Num of Sub Periods" can be set under the "RECORDS/Rolling Demand/Num of Sub Per" menu. Setting range: from 1 to 24. � Display of the first result under the MEASUREMENTS menu only after the storage of "Num of Sub Periods" periods. The 3 phases Rolling average value are displayed: Rolling Average IA RMS Rolling Average IB RMS Rolling Average IC RMS - The calculation is reset either via the front operator interface (Key c) without entering a password, or by a remote command. NOTE: In case of loss of power supply the rolling demand are not stored. A modification of the settings (either "Rolling Sub Period" or "Num of Sub Periods" parameter) reset the calculation. Example: Sub Period = 5 mn Num of Sub Period = 2 At the end of the Sub Period 2: Rolling average value = (average value 1 + average value 2)/2 At the end of the Sub Period 3: New Rolling average value = (average value 2 + average value 3)/2 P12x/EN AP/Fc6 Application Guide Page 70/71 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 33.2 Peak value demand The principle of calculation of the Peak value demand for IA, IB and IC currents is the following: For every "Rolling Sub Period", a new average value is compared with the previous value calculated at the previous "Rolling Sub Period". If this new value is greater than the previous value already stored, then this new value is stored instead of the previous one. In the other way, if this new value is lower than the previous value already stored, then the previous value is stored. This way the average peak vale will be refreshed each Sub Period; There is no dedicated setting for this calculation. The setting of the Sub Period in the RECORDS menu is used. The 3 phase Peak value demand are displayed in the MEASUREMENTS menu: MAX SUBPERIOD IA RMS MAX SUBPERIOD IB RMS MAX SUBPERIOD IC RMS - The calculation is reset either by pushing key without using a password, or by remote command. NOTE: In case of loss of power supply, Peak average values are stored. A modification of the "Rolling Sub Period" parameter reset the calculation. 34. CT REQUIREMENTS Hereafter are presented the CT requirements for MiCOM P12x Overcurrent. Current transformer requirements are based on a potential maximum fault current that is 50 times the relay rated current (In) and on the setting of the instantaneous at 25 times rated current (In). The current transformer requirements are designed to provide operation of all protection elements. When the criteria for a specific application are higher than the criteria described above, or when the actual lead resistance exceeds the limiting value recommended, it may be desirable to increase the CT requirements according to the following formula. Nominal Rating 1A 5A Nominal Output 2.5VA 7.5VA Accuracy Class 10P 10P Accuracy Limit Factor 20 20 Limiting lead resistance 1.3 ohms 0.11 ohms 34.1 34.2 Definite time / IDMT overcurrent & earth fault protection Time-delayed Phase overcurrent elements: VK Icp/2 * (RCT + RL + Rrp) Time-delayed Earth Fault overcurrent elements: VK Icn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn) Instantaneous overcurrent & earth fault protection CT requirements for instantaneous phase overcurrent elements: VK Isp * (RCT + RL + Rrp) CT requirements for instantaneous earth fault overcurrent elements: VK Isn * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn) Application Guide P12x/EN AP/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 71/71 34.3 Definite time / IDMT sensitive earth fault (SEF) protection Time delay SEF protection: VK Icn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn) SEF Protection - as fed from a core-balance CT: The type of current transformers that are required are core balance type and with metering class accuracy and with a limiting secondary voltage that follows the following formula: Time Delayed element: VK Icn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn) Instantaneous element: VK Ifn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrp + Rrn) In addition, note that phase error of the applied core balance current transformer should be less than 90 minutes at 10% of rated current and less than 150 minutes at 1% of rated current. Abbreviations used in the previous formula are explained below: Where: VK = Ifn = Ifp = Icn = Icp = Isn = Isp = RCT = Rrp = RL = Rrp = Rrn = Required CT knee-point voltage (volts), Maximum prospective secondary earth fault current (amps), Maximum prospective secondary phase fault current (amps), Maximum prospective secondary earth fault current or 31 times I> setting (whichever is lower) (amps), Maximum prospective secondary phase fault current or 31 times I> setting (whichever is lower) (amps), Stage 2 & 3 Earth Fault setting (amps), Stage 2 and 3 setting (amps), Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (ohms) Impedence of relay phase current input at 30In Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (ohms), Impedance of relay phase current input at 30In (ohms), Impedance of the relay neutral current input at 30In (ohms). 34.4 High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault Protection The High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault element shall remain stable for through faults and shall operate in less than 40ms for internal faults provided that following equations are met when determining CT requirements and the value of the associated stabilising resistor: Rs = [K * (If) * (RCT + 2RL)] / IS VK 4 * Is * Rs K = 1 for Vk/Vs less or equal to 16 K = 1.2 for Vk/Vs greater than 16 Where: VK = Rs = If = VK = IS = RCT = RL = Required CT knee-point voltage (volts), Value of Stabilising resistor (ohms), Maximum through fault current level (amps). CT knee point voltage (volts), Current setting of REF element (amps), Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (ohms), Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (ohms). Communications MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MODBUS DATABASE COURIER DATABASE IEC 60870-5-103 DNP 3.0 DATABASE MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x /EN CT/Gd6 BLANK PAGE Communications MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Communications MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MODBUS DATABASE MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 VERSION V14.C P12x /EN CT/Gd6 Page 2/190 BLANK PAGE Communications MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Communications MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 CONTENT P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 1/190 1. INTRODUCTION 3 1.1 Purpose of this document 3 1.2 Glossary 3 2. MODBUS PROTOCOL 4 2.1 Technical characteristics of the MODBUS connection 4 2.1.1 Parameters of the MODBUS connection 4 2.1.2 Synchronisation of exchanges messages 4 2.1.3 Message validity check 4 2.1.4 Address of the MiCOM relays 4 2.2 MODBUS functions of the MiCOM relays 5 2.3 Presentation of the MODBUS protocol 5 2.3.1 Frame size received by the protection device (slave) 5 2.3.2 Format of frames sent by the MiCOM relays 6 2.3.3 Messages validity check 6 3. MICOM P120, P121, P122 AND P123 RELAY DATABASE ORGANISATION 7 3.1 Description of the application mapping 7 3.1.1 Settings 7 3.1.2 Disturbance records (P122, P123) 7 3.1.3 Event records (P122, P123) 8 3.1.4 Fault records (P122, P123) 8 3.1.5 Characteristics 8 3.2 Page 0h (Read access only) 9 3.3 Page 1h 12 3.4 Page 2h (Access in reading and in writing) 16 3.5 Page 3h (Access in reading and in writing) 19 3.6 Page 4h Access in writing 19 3.7 Page 5h 19 3.7.1 For P121 P122 and P123 19 3.7.2 For P120 23 3.8 Page 6h 24 3.9 Page 7h 25 3.10 Page 8h (P122, P123) 25 3.11 Pages 9h to 21h 26 3.11.1 Meaning of each value channel 26 3.11.2 Calculation formula for phase current values 26 3.11.3 Calculation formula for earth current values 26 3.12 Page 22h 27 P12x /EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 2/190 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 3.13 Page 35h 28 3.14 Page 36h 31 3.15 Page 37h 31 3.15.1 Calculation formula for phase current values 31 3.15.2 Calculation formula for earth current values 31 3.16 Page 3Eh 32 3.17 Pages 38h to 3Ch 33 3.17.1 Calculation formula for phase current values 34 3.17.2 Calculation formula for earth current values 34 3.18 Pages 3Dh 34 4. DESCRIPTION OF THE MAPPING FORMAT, MICOM P122 AND P123 36 4.1 Disturbance record additional information 49 4.1.1 MODBUS request definition used for disturbance record 49 4.1.2 Request to know the number of disturbance records in SRAM 49 4.1.3 Service requests 49 4.1.4 Disturbance record upload request 49 4.1.5 Index frame upload request 50 4.1.6 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event 50 4.1.7 Request to retrieve a dedicated event 50 4.1.8 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the fault records 50 4.1.9 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record 51 4.1.10 Request to retrieve a dedicated fault record 51 Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 3/190 1. INTRODUCTION 1.1 Purpose of this document This document describes the characteristics of the different communication protocol of MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays. The available communication protocols on the relay are listed below: - MODBUS - IEC 60870-5-103 - K-BUS/Courier (not available) - DNP3 1.2 Glossary Ir, Is, It IE pf PF : currents measured on the concerned phases (r, s, t) : residual current measured by earth input (= 3.I zero sequence) : soft weight of a word of 16 bits : heavy weight of a word of 16 bits P12x /EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 4/190 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2. MODBUS PROTOCOL MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays can communicate by a RS 485 link behind the unit following the MODBUS RTU protocol. 2.1 Technical characteristics of the MODBUS connection 2.1.1 Parameters of the MODBUS connection The different parameters of the MODBUS connection are as follows: - Isolated two-point RS485 connection (2kV 50Hz), - MODBUS line protocol in RTU mode Communication speed can be configured by an operator dialog in the front panel of the relay: Baud rate (dec) 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 Transmission mode of the configured characters by operator dialog Mode 1 start / 8 bits / 1 stop: total 10 bits 1 start / 8 bits / even parity / 1 stop: total 11 bits 1 start / 8 bits / odd parity / 1 stop: total 11 bits 1 start / 8 bits / 2 stop: total 11 bits 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 Synchronisation of exchanges messages All character received after a silence on the line with more or equal to a transmission time of 3 characters is considered as a firm start. Message validity check The frame validity is working with a cyclical redundancy code CRC with 16 bits. The generator polynomial is: 1 + x� + x15 + x16 = 1010 0000 0000 0001 binary = A001h Address of the MiCOM relays The address of the MiCOM relay on a same MODBUS network is situated between 1 and 255. The address 0 is reserved for the broadcast messages Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 5/190 2.2 MODBUS functions of the MiCOM relays Protection device data may be read or modified by using function codes. Following are the available function codes. Function codes to read from or write into parameter cells in the protection device are described in the listed following table. Function Nr. Data Read Data Write Data Format & Type 1 X N bits 2 X N bits 3 X N words 4 X N words 5 X 1 bit 6 X 1 word 7 Fast 8 bits 8 X Diagnostics counter 11 X Event counter 15 X N bits 16 X N words 2.3 Presentation of the MODBUS protocol Master slave protocol, all exchange understands a master query and a slave response Frame size received from MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays 2.3.1 Frame size received by the protection device (slave) Frame transmitted by the master ( query): Slave number 1 byte 0 � FFh Function code 1 byte 1 � 10h Information n bytes CRC16 2 bytes Slave number: The slave number is situated between 1 and 255. A frame transmitted with a slave number 0 is globally addressed to all pieces of equipment (broadcast frame ) Function code: Requested MODBUS function (1 to 16) Information: Contains the parameters of the selected function. CRC16: Value of the CRC16 calculated by the master. NOTE: The MiCOM relay does not respond to globally broadcast frames sent out by the master. P12x /EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 6/190 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2.3.2 2.3.3 Format of frames sent by the MiCOM relays Frame sent by the MiCOM relay (response) Slave number 1 byte 1 � FFh Function code 1 byte 1 � 10h Data n bytes CRC16 2 bytes Slave number: The slave number is situated between 1 and 255. Function code: Processed MODBUS function (1 to 16). Data: Contains reply data to master query . CRC 16: Value of the CRC 16 calculated by the slave. Messages validity check When MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays receive a master query, it validates the frame: If the CRC is false, the frame is invalid. MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays do not reply to the query. The master must retransmit its query. Excepting a broadcast message, this is the only case of non-reply by MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays to a master query. If the CRC is good but the MiCOM relay can not process the query, it sends an exception response. Warning frame sent by the MiCOM relay (response) Slave number 1 byte 1 to FFh Function code 1 byte 81h or 83h or 8Ah or 8Bh Warning code 1 byte CRC16 2 bytes pf ... PF Slave number: The slave number is situated between 1 and 255. Function code: The function code returned by the MiCOM relay in the warning frame is the code in which the most significant bit (b7) is forced to 1. Warning code: On the 8 warning codes of the MODBUS protocol, the MiCOM relay manages two of them: � code 01: function code unauthorised or unknown. � code 03: a value in the data field is unauthorised ( incorrect data ). - - - - CRC16: Control of pages being read Control of pages being written Control of addresses in pages Length of request messages Value of the CRC16 calculated by the slave. Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 7/190 3. MiCOM P120, P121, P122 AND P123 RELAY DATABASE ORGANISATION 3.1 Description of the application mapping 3.1.1 Settings MiCOM P122 and P123 application mapping has 9 pages of parameters. Parameters are organized in pages. MiCOM P12y application mapping has 7 pages of parameters. The characteristics are the following: Page 0h 1h 2h 3h 4h 5h 6h 7h 8h Data type Product information, remote signalling, measurements General remote parameters Setting group 1 remote parameters Setting group 2 remote parameters Remote controls Boolean equations General remote parameters (part 2) Quick reading byte Time synchronisation (only for P122, P123) Read permission Write permission Through communication X X X X X X X X X X X X Fast X X 3.1.2 They are completely listed below. Disturbance records (P122, P123) Before uploading any disturbance record, a service request must be send to select the record number to be uploaded. The answer following this request contain the following information: 1. Numbers of samples (pre and post time) 2. Phase CT ratio 3. Earth CT ratio 4. Internal phase and earth ratios 5. Number of the last disturbance mapping page 6. Number of samples in this last disturbance mapping page The mapping pages used for this service request are from 38h to 3Ch. Pages 9h to 21h: Contain the disturbance data (25 pages) A disturbance mapping page contains 250 words: 0900 � 09FAh: 250 disturbance data words 0A00 � 0AFAh: 250 disturbance data words 0B00 � 0BFAh: 250 disturbance data words 2100 � 21FAh: 250 disturbance data words P12x /EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 8/190 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 3.1.3 3.1.4 3.1.5 The disturbance data pages contain the sample of a single channel from a record. Page 22h: contains the index of the disturbance Page 38h � 3Ch: Selection of the disturbance record and channel Page 3Dh: A dedicated request allows to know the number of disturbance records stored in SRAM. Event records (P122, P123) To upload the event records two requests are allowed: Page 35h: Request to upload an event record without acknowledge of this event. Used addresses: 3500h: ... 354Ah: ... 35F9h EVENT 1 EVENT 75 EVENT 250 Page 36h: Request to upload the non-acknowledged oldest stored event record. Two modes are available for the acknowledgement: automatic acknowledgement or manual acknowledgement The mode depends of the state of bit 12 of telecommand word (address 400 h). If this bit is set, then the acknowledgement is manual else the acknowledgement is automatic. In automatic mode, the reading of the event acknowledges the event. In manual mode, it is necessary to write a specific command to acknowledge the oldest event. (set the bit 13 of control word 400 h ) Fault records (P122, P123) Page 37h: Page dedicated to upload fault record Used addresses: 3700h: FAULT 1 3701h: FAULT 2 ... 3718h: FAULT 25 Page 3Eh: Request to upload the non-acknowledged oldest stored fault record. Two modes are available for the acknowledgement: automatic acknowledgement or manual acknowledgement The mode depends of the state of bit 12 of telecommand word (address 400 h). If this bit is set, then the acknowledgement is manual else the acknowledgement is automatic. In automatic mode, the reading of the fault acknowledges automatically the event. In manual mode, it is necessary to write a specific command to acknowledge the oldest fault. (set the bit 14 of control word 400 h ) Characteristics Page 0h can only be read through communication. Pages 1h, 2h, 3h and 4h can be read and write. Page 7h can be access in quick reading only. Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 9/190 Page 8h can be write (P122, P123 only). They are describe more precisely in the following chapters. 3.2 Page 0h (Read access only) Read access only. Legend: Reserved: Obsolete: Free for future use Do not use (reserved for old versions) Address Group 0000 0001 Product Information 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 000A to 000B 000C 000D 000E 000F 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0017 0018 0019 001A 001B 001C 001D 001E 001F 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 0025 Remote signalling Description Values range Step Unit Form Fault at Value Range Relay description 32-127 1 F10 P120 to P123 characters 1 and 2 Relay description 32-127 1 F10 P1 P120 to P123 characters 3 and 4 Relay description 32-127 1 F10 23 P120 to P123 characters 5 and 6 Unit reference characters 32-127 1 F10 AL P120 to P123 1 and 2 Unit reference characters 32-127 1 F10 ST P120 to P123 3 and 4 Software version 10-xx 1 F21 P120 to P123 Communication 0-3 1 F41 P120 to P123 description Internal phase ratio 800 F1 800 P122-P123 Internal earth ratio : F1 P120 to P123 0.1 to 40 Ion range 800 800 0.01 to 8 Ion range 3277 3277 0.002 to 1 Ion range 32700 32700 General start info. 0-1 1 F1 P120 to P123 Reserved P120 to P123 LED Status 0-255 Real Active Setting 1-2 Group (after taking into account the protection flags) Password active Device status Logical inputs 0 to 7 or to 1 31 Logical data status 0 to FFFF 2n Part 1/2 Trip status 0 to FFFF 2n Output contacts 0 to 127 or 1 to 511 Status information I> 0 to FFFF 1 Status information I>> 0 to FFFF 1 Status information I>>> 0 to FFFF 1 Status information IE> 0 to FFFF 1 Status information IE>> 0 to FFFF 1 Status information IE>>> 0 to FFFF 1 I> memorisation 0 to FFFF 1 I>> memorisation 0 to FFFF 1 I>>> memorisation 0 to FFFF 1 tI> memorisation 0 to FFFF 1 tI>> memorisation 0 to FFFF 1 tI>>> memorisation 0 to FFFF 1 Thermal state information 0 to 1 1 Status information I< 0 to FFFF 1 Status information I2> 0 to FFFF 1 Output information 0 to FFFF 1 Part 1/2 tI< memorisation 0 to FFFF 1 Memorised flags for non acknowledged alarms Part 1/3 F73 P120 to P123 F1 P122-P123 F24 0 F45 F12 F20a F22 F13 F17 F17 F17 F16 F16 F16 F17 F17 F17 F17 F17 F17 F37 F17 F16 F38 F17 F36a P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P121 to P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P12x /EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 10/190 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Address 0026 0027 0028 0029 002A 002B 002C 002D 002E 002F 0030 0032 0034 0036 0038 0039 003A 003B 003C 003E 0040 0042 0044 0046 0048 004A 004C 004E 004F 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 0055 0056 0057 0058 0059 005A 005B 005C Group Description Values range Step Unit Form at Number of disturbance 0 to 5 1 F31 records available Tripping status (RL1) 0 to 1 1 F1 Fault origin 0 to 28 1 F81 CB supervision flag F43 Memorised flags for non F44 acknowledged alarms Part 2/3 Logical data status 0 to FFFF 2n F20b Part 2/2 Status information I2>> 0 to FFFF 1 F16 Memorised flags for non F36b acknowledged alarms Part 3/3 Reserved Memorised latched relays 0 to 127 or 1 F13 to 511 Reserved Remote Phase A current RMS 0 to 1 1/100 A F18 measurements value 600000 Phase B current RMS 0 to 1 1/100 A F18 value 600000 Phase C current RMS 0 to 1 1/100 A F18 value 600000 Earth current RMS value 0 to 1 1/100 A F18 600000 Device Status Power self-test status F98 Transformer self-test status F99 Thermal state (saved) % F1 Frequency 4500 to 1 1/100 F1 6500 Hz Max RMS value phase A 0 to 1 1/100 A F18 600000 Max RMS value phase B 0 to 1 1/100 A F18 600000 Max RMS value phase C 0 to 1 1/100 A F18 600000 Average RMS value 0 to 1 1/100 A F18 Phase A 600000 Average RMS value 0 to 1 1/100 A F18 Phase B 600000 Average RMS value 0 to 1 1/100 A F18 Phase C 600000 Harmonic IE 0 to 1 1/100 A F18 600000 I2 current fundamental 0 to 1 1/100 A F18 value 600000 I1 current fundamental 0 to 1 1/100 A F18 value 600000 I2/I1 ratio % F1 Reserved Fourier Module Module IA 1 CAN F1 Module IB 1 CAN F1 Module IC 1 CAN F1 Module IE 1 CAN F1 Fourier Argument IA � F1 Argument Argument IB � F1 Argument IC � F1 Argument IE � F1 Module I2 � F1 Module I1 � F1 Recloser Cycle total number F1 statistics Cycle 1 number F1 Cycle 2 number F1 Fault Value Range P122-P123 P120-P121 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P120 to P123 P122-P123 P122 P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 P120 P122-P123 P120 to P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P120 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P120 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P120 to P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P123 P123 P123 Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 11/190 Address 005D 005E 005F 0060 0061 0063 0065 0067 0069 006B 006D to 006F 0070 0071 0072 0073 0074 0075 0076 0077 0078 0079 to 0080 0081 to 0084 0085 Group Rolling Demand Description Values range Cycle 3 number Cycle 4 number Definitive tripping number Closing order number Average sliding time 0 to window- RMS IA 600000 Average sliding time 0 to window- RMS IB 600000 Average sliding time 0 to window- RMS IC 600000 Maximum of the sub 0 to period average value 600000 RMS phase A Maximum of the sub 0 to period average value 600000 RMS phase B Maximum of the sub 0 to period average value 600000 RMS phase C Reserved Output information SOTF 0 to FFFF Boolean Boolean equation status equations Remote Output information 0 to FFFF signalling part 2/2 Remote Output information IE 0 to FFFF signaling derived Fourier module Module IE derived Fourier Argument calculated IE Argument Closing origin Closing origin status 0 - 63 CB monitoring CB Operations number / measurements time CB status get from 52A,52B 0-3 Device Model Number 32-127 Serial Number 32-127 Output information of Ie_d>> 0 to FFFF Step Unit Form at F1 F1 F1 F1 1 1/100 A F18 Fault Value 1 1/100 A F18 1 1/100 A F18 1 1/100 A F18 1 1/100 A F18 1 1/100 A F18 1 F54 F61 1 F79 1 F16 F1 F1 1 F75 1 F1 0 1 F83 1 F10 1 F10 1 F16 Range P123 P123 P123 P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P122 - P123 P122 - P123 P121 to P123 P123 P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P122 to P123 P12x /EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 12/190 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 3.3 Page 1h Read and write access Address 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 010A 010B 010C 010D 010E 010F 0110 0111 0112-0113 0114-0115 0116-0117 0118 0119-011D 011E 011F 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 to 012D 012E 012F 0130 Group Description Values range Remote settings Address of front/rear port: MODBUS 1 - 255 IEC 60870-5-103 1 - 255 Reserved Password (characters 1 and 32 -127 2) Password (characters 3 and 32 -127 4) Frequency 50-60 Phase A label L1-A-R Phase B label L2-B-S Phase C label L3-C-T Earth label N-G-E By default display 1-4 CB monitoring measurements User reference (characters 32-127 1 and 2) User reference (characters 32-127 3 and 4) Faults number to be 1-25 displayed by default Level signalisation of logic 0-31 inputs Instantaneous fault number 1-5 to be displayed Voltage Type applied to the 0-1 logic inputs Operations number CB Operating time Switched square Amps phase A sum Switched square Amps phase B sum Switched square Amps phase C sum CB Closing time Reserved Maintenance mode Relays Latching Ratio Primary phase CT value 1 to 50000 Secondary phase CT value 1 to 5 Primary earth CT value 1 to 50000 Secondary earth CT value 1 to 5 Reserved Fail safe and inversion relays Rotation phase sequence 0 to 1 Communication Speed 0 to 7 Step 1 Unit Format Fault Value F1 1 Range P120 to P123 1 F10 1 F10 10 Hz F1 VTA F25 VTA F25 VTA F25 VTA F25 1 F26 1 F10 1 F10 1 F31 31 F12 1 F31 1 F50 1 F1 1 1/100 s F1 An F18 An F18 An F18 1/100 s F1 F11 F14 1 F1 4 F1 1 F1 4 F1 1 F60 1 F51 1 F4 AA P120 to P123 AA P120 to P123 50 P120 to P123 A P121 to P123 B P121 to P123 C P121 to P123 N P120 to P123 1 P120 to P123 AL P120 to P123 ST P120 to P123 5 P122-P123 0 P122-P123 5 P122-P123 0 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P120 to P123 P122-P123 P121 to P123 1000 P121 to P123 1 P121 to P123 1000 P120 to P123 1 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 0 P120 to P123 0 P121 to P123 6 = 19200 P120 to bds P123 Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 13/190 Address 0131 Group Description Parity Values range 0 to 2 0132 Data bits 0 to 1 0133 Stop bit 0 to 1 0134 COM available 0 to 1 0135 Date Format 0 to 1 0136 0137 0138 to 013F 0140 0141 0142 0143 0144 0145 to 0149 014A 014B to 014F 0150 IEC870-5-103 Private messages option Address of rear port: COURIER DNP3 Reserved 0 to 1 1 - 255 1 - 59999 Configuration Setting group Validation of instantaneous alarms auto reset Configuration of change of group selection Reserved Configuration of LED reset on fault Reserved 1 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 Output Relays allocation Max I2>> Reserved 0 to 31 LEDs allocation Led 5 Part 1/4 0151 Led 6 Part 1/4 0152 Led 7 Part 1/4 0153 Led 8 Part 1/4 0154 Led 5 Part 2/4 0155 Led 6 Part 2/4 0156 Led 7 Part 2/4 0157 Led 8 Part 2/4 0158 to 015A 015B 015C 015D 015E 015F 0160 0161 Logic input allocation Logic input allocation Reserved Logic input 1 Part 2/2 Logic input 2 Part 2/2 Logic input 3 Part 2/2 Logic input 4 Part 2/2 Logic input 5 Part 2/2 Logic input 1 Part 1/2 Logic input 2 Part 1/2 0162 0163 0164 0165 0166 0167 Output relays allocation Logic input 3 Part 1/2 Logic input 4 Part 1/2 Logic input 5 Part 1/2 Broken conductor detection 0-31 CB failure tI< 0 - 31 0 - 31 Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Unit Format Fault Value Range F5 0 = P120 to without P123 F28 1 = 8 bits P120 to P123 F29 0 = 1 stop P120 to bit P123 F30 1=COM P120 to available P123 F48 0= P120-P122- Private P123 F56 0= P120 to Public P123 P120 to 255 P123 1 0 P120 to P123 F1 1 P122-P123 F1 0 P122-P123 F47 1 P122-P123 F1 0 0 F14 0 P122-P123 P120 to P123 P122-P123 F19a 4 F19a 16 F19a 32 F19a 64 F19b 0 F19b 0 F19b 0 F19b 0 F15b 0 F15b 0 F15b 0 F15b 0 F15b 0 F15a 0 F15a 0 F15a 0 F15a 0 F15a 0 F14 0 F14 0 F14 0 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P123 P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P122-P123 P123 P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P12x /EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 14/190 Address 0168 0169 016A 016B Group 016C 016D 016E 016F 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 0175 0176 0177 0178 0179 017A 017B 017C 017D 017E 017F 0180 Automation 0181 0182 0183 0184 0185 0186 0187 0188 0189 018A 018B 018C 018D 018E 018F 0190 Disturbance 0191 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Description I2> Thermal overload alarm Thermal overload trip CB close Values range 0 - 31 0 - 31 0-31 0-31 Step 1 1 1 1 Unit Format Fault Value F14 0 F14 0 F14 0 F14 0 tAUX1 0-31 1 F14 0 tAUX2 0-31 1 F14 0 CB alarms 0-31 1 Trip circuit 0-31 1 Active setting group 2 0 - 31 1 Trip 0 - 31 1 F14 0 F14 0 F14 0 F14 1 tI> 0 - 31 1 F14 0 tI>> 0 - 31 1 F14 0 tI>>> 0 - 31 1 F14 0 tIE> 0 - 31 1 F14 0 tIE>> 0 - 31 1 F14 0 tIE>>> 0 - 31 1 F14 0 I> 0 - 31 1 F14 0 I>> 0 - 31 1 F14 0 I>>> 0 - 31 1 F14 0 IE> 0 - 31 1 F14 0 IE>> 0 - 31 1 F14 0 IE>>> 0 - 31 1 F14 0 Recloser running Recloser final trip Tripping configuration Part 1/2 Latching function configuration part 1/2 Blocking logic 1 Part 1/2 0 - 31 1 0 - 31 1 0 to 65535 1 0 to 65535 1 0 to 65535 1 F14 0 F14 0 F6a 1 F7a 0 F8a 0 Blocking logic 2 Part 1/2 0 to 65535 1 F8a 0 Broken conductor detection 0 - 1 1 F24 0 tBC 0 to 14400 1 F1 0 Cold load pick-up activation 0 - 1 1 F24 0 Cold load pick-up sources 0 to 255 1 F33 0 Cold load pick-up level (%) 20 to 800 1 F1 50 Cold load pick-up start delay 1 to 36000* 1 1/10 s F1 10 CB failure 0 - 1 1 F24 0 tBF 0 to 1000 1 1/100 s F1 10 Logic Selectivity1 0 to 31 1 F40 0 tSEL1 0 to 15000 1 1/100 s F1 0 Logic Selectivity2 0 to 31 1 F40 0 tSEL2 0 to 15000 1 1/100 s F1 0 Pre-time 1 to 29 1 1/10 s F1 1 1 to 29 1 to 49 1 to 69 1 to 89 Do not use Range P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P121 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P122-P123 P123 P122-P123 P120 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P123 P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 15/190 Address Group Description 0192 0193 0194 0195 0196 0197 0198 0199 019A 019B CB supervision Aux inputs Disturbance starting condition Operating time supervision Operating time threshold Operations number supervision Operations number threshold CB switched Amps sum supervision (Power n) CB switched Amps sum threshold Amps or square Amps Closing time threshold Auxiliary timer 1 019C Auxiliary timer 2 019D 019E 019F 01A0 01A1 01A2 01A3 01A4 01A5 01A6 01A7 01A8 01A9 01AA 01AB 01AC 01AD 01AE 01AF 01B0 01B1 01B2 01B3 01B4 01B5 � 01BC 01BD Max. & average Peak value measurement Broken I2 / I1 threshold conductor CB supervision Tripping time Closing time Closing time threshold supervision CB Fail Trip circuit supervision t SUP I< threshold CB failure Instantaneous phase blocking if CB failure Instantaneous earth blocking if CB failure Rolling Demand Sub period Sub period number Output relays Communication Order 1 allocation Communication Order 2 Communication Order 3 Communication Order 4 T comm 1 T comm 2 T comm 3 T comm 4 tAux3 tAux4 Auxiliary timer3 Auxiliary timer4 Courier Courier Description Automation Cold Load start detection 01BE � 01F5 01F6 01F7 01F8 01F9 01FA 01FB 01FC Output relays allocation Automatisms Reserved Remote trip Remote close SOTF function SOT timer SOTF parameter I>> or I>>> Tripping configuration Part 2/2 Latching function configuration part 2/2 Values range Step Unit Format Fault Value 0 - 1 1 F32 0 0 - 1 1 F24 0 5 to 100 5 1/100 s F1 5 0 - 1 1 F24 0 0 - 50000 1 F1 0 0 - 1 1 F24 0 0 to 4000 10E6 An 1 - 2 1 F1 1 5 to 100 5 1/100 s F1 0 0 to 20000 1 1/100 s F1 0 0 to 20000 1 1/100 s F1 0 5 to 60 min F42 5 20 to 100 1 % F1 20 10 to 500 5 1/100 s F1 10 10 to 500 5 1/100 s F1 10 0 - 1 1 F24 0 0 - 1 1 F24 0 10 to 1000 5 1/100 s F1 10 10 - 100 1 %In F1 10 0 � 1 1 F24 0 0 � 1 1 F24 0 0 � 60 0 � 24 0 - 31 1 min F1 1 F1 1 F14 0 0 - 31 1 F14 0 0 - 31 1 F14 0 0 - 31 1 F14 0 10 � 60000 5 1/100s F1 10 10 � 60000 5 1/100s F1 10 10 � 60000 5 1/100s F1 10 10 � 60000 5 1/100s F1 10 0 � 31 1 F14 0 0 � 31 1 F14 0 0 � 20000 1 1/100s F1 0 0 � 20000 1 1/100s F1 0 32-127 1 F10 P1 0 to 3 1 F76 1 0 � 31 1 F14 0 0 � 31 1 F14 0 0 � 1 1 F24 0 0 - 500 1 1/1000s F1 0 0 - 3 1 F53 0 0 to 4095 1 F6b 0 0 to 4095 1 F7b 0 Range P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P123 P122-P123 P123 P120 to P123 P122 � P123 P121 - P123 P121 - P123 P123 P123 P123 P121 to P123 P122- P123 P12x /EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 16/190 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Address Group 01FD 01FE 01FF Output relays allocation Description SOTF Internal blocked recloser reserved Values range Step Unit Format Fault Value Range 0 - 31 1 F14 0 P123 0 - 31 1 F14 0 P123 Note: this needs to be corrected in the next comms database to: (1) SOTF function (2) SOTF timer, (3) SOTF parameter I>> or I>>>, (3) SOTF 3.4 Page 2h (Access in reading and in writing) Access in reading and in writing Address Group Description 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 0205 [50/51] Phase Overcurrent Protection I> activation I> threshold I> time delay type I> IDMT Curve Type I> TMS value I> K value (RI curve) 0206 0207 0208 0209 020A 020B to 020F 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 0215 0216 0217 0218 0219 021A to 021F 0220 0221 0222 0223 tI> value I> Reset type I> RTMS value I> tRESET value I> Interlock Reserved I>> activation I>> Threshold tI>> value I>> time delay type I>> IDMT curve type I>> TMS value K value (RI curve) I>> Reset Type I>> RTMS value I>> tRESET value Reserved I>>> activation I>>> Threshold tI>>> value "I>>> on sample" activation 0223 to 022F 0230 0231 Reserved [50N/51N] Earth IE> activation Overcurrent Protection IE> Threshold Low sensitivity Med. sensitivity High sensitivity 0232 IE> time delay type Values range 0-1 Step 1 Unit Format Fault Value F24 0 10 to 2500 1 0 to 2 1 0 to 10 1 25 to 1500 1 100 to 5 10000 0 to 15000 1 0 - 1 1 25 to 3200 1 0 to 60000 1 0-1 1 0-1 1 50 to 4000 5 0 to 15000 1 0 � 2 1 0 � 10 1 25 � 1500 1 100 � 10000 5 0 � 1 1 25 � 3200 1 0 to 60000 1 0-1 1 50 to 4000 5 0 to 15000 1 0 � 1 1 0-1 1 1/100 In F1 10 F27a 0 F3a 1 1/1000 F1 25 1/1000 F1 100 1/100 s F1 4 F27a 0 1/1000 F1 25 1/100 s F1 0 F24 0 0 F24 0 1/100 In F1 50 1/100 s F1 1 F27a 0 F3a 1 1/1000 F1 25 1/1000 F1 100 F27a 0 1/1000 F1 25 1/100 s F1 0 0 F24 0 1/100 In F1 50 1/100 s F1 1 F24 0 0 F24 0 10 to 2500 1 10 to 2000 5 2 to 1000 1 0 to 3 1 F1 1/100 10 IEn 1/1000 10 IEn 1/1000 2 IEn F27b 0 Range P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P121 to P123 P120 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P120 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P120-P122P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 17/190 Address 0233 0234 0235 0236 0237 0238 0239 023A 023B 023C to 023F 0240 0241 Group 0242 0243 0244 0245 0246 0247 0248 0249 024A 024B to 024E 024F 0250 0251 0252 0253 0254 0255 0256 0257 0258 0259 025A 025B 025C 025D 025E 025F 0260 [49] Thermal Overload Protection [37] Phase Undercurrent Protection [46] Negative Sequence Protection Description Values range IE> IDMT curve type 0 to 11 IE> TMS value 25 to 1500 IE> K value (RI curve) 100 to 10000 tIE> value 0 to 15000 IE> reset type 0 - 1 IE> RTMS value 25 to 3200 IE> tRESET value 0 to 60000 IE> RXIDG curve (Belgium) 0 to 7 IE> Interlock 0-1 Reserved Step Unit 1 1 1/1000 5 1/1000 Format Fault Value Range F3a 1 P120 to P123 F1 25 P120 to P123 F1 100 P120 to P123 1 1/100 s F1 4 1 F27a 0 1 1/1000 F1 25 1 1/100 s F1 0 0 1 F3b 0 1 F24 0 P120 to P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P121 to P123 P120 to P123 IE>> activation IE>> Threshold Low sensitivity Med. sensitivity High sensitivity tIE>> value IE>> time delay type IE>> IDMT curve type IE>> TMS value IE>> K value (RI curve) IE>> Reset Type IE>> RTMS value IE>> tRESET value IE>> RXIDG curve (Belgium) Reserved 0-1 1 50 to 4000 1 10 to 8000 5 2 to 1000 1 0 to 15000 1 0 to 3 1 0 to 11 1 25 to 1500 1 100 to 5 10000 0 � 1 1 25 � 3200 1 0 to 60000 1 0 to 7 0 F24 0 F1 1/100 50 IEn 1/1000 10 IEn 1/1000 2 IEn 1/100 s F1 1 F27b 0 F3a 1 1/1000 F1 25 1/1000 F1 100 F27a 0 1/1000 F1 25 1/100 s F1 0 1 F3b 0 0 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P120 to P123 "IE>>> on sample" activation IE>>> IE>>> Threshold Low sensitivity Med. sensitivity High sensitivity tIE>>>value Ith> activation 0 � 1 1 0-1 1 50 to 4000 1 10 to 8000 5 2 to 1000 1 0 to 15000 1 0 - 1 1 F24 0 F24 0 F1 1/100 50 IEn 1/1000 10 IEn 1/1000 2 IEn 1/100 s F1 1 F24 0 P122-P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P122-P123 Ith> Threshold Ith> k value Ith> trip threshold Ith> alarm activation Ith> alarm threshold Thermal overload time constant I< activation 10 to 320 5 100 to 150 1 50 to 200 1 0 - 1 1 50 to 200 1 1 to 200 1 0-1 1 1/100 F1 8 P122-P123 1/100 F1 105 P122-P123 % F1 100 P122-P123 F24 0 P122-P123 % F1 90 P122-P123 mn F1 1 P122-P123 F24 0 P122-P123 I< threshold I2> activation 0 to 100 1 0-1 1 % In F1 20 F24 0 P122-P123 P122-P123 I2> threshold I2> time delay type I2> IDMT type I2> TMS value 10 to 4000 1 0 to 2 1 0 to 9 1 25 to 1500 1 1/100 In F1 10 F27a 0 F3a 1 1/1000 F1 25 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P12x /EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 18/190 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Address Group Description Values range 0261 I2> K value (RI) 100 to 10000 0262 tI2> value 0 to 15000 0263 I2> Reset type 0 - 1 0264 I2> RTMS value 25 to 3200 0265 I2> tRESET value 4 to 10000 0266 I2>> activation 0 � 1 0267 I2>> Threshold 10 � 4000 0268 t2>> value 0 to 15000 0269 to Reserved 026D 026E Next... Inhibition of I< on 52A 0-1 [37] I< 026F tI< value 0 to 15000 0270 [79] Autoreclose Recloser activation 0 - 1 0271 CB position active 0 - 1 0272-0273 Supervision window 1 to 60000 0274 External blocking input 0 � 1 0275 � Reserved 0276 0277 Dead time 1 5 to 30000 0278 Dead time 2 5 to 30000 0279- Dead time 3 5 to 60000 027A 027B- Dead time 4 5 to 60000 027C 027D- Reclaim time 2 to 60000 027E 027F- Inhibit time 2 to 60000 0280 0281 Recloser cycles for phase 0 to 4 faults 0282 Recloser cycles for earth 0 to 4 faults 0283 I> Phase cycle configuration 0 � 2222 0284 I>> Phase cycle 0 � 2222 configuration 0285 I>>> Phase cycle 0 � 2222 configuration 0286 IE> Phase cycle 0 � 2222 configuration 0287 IE>> Phase cycle 0 � 2222 configuration 0288 IE>>> Phase cycle 0 � 2222 configuration 0289 TAUX1 cycle configuration 0 � 3333 (phase group) 028A TAUX2 cycle configuration 0 � 3333 (earth group) 028B Trips nb / time blocks AR 0-1 (function activation) 028C CB Operations number / 2 - 100 time threshold 028D Period for CB Operations 10 to 1440 number / time 028E- Minimum Dead Time 5 to 60000 028F for tI> 0290-0291 Minimum Dead Time 5 to 60000 for tI>> 0292-0293 Minimum Dead Time 5 to 60000 for tI>>> 0294-0295 Minimum Dead Time 5 to 60000 for tIE> 0296-0297 Minimum Dead Time 5 to 60000 for tIE>> Step Unit Format Fault Value Range 5 1/1000 F1 100 P122-P123 1 1/100 s F1 1 F27a 0 1 1/1000 F1 25 1 1/100 s F1 4 1 F24 0 1 1/100 In F1 10 1 1/100 s F1 0 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P120 to P123 1 F24 0 P122 P123 1 1/100 s F1 1 F24 0 1 F1 0 1 1/100 s F18 1 1 F24 0 0 P122-P123 P123 P123 P123 P123 P120 to P123 1 1/100 s F1 5 1 1/100 s F1 5 1 1/100 s F18 5 P123 P123 P123 1 1/100 s F18 5 P123 1 1/100 s F18 2 P123 1 1/100 s F18 2 P123 1 F1 0 P123 1 F1 0 P123 1 F49 0 P123 1 F49 0 P123 1 F49 0 P123 1 F49 0 P123 1 F49 0 P123 1 F49 0 P123 1 F49 0 P123 1 F49 0 P123 1 F24 0 P123 1 F1 10 P123 10 mn F1 10 P123 1 1/100 s F18 5 P123 1 1/100 s F18 5 P123 1 1/100 s F18 5 P123 1 1/100 s F18 5 P123 1 1/100 s F18 5 P123 Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 19/190 Address Group Description 0298-0299 Minimum Dead Time for tIE>>> 029A- Reserved 029F 02A0 [50N/51N] Ie_d> Ie_d> activation 02A1 Ie_d> Threshold 02A2 02A3 02A4 02A5 Ie_d> time delay type Ie_d> IDMT curve type Ie_d> TMS value Ie_d> K value (RI curve) 02A6 02A7 02A8 02A9 02AA 02AB to 02AF 02B0 02B1 [50N/51N] Ie_d>> tIe_d> value Ie_d> reset type Ie_d> RTMS value Ie_d> tRESET value Ie_d> RXIDG curve (Belgium) Reserved Ie_d>> activation Ie_d>> Threshold 02B2 02B3 02B4 02B5 Ie_d>> time delay type Ie_d>> IDMT curve type Ie_d>> TMS value Ie_d>> K value (RI curve) 02B6 02B7 02B8 02B9 02BA tIe_d>> value Ie_d>> reset type Ie_d>> RTMS value Ie_d>> tRESET value Ie_d>> RXIDG curve (Belgium) Values range Step Unit Format Fault Value Range 5 to 60000 1 1/100 s F18 5 P123 0-1 1 10 to 4000 1 0 to 1 1 0 to 11 1 25 to 1500 1 100 to 5 10000 0 to 15000 1 0 - 1 1 25 to 3200 1 0 to 60000 1 0 to 7 0 0-1 1 10 to 4000 1 0 to 1 1 0 to 11 1 25 to 1500 1 100 to 5 10000 0 to 15000 1 0 - 1 1 25 to 3200 1 0 to 60000 1 0 to 7 0 F24 0 1/100 F1 10 IEn F27a 0 F3a 1 1/1000 F1 25 1/1000 F1 100 1/100 s F1 4 F27a 0 1/1000 F1 25 1/100 s F1 0 1 F3b 0 0 F24 0 1/100 F1 10 IEn F27a 0 F3a 1 1/1000 F1 25 1/1000 F1 100 1/100 s F1 4 F27a 0 1/1000 F1 25 1/100 s F1 0 1 F3b 0 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P120 to P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 3.5 Page 3h (Access in reading and in writing) The same as page 2H except addresses are 03XX instead of 02XX. 3.6 Page 4h Access in writing Address Group 0400 0401 0402 Remote control 0403 Description Values range Remote control Part 1/2 0 to 31 Reserved Remote contro of output 0 to 511 relays in maintenance mode Remote control Part 2/2 0 to 1 Step 1 1 1 Unit Format Fault Value Range F9a 0 P120 to P123 0 P120 to P123 F39 0 P122-P123 F9b 0 P122-P123 3.7 Page 5h 3.7.1 For P121 P122 and P123 Address (hex) 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 0505 0506 0507 0508 Group Bool Equations Description Equation A.00 operator Equation A.00 operand Equation A.01 operator Equation A.01 operand Equation A.02 operator Equation A.02 operand Equation A.03 operator Equation A.03 operand Equation A.04 operator Values range Step 0 - 1 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 Unit Format Def. Value F70 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 P12x /EN CT/Gd6 Page 20/190 Address (hex) 0509 050A 050B 050C 050D 050E 050F 0510 0511 0512 0513 0514 0515 0516 0517 0518 0519 051A 051B 051C 051D 051E 051F 0520 0521 0522 0523 0524 0525 0526 0527 0528 0529 052A 052B 052C 052D 052E 052F 0530 0531 0532 0533 0534 0535 0536 0537 0538 0539 053A 053B 053C 053D 053E 053F 0540 0541 0542 0543 0544 0545 0546 0547 0548 0549 054A Group Description Equation A.04 operand Equation A.05 operator Equation A.05 operand Equation A.06 operator Equation A.06 operand Equation A.07 operator Equation A.07 operand Equation A.08 operator Equation A.08 operand Equation A.09 operator Equation A.09 operand Equation A.10 operator Equation A.10 operand Equation A.11 operator Equation A.11 operand Equation A.12 operator Equation A.12 operand Equation A.13 operator Equation A.13 operand Equation A.14 operator Equation A.14 operand Equation A.15 operator Equation A.15 operand Equation B.00 operator Equation B.00 operand Equation B.01 operator Equation B.01 operand Equation B.02 operator Equation B.02 operand Equation B.03 operator Equation B.03 operand Equation B.04 operator Equation B.04 operand Equation B.05 operator Equation B.05 operand Equation B.06 operator Equation B.06 operand Equation B.07 operator Equation B.07 operand Equation B.08 operator Equation B.08 operand Equation B.09 operator Equation B.09 operand Equation B.10 operator Equation B.10 operand Equation B.11 operator Equation B.11 operand Equation B.12 operator Equation B.12 operand Equation B.13 operator Equation B.13 operand Equation B.14 operator Equation B.14 operand Equation B.15 operator Equation B.15 operand Equation C.00 operator Equation C.00 operand Equation C.01 operator Equation C.01 operand Equation C.02 operator Equation C.02 operand Equation C.03 operator Equation C.03 operand Equation C.04 operator Equation C.04 operand Equation C.05 operator Communications MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Values range Step 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 1 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 1 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 Unit Format Def. Value F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F70 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F70 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 Communications MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Address (hex) 054B 054C 054D 054E 054F 0550 0551 0552 0553 0554 0555 0556 0557 0558 0559 055A 055B 055C 055D 055E 055F 0560 0561 0562 0563 0564 0565 0566 0567 0568 0569 056A 056B 056C 056D 056E 056F 0570 0571 0572 0573 0574 0575 0576 0577 0578 0579 057A 057B 057C 057D 057E 057F 0580 0581 0582 0583 0584 0585 0586 0587 0588 0589 058A 058B 058C Group Description Equation C.05 operand Equation C.06 operator Equation C.06 operand Equation C.07 operator Equation C.07 operand Equation C.08 operator Equation C.08 operand Equation C.09 operator Equation C.09 operand Equation C.10 operator Equation C.10 operand Equation C.11 operator Equation C.11 operand Equation C.12 operator Equation C.12 operand Equation C.13 operator Equation C.13 operand Equation C.14 operator Equation C.14 operand Equation C.15 operator Equation C.15 operand Equation D.00 operator Equation D.00 operand Equation D.01 operator Equation D.01 operand Equation D.02 operator Equation D.02 operand Equation D.03 operator Equation D.03 operand Equation D.04 operator Equation D.04 operand Equation D.05 operator Equation D.05 operand Equation D.06 operator Equation D.06 operand Equation D.07 operator Equation D.07 operand Equation D.08 operator Equation D.08 operand Equation D.09 operator Equation D.09 operand Equation D.10 operator Equation D.10 operand Equation D.11 operator Equation D.11 operand Equation D.12 operator Equation D.12 operand Equation D.13 operator Equation D.13 operand Equation D.14 operator Equation D.14 operand Equation D.15 operator Equation D.15 operand Equation E.00 operator Equation E.00 operand Equation E.01 operator Equation E.01 operand Equation E.02 operator Equation E.02 operand Equation E.03 operator Equation E.03 operand Equation E.04 operator Equation E.04 operand Equation E.05 operator Equation E.05 operand Equation E.06 operator P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Values range Step 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 1 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 1 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 Page 21/190 Unit Format Def. Value F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F70 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F70 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 P12x /EN CT/Gd6 Page 22/190 Address (hex) 058D 058E 058F 0590 0591 0592 0593 0594 0595 0596 0597 0598 0599 059A 059B 059C 059D 059E 059F 05A0 05A1 05A2 05A3 05A4 05A5 05A6 05A7 05A8 05A9 05AA 05AB 05AC 05AD 05AE 05AF 05B0 05B1 05B2 05B3 05B4 05B5 05B6 05B7 05B8 05B9 05BA 05BB 05BC 05BD 05BE 05BF 05C0 05C1 05C2 05C3 05C4 05C5 05C6 05C7 05C8 050C9 05CA 05CB 05CC 05CD 05CE Group Description Equation E.06 operand Equation E.07 operator Equation E.07 operand Equation E.08 operator Equation E.08 operand Equation E.09 operator Equation E.09 operand Equation E.10 operator Equation E.10 operand Equation E.11 operator Equation E.11 operand Equation E.12 operator Equation E.12 operand Equation E.13 operator Equation E.13 operand Equation E.14 operator Equation E.14 operand Equation E.15 operator Equation E.15 operand Equation F.00 operator Equation F.00 operand Equation F.01 operator Equation F.01 operand Equation F.02 operator Equation F.02 operand Equation F.03 operator Equation F.03 operand Equation F.04 operator Equation F.04 operand Equation F.05 operator Equation F.05 operand Equation F.06 operator Equation F.06 operand Equation F.07 operator Equation F.07 operand Equation F.08 operator Equation F.08 operand Equation F.09 operator Equation F.09 operand Equation F.10 operator Equation F.10 operand Equation F.11 operator Equation F.11 operand Equation F.12 operator Equation F.12 operand Equation F.13 operator Equation F.13 operand Equation F.14 operator Equation F.14 operand Equation F.15 operator Equation F.15 operand Equation G.00 operator Equation G.00 operand Equation G.01 operator Equation G.01 operand Equation G.02 operator Equation G.02 operand Equation G.03 operator Equation G.03 operand Equation G.04 operator Equation G.04 operand Equation G.05 operator Equation G.05 operand Equation G.06 operator Equation G.06 operand Equation G.07 operator Communications MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Values range Step 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 1 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 1 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 Unit Format Def. Value F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F70 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F70 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 Communications MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Address (hex) 05CF 05D0 05D1 05D2 05D3 05D4 05D5 05D6 05D7 05D8 05D9 05DA 05DB 05DC 05DD 05DE 05DF 05E0 05E1 05E2 05E3 05E4 05E5 05E6 05E7 05E8 05E9 05EA 05EB 05EC 05ED 05EE 05EF 05F0 05F1 05F2 05F3 05F4 05F5 05F6 05F7 05F8 05F9 05FA 05FB 05FC 05FD 05FE 05FF Group Description Equation G.07 operand Equation G.08 operator Equation G.08 operand Equation G.09 operator Equation G.09 operand Equation G.10 operator Equation G.10 operand Equation G.11 operator Equation G.11 operand Equation G.12 operator Equation G.12 operand Equation G.13 operator Equation G.13 operand Equation G.14 operator Equation G.14 operand Equation G.15 operator Equation G.15 operand Equation H.00 operator Equation H.00 operand Equation H.01 operator Equation H.01 operand Equation H.02 operator Equation H.02 operand Equation H.03 operator Equation H.03 operand Equation H.04 operator Equation H.04 operand Equation H.05 operator Equation H.05 operand Equation H.06 operator Equation H.06 operand Equation H.07 operator Equation H.07 operand Equation H.08 operator Equation H.08 operand Equation H.09 operator Equation H.09 operand Equation H.10 operator Equation H.10 operand Equation H.11 operator Equation H.11 operand Equation H.12 operator Equation H.12 operand Equation H.13 operator Equation H.13 operand Equation H.14 operator Equation H.14 operand Equation H.15 operator Equation H.15 operand 3.7.2 For P120 Reserved P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Values range Step 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 1 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 0 - 3 1 0 - 36 1 Page 23/190 Unit Format Def. Value F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F70 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 F71 0 F72 0 P12x /EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 24/190 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 3.8 Page 6h Read and write access Address 0600 0601 to 061F 0620 0621 Group Description Alarms inhibition Reserved Output relays Input 1 allocation Input 2 0622 Input 3 0623 Input 4 0624 Input 5 0625 Input 6 0626 Input 7 0627 tI> phase A 0628 tI> phase B 0629 tI> phase C 062A Do not use 062B Ie_d> 062C tIe_d> 062D [79] ext locked 062E tAux5 062F Free 0630 0631 0632 0633 0634 to 063F 0640 0641 0642 0643 0644 0645 0646 0647 0648 0649 064A 064B 064C 064D 064E 064F 0650 0651 0652 0653 Automation Inrush Inrush activation Inrush blocking selection Inrush harmonic 2 ratio tInrush_reset Free for automation Equation tempos Output relay allocation Equation A rising tempo Equation A falling tempo Equation B rising tempo Equation B falling tempo Equation C rising tempo Equation C falling tempo Equation D rising tempo Equation D falling tempo Equation E rising tempo Equation E falling tempo Equation F rising tempo Equation F falling tempo Equation G rising tempo Equation G falling tempo Equation H rising tempo Equation H falling tempo Equation A assignation to outputs Equation B assignation to outputs Equation C assignation to outputs Equation D assignation to outputs Values Ste range p Unit Format Fault Value Range F59 P120 to P123 1 F14 1 F14 1 F14 1 F14 1 F14 1 F14 1 F14 1 F14 1 F14 1 F14 1 F14 1 F14 1 F14 1 F14 0-31 1 F14 100-350 0 - 200 F24 F8c 1 0.1% F1 10 1/100 s F1 0 - 60000 1 0 - 60000 1 0 - 60000 1 0 - 60000 1 0 - 60000 1 0 - 60000 1 0 - 60000 1 0 - 60000 1 0 - 60000 1 0 - 60000 1 0 - 60000 1 0 - 60000 1 0 - 60000 1 0 - 60000 1 0 - 60000 1 0 - 60000 1 1 1 1 1 1/100 s F1 1/100 s F1 1/100 s F1 1/100 s F1 1/100 s F1 1/100 s F1 1/100 s F1 1/100 s F1 1/100 s F1 1/100 s F1 1/100 s F1 1/100 s F1 1/100 s F1 1/100 s F1 1/100 s F1 1/100 s F1 F14 F14 F14 F14 0 P120 to P123 0 P120 to P123 0 P120 to P123 0 P120 to P123 0 P120 to P123 0 P120 to P123 0 P120 to P123 0 P120 to P123 0 P120 to P123 0 P120 to P123 0 P122 - P123 0 P122 - P123 0 P122 - P123 0 P123 0 P123 P120 to 0123 0 P122-P123 0 P122-P123 200 P122-P123 0 P122-P123 0 0 P121 to 123 0 P121 to 123 0 P121 to 123 0 P121 to 123 0 P121 to 123 0 P121 to 123 0 P121 to 123 0 P121 to P123 0 P121 to P123 0 P121 to P123 0 P121 to P123 0 P121 to P123 0 P121 to P123 0 P121 to P123 0 P121 to P123 0 P121 to P123 0 P121 to P123 0 P121 to P123 0 P121 to P123 0 P121 to P123 Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 25/190 Address 0654 Group 0655 0656 0657 0658 0659 065A 065B 065C to 066F 0670 to 0674 0675 0676 0677 LEDs allocation Do not use Records Output relays allocation Aux inputs 0678 0679 067A 067B 067C 067D 067E 067F 0680 Automation Automation / SOTF LEDs allocation Description Equation E assignation to outputs Equation F assignation to outputs Equation G assignation to outputs Equation H assignation to outputs Led 5 Part 3/4 Led 6 Part 3/4 Led 7 Part 3/4 Led 8 Part 3/4 Free Do not use Dist. records number I< Auxiliary timer 5 Blocking logic 1 Part 2/2 Blocking logic 2 Part 2/2 SOTF source activation Ie_d>> tIe_d>> Led 5 Part 4/4 Led 6 Part 4/4 Led 7 Part 4/4 Led 8 Part 4/4 Values range 1 to 5 0 - 31 0 � 20000 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 � 63 Ste p Unit Format Fault Value Range 1 F14 0 P121 to P123 1 F14 0 P121 to P123 1 F14 0 P121 to P123 1 F14 0 P121 to P123 1 F19c 0 1 F19c 0 1 F19c 0 1 F19c 0 0 1 1 1 F1 5 F14 0 1 1/100s F1 0 1 F8b 0 1 F8b 0 1 F75 0 1 F14 0 1 F14 0 1 F19d 0 1 F19d 0 1 F19d 0 1 F19d 0 P122-P123 P122-P123 P123 P123 P123 P123 P122 - P123 P122 - P123 3.9 Page 7h Access in quick reading only (MODBUS 07 function) Address Group 0700 Quick reading byte Description relay status Values range Step Unit Format Fault Value 1 - F23 0 3.10 Page 8h (P122, P123) Time synchronisation: access in writing for n words (function 16). The time synchronisation format is based on 8 bits (4 words). If date Format (0135h) is private date then format is: Timer Year Month Day Hour Minute Milliseconds Address (hex) 0800 0801 0802 0803 Nb bytes 2 1 (Hi) 1 (Lo) 1 (Hi) 1 (Lo) 2 Mask (hex) FFFF FF FF FF FF FFFF Values range 1994-2093 1 -12 1 - 31 0 - 23 0 - 59 0 - 59999 Unit Years Months Days Hours Minutes ms P12x /EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 26/190 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Else format is ( Inverted IEC 870-5-4 CP56Time2a): Timer Year Month Day of the week Day of the month Season Hour Date validity Minute Milliseconds Address (hex) 0800 Nb bytes 1 (Hi) 1 (Lo) 0801 0802 0803 1 (Hi) 1 (Lo) 1 (Lo) 1 (Hi) 1 (Hi) 1 (Lo) 1 (Lo) 2 Mask (hex) 7F 0F E0 1F 80 1F 80 3F FFFF Values range 94-99 (1994-1999) 0-93 (2000-2093) 1 - 12 1 � 7 (Monday � Sunday) 1 - 31 0 - 1 (summer � winter) 0 - 23 0 - 1 (valid � invalid) 0 - 59 0 - 59999 Unit Years Months Days Days Hours Minutes ms 3.11 3.11.1 3.11.2 3.11.3 Pages 9h to 21h Disturbance record data (25 pages). Access in words writing (function 03) Each disturbance mapping page contain 250 words. Addresses 0900h to 09FAh 0A00h to 0AFAh 0B00h to 0BFAh 0C00h to 0CFAh 0D00h to 0DFAh 0E00h to 0EFAh 0F00h to 0FFAh 1000h to 10FAh 1100h to 11FAh 1200h to 12FAh 1300h to 13FAh 1400h to 14FAh 1500h to 15FAh 1600h to 16FAh 1700h to 17FAh 1800h to 18FAh 1900h to 19FAh 1A00h to 1AFAh 1B00h to 1BFAh 1C00h to 1CFAh 1D00h to 1DFAh 1E00h to 1EFAh 1F00h to 1FFAh 2000h to 20FAh 2100h to 21FAh Contents 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words 250 disturbance data words NB: The disturbance data pages contain values of one channel from one given disturbance record. Meaning of each value channel � IA, IB, IC and IO channels: The value is an signed 16 bits word equivalent to the ADC value Calculation formula for phase current values Line phase current value (primary value) = phase sampled value x phase primary CT / phase internal CT ratio (mapping address 0007 = 800) x 2 Calculation formula for earth current values The formula depends of nominal earth current: Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 27/190 0.1 to 40 Ion range Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value x earth primary CT / earth internal CT ratio (mapping address 0008 = 800) x 2 0.01 to 8 Ion range Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value x earth primary CT / earth internal CT ratio (mapping address 0008 = 3277) x 2 0.002 to 1 Ion range Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value x earth primary CT / earth internal CT ratio (mapping address 0008 = 32700) x 2 � Frequency channel: Time between two samples in microseconds � Logic channels: Logic channel Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 MODBUS, COURIER & DNP 3.0 Trip relay (RL1) Output relay 2 Output relay 3 Output relay 4 Watch-dog relay Output relay 5 Output relay 6 Output relay 7 Output relay 8 Reserved Logic input 1 Logic input 2 Logic input 3 Logic input 4 Logic input 5 Reserved IEC 61870-5-103 Earth Starting General Starting CB Fail General Trip tI> tI>> tI>>> tIE> tIE>> tIE>>> Logic input 1 Logic input 2 Logic input 3 Logic input 4 Logic input 5 Reserved 3.12 Page 22h Disturbance record index frame (7 to 9 Words) Access in word reading (function 03) 2200h Addresses Contents Disturbance data index frame Disturbance record index frame Word n� 1 n� 2 n� 3 n� 4 n� 5 n� 6 n� 7 n� 8 n� 9 Contents Disturbance record number Disturbance record finish date (second) Disturbance record finish date (second) Disturbance record finish date (millisecond) Disturbance record finish date (millisecond) Disturbance record starting condition: 1: tripping command (RL1) 2: instantaneous 3: remote command 4: logic input Frequency at the post-time beginning (=0) Optional (=0) Optional P12x /EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 28/190 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 3.13 Page 35h Addresses 3500h to 35FAh. Event record data (9 words) Word n� 1: Event meaning Word n� 2: MODBUS associated value Word n� 3: MODBUS address Word n� 4: COURIER Cell address Words n� 5 & 6 if data format is private: Event date (second) number of seconds since 01/01/94 Words n� 7 & 8 if data format is private: Event date (millisecond) Words N�5, 6, 7, 8, if data format is Inverted IEC 870-5-4 CP56Time2a: See format � 0 Word n� 9: Acknowledge 0=event non acknowledged 1= event acknowledged Code Meaning of the event 00 No event 01 Control close order (remote & HMI) 02 Control trip order (remote & HMI) 03 Disturbance recording start 04 Trip output delatch 05 Setting change 06 Remote thermal reset 07 Maintenance Mode 08 Control relay in maintenance mode 09 I> 10 I>> 11 I>>> 12 IE> 13 IE>> 14 IE>>> 15 Thermal overload alarm 16 Thermal overload threshold 17 tI> 18 tI>> 19 tI>>> 20 tIE> 21 tIE>> 22 tIE>>> 23 tI< 24 Broken conductor 25 tAux 1 26 tAux 2 27 CB failure 28 Selective logic 1 29 Selective logic 2 30 Blocking logic 1 31 Blocking logic 2 32 Setting group change 33 52a 34 52b Type F9a F9a F74 F9a Address F9a F9a F39 F17 F17 F17 F16 F16 F16 F37 F37 F17 F17 F17 F16 F16 F16 F16 F38 F38 F38 F38 F20a F20a F20a F20a 1 or 2 F20a F20a MODBUS address 013h 013h 013h 0400h 013h 014h 015h 016h 017h 018h 019h 020h 020h 014h 015h 016h 017h 018h 019h 021h 023h 023h 023h 023h 011h 011h 011h 011h 011h 011h 011h COURIER Cell 021 021 021 023 023 023 023 023 023 023 023 023 023 023 023 023 023 023 024 024 024 024 020 020 020 020 020 020 020 Communications MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Code Meaning of the event Type 35 Acknowledgement of the output relay latched, F20a by logic input, 36 SF6 F20a 37 Cold load start F20a 38 Change of input logic state F12 39 Thermal overload trip F37 40 tI> trip F13 41 tI>> trip F13 42 tI>>> trip F13 43 tIE> trip F13 44 tIE>> trip F13 45 tIE>>> trip F13 46 tI< trip F13 47 Broken conductor trip F13 48 tAux 1 trip F13 49 tAux 2 trip F13 50 Output relays command F39 51 Front panel single alarm acknowl. 52 Front panel all alarms acknowledge 53 Remote single alarm acknowledge 54 Remote all alarms acknowledge 55 Major material alarm F45 56 Minor material alarm F45 57 I2> F16 58 tI2> F16 59 Operation time F43 60 Operation numbers F43 61 Sum of switched square amps F43 62 Trip circuit supervision F43 63 Closing time F43 64 Reclose successful F43 65 Recloser final trip F43 66 Recloser settings error or configuration error F43 67 I2> trip F13 68 General Starting (IEC103) F1 69 Recloser active (IEC103) F43 70 CB Closed by autoreclosure (IEC103) 71 Relays latching F13 72 External CB failure F20b 73 I< F16 74 I2>> F16 75 tI2>> F16 76 I2>> Trip F16 77 Reserved 78 Latching Trip Relay (RL1) F22 79 tAux 3 F38 80 tAux 3 trip F13 81 tAux 4 F38 82 tAux 4 trip F13 83 t Reset I> F17 84 t Reset I>> F17 85 t Reset IE> F16 86 t Reset IE>> F16 87 t Reset I2> F16 88 TRIP Breaker Failure F13 89 t BF / Ext. Breaker Failure F38 90 Manual Close (input) F20b 91 t SOTF F54 92 t SOTF trip F13 93 Local Mode (IEC 103) F20b 94 Reset leds (IEC103) 95 Recloser internal locked F43 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 29/190 MODBUS address 011h 011h 011h 010h 013h 013h 013h 013h 013h 013h 013h 013h 013h 013h 013h 013h COURIER Cell 020 020 020 020 021 021 021 021 021 021 021 021 021 021 021 021 00Fh 022 00Fh 022 022h 024 022h 024 028h 024 028h 024 028h 024 028h 024 028h 024 028h 024 028h 025 028h 024 013h 021 009h 028h 02Eh 02Ah 020 021h 023 022h 024 022h 024 013h 021 023h 025 013h 021 023h 025 013h 021 014h 025 015h 025 017h 025 018h 025 022h 025 013h 021 023h 025 02Ah 020 070h 025 013h 021 02Ah 020 028h 024 P12x /EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 30/190 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Code Meaning of the event 96 Recloser in progress 97 Synchronization > 10s 98 Inrush blocking 99 tEquation A 100 tEquation B 101 tEquation C 102 tEquation D 103 tEquation E 104 tEquation F 105 tEquation G 106 tEquation H 107 tEquation A trip 108 tEquation B trip 109 tEquation C trip 110 tEquation D trip 111 tEquation E trip 112 tEquation F trip 113 tEquation G trip 114 tEquation H trip 115 CB activity Operation time 116 Ie_d> 117 tIe_d> 118 tIe_d> trip 119 t Reset Ie_d> 120 tAux 5 121 tAux 5 trip 122 Do not use 123 Recloser external locked 124 Hardware alarm with main power supply 125 Hardware alarm with -3.3v power supply 126 Hardware alarm with 5.0v power supply 127 Hardware alarm with 3.3v power supply 128 Hardware alarm with 12v power supply 129 Hardware alarm with 1.3v power supply 130 Hardware alarm with 0 v power supply 131 Hardware alarm with transformer 1 132 Hardware alarm with transformer 2 133 Hardware alarm with transformer 3 134 Hardware alarm with transformer 4 135 Hardware alarm with transformer 5 136 Hardware alarm with transformer 6 137 Hardware alarm with transformer 7 138 Hardware alarm with transformer 8 139 Hardware alarm with transformer 9 140 Ie_d>> 141 tIe_d>> 142 tIe_d>> trip 143 t Reset Ie_d>> 144 Alarm with cortec mismatch Type F43 F23 F38 F61 F61 F61 F61 F61 F61 F61 F61 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F13 F43 F16 F16 F13 F16 F38 F13 F43 F2 unit mV F2 unit mV F2 unit mV F2 unit mV F2 unit mV F2 unit mV F2 unit mV F2 unit CAN F2 unit CAN F2 unit CAN F2 unit CAN F2 unit CAN F2 unit CAN F2 unit CAN F2 unit CAN F2 unit CAN F16 F16 F13 F16 MODBUS address 028h COURIER Cell 025 071h 071h 071h 071h 071h 071h 071h 071h 028h 073h 073h 013h 073h 023h 013h 028h 00FH 038H 038H 038H 038H 038H 038H 039H 039H 039H 039H 039H 039H 039H 039H 039H 085h 085h 013h 085h 025 026 026 021 026 024 ?? 021 024 026 ?? 026 ?? 021 ?? 026 ?? NOTE: The double arrow means the event is generated on event occurrence () and on event disappearance (). On event occurrence, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to � 1 �. On event disappearance, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to � 0 �. Communications MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 3.14 Page 36h Most older event data Access in word reading (function 03) 3600h Addresses Most older event data Contents 3.15 Page 37h Fault record value data Access in word reading (function 03) 3700h 3701h 3702h ... 3718h Addresses Fault value record n�1 Fault value record n�2 Fault value record n�3 ... Fault value record n�25 Contents P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 31/190 Each record is made up of 16 words: Word Nr. 1 PRIVATE FORMAT: 2 & 3 PRIVATE FORMAT: 4 & 5 IEC FORMAT: 2 to 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Contents Fault number Fault date (number of seconds since 01/01/94) Fault date (milli-seconds) Fault date (see format of time synchronisation, address 0800h) Fault date (season) 0= winter 1= summer 2= undefined Active setting group during the fault (1 or 2) Fault type origin (format F80) Fault protection origin (format F81) Fault amplitude value (Fourier module) Phase A current value (Fourier module) Phase B current value (Fourier module) Phase C current value (Fourier module) Earth current value (Fourier module) Earth derived current value (Fourier module) Acknowledgement: 0 = fault not acknowledged 1 = fault acknowledged 3.15.1 3.15.2 Calculation formula for phase current values Line phase current value (primary value) = phase sampled value (e.g. word 10, 11, 12 or 13) x phase primary CT / phase internal CT ratio (mapping address 0007 = 800) Calculation formula for earth current values The formula depends of nominal earth current: 0.1 to 40 Ion range Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value (word 10 or 14) x earth primary CT ratio/ earth internal CT ratio (mapping address 0008 = 800) 0.01 to 8 Ion range Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. word 10 or 14) x earth primary CT ratio/ earth internal CT ratio (mapping address 0008 = 3277) P12x /EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 32/190 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 0.002 to 1 Ion range Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. word 10 or 14) x earth primary CT ratio/ earth internal CT ratio (mapping address 0008 = 32700) 3.16 Page 3Eh Most older Fault record value data Access in word reading (function 03) Addresses 3E00h Most older Fault record Contents Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 33/190 3.17 Pages 38h to 3Ch Selection of the disturbance record and channel (11 to 13 words are uploaded for each address reading) Access in word reading (function 03) 38x0h 38x1h 38x2h 38x3h 38x4h 38x5h 39x0h 39x1h 39x2h 39x3h 39x4h 39x5h 3Ax0h 3Ax1h 3Ax2h 3Ax3h 3Ax4h 3Ax5h 3Bx0h 3Bx1h 3Bx2h 3Bx3h 3Bx4h 3Bx5h 3Cx0h 3Cx1h 3Cx2h 3Cx3h 3Cx4h 3Cx5h Address Disturbance record number 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 Format IA IB IC IE Frequency Logic input and outputs IA IB IC IE Frequency Logic input and outputs IA IB IC IE Frequency Logic input and outputs IA IB IC IE Frequency Logic input and outputs IA IB IC IE Frequency Logic input and outputs If x = 0 then the first 6250 word are selected, if x=1 the following 6250 word are selected, and so on... Word n� 1: Number of samples included in the mapping Word n� 2: Sample number in pre-time Word n� 3: Sample number in post-time Word n� 4: Phase primary CT ratio Word n� 5: Phase secondary CT ratio Word n� 6: Earth primary CT ratio Word n� 7: Earth secondary CT ratio Word n� 8: Phase internal CT ratio Word n� 9: Earth internal CT ratio Word n� 10: Mapping last page number Word n� 11: Number of words in the mapping last page Word n� 12: Coefficient of samples conversion (=1) (Optional) Word n� 13: Reference of samples conversion (=1) (Optional) P12x /EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 34/190 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 3.17.1 3.17.2 Calculation formula for phase current values Line phase current value (primary value) = phase sampled value (e.g. address 3800h, 3801h or 3802h) x phase primary CT x (1 / internal phase ratio*) x 2 (*) Mapping address 0007 = 800 Calculation formula for earth current values Line earth current value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. address 3803h) x earth primary CT x (1 / internal earth ratio*) x 2 (*) The internal earth ratio depends of nominal earth current: 0.1 to 40 Ion range Mapping address 0008 = 800 0.01 to 8 Ion range Mapping address 0008 = 3277 0.002 to 1 Ion range Mapping address 0008 = 32700 3.18 Pages 3Dh Number of disturbance records available Access in word reading (function 03) 3D00h Addresses Contents Number of disturbance records available Word n� 1: Number of disturbance records available Word n� 2: Oldest disturbance record number (n) Words n� 3 & 4: Oldest disturbance record date (second) Words n� 5 & 6: Oldest disturbance record date (millisecond) Word n� 7: Disturbance record starting origin 1= trip relay (RL1) 2= instantaneous threshold 3= remote command 4= logic input Word n� 8: Acknowledge Word n� 9: Number of Previous Disturbance record (n+1) Words n� 10 & 11: Previous disturbance record date (second) Words n� 12 & 13: Previous disturbance record date (millisecond) Word n� 14: Disturbance record starting origin 1= trip relay (RL1) 2= instantaneous threshold 3= remote command 4= logic input Word n� 15: Acknowledge Word n� 16: Number of Previous Disturbance record (n+2) Words n� 17 & 18: Previous disturbance record date (second) Words n� 19 & 20: Previous disturbance record date (millisecond) Word n� 21: Disturbance record starting origin 1= trip relay (RL1) Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Word n� 22: Word n� 23: Words n� 24 & 25: Words n� 26 & 27: Word n� 28: Word n� 29: Word n� 30: Words n� 31 & 32: Words n� 33 & 34: Word n� 35: Word n� 36: 2= instantaneous threshold 3= remote command 4= logic input Acknowledge Number of Previous Disturbance record (n+3) Previous disturbance record date (second) Previous disturbance record date (millisecond) Disturbance record starting origin 1= trip relay (RL1) 2= instantaneous threshold 3= remote command 4= logic input Acknowledge Number of Previous Disturbance record (n+4) Previous disturbance record date (second) Previous disturbance record date (millisecond) Disturbance record starting origin 1= trip relay (RL1) 2= instantaneous threshold 3= remote command 4= logic input Acknowledge Page 35/190 P12x /EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 36/190 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 4. F1 F2 F3a F3b F4 F5 F6a DESCRIPTION OF THE MAPPING FORMAT, MICOM P122 AND P123 CODE DESCRIPTION Unsigned integer � numerical data: 0 to 65535 Signed integer � numerical data: -32768 to 32767 Unsigned integer � curves type 0: STI (IEC) 1: SI (IEC) 2: VI (IEC) 3: EI (IEC) 4: LTI (IEC) 5: STI (C02) 6: MI (ANSI) 7: LTI (CO8) 8: VI (ANSI) 9: EI (ANSI) 10: RC (IEC) Rectifier curve 11: BPN (EDF) Unsigned integer � RXIDG curve type 0 : curve 1 (K = 0.3) 1 : curve 2 (K = 0.4) 2 : curve 3 (K= 0.5) 3 : curve 4 (K = 0.6) 4 : curve 5 (K = 0.7) 5 : curve 6 (K = 0.8) 6 : curve 7 (K = 0.9) 7 : curve 8 (K = 1.0) Unsigned integer: MODBUS speed 0: 300 1: 600 2: 1200 3: 2400 4: 4800 5: 9600 6: 19200 7: 38400 Unsigned integer: parity 0: without 1: even 2: odd Unsigned integer: Tripping configuration Part 1/2 bit 0: tI> bit 1: tI>> bit 2: tI>>> bit 3: tIE> bit 4: tIE>> bit 5: tIE>>> bit 6: I< bit 7: tIth> bit 8: Broken conductor detection bit 9: tAux 1 bit 10: tAux 2 bit 11: tI2> bit 12: tI2>> bit 13: tAux 3 bit 14: tAux 4 bit 15: Breaker Failure Communications MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 CODE F6b F7a F7b F8a F8b DESCRIPTION Tripping configuration Part 2/2 Bit 0: SOFT Bit 1: Control Trip (remote or HMI) Bit 2: t Boolean equation A Bit 3: t Boolean equation B Bit 4: t Boolean equation C Bit 5: t Boolean equation D Bit 6: t Boolean equation E Bit 7: t Boolean equation F Bit 8: t Boolean equation G Bit 9: t Boolean equation H Bit 10: tIe_d> Bit 11: tAux5 Bit 12: tIe_d>> Bit 13 to 15: Free Latching function configuration part 1/2 bit 0: I> latching bit 1: I>> bit 2: I>>> bit 3: IE> bit 4: IE>> bit 5: IE>>> bit 6: I< bit 7: tIth> bit 8: Broken conductor detection bit 9: tAux 1 bit 10: tAux 2 bit 11: tI2> bit 12: tI2>> bit 13: tAux 3 bit 14: tAux 4 bit 15: Breaker Failure Latching functions configuration part 2/2 bit 0: SOTF bit 1 to 9: Reserved bit 10: Ie_d> bit 11: tAux5 bit 12: Ie_d>> bit 13 to 15: Reserved Blocking logic configuration Part 1/2 bit 0: I> bit 1: I>> bit 2: I>>> bit 3: IE> bit 4: IE>> bit 5: IE>>> bit 6: reserved bit 7: tIth> bit 8: Broken conductor detection bit 9: tAux 1 bit 10: tAux 2 bit 11: tI2> bit 12: tI2>> bit 13: tAux 3 bit 14: tAux 4 bit 15: Ie_d> Blocking logic configuration Part 2/2 bit 0: tAux 5 bit 1: Ie_d>> P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 37/190 P12x /EN CT/Gd6 Page 38/190 CODE F8c F9a F9b F10 F11 F12 Communications MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 DESCRIPTION Inrush blocking configuration bit 0: I> bit 1: I>> bit 2: I>>> bit 3: IE> bit 4: IE>> bit 5: IE>>> bit 6: Ie_d>> bit 7: reserved bit 8: reserved bit 9: reserved bit 10: reserved bit 11: I2> bit 12: I2>> bit 13: Do not use bit 14: reserved bit 15: Ie_d> Remote controls Part 1/2 bit 0: Tripping contact delatched bit 1: 1st alarm acknowledge bit 2: All alarms acknowledge bit 3: Control trip order bit 4: Control close order bit 5: Setting group change bit 6: Thermal state reset bit 7: Peak And Rolling Value Reset Bit 8: Disturbance Record Starting Order Bit 9: Maintenance Mode Bit 10: Recloser Counter Reset Bit 11: Recloser Reset Bit 12: Local Manual Acknowledge Bit 13: Oldest Event Acknowledge Bit 14: Oldest Fault Acknowledge Bit 15: Hardware "Stat Reset" Alarm Acknowledge Remote controls Part 2/2 Bit 0: Launching IO harmonic calculation bit 1: Internally reserved for delatching of tripping relay only (RL1), and not like bit 0 in F9a. Bit 2: Acknowledgement of the oldest disturbance record bit 3: End of maintenance mode bit 4: Reset of Rolling Demands Data (average avlues and timers) bit 5: Reset of maximum values of the averages in sub period bit 6: leds reset bit 7: Internal reset of non latched tripping LED bit 8: communication Order 1 bit 9: communication Order 2 bit 10: communication Order 3 bit 11: communication Order 4 bit 12: Reset of SA� counter bit 13: Reset of trips counter bit 15: Reserved (R&D feature only) 2 characters ASCII 32 �127 = ASCII character1 32 � 127 = ASCII character 2 Reserved Unsigned integer: Logic input status bit 0: logic input number 1 bit 1: logic input number 2 bit 2: logic input number 3 bit 3: logic input number 4 bit 4: logic input number 5 bits 5 to 15: reserved Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 CODE F13 F14 F15a F15b F16 F17 F18 DESCRIPTION Unsigned integer: logic outputs status bit 0: logic output number RL1 (tripping) bit 1: logic output number RL2 bit 2: logic output number RL3 bit 3: logic output number RL4 bit 4: logic output number RL0 (watchdog) bit 5: logic output number RL5 bit 6: logic output number RL6 bit 7: logic output number RL7 bit 8: logic output number RL8 bits 9 to 15: reserved Unsigned integer: logic outputs configuration bit 0: selection logic output number RL2 bit 1: selection logic output number RL3 bit 2: selection logic output number RL4 bit 3: selection logic output number RL5 bit 4: selection logic output number RL6 bit 5: selection logic output number RL7 bit 6: selection logic output number RL8 Logical inputs allocation part 1/2 bit 0: Unlatch bit 1: 52 a bit 2: 52 b bit 3: CB fault (Lack of SF6) bit 4: tAux1 bit 5: tAux2 bit 6: Blocking logic 1 bit 7: Blocking logic 2 bit 8: Disturbance start bit 9: Cold load pick up bit 10: Logic selectivity 1 bit 11: Logic selectivity 2i bit 12: Setting group change bit 13: Autorecloser locking bit 14: Termal state reset bit 15: Trip circuit supervision Logical inputs allocation part 2/2 bit 0: Circuit Breaker Failure bit 1: Alarm LED reset bit 2: Maintenance mode bit 3: tAux3 bit 4: tAux4 bit 5: SOTF bit 6: Local mode bit 7: Synchronization bit 8: Control Trip bit 9: Control Close bit 10: tAux5 bit 11 to 15: reserved threshold earth information status bit 0: information threshold exceeded (IE> or IE>> or IE>>> or Ie_d>) bit 1: reserved bit 2: reserved bit 3: reserved bit 4: reserved bit 5: Instantaneous information (IE> or IE>> or IE>>> or Ie_d>) bit 6: Tripping information (tIE> or tIE>> or tIE>>> or tIe_d>) bits 7 to 15: reserved Unsigned integer: threshold phase information status bit 0: information thresold exceeded (I>, I>>, I>>>) bit 1: Instantaneous IA bit 2: Instantaneous IB bit 3: Instantaneous IC bit 4: Interlock bit 5: Instantaneous information I> or I>> or I>>> or I< bit 6: Tripping information tI> or tI>> or tI>>> or tI< bits 7 to 15: reserved Long integer Page 39/190 P12x /EN CT/Gd6 Page 40/190 CODE F19a F19b F19c F19d Communications DESCRIPTION Unsigned integer: LEDs allocation (1/4) bit 0: I> bit 1: tI> bit 2: I>> bit 3: tI>> bit 4: I>>> bit 5: tI>>> bit 6: IE> bit 7: tIE> bit 8: IE>> bit 9: tIE>> bit 10: IE>>> bit 11: tIE>>> bit 12: Thermal overload trip bit 13: tI2> bit 14: Broken conductor trip bit 15: CB failure Unsigned integer: LEDs allocation (2/4) bit 0: Logic input 1 bit 1: Logic input 2 bit 2: Logic input 3 bit 3: Logic input 4 bit 4: Logic input 5 bit 5: Recloser running bit 6: Recloser internal blocked bit 7: tAUX1 bit 8: tAUX2 bit 9: tI2>> bit 10: SOFT bit 11: tAux3 bit 12: tAux4 bit 13: t I > phase A bit 14: t I > phase B bit 15: t I > phase C LEDs allocation (3/4) bit 0: Equation A bit 1: Equation B bit 2: Equation C bit 3: Equation D bit 4: Equation E bit 5: Equation F bit 6: Equation G bit 7: Equation H bit 8: Ie_d> bit 9: tIe_d> bit 10: Do not use bit 11: I< bit 12: tI< bit 13: tAux5 bit 14: [79] external blocked bit 15: Ie_d>> LEDs allocation (4/4) bit 0: tIe_d>> bit 1: TCS MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Communications MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 CODE F20a F20b F21 F22 F23 F24 F25 F26 F27a F27b F28 DESCRIPTION Logical data status Part 1/2 bit 0: Selective scheme logic 1 bit 1: Selective scheme logic 2 bit 2: Relay delatch bit 3: CB position (52 a) bit 4: CB position (52 b) bit 5: Lack of SF6 bit 6: External Aux1 bit 7: External Aux2 bit 8: Blocking logic 1 bit 9: Blocking logic 2 bit 10: Disturbance record start bit 11: Cold load start bit 12: Setting group change bit 13: Recloser locked bit 14: Thermal state reset bit 15: Trip circuit supervision Logical data status Part 2/2 bit 0: CB Failure by external signalisation bit 1: LEDs alarms reset bit 2: Maintenance mode bit 3: External Aux3 bit 4: External Aux4 bit 5: Manual Close (SOFT/TOR) --> New name = "SOTF" bit 6: Local Mode bit 7: Synchronisation bit 8: Control Trip bit 9: Control Close bit 10: External Aux5 Unsigned integer: software version 10: Version 1.A 11: Version 1.B 20: Version 2.A ... Unsigned integer: Trip status bit 0: Trip output relay RL1 latched bit 1: Memorization of trip information bit 2 to bit 15: free Unsigned integer: relay status bit 0: Relay status bit 1: Minor material alarm bit 2: Presence of non-acknowledged event bit 3: Synchronisation state bit 4: Presence of non-acknowledged disturbance record bit 5: Presence of non-acknowledged fault record bit 6: reserved bit 7: reserved Status of the relay functions 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 2 ASCII characters By default display 1: IA measurement display (True RMS) 2: IB measurement display (True RMS) 3: IC measurement display (True RMS) 4: IN measurement display (True RMS) Type delay time 0: DMT time delay 1: IDMT time delay 2: RI time delay Type time delay with RXIDG curves 0: DMT time delay 1: IDMT time delay 2: RI time delay 3: RXIDG curves Communication data bits 0: 7 data bits 1: 8 data bits P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 41/190 P12x /EN CT/Gd6 Page 42/190 CODE F29 F30 F31 F32 F33 F34 F35 F36a F36b F37 Communications MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 DESCRIPTION Communication stop bits 0: 1 stop bit 1: 2 stop bits Communication availability 0: Communication non-available 1: Communication available Unsigned integer: Number of available event records 0: None 1: 1 event record available 2: 2 event records available 3: 3 event records available 4: 4 event records available 5: 5 event records available Disturbance record start condition on: 0: INSTANTANEOUS 1: TRIPPING Cold load pick-up sources bit 0: tI> bit 1: tI>> bit 2: tI>>> bit 3: tIE> bit 4: tIE>> bit 5: tIE>>> bit 6: Thermal overload trip bit 7: tI2> bit 8: tI2>> bit 9: tIe_d> bit 10: tIe_d>> bit 11 to 15: reserved Reserved Disturbance record upload running 0: No 1: Yes Memorised flags of non acknowledged alarms Part 1/3 bit 0: IE> bit 1: tIE> bit 2: IE>> bit 3: tIE>> bit 4: IE>>> bit 5: tIE>>> bit 6: Thermal overload alarm bit 7: Thermal overload trip bit 8: Broken conductor bit 9: CB failure bit 10: I2>> bit 11: I2> bit 12: tI2> bit 13: tAux 1 bit 14: tAux 2 bit 15: tI2>> Memorised flags of non acknowledged alarms Part 3/3 Bit 0: t Boolean Equation A Bit 1: t Boolean Equation B Bit 2: t Boolean Equation C Bit 3: t Boolean Equation D Bit 4: t Boolean Equation E Bit 5: t Boolean Equation F Bit 6: t Boolean Equation G Bit 7: t Boolean Equation H Bit 8: Ie_d>> Bit 9: tIe_d>> Thermal overload information bit 0: Thermal overload alarm bit 1: Thermal overload trip Communications MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 CODE F38 F39 F40 F41 F42 F43 DESCRIPTION Output information part 1/2 bit 0: reserved bit 1: CB failure bit 2: Pole A opening bit 3: Pole B opening bit 4: Pole C opening bit 5: Broken conductor bit 6: tAux 1 bit 7: tAux 2 bit 8: Broken conductor time delay bit 9: CB failure time delay bit 10: "Cold load pick up" temporization started bit 11: CB alarms or bits 0,1,2,4 of F43 bit 12: tAux 3 bit 13: tAux 4 bit 14: Inrush blocking bit 15: tAux 5 Output relays command bit 0: RL1 (trip) bit 1: RL2 bit 2: RL3 bit 3: RL0 (watch-dog) bit 4: RL4 bit 5: RL5 bit 6: RL6 bit 7: RL7 bit 8: RL8 Selective scheme logic configuration bit 0: tI>> bit 1: tI>>> bit 2: tIE>> bit 3: tIE>>> bit 4: tIe_d> bit 5: tIe_d>> Communication description 0: Front and rear MODBUS communication 1: Front MODBUS and rear Courier communication 2: Front MODBUS and rear IEC103 communication 3: Front MODBUS and rear DNP3 communication Peak value of max. & average measurement 5, 10, 15, 30 or 60 minutes CB supervision flags bit 0: CB operating time overreach bit 1: CB operation number overreach bit 2: Square Amps sum overreach bit 3: Trip circuit self-test bit 4: CB closing time overreach bit 5: Recloser int locked bit 6: Recloser successful bit 7: Recloser in progress bit 8: Closing command issued from recloser cycle bit 9: Recloser configuration error bit 10: Recloser in service bit 11: Recloser final trip bit 12: "CB operations number / time" overreach bit 13: Recloser external locked bit 14: Recloser reinitialized P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 43/190 P12x /EN CT/Gd6 Page 44/190 CODE F44 F45 F46 F47 F48 F49 F50 F51 F52 F53 F54 F56 F58 Communications MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 DESCRIPTION Memorised flags of non acknowledged alarms Part 2/3 bit 0: CB, operating time overreach bit 1: CB operation number overreach bit 2: Square Amps sum overreach bit 3: Trip circuit self-test bit 4: CB closing time overreach bit 5: tAux 3 bit 6: tAux 4 bit 7: External CB failure bit 8: SOFT bit 9: Ie_d> bit 10: tIe_d> bit 11: tAux5 bit 12: Do not use bit 13: Control trip bit 14: Autorecloser internal blocking bit 15: Autorecloser external blocking Device status bit 0: Watchdog bit 1: Communication failure bit 2: EEPROM data failure bit 3: Analogue failure bit 4: Datation failure bit 5: EEPROM calibration failure bit 6: SRAM failure bit 7: Battery failure bit 8: Reserved bit 9: Default settings alarm Bit 10: main power supply Bit 11: auxiliary power supplies Bit 12: transformers offset failurebit 13 to 15: reserved Remote controls Part 2/2 See format F9b Configuration of change of group selection. Setting group change 0: either by communication, or of the relay front (MENU) 1: on LEVEL (High or Low) of digital input. Date Format 0: Private Format Date 1: IEC Format Date Recloser cycle configuration bit 0: Cycle 1 configuration ( trip and initialise the reclosure) bit 1: Cycle 1 configuration ( block the tripping on cycle ) bit 2, 3: reserved bit 4: Cycle 2 configuration ( trip and initialise the reclosure) bit 5: Cycle 2 configuration ( block the tripping on cycle ) bit 6, 7: reserved bit 8: Cycle 3 configuration ( trip and initialise the reclosure) bit 9: Cycle 3 configuration ( block the tripping on cycle ) bit 10, 11: reserved bit 12: Cycle 4 configuration ( trip and initialise the reclosure) bit 13: Cycle 4 configuration ( block the tripping on cycle ) Voltage Type applied to the logic inputs 0: DC Voltage 1: AC Voltage Rotation phase sequence 0: Direct phase rotation ABC 1: Inverse phase rotation ACB Reserved SOTF parameters 0: Start I>> 1: Start I>>> Output information SOTF Bit 0: SOTF in progress Bit 1: Instantaneous information Bit 2: Tripping information IEC870-5-103 messages option for non-standard protections 0 : Public messages 1 : Private messages. Reserved Communications MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 CODE F59 F60 F61 F70 F71 DESCRIPTION Alarms inhibition Bit 0: tAux1 Bit 1: tAux2 Bit 2: tAux3 Bit 3: tAux4 Bit 4: tAux5 Bit 5: Equation A Bit 6: Equation B Bit 7: Equation C Bit 8: Equation D Bit 9: Equation E Bit 10: Equation F Bit 11: Equation G Bit 12: Equation H Bit 13: Control trip Bit 14: Autorecloser blocked by input Bit 15: I< Fail safe and inversion relays bit x = 0 : relay normally de-energized. bit x = 1 : relay normally energized. bit 0 : Fail safe logic output number RL1 (tripping) bit 1 : Fail safe logic output number RL2 bit 2 : Inversion logic output number RL3 bit 3 : Inversion logic output number RL4 bit 4 : Inversion logic output number RL5 bit 5 : Inversion logic output number RL6 bit 6 : Inversion logic output number RL7 bit 7 : Inversion logic output number RL8 bits 8 � 15 : Reserved Boolean Equation Status Bit 0: Reserved Bit 1: t Boolean Equation A Bit 2: t Boolean Equation B Bit 3: t Boolean Equation C Bit 4: t Boolean Equation D Bit 5: Temporisation A, B,... or H active Bit 6: t Boolean Equation E Bit 7: t Boolean Equation F Bit 8: t Boolean Equation G Bit 9: t Boolean Equation H Bits 10 to 15: Reserved 1st Operator for Boolean equations 0 : Nothing 1 : NOT Other than 1st Operator for Boolean equations 0 : OR 1 : OR NOT 2 : AND 3 : AND NOT P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 45/190 P12x /EN CT/Gd6 Page 46/190 CODE F72 F73 F74 F75 Communications MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 DESCRIPTION Equations operands 0: NULL 1: I> 2: tI> 3: I>> 4: tI>> 5: I>>> 6: tI>>> 7: IE> 8: tIE> 9: IE>> 10: tIE>> 11: IE>>> 12: tIE>>> 13: I2> 14: tI2> 15: I2>> 16: tI2>> 17: Thermal alarm 18: Thermal tripping 19: I< 20: tI< 21: Tripping BRK 22: Tripping 79 23: tAux 1 24: tAux 2 25: tAux 3 26: tAux 4 27: tAux 5 28: Logical Input 1 29: Logical Input 2 30: Logical Input 3 31: Logical Input 4 32: Logical Input 5 33: Ie_d> 34: tIe_d> 35: [79] Recloser internal locked 36: [79] Recloser external locked 37: Do not use 38: Ie_d>> 39: tIe_d>> 40: TCS LED status (bit = 0 if LED inactive) Bit 0 � Trip LED Bit 1 � Alarm LED Bit 2 � Warning LED Bit 3 � Healthy LED (always active) Bit 4 � LED 5 Bit 5 � LED 6 Bit 6 � LED 7 Bit 7 � LED 8 Measurements transmission enabling for IEC870-5-103 communication 0 : None 1 : On trip protection 2: On instantaneous protection 3 : On communication order 4 : On logic input order 5 : No disturbance 6 : On HMI order SOTF parameters: Closing orders types for SOTF starting Bit 0: Front port communication order Bit 1: Reart port communication order Bit 2: "Ctrl Close" logical input Bit 3: "SOTF" logical input Bit 4: Reclosing ordered by Autorecloser Bit 5: Reclosing ordered by HMI Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 47/190 CODE DESCRIPTION F76 Cold Load start detection Bit 0: Detection with 52a input Bit 1: Automatic detection (Detection from important current groth, from 0.05 In to In in 200 ms max) F77 Do not use F78 Do not use F79 Output information part 2/2 bit 0: Do not use F80 Fault type origin 0 = None 1 = Phase A 2 = Phase B 3 = Phase C 4 = Phases A-B 5 = Phases A-C 6 = Phases B-C 7 = Phases A-B-C 8 = Earth 9 = Earth Derived F81 Fault protection origin 0 = None 1 = Remote tripping 2 = Thermal overload 4 = tI>> 5 = tI>>> 6 = tIE> 7 = tIE>> 8 = tIE>>> 9 = tI< 10 = Broken conductor 11 = tAux1 12 = tAux2 13 = tI2> 14 = tI2>> 15 = tAux3 16 = tAux4 17 = CB Fail 18 = SOTF 19 = tEquation A 20 = tEquation B 21 = tEquation C 22 = tEquation D 23 = tEquation E 24 = tEquation F 25 = tEquation G 26 = tEquation H 27 = tAux5 28 = tIe_d> 29 = tIe_d>> F82 Unsigned integer: Number of disturbances records 0: 1 1: 2 2: 3 3: 5 F83 Unsigned integer: CB status get from 52A and 52B 0: 52A and 52B both 0 1: 52A is 0, 52B is 1 2: 52A is 1, 52B is 0 3: 52A and 52B both 1 Format F84 to F97 are not defined and could be used in the future F98 Auxiliary power self-test status Bit 0 : -3V3 out of range Bit 1 : 5V0 out of range Bit 2 : 3V3 out of range Bit 3 : 12V out of range Bit 4 : 1V3 out of range Bit 5 : 0V out of range P12x /EN CT/Gd6 Page 48/190 F99 Transformer self-test status bit 0: transformer 1 fault bit 1: transformer 2 fault bit 2: transformer 3 fault bit 3: transformer 4 fault bit 4: transformer 5 fault bit 5: transformer 6 fault bit 6: transformer 7 fault bit 7: transformer 8 fault bit 8: transformer 9 fault Communications MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 49/190 4.1 Disturbance record additional information 4.1.1 MODBUS request definition used for disturbance record To upload a disturbance record, the following requests must be done in the exact given order: 1. (optional): Send a request to know the number of disturbance records available in SRAM. 2. (compulsory): Send a request with the record number and the channel number. 3. (compulsory): Send one or several requests to upload the disturbance record data. It depends of the number of samples. 4. (compulsory): Send a request to upload the index frame. 4.1.2 Request to know the number of disturbance records in SRAM 4.1.3 Slave number Function code Word address Word number xx 03h 3Dh 00 00 24h xx CRC xx This request may be answered an error message with the error code: EVT_NOK(OF): No record available NOTA: If there is less than 5 records available, the answer will contains zero in the non-used words. Service requests This request must be send before uploading the disturbance record channel samples. It allows to know the record number and the channel number to upload. It allows also to know the number of samples in the channel. 4.1.4 Slave number Function code Word address Word number xx 03h Refer to mapping 00 0Bh xx CRC xx This request may be answered an error message with two different error codes: CODE_DEF_RAM(02): CODE_EVT_NOK(03): Disturbance record upload request SRAM failure No disturbance record available in SRAM Slave number Function code Word address Word number xx 03h Refer to mapping 01 to 7Dh xx CRC xx This request may be answered an error message with two different error codes: CODE_DEP_DATA(04): CODE_SERV_NOK(05): The required disturbance data number is greater than the memorised number. The service request for disturbance record and channel number has not been send. P12x /EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 50/190 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 4.1.5 Index frame upload request 4.1.6 4.1.7 4.1.8 Slave number Function code Word address Word number xx 03h 22h 00 00 07h xx CRC xx This request may be answered an error message with an error code: CODE_SERV_NOK(05): The service request for disturbance record and channel number has not been send. Two ways can be followed to retrieve an event record: - Send a request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event. - Send a request to retrieve a dedicated event. Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event Slave number Function code Word address Word number xx 03h 36h 00 00 09h xx CRC xx This event request may be answered an error message with the error code: EVT_EN_COURS_ECRIT (5): An event is being written into the saved RAM. NOTE: On event retrieval, two possibilities exist regarding the event record acknowledgement: a) Automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval. b) Non automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval. a) Automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval: The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 � mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 0. On event retrieval, this event record is acknowledged. b) Non automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval: The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 � mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1. On event retrieval, this event record is not acknowledged. To acknowledge this event, an other remote order shall be sent to the relay. The bit 13 of this frame (format F9 � mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1. Request to retrieve a dedicated event Slave number Function code Word address Word number xx 03h Refer to mapping 00 09h xx CRC xx This event request may be answered an error message with the error code: EVT_EN_COURS_ECRIT (5): An event is being written into the saved RAM. NOTA: This event retrieval does not acknowledge this event. Modbus request definition used to retrieve the fault records Two ways can be followed to retrieve a fault record: Send a request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record. Send a request to retrieve a dedicated fault record. Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 51/190 4.1.9 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record 4.1.10 Slave number Function code Word address Word number xx 03h 3Eh 00 00 0Fh xx CRC xx NOTA: On fault retrieval, two possibilities exist regarding the fault record acknowledgement: a) Automatic fault record acknowledgement on event retrieval. b) Non automatic fault record acknowledgement on event retrieval. a) Automatic fault record acknowledgement on fault retrieval: The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 � mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 0. On fault retrieval, this fault record is acknowledged. b) Non automatic fault record acknowledgement on fault retrieval: The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 � mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1. On fault retrieval, this fault record is not acknowledged. To acknowledge this fault, an other remote order shall be sent to the relay. The bit 14 of this frame (format F9 � mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1. Request to retrieve a dedicated fault record Slave number Function code Word address Word number xx 03h Refer to mapping 00 0Fh xx CRC xx NOTA: This fault value retrieval does not acknowledge this fault record. Communications MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 COURIER DATABASE MiCOM P120 - P121 - P122 - P123 VERSION V14.C P12x /EN CT/Gd6 Page 54/190 BLANK PAGE Communications MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Communications MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 CONTENT 1. K-BUS PROTOCOL AND COURIER LANGUAGE 1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 1.4.4 1.4.5 1.4.6 1.4.7 1.4.8 1.4.9 1.4.10 1.4.11 1.5 1.5.1 1.5.2 1.5.3 1.5.4 1.6 K-BUS K-Bus transmission layer K-Bus connection Auxiliary equipment Relay courier database Setting changes Systems integration data Address of the relay Measured values Status word Unit status word Control status word Logic input status word Output relay status word Control information Protection Indication Measurement control Change of remote measurements Event extraction Automatic event extraction Event types Event format Manual record extraction Disturbance record extraction (P120, P122, P123 only) 2. LIST OF EVENTS CREATED BY THE RELAY P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 55/190 57 57 57 57 57 58 58 58 58 58 59 59 59 59 59 60 60 62 62 62 62 63 63 63 63 64 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 56/190 BLANK PAGE Communications MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 57/190 1. 1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 K-BUS PROTOCOL AND COURIER LANGUAGE The serial communications are transmitted on K-Bus, a multi-drop network proposing an instantaneous interface with IEC 870 - 5 - FT1.2 standards. The language and the communication protocol used are Courier. This concept permits especially to the generic programmes of the principal units to access to a high number of different relay types without need to change permanently the principal unit program for each relay type. The relays forms a distributed database in which the principal workstation proceeds to a selective call of the slave relays in order to know all necessary information. Courier has a concept for the functions with a selective call system which allows not a slave periphery to communicate directly with the central unit when one shall informs another about a particular event. The slave workstation has to wait that the principal workstation asks for the information. With Courier each information is given into a box with a code of the length and the database type. In knowing the database format the reception periphery can read them. K-BUS K-Bus is a communication system developed for connecting the slave peripheries in remoting on the central unit, permitting them to execute all remote monitoring and remote control functions using the appropriated communication language. K-Bus is not able to permit a direct communication between the slave peripheries. Only a communication between the central unit and the slave peripheries can be established. The principal characteristics of the K-Bus are his profitability, his high security level, his installation facility and his user friendliness. K-Bus transmission layer The communication port is supported on the reception levels and the voltage transmission RS485 with galvanic isolation assured by a transformer. A selective call protocol is used. No relay unit is allowed to transmit before having received a validation message without any error detection. The transmission is synchronous on a pair of isolated waves. The data are coded FM0 with a clock signal for eliminate all CC-component, allows the signal to cross the transformers. With the exception of the central units, each network node is passive. No defective unit from the system can interfere with the communications established with the other units. The message format is HDLC. The data transmission speed is 64 kbits/s. K-Bus connection The connection on the K-Bus port is realised by screwed terminals of 4 mm of MIDOS standards or by FASTON-connectors. A cabled pair is sufficient to realise the connection, knowing that the polarity is not important. It is recommended to use an external screen earth linked at the end of the principal workstation only. The screen has to be fixed with a M4 screw following the wiring scheme (cf. TG: P12X/EN T). The functioning of the K-BUS network is guaranteed for 32 units connected on 1000 meters of cables. Thanks to the data code method, the polarity of the Bus cable connection is not important. NOTE: The K-Bus network has to finish with a 150 ohms resistance on each end of the Bus. The principal workstation can be placed anywhere on the network. This command point has to be unique. Auxiliary equipment For communication with the relay it is necessary to have at least one converter case KBus/IEC870-5 of the type KITZ and a computer suitable software, an interconnection cable RS232 for connecting the KITZ to the computer and a software conform to the specification of the Courier protocol. P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 58/190 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.4.1 1.4.2 Relay courier database The Courier database is two dimensional structure with each cell in the database being referenced by a row and column address. Both the column and the row can take a range from 0 to 255. Addresses in the database are specified as hexadecimal values, eg 0A02 is column 0A (10 decimal) row 02. Associated settings/data will be part of the same column, row zero of the column contains a text string to identify the contents of the column. This data base is given in paragraph 1, 4, 5. Setting changes This uses a combination of three commands to perform a settings change: Enter Setting Mode - checks that the cell is settable and returns the limits Pre-load Setting - Places a new value in the cell, this value is echoed to ensure that setting corruption has not taken place, the validity of the setting is not checked by this action. Execute Setting - Confirms the setting change, if the change is valid then a positive response will be returned, if the setting change fails then an error response will be returned. Abort Setting - This command can be used to abandon the setting change. This is the most secure method and is ideally suitable for on-line editors as the setting limits are taken from the relay before the setting change is made. However this method can be slow if many settings are to be changed as three commands are required for each change. Systems integration data Address of the relay The relays can have any address between 1 and 254 included. The address 255 corresponds to the global address to which all relays and all the other slave peripheries are responding. The Courier protocol specifies that no response can be resent from a slave periphery to a global message. This permits to avoid that all peripheries respond at the same time creating by this way user conflict on the Bus. Each relay has an address settled on 255 in order to guarantee that in case of his connection to the operating network, its address cannot create any conflict with the address of another periphery already running. In order to permit to a new periphery to get entirely operational, its address has to be settled. The address can be modified manually by capturing the password, than by following the method of the setting change through the user interface on the front plate of the relay. The same, if the network functioning on a computer takes in charge the auto-addressing, the relay address can be settled on 0 to active the characteristic of auto-addressing of the computer software. The relay receives then the next valid address on the Bus. If the address is 255 or it is unknown, it can be modified by sending a new address, with a global message, to a periphery possessing a particular serial number. This method is used for those peripheries which do not have any user interface for reading or for changing the address in process. Measured values Each measured value can be periodically extracted by a selective call of MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays. Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 59/190 1.4.3 1.4.4 1.4.5 1.4.6 1.4.7 Status word Each response of a slave periphery contains an octet of status. This octet is resent by the relay at the beginning of each message for signalling important data. The principal workstation can be design for responding automatically to these important data. The contained indications are the following: Bit 0 - 1 = Bit 1 - 1 = Bit 2 - 1 = Bit 3 - 1 = Bit 4 - 1 = Bit 5 - 1 = Bit 6 - 1 = Bit 7 - 1 = Recording of disturbance available for retrieval Change of the Unit status word Change of the control status word Relay busy, no response possible in time Relay out of service Recording of events available for retrieval Switched alarm indicator Switched tripping indicator Only bits 3,4 and 7 are used for version P121. Bits 1, 3 4, 5 and 7 are used for versions P120, P122, P123. Unit status word The unit status word is located in the menu 000C. Each bits pair of the Unit status word serves to indicate the status (position) of the unit elements checked through the relay. This functionality is not supported on MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays. Control status word The Control status word is located in the cell of the menu 000D. It is used for transmitting the control information of the slave periphery to the central unit. Nevertheless, the relays described in this manual are protection relays, which are not using this control characteristic. Logic input status word The logic control input status can be observed in proceeding to a selective call from the cell of menu 0020. The 2 bits inferior of the returned value indicating the status of each of the 2 logic inputs. This cell is accessible only in reading. Bit 0: Bit 1: Bit 2: Bit 3: Bit 4: logic input 1 logic input 2 logic input 3 logic input 4 logic input 5 Output relay status word The output relay status can be observed in proceeding to a selective call from the cell of menu 0021. The 8 bits inferior of the returned value indicating the status of each of the 5 output relays. This cell is accessible only in reading. Bit 0: Bit 1,2,3: Bit 4: Bit 5,6,7,8: relay 1 (TRIP) programmable relays n� 2,3,4 Watchdog programmable relays n� 5,6,7,8 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 60/190 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 1.4.8 1.4.9 Control information The status of internal controls triggered by the auto-control program of the relays can be observed in proceeding to a selective call of the cell of menu 0022. The bits 0 to 6 indicate the material controls of the product. Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 to 15 Analogue Output error Communication error EEPROM data error Analogue fault Clock error EEPROM calibration error RAM error Battery error Reserved Default settings Reserved Protection Indication The protection indications gives the status of different protection elements in the relay. The fault indications are generated with these indications. They are transmitted in the events recordings, in case of a fault recording. This is the only way to access to these indications. The status of internal protection indication of the relays can be observed in proceeding to a selective call of the cell of menu 0023 and 0024. The following table presents the list of the protection indications of the cell 0023: Bit position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Function of the protection I> I>> I>>> IE> IE>> IE>>> tI> tI>> tI>>> tIE> tIE>> tIE>>> Thermal alarm Thermal overload tI< reserved Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 61/190 The following table presents the list of the protection indications of the cell 0024: Bit position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Function of the protection Broken conductor t Aux 1 t Aux 2 Breaker failure I2> tI2> Open operating time Trip operation number SA 2n Trip circuit Supervision Close operating time Successful autoreclose Locked autorecloser Autorecloser configuration fail I2>> tI2>> The following table presents the list of the protection indications of the cell 0025: Bit position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Function of the protection t Aux 3 t Aux 4 t Reset I> t Reset I>> t Reset IE> t Reset IE>> t Reset I2> t BF t SOTF Final Trip Autoreclos. In progress Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved The following table presents the list of the protection indications of the cell 0026 : Bit position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Function of the protection t Equation A t Equation B t Equation C t Equation D t Equation E t Equation F t Equation G t Equation H Blocking Inrush Ie_d> tIe_d> Reset Ie_d> Ie_d>> tIe_d>> Reset Ie_d>> Reserved P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 62/190 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 1.4.10 1.4.11 1.5 1.5.1 Measurement control The control functions through a relay of the MiCOM P12x range can be executed on a serial link. These functions are supported in particular on the changes of the individual relay settings, on the changes of the setting groups, on the remote control of the circuit breaker, as well as on the functions and the locking of the selected output relays. The remote control is limited in the control functions selected in the table of the relays menu. The CRC and the controls of the message length are used on each received message. No response is given for messages received with an error detection. The principal unit can be reinitialised in order to resent an order as often as wanted if he is not receiving any response or if he receives a response with an error detection. NOTE: The control commands are generally materialised by the change of the cell value. They dispose the same inherent security. No response is allowed for the global orders to avoid any user conflict of the Bus. For this type of order, a double start is used for the verification of the message by the relay. The relay transmits then a confirmation indicating that the control order or the change of setting has been accepted. If this is not the case, the relay is sending an error message. Change of remote measurements The relay is only responding to the orders of a setting change through the serial port if the SD0 link = 1 is selected. The selection of the SD0 link = 1 is blocking all the changes of remote setting with the exception of the SC logical links and the password capture. When the SD0 link = 0 is selected, the remote setting are protected by the password. For changing the remote links, the password has to be first remote captured and the SD and SD0 function links have to be settled on 1. Event extraction Events can be extracted either automatically or manually. For automatic extraction all events are extracted in sequential order using the standard Courier mechanism, this includes fault. The manual approach allows the user to select randomly an event, or a fault from the stored records. Automatic event extraction This method is intended for continuous extraction of event and fault information as it is produced via the rear port. When new event information is created the Event bit is set within the Status byte, this indicates to the Master device that event information is available. The oldest, unextracted event can be extracted from the relay using the Send Event command. The relay will respond with the event data, which will be either a Courier Type 0 or Type 3 event. The Type 3 event is used for fault records. Once an event is extracted from the relay the Accept Event can be used to confirm that the event has been successfully extracted. If all events have been extracted then the event bit will reset, if there are more events still to be extracted the next event can be accessed using the Send Event command as before. Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 63/190 1.5.2 1.5.3 1.5.4 1.6 Event types Events will be created by the relay under the following circumstances: � Change of state of output contact � Change of state of opto input � Protection element operation � Alarm condition � Setting Change � Fault Record (Type 3 Courier Event) Event format The Send Event command results in the following fields being returned by the relay: � Cell Reference � Timestamp � Cell Text � Cell Value Paragraph 2 contains a table of the events created by the relay and indicates how the contents of the above fields are interpreted. Fault records will return a Courier Type 3 event which contains the above fields together with two additional fields: � Event extraction column � Event number These events contain additional information which is extracted from the relay using the referenced extraction column. Row 01 of the extraction column contains a setting which allows the fault record to be selected. This setting should be set to the event number value returned within the record, the extended data can be extracted from the relay by uploading the text and data from the column. Manual record extraction Column 02 of the database can be used for manual viewing fault records. The contents of this column will depend of the nature of the record selected. It is possible to select directly a fault record. Fault Record Selection (Row 01) - This cell can be used to directly select a fault record using a value between 0 and 4 to select one of up to five stored fault records (0 will be the most recent fault and 4 will be the oldest). The column will then contain the details of the fault record selected (row 02 to 0A) It should be noted that if this column is used to extract event information from the relay the number associated with a particular record will change when a new fault occurs. Disturbance record extraction (P120, P122, P123 only) The stored disturbance records within the relay are accessible via the Courier interface. Select Record Number (Row 01) - This cell can be used to select the record to be extracted. Record 0 will be the oldest un-extracted record, older records will be assigned positive values, and negative values will be used for more recent records. To facilitate automatic extraction via the rear port the Disturbance bit of the Status byte is set by the relay whenever there are unextracted disturbance records. Once a record has been selected, using the above cell, the time and date of the record can be read from cell 02. The disturbance record itself can be extracted using the block transfer mechanism from cell B00B. As has been stated the rear Courier port can be used to automatically extract disturbance records as they occur. This operates using the standard Courier mechanism defined in Chapter 8 of the Courier User Guide. P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 64/190 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2. LIST OF EVENTS CREATED BY THE RELAY Code 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 Cell text UNKNOWN EVENT REMOTE CB CLOSING CB TRIP DIST TRIG UNLOCK TRIP SET. CHANGE RESET THERM SET MAINT MODE SET RELAY MAINT MODE I> I>> I>>> IE> IE>> IE>>> TH. ALARM TH OVERLOAD tI> tI>> tI>>> tIE> tIE>> tIE>>> tI< BROKEN CONDUCTOR t Aux1 t Aux2 BREAKER FAILURE Logic Sel. 1 Logic Sel. 2 Blocking Logic 1 Blocking Logic 2 Setting group change 52 a 52 b ACK ALL ALAR SF6 COLD LOAD PICKUP TS Change TRIP: TH OVERLOAD TRIP: tI> TRIP: tI>> TRIP: tI>>> TRIP: tIE> TRIP: tIE>> TRIP: tIE>>> TRIP: tI< TRIP: BROKEN CONDUCTOR TRIP: t Aux 1 TRIP: t Aux 2 AUX Relays ACK 1 AL (FRONT) ACK ALAR (FRONT) ACK 1 ALARM (COM) ACK ALAR (COM) Hard Maj Alarm Hard min Alarm I2 > t 2 > OPEN OPERATING TIME TRIP OPERATION Nb SA2N SW TRIP CIRCUIT CLOSE OPERATING TIME Cell reference 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0021 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0024 0024 0024 0024 0020 0020 0020 0020 0020 0020 0020 0020 0020 0020 0020 0021 0021 0021 0021 0021 0021 0021 0021 0021 0021 0021 0021 0 0 0 0 0022 0022 0024 0024 0024 0024 0024 0024 0024 Availability P120-P122-P123 P120-P122-P123 P120-P122-P123 P120-P122-P123 P120-P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P120-P122-P123 P120-P122-P123 P120-P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P120-P122-P123 P120-P122-P123 P120-P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P120-P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P120-P122-P123 P120-P122-P123 P120-P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P120-P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P120-P122-P123 P120-P122-P123 P120-P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P120-P122-P123 P120-P122-P123 P120-P122-P123 P120-P122-P123 P120-P122-P123 P120-P122-P123 P120-P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 Communications MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Code 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 Cell text SUCCESS AUTORECLOSE AUTORECLOSER FINAL TRIP AUTORECLOSER CONF. FAIL TRIP: t I2 > Reserved Reserved Reserved LATCHED RELAYS EXT BREAKER FAILURE I< I2>> tI2>> TRIP: tI2>> Reserved LATCHED RELAY TRIP t AUX3 TRIP: t AUX3 t AUX4 TRIP: t AUX4 t Reset I> t Reset I>> t Reset IE> t Reset IE>> t Reset I2> TRIP Breaker Failure t BF /Ext. Breaker Failure MANUAL CLOSE (Inp) t SOTF TRIP t SOTF LOCAL MODE Reserved LOCKED AUTORECLOSER AUTORECLOS. IN PROGRESS TIME SYNCHRO INRUSH BLOCKING t Equation A t Equation B t Equation C t Equation D t Equation E t Equation F t Equation G t Equation H TRIP: t Equation A TRIP: t Equation B TRIP: t Equation C TRIP: t Equation D TRIP: t Equation E TRIP: t Equation F TRIP: t Equation G TRIP: t Equation H CB activity Operation time Ie_d> tIe_d> tIe_d> trip t Reset Ie_d> tAux 5 tAux 5 trip Do not use Recloser external locked Hardware alarm with main power supply Hardware alarm with -3.3v power supply Hardware alarm with 5.0v power supply Hardware alarm with 3.3v power supply Hardware alarm with 12v power supply Hardware alarm with 1.3v power supply Hardware alarm with 0 v power supply P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 65/190 Cell reference 0024 0025 0024 0021 Availability P123 P123 P123 P122-P123 0020 0023 0024 0024 0021 0025 0021 0025 0021 0025 0025 0025 0025 0025 0021 0025 0020 0025 0021 0020 0024 0025 00XX 0026 0025 0026 0025 0026 0025 0026 0025 0021 0021 0021 0021 0021 0021 0021 0021 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P123 P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P123 P123 P123 P123 P123 P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P121-P123 P121-P123 P121-P123 P121-P123 P121-P123 P121-P123 P121-P123 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 66/190 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Code 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 Cell text Hardware alarm with transformer 1 Hardware alarm with transformer 2 Hardware alarm with transformer 3 Hardware alarm with transformer 4 Hardware alarm with transformer 5 Hardware alarm with transformer 6 Hardware alarm with transformer 7 Hardware alarm with transformer 8 Hardware alarm with transformer 9 Ie_d>> tIe_d>> tIe_d>> trip t Reset Ie_d>> Alarm with cortec mismatch GEN. SET. CHANGE Cell reference Availability P121-P123 P121-P123 P121-P123 P121-P123 P121-P123 P121-P123 P121-P123 P121-P123 P121-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P120-P122-P123 NOTA: When the cell reference is different of zero this means that the event is generated on event occurrence and another is generated on event disappearance. When the cell reference is equal to zero, only the event on edging edge is generated. Twelve bits are available in the string of characters to describe the contain of the Courier cell: On event occurrence, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to � 1 �. On event disappearance, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to � 0 �. Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 3. COURIER DATABASE ORGANISATION P120 Col Row 00 00 01 Menu Text SYSTEM DATA Language Data Type Ver>: Indexed String 02 Password ASCII Password(4 bytes) 03 Fnlinks: NOT IMPLEMENTED 04 Description ASCII Text (6 bytes) 05 Plant Reference ASCII Text (4 bytes) 06 Model Number ASCII Text (16 bytes) 07 Firmware Number ASCII Text (16 bytes) 08 Serial Number ASCII Text (16 bytes) 09 Frequency Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0A Communication Level Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0B Address Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0C Plant Status Word: NOT IMPLEMENTED 0D Control Status Word: NOT IMPLEMENTED 0E Setting Group Unsigned Integer 0F Load shed Stage: NOT IMPLEMENTED 10 Circuit Breaker Control Binary flag (3 bits) 11 12-1F 20 Software Reference Unused, reserved Logic Input Status 21 Relay Output Status ASCII Text (16 characters) Binary flag (3 bits) Binary flag (5 bits) 22 Alarm Binary flag (16 bits) Ind Values (*: default) 0 Lang1 (French) 1 Lang2 (English) * 2 Lang3 (German) 3 Lang4 (Spanish) AAAA " P120 "* " Pref " " Model Number " " Firmware Number " " Serial Number " XXXX Hz 1 1* 0: No operation 1: Trip 2: Close 0: log input 1 1: log input 2 0: relay 1 (trip) 1: relay 2 2: relay 3 3: relay 4 4: watchdog relay 0: Ana output err 1: Comm err 2: Eeprom err data P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 67 /190 Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step Setting 0/3/1 Setting Setting Setting Data Data Data Setting Data Setting 32/127/1 32/127/1 32/127/1 50/60/10 1/255/1 Data Data Data Data Data Always = 1 Data P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 68 /190 Col Row Menu Text Data Type 23 Pseudo Logic Input Status Binary flag (12 bits) group 1 24 01 00 01 Pseudo Logic Input Status Binary flag (3 bits) group 2 USER CONTROL Remote control 1 Binary flag (9 bits) 02 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 0A 03 00 01 09 0E 00 01 02 VIEW RECORDS Record number Occur date Active set group Phase in fault Fault Id Magnitude In magnitude MEASUREMENTS I0 RMS FREQUENCY CT RATIOS CT Primary CT Secondary Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) ASCII Text ASCII Text Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Ind Values (*: default) 3: Ct error 4: reserved 5: Eeprom err calib 6: reserved 7: reserved 8: reserved 9: Default settings 10 to 15: reserved 3: IE> 4: IE>> 5: IE>>> 9: t IE> 10: t IE>> 11: t IE>>> 0: Reserved 1: tAux 1 2: tAux 2 0: Unlock trip cont.* 1: Ack first alarm 2: Ack all alarms 3: TRIP 4: CLOSE 5 to 7: Reserved Dist. Rec. Trig 9 to 15: Reserved 1000 * 1 * Depend 8: 5 * Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Cell Type Min/Max/Step Data Data Setting 0/ 511/1 Setting 1/5/1 Data Data Setting Setting Starting from V5.F 1/3000/1 1/5/4 Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Col 21 Row 00 01 02 03 04 Menu Text Protection Group n� 1 EARTH FAULT Stage 1 Overcurrent Max I> Threshold I> Tempo Type I> 05 Curve Type I> 07 TMS I> 08 K I> 09 Tempo I> 0C-0F Reserved 10 Stage 2 Overcurrent 11 Max I>> 12 Threshold I>> 18 Tempo I>> 1C-1F Reserved 20 Stage 3 Overcurrent 21 Max I>>> 22 Threshold I>>> 23 Tempo I>>> 60 00 AUTOMATISM 01 Trip Configuration Data Type Ind Values (*: default) (Sub Heading) Binary (1 bit) 0 Courier floating point number Indexed String 0 1 2 3 Indexed String 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number (Sub Heading) Binary (1 bit) 0 Courier floating point number Courier floating point number (Sub Heading) Binary (1 bit) 0 Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Binary (11 bits) Disabled * / Enabled 0.01 IEn* 0: definite time * 1: inverse time 2: RI curve 3: Laborelec curves STI (CEI) * SI (CEI) VI (CEI) EI (CEI) LTI (CEI) STI (CO2) MI (ANSI) LTI (CO8) VI (ANSI) EI (ANSI) RC (CEI) 0.025 * 0.1 * 0.01 s * Disabled * / Enabled 0.01 IEn* 0.01 s * Disabled * / Enabled 0.01 IEn * 0.01 s * 0: t I> 1: t I>> 2: t I>>> 3: reserved 4: reserved 5: reserved 6: reserved Depend P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 69 /190 Cell Type Min/Max/Step 2102=1 2102=1 2104=1 Setting Setting Setting 0/1/1 0.01/1.0/0.005 0/3/1 Setting 0/10/1 2104=1 2104=2 2104=0 2111=1 2113=0 2121=1 2121=1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0.025/1.5/0.025 0.1/10.0/0.005 0 /150.0/0.01 0/1/1 0.01/8.0/0.005 0 /150.0/0.01 0/1/1 0.01/8.0/0.005 0 /150.0/0.01 0 / 2047 / 1 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 70 /190 Col Row Menu Text Data Type 02 Latched Configuration Binary (11 bits) 03 Blocking Configuration Binary (11 bits) 61 00 06 07 10 TS SETTINGS Timer aux 1 Timer aux 2 Logical input 1 allocation (1/2) Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Binary (9 bits) 11 Logical input 2 allocation Binary (9 bits) (1/2) Ind Values (*: default) 7: reserved 8: reserved 9: tAux1 10: tAux2 0: Latch I> 1: Latch I>> 2: Latch I>>> 3: reserved 4: reserved 5: reserved 6: reserved 7: reserved. 8: reserved 9: Latch Aux1 10: Latch Aux2 0: Blocking t I> 1: Blocking t I>> 2: Blocking t I>>> 3: reserved 4: reserved 5: reserved 6: reserved 7: reserved 8: reserved 9: Blocking tAux1 10: Blocking tAux2 0 * 0 * 0 0: delatch 1 1: 52 a 2 2: 52 b 3 3: CB failure 4 4: External input 1 5 5: External input 2 6 6: Logic blocking 7 7: Reserved 8 8: Disturbance start 0 0: delatch 1 1: 52 a 2 2: 52 b 3 3: CB failure Depend Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Cell Type Min/Max/Step Setting 0 / 2047 / 1 Setting 0 / 2047 / 1 Setting Setting Setting 0 / 200.0 / 0.01 0 / 200.0 / 0.01 0/511/1 Setting 0/511/1 Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Col Row Menu Text Data Type 15 Logical input 1 allocation Binary (8 bits) (2/2) 16 Logical input 2 allocation Binary (8 bits) (2/2) 62 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 15 16 17 28 29 63 00 01 TC SETTINGS GENERAL TRIP I> tI> I>> t I>> I>>> t I>>> Reclosing tAux 1 tAux 2 Logical input 1 Logical input 2 LEDS SETTINGS Led 5 1/2 Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (6 bits) Ind Values (*: default) 4 4: External input 1 5 5: External input 2 6 6: Logic blocking 7 7: Reserved 8 8: Disturbance start 0 0: Reserved 1 1: Reserved 2 2: Reserved 3 3: Reserved 4 4: Reserved 5 5: Reserved 6 6: Reserved 7: 7 Synchronisation 0 0: Reserved 1 1: Reserved 2 2: Reserved 3 3: Reserved 4 4: Reserved 5 5: Reserved 6 6: Reserved 7: 7 Synchronisation 000 * 000 * 000 * 000 * 000 * 000 * 000 * 000 * 000 * 000 * 000 * 000 * 1 * 0: I> * 1: t I> 2: I>> 3: t I>> 4: I>>> 5: t I>>> Depend P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 71 /190 Cell Type Min/Max/Step Setting 0/255/ 1 Setting 0/255/ 1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/63/1 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 72 /190 Col Row Menu Text 02 Led 6 1/2 03 Led 7 1/2 04 Led 8 1/2 05 Led 5 2/2 06 07 08 64 00 10 70 00 01 Led 6 2/2 Led 7 2/2 Led 8 2/2 ALARMS Inhib. Alarms tAux RECORDER CONTROL Start/Trigger recorder 02 20 21 22 80 00 01 Recorder Source Pretemps Postemps Trigger DISTURBANCE REC Record Number Data Type Binary (6 bits) Binary (6 bits) Binary (6 bits) Binary (9 bits) Binary (9 bits) Binary (9 bits) Binary (9 bits) Ind 2 * 4 * 16 * 0 * 0 * 0 * 0 * Values (*: default) As "Led 5 1/2" As "Led 5 1/2" As "Led 5 1/2" 0: Input 1 1: Input 2 2: Reserved 3: Reserved 4: Reserved 5: Reserved 6: Reserved 7: tAux1 8: tAux2 As "Led 5 1/2" As "Led 5 1/2" As "Led 5 1/2" Binary (2 bits) 0 0: Alarm tAux1 0 1: Alarm tAux2 Indexed String 0 1 2 Indexed String 0 Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Indexed String 0 Stopped Trigerred Running * Samples * 0.1 secondes 0.1 secondes On Inst* / On Trig Unsigned integer (1 byte) 0* 02 Trigger Time IEC870 Time & Date 03 Available Channel Bit Mask Binary Flag Indexed String 0 1 04 Channel Types Binary Flag 0: digital, 1: analogue 05 Channel Offsets Repeated group of Courier numbers 06 Scaling Factors Repeated group of Courier numbers 07-0F NOT IMPLEMENTED � reserved dd/mm/yy hh:mm 11 " I0 " " Inputs/Outputs " 01 Upload Offsets Upload Scal. Factors Depend Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Cell Type Setting Setting Setting Setting Min/Max/Step 0/63/1 0/63/1 0/63/1 0/511/1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Data Setting Setting Setting Setting Data Data Data Data Data 0/511/1 0/511/1 0/511/1 0/3/1 1/2/1 0.1/3.0/0.1 0.1/3.0/0.1 0/1/1 0/5/1 (selon contexte) Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Col 90 Row 10 11 12 13 14 15-1F 20 21 00 01 Menu Text Record Length Trigger position Time Base NOT IMPLEMENTED � reserved Upload Timer NOT IMPLEMENTED � reserved Upload Channel 0 Upload Channel Inputs/Outputs AUTOMAT. FLT Record number 02 03 04 05 06 0A BF 00 01 02 03 04 05 Occur fault date Active set group Phase in fault Fault Id Magnitude In Magnitude COMM SYSTEM DATA Dist Record Cntrl Ref Dist Record Extract Ref Setting Transfert Reset Demand Timers Reset Event Report Data Type Ind Integer (2 bytes) Integer (2 bytes) Courier floating point number Values (*: default) Repeated group of Integers Repeated group of Integers Repeated group of Integer/Bin. flags Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) ASCII Text (10 bytes) ASCII Text (18 bytes) Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Menu Cell (2) Menu Cell (2) NOT IMPLEMENTED NOT IMPLEMENTED 1 " PHASE A " " I >> " 12.34 A 12.34 A 0x7000 0x8000 Depend P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 73 /190 Cell Type Data Data Data Min/Max/Step Data Data Data Setting (automatic) Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Setting 0/1/1 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 74 /190 4. COURIER DATABASE ORGANISATION P121 Col Row 00 00 01 Menu Text SYSTEM DATA Language Data Type Ver>: Indexed String 02 Password ASCII Password (4 bytes) 03 Fnlinks: NOT IMPLEMENTED 04 Description ASCII Text (6 bytes) 05 Plant Reference ASCII Text (4 bytes) 06 Model Number ASCII Text (16 bytes) 07 Firmware Number ASCII Text (16 bytes) 08 Serial Number ASCII Text (16 bytes) 09 Frequency Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0A Communication Level Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0B Address Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0C Plant Status Word: NOT IMPLEMENTED 0D Control Status Word: NOT IMPLEMENTED 0E Setting Group Unsigned Integer 0F Load shed Stage: NOT IMPLEMENTED 10 Circuit Breaker Control Binary flag (3 bits) 11 12-1F 20 Software Reference Unused, reserved Logic Input Status ASCII Text (16 characters) Binary flag (3 bits) 21 Relay Output Status Binary flag (5 bits) Ind Values (*: default) 0 Lang1 (French) 1 Lang2 (English) * 2 Lang3 (German) 3 Lang4 (Spanish) AAAA " P121 "* " Pref " " Model Number " " Firmware Number " " Serial Number " XXXX Hz 1 1* 0: No operation 1: Trip 2: Close 0: log input 1 1: log input 2 2: log input 3 0: relay 1 (trip) 1: relay 2 2: relay 3 3: relay 4 4: watchdog relay Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step Setting 0/3/1 Setting Setting Setting Data Data Data Setting Data Setting 32/127/1 32/127/1 32/127/1 50/60/10 1/255/1 Data Data Data Data Data Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Col Row Menu Text 22 Alarm Data Type Binary flag (16 bits) 23 Pseudo Logic Input Status Binary flag (12 bits) group 1 24 Pseudo Logic Input Status Binary flag (3 bits) group 2 26 Pseudo Logic Input Status Binary flag (8 bits) group 4 01 00 01 USER CONTROL Remote control 1 Binary flag (5 bits) 03 00 MEASUREMENTS Ind Values (*: default) 0: Ana output err 1: Comm err 2: Eeprom err data 3: Ct error 4: reserved 5: Eeprom err calib 6: reserved 7: reserved 8: reserved 9: Default settings 10 to 15: reserved 0: I> 1: I>> 2: I>>> 3: IE> 4: IE>> 5: IE>>> 6: t I> 7: t I>> 8: t I>>> 9: t IE> 10: t IE>> 11: t IE>>> 0: Reserved 1: tAux 1 2: tAux 2 0: t Equation A 1: t Equation B 2: t Equation C 3: t Equation D 4: t Equation E 5: t Equation F 6: t Equation G 7: t Equation H 0: Unlock trip cont.* 1: Ack first alarm 2: Ack all alarms 3: TRIP 4: CLOSE 5 to 15: Reserved Depend P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 75 /190 Cell Type Data Min/Max/Step Data Data Data Setting 0/ 31/1 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 76 /190 Col Row 01 02 03 04 09 0C 00 01 Menu Text IA RMS IB RMS IC RMS I0 RMS FREQUENCY FAIL-SAFE RELAYS SETTINGS Fail-safe relays 0D 00 01 0E 00 01 02 03 04 20 00 01 02 03 04 05 GENERAL SETTING Phase rotation sense CT RATIOS Phase CT Primary Phase CT Secondary Neutral CT Primary Neutral CT Secondary Protection Group n� 1 PHASE OVERCURRENT Stage 1 Overcurrent Max I> Threshold I> Temporisation Type I> Curve type I> 06 TMS I> 07 K I> 08 Tempo I> Data Type Ind Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Values (*: default) Binary flag (4 bits) Indexed string Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0: relay 1 (trip) 1: relay 2 2: relay 3 3: relay 4 0: Direct (A/B/C) 1: Inverse (A/B/C) 1000 * 1 * 1000 * 1 * (Sub Heading) Binary (1 bit) 0 Courier floating point number Indexed String 0 1 2 Indexed String 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Disabled * / Enabled 0.1 In * 0: definite time * 1: inverse time 2: RI curve STI (CEI) * SI (CEI) VI (CEI) EI (CEI) LTI (CEI) STI (CO2) MI (ANSI) LTI (CO8) VI (ANSI) EI (ANSI) RC (CEI) 0.025 * 0.1 * 0.01 s * Depend Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Cell Type Data Data Data Data Data Min/Max/Step Setting 0 / 15 / 1 2002=1 2002=1 2004=1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 (A/B/C) 1 (A/B/C) 1/3000/1 1/5/4 1/3000/1 1/5/4 Setting Setting Setting Setting 0/1/1 0.1/25.0/0.1 0/2/1 0/10/1 2004=1 2004=2 2004=0 Setting Setting Setting 0.025/1.5/0.001 0.1/10.0/0.005 0 /150.0/0.01 Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Col Row 0C-0F 10 11 12 13 Menu Text Reserved Stage 2 Overcurrent Max I>> Threshold I>> Temporisation Type I>> 14 Curve type I>> 15 TMS I>> 16 K I>> 17 Tempo I>> 1B-1F Reserved 20 Stage 3 Overcurrent 21 Max I>>> 22 Threshold I>>> 23 Tempo I>>> 21 00 EARTH FAULT 01 Stage 1 Overcurrent 02 Max IE> 03 Threshold IE> 04 Tempo Type IE> Data Type Ind Values (*: default) (Sub Heading) Binary (1 bit) 0 Courier floating point number Indexed String 0 1 2 Indexed String 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Disabled * / Enabled 0.50 In * 0: definite time * 1: inverse time 2: RI curve STI (CEI) * SI (CEI) VI (CEI) EI (CEI) LTI (CEI) STI (CO2) MI (ANSI) LTI (CO8) VI (ANSI) EI (ANSI) RC (CEI) 0.025 * 0.1 * 0.01 s * (Sub Heading) Binary (1 bit) 0 Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Disabled * / Enabled 0.50 In * 0.01 s * (Sub Heading) Binary (1 bit) 0 Courier floating point number Indexed String 0 1 2 Disabled * / Enabled 0.01 IEn* 0: definite time * 1: inverse time 2: RI curve Depend P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 77 /190 Cell Type Min/Max/Step 2011=1 2011=1 2013=1 Setting Setting Setting Setting 0/1/1 0.5/40.0/0.05 0/2/1 0/10/1 2013=1 2013=2 2013=0 2021=1 2021=1 2102=1 2102=1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0.025/1.5/0.001 0.1/10.0/0.005 0 /150/0.01 0/1/1 0.5/40.0/0.05 0 /150/0.01 0/1/1 0.01/1.0/0.005 0/2/1 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 78 /190 Col Row Menu Text 05 Curve Type IE> 07 08 09 0C-0F 10 11 12 13 TMS IE> K IE> Tempo IE> Reserved Stage 2 Overcurrent Max IE>> Threshold IE>> Tempo Type IE>> 14 Curve Type IE>> 16 TMS IE>> 17 K IE>> 18 Tempo IE>> 1C-1F Reserved 20 Stage 3 Overcurrent 21 Max IE>>> 22 Threshold IE>>> 23 Tempo IE>>> 60 00 AUTOMATISM Data Type Indexed String Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Ind 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Values (*: default) STI (CEI) * SI (CEI) VI (CEI) EI (CEI) LTI (CEI) STI (CO2) MI (ANSI) LTI (CO8) VI (ANSI) EI (ANSI) RC (CEI) 0.025 * 0.1 * 0.01 s * (Sub Heading) Binary (1 bit) 0 Courier floating point number Indexed String 0 1 2 Indexed String 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Disabled * / Enabled 0.01 IEn* 0: definite time * 1: inverse time 2: RI curve STI (CEI) * SI (CEI) VI (CEI) EI (CEI) LTI (CEI) STI (CO2) MI (ANSI) LTI (CO8) VI (ANSI) EI (ANSI) RC (CEI) 0.025 * 0.1 * 0.01 s * (Sub Heading) Binary (1 bit) 0 Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Disabled * / Enabled 0.01 IEn * 0.01 s * Depend 2104=1 Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Cell Type Min/Max/Step Setting 0/10/1 2104=1 2104=2 2104=0 2111=1 2111=1 2113=1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0.025/1.5/0.001 0.1/10.0/0.005 0 /150.0/0.01 0/1/1 0.01/8.0/0.005 0/3/1 0/10/1 2113=1 2113=2 2113=0 2121=1 2121=1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0.025/1.5/0.001 0.1/10.0/0.005 0 /150.0/0.01 0/1/1 0.01/8.0/0.005 0 /150.0/0.01 Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Col Row Menu Text 01 Trip Configuration 1/2 Data Type Binary (11 bits) 02 Latched Configuration Binary (11 bits) 03 Blocking 1 Configuration Binary (11 bits) Ind Values (*: default) 0: t I> * 1: t I>> 2: t I>>> 3: t IE> 4: t IE>> 5: t IE>>> 6: reserved 7: reserved 8: reserved 9: tAux1 10: tAux2 0: Latch I> 1: Latch I>> 2: Latch I>>> 3: Latch IE> 4: Latch IE>> 5: Latch IE>>> 6: reserved 7: reserved. 8: reserved 9: Latch Aux1 10: Latch Aux2 0: Blocking t I> 1: Blocking t I>> 2: Blocking t I>>> 3: Blocking t IE> 4: Blocking t IE>> 5: Blocking t IE>>> 6: reserved 7: reserved 8: reserved 9: Blocking tAux1 10: Blocking tAux2 Depend P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 79 /190 Cell Type Min/Max/Step Setting 0 / 2047 / 1 Setting 0 / 2047 / 1 Setting 0 / 2047 / 1 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 80 /190 Col Row Menu Text 15 Trip Configuration 2/2 Data Type Binary (10 bits) 61 00 06 07 10 TS SETTINGS Timer aux 1 Timer aux 2 Logical input allocation 1 Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Binary (7 bits) 11 Logical input allocation 2 Binary (7 bits) 62 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D TC SETTINGS GENERAL TRIP I> tI> I>> t I>> I>>> t I>>> IE> t IE> IE>> t IE>> IE>>> t IE>>> Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Ind 0 * Values (*: default) 0: Reserved 1: Reserved 2: Trip Equation A 3: Trip Equation B 4: Trip Equation C 5: Trip Equation D 6: Trip Equation E 7: Trip Equation F 8: Trip Equation G 9: Trip Equation H 0 * 0 * 0: delatch 1: 52 a 2: 52 b 3: CB failure 4: External input 1 5: External input 2 6: Logic blocking 0: delatch 1: 52 a 2: 52 b 3: CB failure 4: External input 1 5: External input 2 6: Logic blocking 000 * 000 * 000 * 000 * 000 * 000 * 000 * 000 * 000 * 000 * 000 * 000 * 000 * Depend Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Cell Type Min/Max/Step Setting 0 / 4095 / 1 Setting Setting Setting 0 / 200.0 / 0.01 0 / 200.0 / 0.01 0 / 127 / 1 Setting 0 / 127 / 1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Col Row 15 16 17 1D Menu Text Reclosing tAux1 tAux2 TC lock setting 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 63 00 01 Logical input 1 Logical input 2 t Equation A t Equation B t Equation C t Equation D t Equation E t Equation F t Equation G t Equation H LEDS SETTINGS Led 5 1/3 Data Type Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (3 bits) Binary (16 bits) 02 Led 6 1/3 03 Led 7 1/3 04 Led 8 1/3 05 Led 5 2/3 Binary (16 bits) Binary (16 bits) Binary (16 bits) Binary (9 bits) Ind Values (*: default) 000 * 000 * 000 * 000 * bit 0 to 2 =1: TC Locked 000 * 000 * 000 * 000 * 000 * 000 * 000 * 000 * 000 * 000 * 0: I> 1: t I> 2: I>> * 3: t I>> 4: I>>> 5: t I>>> 6: IE> 7: t IE> 8: IE>> 9: t IE>> 10: IE>>> 11: t IE>>> 12 to 15: Reserved As "Led 5 1/3" As "Led 5 1/3" As "Led 5 1/3" 0 * 0: Input 1 1: Input 2 2: Reserved 3: Reserved 4: Reserved 5: Reserved 6: Reserved 7: tAux1 8: tAux2 Depend P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 81 /190 Cell Type Setting Setting Setting Setting Min/Max/Step 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 0/7/1 Setting 0/65535/1 Setting Setting Setting Setting 0/65535/1 0/65535/1 0/65535/1 0/511/1 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 82 /190 Col Row 06 07 08 09 Menu Text Led 6 2/3 Led 7 2/3 Led 8 2/3 Led 5 3/3 Data Type Binary (9 bits) Binary (9 bits) Binary (9 bits) Binary (8 bits) 0A 0B 0C 64 00 10 6C 00 10 11 12 Led 6 3/3 Led 7 3/3 Led 8 3/3 ALARMS Inhib. Alarms tAux BOOLEAN EQUATIONS 1/2 EQUATION A Operator 00 Operand 00 Binary (8 bits) Binary (8 bits) Binary (8 bits) Binary (2 bits) Indexed String Indexed String 13 Operator 01 Indexed String Ind 0 * 0 * 0 * 0 * 0 * 0 * 0 * Values (*: default) As "Led 5 2/3" As "Led 5 2/3" As "Led 5 2/3" 0: Equation A 1: Equation B 2: Equation C 3: Equation D 4: Equation E 5: Equation F 6: Equation G 7: Equation H As "Led 5 3/3" As "Led 5 2/3" As "Led 5 2/3" 0 * 0: Alarm tAux1 1: Alarm tAux2 0 * * (Space) 1 NOT 0 * NULL * 1 I> 2 t I> 3 I>> 4 t I>> 5 I>>> 6 t I>>> 7 IE> 8 t IE> 9 IE>> 10 t IE>> 11 IE>>> 12 t IE>>> 25 tAux1 26 tAux2 0 * OR * 1 OR NOT 2 AND 3 AND NOT Depend Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Cell Type Setting Setting Setting Setting Min/Max/Step 0/511/1 0/511/1 0/511/1 0/255/1 Setting Setting Setting Setting 0/255/1 0/255/1 0/255/1 0/3/1 Setting Setting 0/1/1 0/26/1 Setting 0/3/1 Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Col Row 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 6C 40 41 42 43 ... 60 6C 70 Menu Text Operand 01 Operator 02 Operand 02 Operator 03 Operand 03 Operator 04 Operand 04 Operator 05 Operand 05 Operator 06 Operand 06 Operator 07 Operand 07 Operator 08 Operand 08 Operator 09 Operand 09 Operator 10 Operand 10 Operator 11 Operand 11 Operator 12 Operand 12 Operator 13 Operand 13 Operator 14 Operand 14 Operator 15 Operand 15 EQUATION B Operator 00 Operand 00 Operator 01 ... Operand 15 EQUATION C Data Type Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String ... Indexed String Ind ------------------------------ Values (*: default) As "Operand 00" As "Operator 01" As "Operand 00" As "Operator 01" As "Operand 00" As "Operator 01" As "Operand 00" As "Operator 01" As "Operand 00" As "Operator 01" As "Operand 00" As "Operator 01" As "Operand 00" As "Operator 01" As "Operand 00" As "Operator 01" As "Operand 00" As "Operator 01" As "Operand 00" As "Operator 01" As "Operand 00" As "Operator 01" As "Operand 00" As "Operator 01" As "Operand 00" As "Operator 01" As "Operand 00" As "Operator 01" As "Operand 00" Depend -- As "Operator 00" � Equation A -- As "Operand 00" � Equation A -- As "Operator 01" � Equation A ... ... ... -- As "Operand 00" � Equation A P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 83 /190 Cell Type Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Min/Max/Step 0/26/1 0/3/1 0/26/1 0/3/1 0/26/1 0/3/1 0/26/1 0/3/1 0/26/1 0/3/1 0/26/1 0/3/1 0/26/1 0/3/1 0/26/1 0/3/1 0/26/1 0/3/1 0/26/1 0/3/1 0/26/1 0/3/1 0/26/1 0/3/1 0/26/1 0/3/1 0/26/1 0/3/1 0/26/1 Setting Setting Setting ... Setting 0/1/1 0/26/1 0/3/1 ... 0/26/1 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 84 /190 Col Row 71 72 73 ... 90 6C A0 A1 A2 A3 ... C0 6D 00 10 11 12 13 ... 60 6E 40 41 42 43 ... 60 6E 70 71 72 73 ... 90 6E A0 A1 A2 A3 ... C0 6E 00 01 Menu Text Data Type Operator 00 Indexed String Operand 00 Indexed String Operator 01 Indexed String ... ... Operand 15 Indexed String EQUATION D Operator 00 Indexed String Operand 00 Indexed String Operator 01 Indexed String ... ... Operand 15 Indexed String BOOLEAN EQUATIONS 2/2 EQUATION E Operator 00 Indexed String Operand 00 Indexed String Operator 01 Indexed String ... ... Operand 15 Indexed String EQUATION F Operator 00 Indexed String Operand 00 Indexed String Operator 01 Indexed String ... ... Operand 15 Indexed String EQUATION G Operator 00 Indexed String Operand 00 Indexed String Operator 01 Indexed String ... ... Operand 15 Indexed String EQUATION H Operator 00 Indexed String Operand 00 Indexed String Operator 01 Indexed String ... ... Operand 15 Indexed String BOOLEAN EQUATIONS DELAYS Equation A operation delay Courier floating point number Ind Values (*: default) -- As "Operator 00" � Equation A -- As "Operand 00" � Equation A -- As "Operator 01" � Equation A ... ... ... -- As "Operand 00" � Equation A -- As "Operator 00" � Equation A -- As "Operand 00" � Equation A -- As "Operator 01" � Equation A ... ... ... -- As "Operand 00" � Equation A -- As "Operator 00" � Equation A -- As "Operand 00" � Equation A -- As "Operator 01" � Equation A ... ... ... -- As "Operand 00" � Equation A -- As "Operator 00" � Equation A -- As "Operand 00" � Equation A -- As "Operator 01" � Equation A ... ... ... -- As "Operand 00" � Equation A -- As "Operator 00" � Equation A -- As "Operand 00" � Equation A -- As "Operator 01" � Equation A ... ... ... -- As "Operand 00" � Equation A -- As "Operator 00" � Equation A -- As "Operand 00" � Equation A -- As "Operator 01" � Equation A ... ... ... -- As "Operand 00" � Equation A 0 * Depend Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Cell Type Setting Setting Setting ... Setting Min/Max/Step 0/1/1 0/26/1 0/3/1 ... 0/26/1 Setting Setting Setting ... Setting 0/1/1 0/26/1 0/3/1 ... 0/26/1 Setting Setting Setting ... Setting Setting Setting Setting ... Setting Setting Setting Setting ... Setting Setting Setting Setting ... Setting Setting 0/1/1 0/26/1 0/3/1 ... 0/26/1 0/1/1 0/26/1 0/3/1 ... 0/26/1 0/1/1 0/26/1 0/3/1 ... 0/26/1 0/1/1 0/26/1 0/3/1 ... 0/26/1 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Col Row 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 BF 00 01 02 03 04 05 Menu Text Data Type Equation A reset delay Courier floating point number Equation B operation delay Courier floating point number Equation B reset delay Courier floating point number Equation C operation delay Courier floating point number Equation C reset delay Courier floating point number Equation D operation delay Courier floating point number Equation D reset delay Courier floating point number Equation E operation delay Courier floating point number Equation E reset delay Courier floating point number Equation F operation delay Courier floating point number Equation F reset delay Courier floating point number Equation G operation delay Courier floating point number Equation G reset delay Courier floating point number Equation H operation delay Courier floating point number Equation H reset delay Courier floating point number COMM SYSTEM DATA NOT IMPLEMENTED NOT IMPLEMENTED Setting Transfert Reset Demand Timers NOT IMPLEMENTED Reset Event Report NOT IMPLEMENTED Ind 0 * 0 * 0 * 0 * 0 * 0 * 0 * 0 * 0 * 0 * 0 * 0 * 0 * 0 * 0 * Values (*: default) Depend P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 85 /190 Cell Type Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Min/Max/Step 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s Data Data Setting 0/ 1/ 1 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 86 /190 BF 00 01 02 03 COMM SYSTEM DATA Dist Record Cntrl Ref Dist Record Extract Ref Setting Transfert Menu Cell (2) Menu Cell (2) 0x7000 0x8000 Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Data Data Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 87 /190 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 88 /190 MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 5. COURIER DATABASE ORGANISATION P122, P123 This Database organisation is common for both products, except for the Autorecloser function, the SOTF function (with Control Trip and Control Close outputs). Items specific to P123 are set in Italic. Col Row Menu Text 00 00 01 SYSTEM DATA Language Data Type Ver>: Indexed String 02 Password ASCII Password (4 bytes) 03 Fnlinks: NOT IMPLEMENTED 04 Description ASCII Text (6 bytes) 05 Plant Reference ASCII Text (4 bytes) 06 Model Number ASCII Text (16 bytes) 07 Firmware Number ASCII Text (16 bytes) 08 Serial Number ASCII Text (16 bytes) 09 Frequency Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0A Communication Level Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0B Address Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0C Plant Status Word: NOT IMPLEMENTED 0D Control Status Word: NOT IMPLEMENTED 0E Setting Group Unsigned Integer 0F Load shed Stage: NOT IMPLEMENTED 10 Circuit Breaker Indexed String Control 11 Software Reference ASCII Text (16 characters) 12-1F Unused, reserved 20 Logic Input Status Binary flag (5 bits / 3 bits) Ind Values (*: default) 0 Lang1 (French) 1 Lang2 (English)* 2 Lang3 (German) 3 Lang4 (Spanish) AAAA " P123 "* " Pref " " Model Number " " Firmware Number " " Serial Number " XXXX Hz 1 1* 0*: No operation 1: Trip 2: Close 0: log input 1 1: log input 2 2: log input 3 3: log input 4 4: log input 5 Depend Cell Type Setting Min/Max/Step 0/3/1 Setting Setting Setting Data Data Data Setting Data Setting 32/127/1 32/127/1 32/127/1 50/60/10 1/255/1 Data Setting Data Data 0/2/1 Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Col Row Menu Text Data Type 21 Relay Output Status Binary flag (9 bits / 7 bits) 22 Alarm Binary flag (16 bits) 23 Pseudo Logic Input Binary flag (16 bits) Status group 1 Ind Values (*: default) 0: relay 1 (trip) 1: relay 2 2: relay 3 3: relay 4 4: watchdog relay 5: relay 5 6: relay 6 7: relay 7 8: relay 8 0: Ana output err 1: Comm err 2: Eeprom err data 3: Ct error 4: Clock error 5: Eeprom err calib 6: Ram error 7: Battery error 8: reserved 9: Default settings 10 to 15: reserved 0: I> 1: I>> 2: I>>> 3: IE> 4: IE>> 5: IE>>> 6: t I> 7: t I>> 8: t I>>> 9: t IE> 10: t IE>> 11: t IE>>> 12: Thermal Alarm 13: Therm. Overload 14: t I< 15: I< Depend Cell Type Data P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 89 /190 Min/Max/Step Data Data P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 90 /190 Col Row Menu Text 24 Pseudo Logic Input Status group 2 Data Type Binary flag (16 bits) 25 Pseudo Logic Input Binary flag (16 bits) Status group 3 Ind Values (*: default) 0: Broken Conductor 1: tAux 1 2: tAux 2 3: Breaker Fail. 4: I2 > 5: t I2> 6: Open operating time 7: Trip operation Nb 8: SA 2 n 9: SW Trip Circuit 10: Close operating time 11: Successful autoreclose 12: Locked autorecloser 13: Autorecloser conf. fail 14: I2>> 15: t I2>> 0: tAux 3 1: tAux 4 2: t Reset I> 3: t Reset I>> 4: t Reset IE> 5: t Reset IE>> 6: t Reset I2> 7: t BF 8: t SOTF 9: Final Trip 10: Autoreclos. in progress 11 � 15: reserved Depend Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Cell Type Data Min/Max/Step Data Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Col Row Menu Text 26 Pseudo Logic Input Status group 4 Data Type Binary flag (9 bits) 01 00 01 USER CONTROL Remote control 1 Binary flag (16 bits) 02 Remote control 2 Binary flag (9 bits) Ind Values (*: default) 0: t Equation A 1: t Equation B 2: t Equation C 3: t Equation D 4: t Equation E 5: t Equation F 6: t Equation G 7: t Equation H 8: Blocking Inrush 9: Ie_d> 10: tIe_d> 11: Ie_d> reset 12: Ie_d>> 13: tIe_d>> 14: Ie_d>> reset 0: Unlock trip cont.* 1: Ack first alarm 2: Ack all alarms 3: TRIP 4: CLOSE 5: Setting Change 6: Th. State Reset 7: RMS aver&max Reset 8: Dist. Rec. Trig 9: Maintenance Start 10: Recloser timer Reset 11: Recloser Reset 12: Reserved 13: Reserved 14: Reserved 15: SRAM def . ack 0: Relay 0: TRIP* 1: Relay 1 2: Relay 2 3: Relay 3 4: Watchdog Relay 5: Relay 4 6: Relay 5 7: Relay 6 8: Relay 7 Depend Cell Type Data P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 91 /190 Min/Max/Step Setting 0/65535/1 Setting 0/511/1 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 92 /190 Col Row Menu Text 03 Remote control 3 Data Type Binary flag (6 bits) 02 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 03 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 20 VIEW RECORDS Record number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Occur date Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Active set group Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Phase in fault ASCII Text Fault Id ASCII Text Magnitude Courier floating point number Ia magnitude Courier floating point number Ib magnitude Courier floating point number Ic magnitude Courier floating point number In magnitude Courier floating point number In derived magnitude Courier floating point number MEASUREMENTS IA RMS Courier floating point number IB RMS Courier floating point number IC RMS Courier floating point number I0 RMS Courier floating point number Idirect Courier floating point number IINV Courier floating point number Ratio Idir / I2 Courier floating point number THERMAL STATE Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) (%) (Rst) FREQUENCY Courier floating point number RST RMS MAX & AVERAGE MAX RMS IA Courier floating point number MAX RMS IB Courier floating point number MAX RMS IC Courier floating point number IA RMS AVERAGE Courier floating point number IB RMS AVERAGE Courier floating point number IC RMS AVERAGE Courier floating point number IN � Fn (Rst) Courier floating point number RST Sub-period average Peaks Ind Values (*: default) 0: Reset I0 Harmonic 1: Reserved 2: Reserved 3: Maintenance stop 4: Reset rolling averages 5: Reset sub-period average peaks. Depend 5 * Cell Type Setting Setting Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Min/Max/Step 0/63/1 1/5/1 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Col Row Menu Text Data Type 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 04 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 06 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 00 01 02 IA RMS Sub-period Courier floating point number average Peak IB RMS Sub-period Courier floating point number average Peak IC RMS Sub-period Courier floating point number average Peak RST Rolling Averages IA RMS Rolling Courier floating point number Average IB RMS Rolling Courier floating point number Average IC RMS Rolling Courier floating point number Average RECLOSER STATISTICS (Rst) TOTAL CYCLE Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) NUMBER CYCLE 1 NUMBER Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) CYCLE 2 NUMBER Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) CYCLE 3 NUMBER Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) CYCLE 4 NUMBER Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) DEFINITIVE TRIP Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) NUMBER RECLOSE ORDER Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) NUMBER SW MONITORING RST SAn Ix SAn IA Courier floating point number SAn IB Courier floating point number SAn IC Courier floating point number SW operation nb Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) (Rst) SW operation time Courier floating point number SW Closing time Courier floating point number TIME: Date/Time IEC870 Time & Date Date Format (IEC/no) Indexed String 0C 00 FAIL-SAFE RELAYS SETTINGS Ind Values (*: default) 0.0 s 0: Private * 1: IEC Depend Cell Type Data Data Data P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 93 /190 Min/Max/Step Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Setting 0 (Private) / 1 (IEC) P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 94 /190 Col Row Menu Text 01 Fail-safe relays Data Type Binary flag (8 bits / 6 bits) 0D 00 01 0E 00 01 02 03 04 0F 00 01 02 03 04 20 00 01 02 03 04 GENERAL SETTING Phase Rotation Indexed String sense CT RATIOS Phase CT Primary Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Phase CT Secondary Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Neutral CT Primary Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Neutral CT Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Secondary SETTING GROUPS Setting group toggle Indexed String Select setting group Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Group 1 visible Indexed String Group 2 visible Indexed String Protection Group n� 1 PHASE OVERCURRENT Stage 1 Overcurrent (Sub Heading) Max I> Binary (1 bit) Threshold I> Courier floating point number Temporisation Type Indexed String I> Ind Values (*: default) 0: relay 1 (trip) 1: relay 2 2: relay 3 3: relay 4 4: relay 5 5: relay 6 6: relay 7 7: relay 8 0: Direct (A/B/C) * 1: Inverse (A/C/B) 1000 * 1 * 1000 * 1 * 0: Menu * 1: Input 1* 0: YES * 1: NO 0: YES 1: NO * Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Depend Cell Type Setting Min/Max/Step 1/255/1 0F01=0 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 (A/B/C) / 1 (A/C/B) 1/50000/1 1/5/4 1/50000/1 1/5/4 0 (Menu) / 1 (Input) 1/2 0 (YES) / 1 (NO) 0 (YES) / 1 (NO) 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.1 In * 0 0: definite time * 1 1: inverse time 2 2: RI curve 2002=1 2002=1 Setting Setting Setting 0/1/1 0.1/25.0/0.1 0/2/1 Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Col Row Menu Text 05 Curve type I> Data Type Indexed String 06 TMS I> Courier floating point number 07 K I> Courier floating point number 08 Tempo I> Courier floating point number 09 Tempo reset type I> Indexed String 0A RTMS I> 0B T RESET I> Courier floating point number Courier floating point number 0C-0F Reserved 10 Stage 2 Overcurrent 11 Max I>> 12 Threshold I>> 13 Temporisation Type I>> (Sub Heading) Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Indexed String 14 Curve type I>> Indexed String Ind Values (*: default) 0 STI (CEI) * 1 SI (CEI) 2 VI (CEI) 3 EI (CEI) 4 LTI (CEI) 5 STI (CO2) 6 MI (ANSI) 7 LTI (CO8) 8 VI (ANSI) 9 EI (ANSI) 10 RC (CEI) 0.025 * 0.1 * 0.01 s * 0: definite time 1: inverse time 0.025 0.04 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.50 In * 0 0: definite time * 1 1: inverse time 2 2: RI curve 0 STI (CEI) * 1 SI (CEI) 2 VI (CEI) 3 EI (CEI) 4 LTI (CEI) 5 STI (CO2) 6 MI (ANSI) 7 LTI (CO8) 8 VI (ANSI) 9 EI (ANSI) 10 RC (CEI) Depend 2004=1 Cell Type Setting P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 95 /190 Min/Max/Step 0/10/1 2004=1 2004=2 2004=0 2004=1 & 2005>= 5 & 2005 <=9 2009 = 1 2009 = 0 or 2004 =0 or 2004 =2 or (2004=1 & 2005 < 5 & 2005 > 9) Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 2011=1 2011=1 Setting Setting Setting 2013=1 Setting 0.025/1.5/0.001 0.1/10.0/0.005 0 /150.0/0.01 0/1 0.025/3.2/0.001 0/600.0/0.01 0/1/1 0.5/40.0/0.05 0/2/1 0/10/1 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 96 /190 Col Row Menu Text Data Type 15 TMS I>> Courier floating point number 16 K I>> Courier floating point number 17 Tempo I>> Courier floating point number 18 Tempo reset type I>> Indexed String 19 RTMS I>> 1A T RESET I>> Courier floating point number Courier floating point number 1B-1F Reserved 20 Stage 3 Overcurrent (Sub Heading) 21 Max I>>> Binary (1 bit) 22 Threshold I>>> Courier floating point number 23 Tempo I>>> Courier floating point number 24 Sample I>>> Binary (1 bit) 21 00 EARTH FAULT 01 Stage 1 Overcurrent (Sub Heading) 02 Max IE> Binary (1 bit) 03 Threshold IE> Courier floating point number 04 Tempo Type IE> Indexed String Ind Values (*: default) 0.025 * 0.1 * 0.01 s * 0: definite time 1: inverse time 0.025 0.04 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.50 In * 0.01 s * 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.01 IEn* or 0.002 IEn* if great sensitivity 0 0: definite time * 1 1: inverse time 2 2: RI curve 3 3: RXIDG curves Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Depend 2013=1 2013=2 2013=0 2013=1 & 2014>= 5 & 2014 <=9 2018 = 1 2018 = 0 or 2013 = 0 or 2013 =2 or (2013=1 & 2014 < 5 & 2014 > 9) Cell Type Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Min/Max/Step 0.025/1.5/0.001 0.1/10.0/0.005 0 /150/0.01 0/1 0.025/3.2/0.001 0/600.0/0.01 2021=1 2021=1 2021=1 Setting Setting Setting Setting 0/1/1 0.5/40.0/0.05 0 /150/0.01 0/1/1 2102=1 Setting Setting 2102=1 Setting 0/1/1 0.01/2.0/0.005 or 0.1/25.0/0.01 if normal sensitivity or 0.002/1.0/0.001 if great sensitivity 0/3/1 Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Col Row Menu Text 05 Curve Type IE> Data Type Indexed String 06 Curve Type 2 (RXIDG) IE> Indexed String 07 TMS IE> Courier floating point number 08 K IE> Courier floating point number 09 Tempo IE> Courier floating point number 0A Tempo reset Type Indexed String IE> 0B RTMS IE> 0C T RESET IE> Courier floating point number Courier floating point number 0D Interlock IE> Binary (1 bit) 0E-0F Reserved 10 Stage 2 Overcurrent (Sub Heading) 11 Max IE>> Binary (1 bit) Ind Values (*: default) 0 STI (CEI) * 1 SI (CEI) 2 VI (CEI) 3 EI (CEI) 4 LTI (CEI) 5 STI (CO2) 6 MI (ANSI) 7 LTI (CO8) 8 VI (ANSI) 9 EI (ANSI) 10 RC (CEI) 0 K = 0.3 * 1 K = 0.4 2 K = 0.5 3 K = 0.6 4 K = 0.7 5 K = 0.8 6 K = 0.9 7 K = 1.0. 0.025 * 0.1 * 0.01 s * 0: definite time 1: inverse time 0.025 0.04 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0 Disabled * / Enabled Depend 2104=1 Cell Type Setting P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 97 /190 Min/Max/Step 0/10/1 2104=3 Setting 0/7/1 2104=1 2104=2 2104=0 2104=1 & 2105>= 5 & 2105 <=9 210A = 1 210A = 0 or 2104 = 0 or 2104 =2 or 2104 =3 or (2104=1 & 2105 < 5 & 2105 > 9) (2104 =3 or 2104=1) & (2111=1 or 2121=1) Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0.025/1.5/0.001 0.1/10.0/0.005 0 /150.0/0.01 0/1 0.025/3.2/0.001 0/600.0/0.01 0/1/1 0/1/1 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 98 /190 Col Row Menu Text 12 Threshold IE>> Data Type Courier floating point number 13 Tempo Type IE>> Indexed String 14 Curve Type IE>> Indexed String 15 Curve Type 2 (RXIDG) IE>> Indexed String 16 TMS IE>> Courier floating point number 17 K IE>> Courier floating point number 18 Tempo IE>> Courier floating point number 19 Tempo reset Type Indexed String IE>> 1A RTMS IE>> Courier floating point number Ind Values (*: default) 0.01 IEn* or 0.50 IEn* if normal sensitivity or 0.002 IEn* if great sensitivity 0 0: definite time * 1 1: inverse time 2 2: RI curve 3 3: RXIDG curves 0 STI (CEI) * 1 SI (CEI) 2 VI (CEI) 3 EI (CEI) 4 LTI (CEI) 5 STI (CO2) 6 MI (ANSI) 7 LTI (CO8) 8 VI (ANSI) 9 EI (ANSI) 10 RC (CEI) 0 K = 0.3 * 1 K = 0.4 2 K = 0.5 3 K = 0.6 4 K = 0.7 5 K = 0.8 6 K = 0.9 7 K = 1.0. 0.025 * 0.1 * 0.01 s * 0: definite time 1: inverse time 0.025 Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Depend 2111=1 Cell Type Setting 2111=1 Setting Min/Max/Step 0.01/8.0/0.005 or 0.50/40.0/0.01 if normal sensitivity or 0.002/1.0/0.001 if great sensitivity 0/3/1 2113=1 Setting 0/10/1 2113=3 Setting 0/7/1 2113=1 2113=2 2113=0 2113=1 & 2114>= 5 & 2114 <=9 2119 = 1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0.025/1.5/0.001 0.1/10.0/0.005 0 /150.0/0.01 0/1 0.025/3.2/0.001 Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Col Row Menu Text 1B T RESET IE>> Data Type Courier floating point number 1C-1F Reserved 20 Stage 3 Overcurrent 21 Max IE>>> 22 Threshold IE>>> (Sub Heading) Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number 23 Tempo IE>>> Courier floating point number 24 Sample IE>>> Binary (1 bit) 30 Ie_d> title (Sub Heading) 31 Max Ie_d> Binary (1 bit) 32 Threshold Ie_d> Courier floating point number 33 Tempo Type Ie_d> Indexed String 34 Curve Type Ie_d> Indexed String 35 TMS Ie_d> Courier floating point number 36 K Ie_d> Courier floating point number 37 Tempo Ie_d> Courier floating point number 38 Tempo reset Type Indexed String Ie_d> 39 RTMS Ie_d> Courier floating point number Ind 0.04 Values (*: default) 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.01 IEn* or 0.50 IEn* if normal sensitivity or 0.002 IEn* if great sensitivity 0.01 s * 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.1 In 0 0: definite time * 1 1: inverse time 2 2: RI curve 0 STI (CEI) * 1 SI (CEI) 2 VI (CEI) 3 EI (CEI) 4 LTI (CEI) 5 STI (CO2) 6 MI (ANSI) 7 LTI (CO8) 8 VI (ANSI) 9 EI (ANSI) 10 RC (CEI) 0.025 * 0.1 * 0.01 s * 0: definite time 1: inverse time 0.025 Depend 2119 = 0 or 2113 = 0 or 2113 =2 or 2113 =3 or (2113=1 & 2114 < 5 & 2114 > 9) Cell Type Setting 2121=1 Setting Setting 2121=1 2121=1 2131=1 2131=1 2133=1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 2133=1 2133=2 2133=0 2133=1 & 2134>= 5 & 2134 <=9 2138 = 1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 99 /190 Min/Max/Step 0/600.0/0.01 0/1/1 0.01/8.0/0.005 or 0.50/40.0/0.01 if normal sensitivity or 0.002/1.0/0.001 if great sensitivity 0 /150.0/0.01 0/1/1 0/1/1 0.1/40/0.01 0/3/1 0/10/1 0.025/1.5/0.001 0.1/10.0/0.005 0 /150.0/0.01 0/1 0.025/3.2/0.001 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 100 /190 Col Row Menu Text 3A T RESET Ie_d> Data Type Courier floating point number 3B Ie_d>> title (Sub Heading) 3C Max Ie_d>> Binary (1 bit) 3D Threshold Ie_d>> Courier floating point number 3E Tempo Type Ie_d>> Indexed String 3F Curve Type Ie_d>> Indexed String 40 TMS Ie_d>> Courier floating point number 41 K Ie_d>> Courier floating point number 42 Tempo Ie_d>> Courier floating point number 43 Tempo reset Type Indexed String Ie_d>> 44 RTMS Ie_d>> 45 T RESET Ie_d>> Courier floating point number Courier floating point number 22 00 01 02 THERMAL OVERLOAD Ith> Threshold Ith> Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Ind 0.04 Values (*: default) 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.1 In 0 0: definite time * 1 1: inverse time 2 2: RI curve 0 STI (CEI) * 1 SI (CEI) 2 VI (CEI) 3 EI (CEI) 4 LTI (CEI) 5 STI (CO2) 6 MI (ANSI) 7 LTI (CO8) 8 VI (ANSI) 9 EI (ANSI) 10 RC (CEI) 0.025 * 0.1 * 0.01 s * 0: definite time 1: inverse time 0.025 0.04 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.10 Ith* Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Depend 2138 = 0 or 2133 = 0 or 2133 =2 or 2133 =3 or (2133=1 & 2134 < 5 & 2134 > 9) 213C=1 213C=1 Cell Type Setting Setting Setting Setting Min/Max/Step 0/600.0/0.01 0/1/1 0.1/40/0.01 0/3/1 213E=1 Setting 0/10/1 213E=1 213E=2 213E=0 213E=1 & 213F>= 5 & 213F <=9 2143 = 1 2143 = 0 or 213E = 0 or 213E =2 or 213E =3 or (213E=1 & 213F < 5 & 213F > 9) Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 2201=1 Setting Setting 0.025/1.5/0.001 0.1/10.0/0.005 0 /150.0/0.01 0/1 0.025/3.2/0.001 0/600.0/0.01 0/1/1 0.01/3.2/0.01 Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Col Row Menu Text 03 04 05 06 07 23 00 01 02 03 04 24 00 01 02 03 K Ith> TRIP ALARM ? ALARM Thermal constant MIN I< I< Threshold I< Tempo I < Inhib. I< by 52a NEGATIVE CURRENT I2> Threshold I2> Temporisation Type Data Type Courier floating point number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Binary (1 bit) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Binary (1 bit) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit) Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Indexed String 04 Curve type Indexed String 05 TMS 06 K (RI) 07 Tempo I2> 08 Reset tempo type Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Indexed String 09 RTMS 0A T RESET Courier floating point number Courier floating point number 10 I2>> 11 Threshold I2>> Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Ind Values (*: default) 1.05 * 100 % * 0 Disabled * / Enabled 90 % * 1 * 0 Disabled * / Enabled 20 %In * 0.01 s * 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.1 In * 0 0: definite time * 1 1: inverse time 2 2: RI curve 0 STI (CEI) * 1 SI (CEI) 2 VI (CEI) 3 EI (CEI) 4 LTI (CEI) 5 STI (CO2) 6 MI (ANSI) 7 LTI (CO8) 8 VI (ANSI) 9 EI (ANSI) 0.025 * 0.1 * 0.01 s * 0: definite time 1: inverse time 0.025 * 0.04 * 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.1 In * Depend 2201=1 2201=1 2201=1 2205 =1 2201=1 2301=1 2301=1 2301=1 Cell Type Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 2401 = 1 2401 = 1 Setting Setting Setting 2403 = 1 Setting P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 101 /190 Min/Max/Step 1.0/1.50/0.01 In 50 / 200/ 1 % 0/1/1 50 / 200/ 1 % 1/ 200 / 1 mn 0/1/1 2 / 100 / 1 %In 0 /150.0/0.01 0/1/1 0/1/1 0.1/40.0/0.01 In 0/2/1 0/9/1 2403=1 2403=2 2403=0 2403=1 & 2404>= 5 & 2404 <=9 2408 = 1 2408 = 0 or 2403 =2 or (2403=1 & 2404 < 5 & 2404 > 9) 2410 = 1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0.025/1.5/0.001 0.1/10.0/0.005 0 /150.0/1.0 0/1/1 0.025/3.2/0.001 0.04/100/0.01 0/1/1 0.1/40.0/0.01 In P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 102 /190 Col Row Menu Text 12 25 00 01 02 03 Tempo I2>> AUTORECLOSER Autorecloser State circuit breaker Control window Data Type Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit) Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number 04 External blocking Binary (1 bit) 07 Temporisation cycle Courier floating point number 1 08 Temporisation cycle Courier floating point number 2 09 Temporisation cycle Courier floating point number 3 0A Temporisation cycle Courier floating point number 4 0B Reclaim TIME Courier floating point number 0C Inhibition time Courier floating point number 0D Number of short Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) circuit cycle 0E Number of earth fault Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) cycle 0F Cycles tI> Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) configuration 10 Cycles tI>> Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) configuration 11 Cycles tI>>> Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) configuration 12 Cycles tIE> Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) configuration 13 Cycles tIE>> Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) configuration 14 Cycles tIE>>> Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) configuration 15 Cycles tAux1> Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) configuration 16 Cycles tAux2> Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) configuration Protection Group n� 2 Ind Values (*: default) 0.01 s * 0 Disabled * / Enabled Disabled * / Enabled 0.01 s * Disabled * / Enabled 0.05 s * 0.05 s * 0.05 s * 0.05 s * 0.02 s * 0.02 s * 0 * 0 * 0x1111 * 0x1111 * 0x1111 * 0x1111 * 0x1111 * 0x1111 * 0x1111 * 0x1111 * Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Depend 2410 = 1 2501 = 1 2502 = 1 2501 = 1 2501 = 1 2501 = 1 2501 = 1 2501 = 1 2501 = 1 2501 = 1 2501 = 1 2501 = 1 2501 = 1 2501 = 1 2501 = 1 2501 = 1 2501 = 1 2501 = 1 2501 = 1 2501 = 1 Cell Type Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Min/Max/Step 0 /150.0/1.0 0/1/1 0/1/1 0.01 / 600.00 / 0.01 s 0/1/1 0.05 / 300.00 / 0.01 s 0.05 / 300.00 / 0.01 s 0.05 / 600.00 / 0.01 s 0.05 / 600.00 / 0.01 s 0.02 / 600.00 / 0.01 s 0.02 / 600.00 / 0.01 s 0 / 4 / 1 0 / 4 / 1 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Col Row Menu Text 40 00 01 02 03 04 PHASE OVERCURRENT Stage 1 Overcurrent Max I> Threshold I> Tempo Type I> Data Type (Sub Heading) Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Indexed String 05 Curve Type I> Indexed String 06 TMS I> Courier floating point number 07 K I> Courier floating point number 08 Tempo I> Courier floating point number 09 Reset tempo type I> Indexed String 0A RTMS I> 0B T RESET I> Courier floating point number Courier floating point number 0C-0F Reserved 10 Stage 2 Overcurrent 11 Max I>> 12 Threshold I>> 13 Tempo Type I>> (Sub Heading) Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Indexed String Ind Values (*: default) Depend Cell Type P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 103 /190 Min/Max/Step 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.1 In * 0 0: definite time * 1 1: inverse time 2 2: RI curve 0 STI (CEI) * 1 SI (CEI) 2 VI (CEI) 3 EI (CEI) 4 LTI (CEI) 5 STI (CO2) 6 MI (ANSI) 7 LTI (CO8) 8 VI (ANSI) 9 EI (ANSI) 10 RC (CEI) 0.025 * 0.1 * 0.01 s * 0: definite time 1: inverse time 0.025 0.04 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.50 In * 0 0: definite time * 1 1: inverse time 2 2: RI curve 4002=1 4002=1 4004=1 Setting Setting Setting Setting 4004=1 4004=2 4004=0 4004=1 & 4005>= 5 & 4005 <=9 4009 = 1 4009 = 0 or 4004 =0 or 4004 =2 or (4004=1 & 4005 < 5 & 4005 > 9) Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 4011=1 4011=1 Setting Setting Setting 0/1/1 0.1/25.0/0.1 0/2/1 0/10/1 0.025/1.5/0.001 0.1/10.0/0.005 0.01/150.0/1.0 0/1 0.025/3.2/0.001 0/600.0/0.01 0/1/1 0.5/40.0/0.05 0/2/1 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 104 /190 Col Row Menu Text 14 Curve Type I>> Data Type Indexed String 15 TMS I>> Courier floating point number 16 K I>> Courier floating point number 17 Tempo I>> Courier floating point number 18 Reset tempo type I>> Indexed String 19 RTMS I>> 1A T RESET I>> Courier floating point number Courier floating point number 1B-1F Reserved 20 Stage 3 Overcurrent (Sub Heading) 21 Max I>>> Binary (1 bit) 22 Threshold I>>> Courier floating point number 23 Tempo I>>> Courier floating point number 24 Sample I>>> Binary (1 bit) 41 00 EARTH FAULT 01 Stage 1 Overcurrent (Sub Heading) 02 Max IE> Binary (1 bit) 03 Threshold IE> Courier floating point number Ind Values (*: default) 0 STI (CEI) * 1 SI (CEI) 2 VI (CEI) 3 EI (CEI) 4 LTI (CEI) 5 STI (CO2) 6 MI (ANSI) 7 LTI (CO8) 8 VI (ANSI) 9 EI (ANSI) 10 RC (CEI) 0.025 * 0.1 * 0.01 s * 0: definite time 1: inverse time 0.025 0.04 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.50 In * 0.01 s * 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.01 IEn* or 0.002 IEn* if great sensitivity Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Depend 4013=1 Cell Type Setting Min/Max/Step 0/10/1 4013=1 4013=2 4013=0 4013=1 & 4014>= 5 & 4014 <=9 4018 = 1 4018 = 0 or 4013 =0 or 4013 =2 or (4013=1 & 4014 < 5 & 4014 > 9) Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 4021=1 4021=1 4021=1 Setting Setting Setting Setting 4102=1 Setting Setting 0.025/1.5/0.001 0.1/10.0/0.005 0 /150/0.01 0/1 0.025/3.2/0.001 0/600.0/0.01 0/1/1 0.5/40.0/0.05 0 /150/0.01 0/1/1 0/1/1 0.01/2.0/0.005 or 0.1/25.0/0.01if normal sensitivity or 0.002/1.0/0.001 if great sensitivity Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Col Row Menu Text 04 Temporisation Type IE> Data Type Indexed String 05 Curve type IE> Indexed String 06 Curve Type 2 (RXIDG) IE> Indexed String 07 TMS IE> Courier floating point number 08 K IE> Courier floating point number 09 Tempo IE> Courier floating point number 0A Tempo reset Type Indexed String IE> 0B RTMS IE> 0C T RESET IE> Courier floating point number Courier floating point number 0D Interlock IE> Binary (1 bit) Ind Values (*: default) 0 0: definite time * 1 1: inverse time 2 2: RI curve 3 3: RXIDG curve 0 STI (CEI) * 1 SI (CEI) 2 VI (CEI) 3 EI (CEI) 4 LTI (CEI) 5 STI (CO2) 6 MI (ANSI) 7 LTI (CO8) 8 VI (ANSI) 9 EI (ANSI) 10 RC (CEI) 0 K = 0.3 * 1 K = 0.4 2 K = 0.5 3 K = 0.6 4 K = 0.7 5 K = 0.8 6 K = 0.9 7 K = 1.0. 0.025 * 0.1 * 0.01 s * 0: definite time 1: inverse time 0.025 0.04 0 Disabled * / Enabled Depend 4102=1 Cell Type Setting P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 105 /190 Min/Max/Step 0/3/1 4104=1 Setting 0/10/1 2104=3 Setting 0/7/1 4104=1 4104=2 4104=0 4104=1 & 4105>= 5 & 4105 <=9 4109 = 1 4109 = 0 or 4104 =0 or 4104 =2 or 4104 =3 or (4104=1 & 4105 < 5 & 4105 > 9) (4104 =3 or 4104=1) & (4111=1 or 4121=1) Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0.025/1.5/0.001 0.1/10.0/0.005 0 /150.0/0.01 0/1 0.025/3.2/0.001 0/600.0/0.01 0/1/1 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 106 /190 Col Row Menu Text 0E-0F Reserved 10 Stage 2 Overcurrent 11 Max IE>> 12 Threshold IE>> Data Type (Sub Heading) Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number 13 Temporisation Type Indexed String IE>> 14 Curve type IE>> Indexed String 15 Curve Type 2 (RXIDG) IE> Indexed String 16 TMS IE>> Courier floating point number 17 K IE>> Courier floating point number 18 Tempo IE>> Courier floating point number 19 Tempo reset Type Indexed String IE>> 1A RTMS IE>> Courier floating point number Ind Values (*: default) 0 Disabled * / Enabled IEn* or 0.50 IEn* if normal sensitivity or 0.002 IEn* if great sensitivity 0 0: definite time * 1 1: inverse time 2 2: RI curve 3 3: RXIDG curve 0 STI (CEI) * 1 SI (CEI) 2 VI (CEI) 3 EI (CEI) 4 LTI (CEI) 5 STI (CO2) 6 MI (ANSI) 7 LTI (CO8) 8 VI (ANSI) 9 EI (ANSI) 10 RC (CEI) 0 K = 0.3 * 1 K = 0.4 2 K = 0.5 3 K = 0.6 4 K = 0.7 5 K = 0.8 6 K = 0.9 7 K = 1.0. 0.025 * 0.1 * 0.01 s * 0: definite time 1: inverse time 0.025 Depend Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Cell Type Min/Max/Step 4111=1 Setting Setting 4111=1 Setting 0/1/1 0.01/8.0/0.005 or 0.50/40.0/0.01 if normal sensitivity or 0.002/1.0/0.001 if great sensitivity 0/3/1 4113=1 Setting 0/10/1 4113=3 Setting 0/7/1 4113=1 4113=2 4113=0 4113=1 & 4114 >= 5 & 4114 <=9 4119 = 1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0.025/1.5/0.001 0.1/10.0/0.005 0 /150.0/0.01 0/1 0.025/3.2/0.001 Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Col Row Menu Text 1B T RESET IE>> Data Type Courier floating point number 1C-1F Reserved 20 Stage 3 Overcurrent 21 Max IE>>> 22 Threshold IE>>> (Sub Heading) Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number 23 24 42 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 43 00 01 02 03 04 44 00 01 02 03 Tempo IE>>> Sample IE>>> THERMAL OVERLOAD Ith> Threshold Ith> K Ith> TRIP ALARM ? ALARM Thermal constant MIN I< I< Threshold I< Tempo I < Inhib. I< by 52a NEGATIVE CURRENT I2> Threshold I2> Temporisation type Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit) Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Binary (1 bit) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Binary (1 bit) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit) Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Ind 0.04 Values (*: default) 0 Disabled * / Enabled IEn* or 0.50 IEn* if normal sensitivity or 0.002 IEn* if great sensitivity 0.01 s * 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.10 Ith* 1.05 * 100 % * 0 Disabled * / Enabled 90 % * 1 * 0 Disabled * / Enabled 20 %In * 0.01 s * 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.1 In * 0 0: definite time * 1 1: inverse time 2 2: RI curve Depend 4119 = 0 or 4113 =0 or 4113 =2 or 4113 =3 or (4113=1 & 4114 < 5 & 4114 > 9) Cell Type Setting 4121=1 Setting Setting 4121=1 4121=1 4201=1 4201=1 4201=1 4201=1 4205 =1 4201=1 4301=1 4301=1 4301=1 4401 = 1 4401 = 1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 107 /190 Min/Max/Step 0/600.0/0.01 0/1/1 0.01/8.0/0.005 or 0.50/40.0/0.01 if normal sensitivity or 0.002/1.0/0.001 if great sensitivity 0 /150.0/0.01 0/1/1 0/1/1 0.01/3.2/0.01 1.0/1.50/0.01 In 50 / 200/ 1 % 0/1/1 50 / 200/ 1 % 1/ 200 / 1 mn 0/1/1 2 / 100 / 1 %In 0 /150.0/0.01 0/1/1 0/1/1 0.1/40.0/0.01 In 0/2/1 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 108 /190 Col Row Menu Text 04 Curve Type Data Type Indexed String 05 TMS Courier floating point number 06 K (RI) Courier floating point number 07 Tempo I2> Courier floating point number 08 Temporisation reset Indexed String type 09 RTMS 0A T RESET Courier floating point number Courier floating point number 10 11 12 45 00 01 02 03 04 07 08 09 0A 0B I2>> Threshold I2>> Tempo I2>> AUTORECLOSER Autorecloser State circuit breaker Control window Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit) Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number External blocking Temporisation cycle 1 Temporisation cycle 2 Temporisation cycle 3 Temporisation cycle 4 Reclaim TIME Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Ind Values (*: default) 0 STI (CEI) * 1 SI (CEI) 2 VI (CEI) 3 EI (CEI) 4 LTI (CEI) 5 STI (CO2) 6 MI (ANSI) 7 LTI (CO8) 8 VI (ANSI) 9 EI (ANSI) 0.025 * 0.1 * 0.01 s * 0: definite time 1: inverse time 0.025 * 0.04 * 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.1 In * 0.01 s * 0 Disabled * / Enabled Disabled * / Enabled 0.01 s * Disabled * / Enabled 0.05 s * 0.05 s * 0.05 s * 0.05 s * 0.02 s * Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Depend 4401 = 1 Cell Type Setting Min/Max/Step 0/9/1 4403=1 4403=2 4403=0 4403=1 & 4404>= 5 & 4404 <=9 4408 = 1 4408 = 0 or 4403 =2 or (4403=1 & 4404 < 5 & 4404 > 9) 4410 = 1 4410 = 1 4501 = 1 4502 = 1 4501 = 1 4501 = 1 4501 = 1 4501 = 1 4501 = 1 4501 = 1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0.025/1.5/0.001 0.1/10.0/0.005 0 /150.0/1.0 0/1/1 0.025/3.2/0.001 0.04/100/0.01 0/1/1 0.1/40.0/0.01 In 0 /150.0/1.0 0/1/1 0/1/1 0.01 / 600.00 / 0.01 s 0/1/1 0.05 / 300.00 / 0.01 s 0.05 / 300.00 / 0.01 s 0.05 / 600.00 / 0.01 s 0.05 / 600.00 / 0.01 s 0.02 / 600.00 / 0.01 s Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Col Row Menu Text 0C Inhibition time Data Type Courier floating point number 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 60 00 01 Number of short Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) circuit cycle Number of earth fault Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) cycle Cycles tI> Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) configuration Cycles tI>> Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) configuration Cycles tI>>> Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) configuration Cycles tIE> Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) configuration Cycles tIE>> Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) configuration Cycles tIE>>> Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) configuration Cycles tAux1> Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) configuration Cycles tAux2> Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) configuration AUTOMATISM Trip Configuration Binary (15 bits) Ind Values (*: default) 0.02 s * 0 * 0 * 0x1111 * 0x1111 * 0x1111 * 0x1111 * 0x1111 * 0x1111 * 0x1111 * 0x1111 * 1 * 0: t I> * 1: t I>> 2: t I>>> 3: t IE> 4: t IE>> 5: t IE>>> 6: t I< 7: t Therm 8: Broken Conductor 9: tAux1 10: tAux2 11: t I2> 12: t I2>> 13: tAux3 14: tAux4 15: Breaker Fail Depend 4501 = 1 4501 = 1 4501 = 1 4501 = 1 4501 = 1 4501 = 1 4501 = 1 4501 = 1 4501 = 1 4501 = 1 4501 = 1 Cell Type Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 109 /190 Min/Max/Step 0.02 / 600.00 / 0.01 s 0 / 4 / 1 0 / 4 / 1 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group 0/2/1 on each 4 bit group 0 / 65535 / 1 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 110 /190 Col Row Menu Text Data Type 02 Latch Configuration Binary (15 bits) 03 Blocking 1 Configuration Binary (16 bits) Ind Values (*: default) 0 * 0: Latch I> 1: Latch I>> 2: Latch I>>> 3: Latch IE> 4: Latch IE>> 5: Latch IE>>> 6: Latch I< 7: Latch Therm. Ov. 8: Latch Broken Conductor 9: Latch Aux1 10: Latch Aux2 11: Latch I2> 12: Latch I2>> 13: Latch Aux3 14: Latch Aux4 15: Latch Breaker Fail 0 * 0: Blocking t I> 1: Blocking t I>> 2: Blocking t I>>> 3: Blocking t IE> 4: Blocking t IE>> 5: Blocking t IE>>> 6: Blocking t I< 7: Blocking t Therm 8: Blocking Broken Conductor 9: Blocking tAux1 10: Blocking tAux2 11: Blocking t I2> 12: Blocking t I2>> 13: Blocking tAux3 14: Blocking tAux4 15: reserved Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Depend Cell Type Setting Min/Max/Step 0 / 65535 / 1 Setting 0 / 65535 / 1 Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Col Row Menu Text 04 Blocking 2 Configuration Data Type Binary (16 bits) 05 Broken conductor detection 06 Tempo tBC 07 Threshold mod iinv/idirect in % 08 Cold load start 09 Threshold of cold load start Binary (1 bit) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit) Binary (9 bits) 0A % of cold load start Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0B Cold load start Courier floating point number Tempo 0C Breaker failure Binary (1 bit) 0D I< Threshold for Courier floating point number Breaker failure 0E Tempo tBF Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 0F Phase instant Binary (1 bit) blocking 10 Earth instant blocking Binary (1 bit) Ind Values (*: default) 0 * 0: Blocking t I> 1: Blocking t I>> 2: Blocking t I>>> 3: Blocking t IE> 4: Blocking t IE>> 5: Blocking t IE>>> 6: Blocking t I< 7: Blocking t Therm 8: Blocking Broken Conductor 9: Blocking tAux1 10: Blocking tAux2 11: Blocking t I2> 12: Blocking t I2>> 13: Blocking tAux3 14: Blocking tAux4 15: reserved Disabled * / Enabled 0 * 20 % * Disabled * / Enabled 0 * 0: Desens t I> 1: Desens t I>> 2: Desens t I>>> 3: Desens t IE> 4: Desens t IE>> 5: Desens t IE>>> 6: Desens t Therm 7: Desens t I2> 8: Desens t I2>> 50 % * 1.0 s * Disabled * / Enabled 10 % * 0.1 s * Disabled * / Enabled Disabled * / Enabled Depend Cell Type Setting P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 111 /190 Min/Max/Step 0 / 65535 / 1 6005 = 1 6005 = 1 6008 = 1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 / 1 / 1 0 / 144.0 / 0.01 s 20 / 100 / 1 % 0 / 1 / 1 0 / 511 / 1 6008 = 1 6008 = 1 600C = 1 600C = 1 600C = 1 600C = 1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 20 / 500 / 1 0.1 / 3600.0 / 0.1 s 0 / 1 / 1 2 / 100/ 1 % 0.03 / 10.0 / 0.01 s 0 / 1/ 1 0 / 1/ 1 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 112 /190 Col Row Menu Text 11 Logic selectivity 1 Data Type Binary (4 bits) 12 Tempo selectivity1 Courier floating point number 13 Logic selectivity 2 Binary (4 bits) 14 Tempo selectivity 2 Courier floating point number 15 Trip Configuration 2/2 Binary (10 bits) 16 Latch Configuration Binary (2 bits) 2/2 20 Blocking Inrush Binary (1 bit) detection 21 Inrush harmonic 2 Courier floating point number ratio in % 22 Inrush Reset tempo Courier floating point number 23 Inrush blocking Binary (13 bits) selection 61 00 06 TS SETTINGS Timer aux 1 Courier floating point number Ind Values (*: default) 0 * 0: t I>> 1: t I>>> 2: t IE>> 3: t IE>>> 0 * 0 * 0: t I>> 1: t I>>> 2: t IE>> 3: t IE>>> 0 * 0 * 0: Trip SOTF 1: Control TRIP 2: Trip Equation A 3: Trip Equation B 4: Trip Equation C 5: Trip Equation D 6: Trip Equation E 7: Trip Equation F 8: Trip Equation G 9: Trip Equation H 0 * 0: Latch SOTF 1: Reserved Disabled * / Enabled 20.0 % * 0 * 0: t I> 1: t I>> 2: t I>>> 3: t IE> 4: t IE>> 5: t IE>>> 6: Reserved 7: Reserved 8: Reserved 9: Reserved 10: Reserved 11: t I2> 12: t I2>> 0 * Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Depend Cell Type Setting Min/Max/Step 0 / 15/ 1 6011 <> 0 Setting Setting 0 / 150.0 / 0.01 s 0 / 15 / 1 6013 <> 1 Setting Setting 0 / 150.0 / 0.01 s 0 / 4095 / 1 6020 = 1 6020 = 1 6020 = 1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 / 3 / 1 0 / 1 / 1 10.0 / 35.0 / 0.01% 0 / 2.00 / 0.01 s 0 / 8191 / 1 Setting 0 / 200.0 / 0.01 Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Col Row Menu Text 07 Timer aux 2 08 TS setting (Edge type) 09 TS voltage 0A Timer aux 3 0B Timer aux 4 10 Logical input 1 allocation (1/2) Data Type Courier floating point number Binary (5 bits) Indexed String Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Binary (16 bits) 11 Logical input 2 allocation (1/2) 12 Logical input 3 allocation (1/2) 13 Logical input 4 allocation (1/2) 14 Logical input 5 allocation (1/2) 15 Logical input 1 allocation (2/2) Binary (16 bits) Binary (16 bits) Binary (16 bits) Binary (16 bits) Binary (8 bits) 16 Logical input 2 allocation (2/2) Binary (8 bits) Ind Values (*: default) 0 * Bit 0 to 4 = 0: Rising edge Bit 0 to 4 = 1: Falling edge 0 * = DC 1 = AC 0 * 0 * 0 0: delatch 1 1: 52 a 2 2: 52 b 3 3: CB failure 4 4: External input 1 5 5: External input 2 6 6: Logic blocking 1 7 7: Logic blocking 2 8 8: Disturbance start 9 9: Cold load start 10 10: Log Selectivity 1 11 11: Log Selectivity 2 12 12: Change of group 13 13: Recloser locked 14 14: Thermal reset 15 15: Trip circuit supervision -- As "Logical input 1 allocation (1/2)" -- As "Logical input 1 allocation (1/2)" -- As "Logical input 1 allocation (1/2)" -- As "Logical input 1 allocation (1/2)" 0 0: external CB failure 1 1: Leds reset 2 2: Maintenance mode 3 3: External input 3 4 4: External input 4 5 5: Manual Close 6 6: Local Mode 7 7: Synchronisation -- As "Logical input 1 allocation (2/2)" Depend Cell Type Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 113 /190 Min/Max/Step 0 / 200.0 / 0.01 0 / 31 / 1 0 / 1 / 1 0 / 200.0 / 0.01 0 / 200.0 / 0.01 0 / 65535 / 1 0 / 65535 / 1 0 / 65535 / 1 0 / 65535 / 1 0 / 65535 / 1 0/255/ 1 0/255/ 1 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 114 /190 Col Row Menu Text 17 18 19 62 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C Logical input 3 allocation (2/2) Logical input 4 allocation (2/2) Logical input 5 allocation (2/2) TC SETTINGS GENERAL TRIP I> tI> I>> t I>> I>>> t I>>> IE> t IE> IE>> t IE>> IE>>> t IE>>> Broken conductor Breaker failure t I< t I2> t I2>> Thermal alarm Thermal trip Reclosing tAux 1 tAux 2 Breaker alarm Trip circuit alarm Autoreclose in progress Definitive trip TC Active Setting Group 1D TC lock setting 1E tAux 3 1F tAux 4 Data Type Binary (8 bits) Binary (8 bits) Binary (8 bits) Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Binary (7 bits) Binary (7 bits) Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Binary (7 bits) Ind Values (*: default) -- As "Logical input 1 allocation (2/2)" -- As "Logical input 1 allocation (2/2)" -- As "Logical input 1 allocation (2/2)" 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * 0000000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * bit 0 to 6 =0: Group 1 bit 0 to 6 =1: Group 2 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Depend Cell Type Setting Setting Setting Min/Max/Step 0/255/ 1 0/255/ 1 0/255/ 1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 0/127/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 Setting Setting Setting 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Col Row Menu Text Data Type 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 63 00 tCOMM1 Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) tCOMM2 Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) tCOMM3 Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) tCOMM4 Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) SOTF Binary (7 bits) CONTROL TRIP Binary (7 bits) CONTROL CLOSE Binary (7 bits) Locked Autorecloser Binary (7 bits) Logical input 1 Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Logical input 2 Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Logical input 3 Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Logical input 4 Binary (7 bits) Logical input 5 Binary (7 bits) Equation A Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Equation B Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Equation C Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Equation D Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Equation E Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Equation F Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Equation G Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Equation H Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) tI> Phase A Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) tI> Phase B Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) tI> Phase C Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Ie_d> Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) tIe_d> Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) I< Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) Auxiliaire 5 Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) [79] recloser external Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) locked Ie derived>> Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) tIe derived>> Binary (7 bits/ 5 bits) LEDS SETTINGS Ind Values (*: default) 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * 0000000 * 0000000 * 0000000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * 0000000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * 0000000 * / 00000 * Depend Cell Type Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 115 /190 Min/Max/Step 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 0/127/1 0/127/1 0/127/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 0/127/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 0/127/1 or 0/31/1 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 116 /190 Col Row Menu Text 01 Led 5 1/4 Data Type Binary (16 bits) 02 Led 6 1/4 03 Led 7 1/4 04 Led 8 1/4 05 Led 5 2/4 Binary (16 bits) Binary (16 bits) Binary (16 bits) Binary (11 bits) 06 Led 6 2/4 07 Led 7 2/4 08 Led 8 2/4 Binary (11 bits) Binary (11 bits) Binary (11 bits) Ind Values (*: default) 4 * 0: I> 1: t I> 2: I>> * 3: t I>> 4: I>>> 5: t I>>> 6: IE> 7: t IE> 8: IE>> 9: t IE>> 10: IE>>> 11: t IE>>> 12: Thermal Overload 13: t I2> 14: Broken Conductor 15: Breaker Failure 16 * As "Led 5 1/4" 32 * As "Led 5 1/4" 64 * As "Led 5 1/4" 0 * 0: Input 1 1: Input 2 2: Input 3 3: Input 4 4: Input 5 5: Locked Autorecloser 6:Autorecloser in progress 7: tAux1 8: tAux2 9: t I2>> 10: SOTF 0 * As "Led 5 2/4" 0 * As "Led 5 1/4" 0 * As "Led 5 1/4" Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Depend Cell Type Setting Min/Max/Step 0/65535/1 Setting Setting Setting Setting 0/65535/1 0/65535/1 0/65535/1 0/2047/1 Setting Setting Setting 0/2047/1 0/2047/1 0/2047/1 Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Col Row Menu Text 09 Led 5 3/4 Data Type Binary (15 bits) 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 64 00 01 02 10 Led 6 3/4 Led 7 3/4 Led 8 3/4 Led 5 4/4 Binary (15 bits) Binary (15 bits) Binary (15 bits) Binary (2 bits) Led 6 4/4 Led 7 4/4 Led 8 4/4 ALARMS Instant. alarm selfreset Reset leds on Fault Inhib. Alarms tAux Binary (2 bits) Binary (2 bits) Binary (2 bits) Binary (1 bits) Binary (1 bits) Binary (4 bits / 3 bits) 69 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 SW SUPERVISION Trip circuit supervision ? Trip circuit time ? SW Operating time? SW Operating time SW Operating number? SW Closing time ? Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Ind Values (*: default) 0 * 0: Equation A 1: Equation B 2: Equation C 3: Equation D 4: Equation E 5: Equation F 6: Equation G 7: Equation H 8: Ie_d> 9: tIe_d> 10: Do not use 11: I< 12: tI< 13: tAux5 14: [79] external blocked 15: Ie_d>> 0 * As "Led 5 3/4" 0 * As "Led 5 3/4" 0 * As "Led 5 3/4" 0 * 0: tIe_d>> 1: TCS 0 * As "Led 5 4/4" 0 * As "Led 5 3/4" 0 * As "Led 5 3/4" Depend Disabled * / Enabled Disabled * / Enabled 0 0: Alarm tAux1 0 1: Alarm tAux2 1 2: Alarm tAux3 1 3: Alarm tAux4 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.1 s * 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.05 s* 0 Disabled * / Enabled 6901 = 1 6903 = 1 0.05 s* 6905 = 1 Cell Type Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 117 /190 Min/Max/Step 0/255/1 0/255/1 0/255/1 0/255/1 0/2/1 0/2/1 0/2/1 0/2/1 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/15/1 or 0/7/1 0/1/1 0.1/10.0/0.05 s 0/1/1 0.05/1.0/0.05 s 0/1/1 0.05/1.0/0.05 s P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 118 /190 Col Row Menu Text 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 6A 00 01 02 03 04 6B 00 01 02 03 SW Closing time SW Operating number SA2n? SA2n N TRIP t CLOSE t COMM ORDER LATCH TIMES t COMM1 t COMM2 t COMM3 t COMM4 SWITCH ON TO FAULT SOTF function ? TManual close Start I>> / I>>> 6C 00 10 11 BOOLEAN EQUATIONS 1/2 EQUATION A Operator 00 Data Type Binary (1 bit) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Binary (2 bit) (Sub Heading) Indexed String Ind Values (*: default) 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0 * 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0 exp+06 A� * 1 * 0.1 s* 0.1 s* 0.1 s* 0.1 s* 0.1 s* 0.1 s* 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.1 s* 0 0*: Start I>> 1 1: Start I>>> Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Depend 6907 = 1 6909 = 1 Cell Type Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Min/Max/Step 0/1/1 0/50000/1 0/1/1 0/4000/1 (*exp+06) 1/2/1 0.1/5.0/0.05 s 0.1/5.0/0.05 s 6220 != 0 6221 != 0 6222 != 0 6223 != 0 Setting Setting Setting Setting 0.1/600.0/0.05 s 0.1/600.0/0.05 s 0.1/600.0/0.05 s 0.1/600.0/0.05 s 6B01 = 1 6B01 = 1 Setting Setting Setting 0/1/1 0/0.50/0.01 s 0/3/1 0 * * (Space) 1 NOT Setting 0/1/1 Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Col Row Menu Text 12 Operand 00 Data Type Indexed String 13 Operator 01 14 Operand 01 15 Operator 02 16 Operand 02 17 Operator 03 18 Operand 03 19 Operator 04 1A Operand 04 1B Operator 05 1C Operand 05 1D Operator 06 1E Operand 06 Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Ind Values (*: default) 0 * NULL * 1 I> 2 t I> 3 I>> 4 t I>> 5 I>>> 6 t I>>> 7 IE> 8 t IE> 9 IE>> 10 t IE>> 11 IE>>> 12 t IE>>> 13 I2> 14 t I2> 15 I2>> 16 t I2>> 17 Thermal Alarm 18 Thermal Trip 19 I< 20 t I< 21 CB Fail 22 Recloser 23 tAux1 24 tAux2 25 tAux3 26 tAux4 0 * OR * 1 OR NOT 2 AND 3 AND NOT -- As "Operand 00" -- As "Operator 01" -- As "Operand 00" -- As "Operator 01" -- As "Operand 00" -- As "Operator 01" -- As "Operand 00" -- As "Operator 01" -- As "Operand 00" -- As "Operator 01" -- As "Operand 00" Depend Cell Type Setting P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 119 /190 Min/Max/Step 0/28/1 or 0/27/1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0/3/1 0/28/1 or 0/27/1 0/3/1 0/28/1 or 0/27/1 0/3/1 0/28/1 or 0/27/1 0/3/1 0/28/1 or 0/27/1 0/3/1 0/28/1 or 0/27/1 0/3/1 0/28/1 or 0/27/1 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 120 /190 Col Row Menu Text 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 6C 40 41 Operator 07 Operand 07 Operator 08 Operand 08 Operator 09 Operand 09 Operator 10 Operand 10 Operator 11 Operand 11 Operator 12 Operand 12 Operator 13 Operand 13 Operator 14 Operand 14 Operator 15 Operand 15 EQUATION B Operator 00 42 Operand 00 43 Operator 01 ... 60 Operand 15 6C 70 71 EQUATION C Operator 00 72 Operand 00 73 Operator 01 ... 90 Operand 15 6C A0 A1 EQUATION D Operator 00 Data Type Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String (Sub Heading) Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String ... Indexed String (Sub Heading) Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String ... Indexed String (Sub Heading) Indexed String Ind Values (*: default) -- As "Operator 01" -- As "Operand 00" -- As "Operator 01" -- As "Operand 00" -- As "Operator 01" -- As "Operand 00" -- As "Operator 01" -- As "Operand 00" -- As "Operator 01" -- As "Operand 00" -- As "Operator 01" -- As "Operand 00" -- As "Operator 01" -- As "Operand 00" -- As "Operator 01" -- As "Operand 00" -- As "Operator 01" -- As "Operand 00" -- As "Operator 00" � Equation A -- As "Operand 00" � Equation A -- As "Operator 01" � Equation A ... ... -- As "Operand 00" � Equation A -- As "Operator 00" � Equation A -- As "Operand 00" � Equation A -- As "Operator 01" � Equation A ... ... -- As "Operand 00" � Equation A -- As "Operator 00" � Equation A Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Depend ... Cell Type Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting ... Setting Min/Max/Step 0/3/1 0/28/1 or 0/27/1 0/3/1 0/28/1 or 0/27/1 0/3/1 0/28/1 or 0/27/1 0/3/1 0/28/1 or 0/27/1 0/3/1 0/28/1 or 0/27/1 0/3/1 0/28/1 or 0/27/1 0/3/1 0/28/1 or 0/27/1 0/3/1 0/28/1 or 0/27/1 0/3/1 0/28/1 or 0/27/1 0/1/1 0/28/1 or 0/27/1 0/3/1 ... 0/28/1 or 0/27/1 Setting 0/1/1 Setting 0/28/1 or 0/27/1 Setting 0/3/1 ... ... ... Setting 0/28/1 or 0/27/1 Setting 0/1/1 Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Col Row Menu Text A2 Operand 00 A3 Operator 01 ... C0 Operand 15 6D 00 10 11 BOOLEAN EQUATIONS 2/2 EQUATION E Operator 00 12 Operand 00 13 Operator 01 ... 30 Operand 15 6D 40 41 EQUATION F Operator 00 42 Operand 00 43 Operator 01 ... 60 Operand 15 6D 70 71 EQUATION G Operator 00 72 Operand 00 73 Operator 01 ... 90 Operand 15 Data Type Indexed String Indexed String ... Indexed String (Sub Heading) Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String ... Indexed String (Sub Heading) Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String ... Indexed String (Sub Heading) Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String ... Indexed String Ind Values (*: default) -- As "Operand 00" � Equation A -- As "Operator 01" � Equation A ... ... -- As "Operand 00" � Equation A Depend ... Cell Type Setting Setting ... Setting P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 121 /190 Min/Max/Step 0/28/1 or 0/27/1 0/3/1 ... 0/28/1 or 0/27/1 -- As "Operator 00" � Equation A -- As "Operand 00" � Equation A -- As "Operator 01" � Equation A ... ... ... -- As "Operand 00" � Equation A -- As "Operator 00" � Equation A -- As "Operand 00" � Equation A -- As "Operator 01" � Equation A ... ... ... -- As "Operand 00" � Equation A -- As "Operator 00" � Equation A -- As "Operand 00" � Equation A -- As "Operator 01" � Equation A ... ... ... -- As "Operand 00" � Equation A Setting Setting Setting ... Setting Setting Setting Setting ... Setting Setting Setting Setting ... Setting 0/1/1 0/28/1 or 0/27/1 0/3/1 ... 0/28/1 or 0/27/1 0/1/1 0/28/1 or 0/27/1 0/3/1 ... 0/28/1 or 0/27/1 0/1/1 0/28/1 or 0/27/1 0/3/1 ... 0/28/1 or 0/27/1 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 122 /190 Col Row Menu Text Data Type Ind Values (*: default) Depend Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Cell Type Min/Max/Step 6D A0 EQUATION H A1 Operator 00 A2 Operand 00 A3 Operator 01 ... C0 Operand 15 6E 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B BOOLEAN EQUATIONS DELAYS Equation A operation delay Equation A reset delay Equation B operation delay Equation B reset delay Equation C operation delay Equation C reset delay Equation D operation delay Equation D reset delay Equation E operation delay Equation E reset delay Equation F operation delay (Sub Heading) Indexed String Indexed String Indexed String ... Indexed String Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number -- As "Operator 00" � Equation A -- As "Operand 00" � Equation A -- As "Operator 01" � Equation A ... ... ... -- As "Operand 00" � Equation A 0 * 0 * 0 * 0 * 0 * 0 * 0 * 0 * 0 * 0 * 0 * Setting Setting Setting ... Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0/1/1 0/28/1 or 0/27/1 0/3/1 ... 0/28/1 or 0/27/1 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 0C Equation F reset Courier floating point number delay 0D Equation G Courier floating point number operation delay 0E Equation G reset Courier floating point number delay 0F Equation H Courier floating point number operation delay 10 Equation H reset Courier floating point number delay 70 00 RECORDER CONTROL 01 Start/Trigger Indexed String 0 recorder 1 2 02 Recorder Source Indexed String 0 20 Pretemps Courier floating point number 21 Postemps Courier floating point number 22 Trigger Indexed String 0 30 Measurement Indexed String 0 period 40 Rolling Demands 41 Rolling sub-period Courier floating point number 42 Rolling sub-period Courier floating point number number 80 00 DISTURBANCE REC 01 Record Number Unsigned integer (1 byte) 02 Trigger Time IEC870 Time & Date 03 Available Channel Binary Flag Bit Mask Indexed String 0 1 2 3 4 04 Channel Types Binary Flag 0: digital, 1: analogue 05 Channel Offsets Repeated group of Courier numbers 06 Scaling Factors Repeated group of Courier numbers 07-0F NOT IMPLEMENTED � reserved 10 Record Length Integer (2 bytes) 0 * 0 * 0 * 0 * 0 * Stopped Trigerred Running * Samples * 0.1 secondes 0.1 secondes On Inst* / On Trig 5* / 10 / 15 / 30 / 60 min 1 min* 1* 0* dd/mm/yy hh:mm 11111 " Ia " " Ib " " Ic " " I0 " " Inputs/Outputs " 01111 Upload Offsets Upload Scal. Factors Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Data Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Data Data Data Data Data Data P12x/EN CT/Gd6 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s 0/ 600.0/ 0.01 s Page 123 /190 1/2/1 0.1/3.0/0.1 0.1/3.0/0.1 0/1/1 0/4/1 1/60/1 1/24/1 0/5/1 (selon contexte) P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 124 /190 11 Trigger position Integer (2 bytes) 12 Time Base Courier floating point number 13 NOT IMPLEMENTED � reserved 14 Upload Timer Repeated group of Integers 15-1F NOT IMPLEMENTED � reserved 20 Upload Channel 0 Repeated group of Integers 21 Upload Channel 1 Repeated group of Integers 22 Upload Channel 2 Repeated group of Integers 23 Upload Channel 3 Repeated group of Integers 24 Upload Channel Repeated group of Integer/Bin. flags Inputs/Outputs 90 00 AUTOMAT. FLT 01 Record number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 02 Occur fault date Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 03 Active set group Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 04 Phase in fault ASCII Text (10 bytes) 05 Fault Id ASCII Text (18 bytes) 06 Magnitude Courier floating point number 07 Ia Magnitude Courier floating point number 08 Ib Magnitude Courier floating point number 09 Ic Magnitude Courier floating point number 0A In Magnitude Courier floating point number 0B In derived Courier floating point number Magnitude BF 00 COMM SYSTEM DATA 01 Dist Record Cntrl Menu Cell (2) Ref 02 Dist Record Extract Menu Cell (2) Ref 03 Setting Transfert 04 Reset Demand NOT IMPLEMENTED Timers 05 Reset Event Report NOT IMPLEMENTED 1 " PHASE A " " I >> " 12.34 A 12.34 A 12.34 A 12.34 A 12.34 A 12.34 A 0x7000 0x8000 Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Setting (automatic) Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Setting 0 / 1 / 1 Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 BLANK PAGE P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 125 /190 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 126 /190 IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASE MICOM P120-P121-P122-P123 VERSION V14.C Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 BLANK PAGE P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 CONTENTS 1. IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE 1.1 Physical connection and link layer 1.2 Initialisation 1.3 Time synchronisation (P122 & P123 only) 1.4 Spontaneous events 1.5 General interrogation 1.6 Cyclic measurements 1.7 Commands 1.8 Disturbance records (P120, P122 & P123 only) 1.9 Fault records (P122 & P123 only) 1.10 Blocking of monitor direction 2. APPENDIX 1 2.1 Spontaneous messages managed by MiCOM P12x 2.2 List of data contained in General Interrogation 2.3 Processed Commands 2.4 Relay re initialization 2.5 Cyclic Messages (ASDU9 and ASDU 77) 2.6 IEC870-5-103 messages for Disturbance record extraction 2.7 IEC870-5-103 messages for Disturbance record extraction P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 129 /190 131 131 131 131 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 133 133 139 142 144 144 144 144 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 130 /190 BLANK PAGE Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Page 131 /190 1. IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE The IEC60870-5-103 interface is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave device. This protocol is based on the VDEW communication protocol. The relay conforms to compatibility level 2, compatibility level 3 is not supported. The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface: � Initialisation (Reset) � Time Synchronisation � Event Record Extraction � General Interrogation � Cyclic Measurements � General Commands 1.1 Physical connection and link layer Connection is available for IEC60870-5-103 through the rear RS485 port. It is possible to select both the relay address and baud rate using the front panel interface. Following a change, a reset command is required to re-establish communications. The parameters of the communication are the following: � Even Parity � 8 Data bits � 1 stop bit � Data rate 9600 or 19200 bauds 1.2 Initialisation Whenever the relay has been powered up, or if the communication parameters have been changed a reset command is required to initialise the communications. The relay will respond to either of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the difference being that the Reset CU will clear any unsent messages in the relay's transmit buffer. The relay will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5, the Cause Of Transmission COT of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB depending on the nature of the reset command. The following information will be contained in the data section of this ASDU: Manufacturer Name: AREVA The Software Identification Section will contain the first four characters of the relay model number to identify the type of relay, e.g. P123. In addition to the above identification message, if the relay has been powered up it will also produce a power up event. 1.3 Time synchronisation (P122 & P123 only) The relay time and date can be set using the time synchronisation feature of the IEC60870-5103 protocol. The relay will correct for the transmission delay as specified in IEC60870-5-103. If the time synchronisation message is sent as a send/confirm message then the relay will respond with a confirm. Whether the time synchronisation message is sent as a send confirm or a broadcast (send/no reply) message, a time synchronisation message will be returned as Class 1 data. P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 132 /190 MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 1.4 Spontaneous events The events created by the relay will be passed using the standard function type/information numbers to the IEC60870-5-103 master station. Private codes are not used, thus any events that cannot be passed using the standardised messages will not be sent. Events are categorised using the following information: � Common Address � Function Type � Information number APPENDIX 1 contains a complete listing of all events produced by the relay. The common address is used to differentiate in circumstances where the relay produces more events of a certain type than can be passed using the standardised messages. For example, if the relay produces starts and trips for three stages of overcurrent only two stages can be passed using the standardised messages. Using the different common address for two of the overcurrent stages allows each stage to be indicated. The table in APPENDIX 1 shows the common address as an offset value. The common address offset will be added to the station address in order to pass these events. 1.5 General interrogation The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers, information numbers and common address offsets that will be returned during the GI cycle are indicated in APPENDIX 1. 1.6 Cyclic measurements The relay will produce measured values using ASDU 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be read from the relay using a Class 2 poll (note ADSU 3 is not used). It should be noted that the measurands transmitted by the relay are sent as a proportion of either 1.2 or 2.4 times the rated value of the analogue value. The selection of either 1.2 or 2.4 for a particular value is indicated in APPENDIX 1. 1.7 Commands A list of the supported commands is contained in APPENDIX 1. The relay will respond to other commands with an ASDU 1, with a cause of transmission (COT) of negative acknowledgement of a command. 1.8 Disturbance records (P120, P122 & P123 only) The disturbance records stored by the relay cannot be extracted using the mechanism defined in the IEC60870-5-103 standard. The relay maintains compatibility with the VDEW control system by transmitting an ASDU 23 with no disturbance records at the start of every GI cycle. 1.9 Fault records (P122 & P123 only) The Fault records stored by the relay cannot be extracted using the mechanism defined in the IEC60870-5-103 standard. The function is private by transmitting an ASDU 4. 1.10 Blocking of monitor direction The relay does not support a facility to block messages in the Monitor direction.IEC 60870-5103 DATABASES Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Page 133 /190 2. APPENDIX 1 2.1 Spontaneous messages managed by MiCOM P12x These messages include a sub-assembly of events which are generated on the relay, because some generated events are not registered in VDEW. They are the most priority messages. An event is always generated on the rising edge of the information. Some events can be generated on the rising or lowering edge. In the list below, events only generated on rising edge will be tagged with a `*'. The double arrow means that the event generated on event occurrence and another event is generated on event disappearing. Two types of ASDU can be generated for events: ASDU 1 (time-tagged message) or ASDU 2 (time-tagged message with relative time). The following list of processed events is the list with the private messages option active, for all Overcurrent protection functions, with the associated FUNCTION Type, INFORMATION NUMBER, ASDU TYPE, CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION and COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU (The corresponding numbers with private messages option inactive or public (pub) are given just below). FUN <160>: Function type in Public range for Overcurrent Protections (compatible). FUN <168>: Function type in Private range (Reserved for Overcurrent Protections). P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 134 /190 Status indications in monitor direction: - Autorecloser active: - LEDs reset: - Local parameter Setting active: - Setting Group number 1 active: - Setting Group number 2 active: - Auxiliary input 1: - Auxiliary input 2: - Auxiliary input 3: - Auxiliary input 4: - Logical input 1: - Logical input 1 (pub): - Logical input 2: - Logical input 2 (pub): - Logical input 3: - Logical input 3 (pub): - Logical input 4: - Logical input 4 (pub): - Logical input 5: - Logical input 5 (pub): - Logical output 1: - Logical output 1 (pub): - Logical output 2: FUN<160>;INF <16>; TYP <1>;COT<1> , FUN<160>;INF <19>; TYP <1>; COT<1>; ,* FUN<160>;INF <22>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <23>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <24>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <27>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <28>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <29>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <30>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <160>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<160>,INF <161>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <161>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<160>,INF <162>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <162>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<160>,INF <163>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <163>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<160>,INF <164>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <164>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<160>,INF <165>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <176>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<160>,INF <176>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <177>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Availability P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P122-P123 P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P122-P123 P123 P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 - Logical output 2 (pub): - Logical output 3: - Logical output 3 (pub): - Logical output 4: - Logical output 4 (pub): - Logical output 5 (Watch-dog): - Logical output 5 (Watch-dog) (pub): - Logical output 6: - Logical output 6 (pub): - Logical output 7: - Logical output 7 (pub): - Logical output 8: - Logical output 8 (pub): - Logical output 9: - Logical output 9 (pub): - Time Synchronisation: FUN<160>,INF <177>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <178>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<160>,INF <178>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <179>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<160>,INF <179>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <180>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<160>,INF <180>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <181>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<160>,INF <181>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <182>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<160>,INF <182>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <183>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<160>,INF <183>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <184>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<160>,INF <184>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <226>; TYP <1>; COT<1>; ,* Supervision Indications in monitor direction: - Trip Circuit Supervision: FUN<160>;INF <36>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, Fault Indications in monitor direction: - Start / pick-up I>: - Start / pick-up I> (pub): FUN<168>;INF <9>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <64>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 135 /190 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P123 P123 P120-P122-P123 Availability P122-P123 Availability P121 to P123 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 136 /190 - Start / pick-up I>>: - Start / pick-up I>> (pub): - Start / pick-up I>>>: - Start / pick-up I>>> (pub): - Start / pick-up IN>: - Start / pick-up IN> (pub): - Start / pick-up IN>>: - Start / pick-up IN>> (pub): - Start / pick-up IN>>>: - Start / pick-up IN>>> (pub): - Start / pick-up Ie_d>: - Start / pick-up Ie_d> (pub): - Start / pick-up Ie_d>>: - Start / pick-up Ie_d>> (pub): - Start / pick-up IN (I>, I>> or I>>>): - Start / pick-up I<: - Start / pick-up I< (pub): - Start / pick-up I2>: - Start / pick-up I2> (pub): - Start / pick-up I2>>: - Start / pick-up I2>> (pub): - tReset I> : - tReset I>> : FUN<168>;INF <10>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <65>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <11>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <66>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <12>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <96>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <13>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <97>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <14>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <98>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <24>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <99>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <26>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <108>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <67>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <73>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <100>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <57>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <104>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <74>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <106>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <80>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <81>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P122 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 - tReset I2> : - tReset IN> : - tReset IN>> : - tReset Ie_d> : - tReset Ie_d>> : - General Trip: - Trip L1: - Trip L2: - Trip L3: - General Start: - Breaker failure: - Start tBF: - Trip external breaker failure: - Trip I>: - Trip I>>: - Trip I>>>: - Trip I>>> (pub): - Trip Ie_d>: - Trip Ie_d>>: - Trip IN>: - Trip IN>>: - Trip IN>>>: - Trip IN>>> (pub): FUN<168>;INF <82>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <155>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <156>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <84>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <85>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <68>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <69>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <70>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <71>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <84>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <85>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <70>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <71>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <90>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <91>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <19>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <94>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <25>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <27>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <92>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <93>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <22>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <95>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 137 /190 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P120 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P120 to P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P122 to P123 P122 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 138 /190 - Trip Ie_d>: - Trip Ie_d>>: - Trip I<: - Trip I< (pub): - Trip I2>: - Trip I2> (pub): - Trip I2>>: - Trip I2>> (pub): - Thermal Alarm - Thermal Alarm (pub): - Thermal Overload - Thermal Overload (pub): - Trip Broken conductor - Trip Broken conductor (pub): - Start tBF: - Trip by external CB Fail: - Trip Equation A: - Trip Equation B: - Trip Equation C: - Trip Equation D: - Trip Equation E: - Trip Equation F: - Trip Equation G: FUN<168>;INF <25>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <109>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <23>; TYP <2>;COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <101>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <58>; TYP <2>;COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <105>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <75>; TYP <2>;COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <107>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <15>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <110>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <16>; TYP <2>;COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <111>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <39>; TYP <2>;COT<1>, FUN<160>;INF <114>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <70>; TYP <2>;COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <71>; TYP <2>;COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <144>; TYP <2>;COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <145>; TYP <2>;COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <146>; TYP <2>;COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <147>; TYP <2>;COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <196>; TYP <2>;COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <197>; TYP <2>;COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <198>; TYP <2>;COT<1>, Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 P122 to P123 P122 to P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 P121 to P123 Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 - Trip Equation H : - Blocking Inrush: FUN<168>;INF <199>; TYP <2>;COT<1>, FUN<168>;INF <225>; TYP <2>;COT<1>, Auto-recloser Indications (monitor direction): - CB `ON' by short-time autorecloser: FUN<160>;INF <128>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,,* - CB `ON' by long-time autorecloser: FUN<160>;INF <129>; TYP <1>; COT<1>*, - Autorecloser blocked: FUN<160>;INF <130>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, - Autorecloser configuration in error : FUN<168>;INF <65>; TYP <1>;COT<1>, - Final Trip : FUN<168>;INF <66>; TYP <1>;COT<1>, - Autorecloser in progress : FUN<168>;INF <67>; TYP <1>;COT<1>, - CB in O/O (closed) position: FUN<168>;INF <33>; TYP <1>;COT<1>, - CB in O/O (closed) position (pub): FUN<160>;INF <140>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, - CB in F/O (open) position: FUN<168>;INF <34>; TYP <1>;COT<1>, - CB in F/O (open) position (pub): FUN<160>;INF <141>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, - Trip TC: FUN<168>;INF <1>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, - Trip TC (pub): FUN<160>;INF <142>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, - Close TC: FUN<168>;INF <2>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, - Close TC (pub): FUN<160>;INF <143>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, - Device cortec mismatch: FUN<168>;INF <28>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, - Device cortec mismatch (pub): FUN<160>;INF <115>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, 2.2 List of data contained in General Interrogation It is given in the answer to the General Interrogation (GI). P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 139 /190 P121 to P123 P122-P123 Availability P123 P123 P123 P123 P123 P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P121 to P123 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 140 /190 MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Relay state information are Class 1 data, they are systematically sent to the master station, during a General Interrogation. The list of processed data, following a General Interrogation, is given below: it is a sub-assembly of the spontaneous message list, so like spontaneous messages, these data are generated on rising and lowering edge. Status indications (monitor direction): Availability - Auto-recloser active: FUN<160>;INF <16>; TYP <1>;COT<9>, P123 - Leds reset: FUN<160>;INF <19>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, P120 to P123 - Local parameter Setting active: FUN<160>;INF <22>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, P120 to P123 - Setting Group number 1 active: FUN<160>;INF <23>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, P122-P123 - Setting Group number 2 active: FUN<160>;INF <24>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, P122-P123 - Auxiliary input 1: FUN<160>;INF <27>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, P120-P122-P123 - Auxiliary input 2: FUN<160>;INF <28>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, P120-P122-P123 - Auxiliary input 3: FUN<160>;INF <29>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, P122-P123 - Auxiliary input 4: FUN<160>;INF <30>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, P123 - Logical input 1: FUN<168>;INF <160>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, P120 to P123 - Logical input 1 (pub): FUN<160>;INF <161>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, - Logical input 2: FUN<168>;INF <161>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, P120 to P123 - Logical input 2 (pub): FUN<160>;INF <162>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, - Logical input 3: FUN<168>;INF <162>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, P122-P123 - Logical input 3 (pub): FUN<160>;INF <163>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, - Logical input 4: FUN<168>;INF <163>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, P123 - Logical input 4 (pub): FUN<160>;INF <164>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, - Logical input 5: FUN<168>;INF <164>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, P123 - Logical input 5 (pub): FUN<160>;INF <165>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 - Logical output 1: FUN<168>;INF <176>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, - Logical output 1 (pub): FUN<160>;INF <176>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, - Logical output 2: FUN<168>;INF <177>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, - Logical output 2 (pub): FUN<160>;INF <177>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, - Logical output 3: FUN<168>;INF <178>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, - Logical output 3 (pub): FUN<160>;INF <178>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, - Logical output 4: FUN<168>;INF <179>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, - Logical output 4 (pub): FUN<160>;INF <179>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, - Logical output 5 (Watch-dog): FUN<168>;INF <180>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, - Logical output 5 (Watch-dog) (pub): FUN<160>;INF <180>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, - Logical output 6: FUN<168>;INF <181>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, - Logical output 6 (pub): FUN<160>;INF <181>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, - Logical output 7: FUN<168>;INF <182>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, - Logical output 7 (pub): FUN<160>;INF <182>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, - Logical output 8: FUN<168>;INF <183>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, - Logical output 8 (pub): FUN<160>;INF <183>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, - Logical output 9: FUN<168>;INF <183>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, - Logical output 9 (pub): FUN<160>;INF <183>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, Supervision Indications in monitor direction: - Trip Circuit Supervision: FUN<160>;INF <36>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, Fault Indications in monitor direction: - Start / pick-up IN: FUN<160>;INF <67>; TYP <2>; COT<9>, P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 141 /190 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 P122-P123 P122-P123 P123 P123 Availability P122-P123 Availability P120 to P123 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 142 /190 - General Start / pick-up: FUN<160>;INF <84>; TYP <2>; COT<9>, Auto-recloser Indications in monitor direction: - Autorecloser blocked: FUN<160>;INF <130>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, - CB in O/O (closed) position: FUN<168>;INF <33>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, - CB in O/O (closed) position (pub): FUN<160>;INF <140>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, - CB in F/O (open) position: FUN<168>;INF <34>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, - CB in F/O (open) position (pub): FUN<160>;INF <141>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 P120 to P123 Availability P123 P120 to P123 P120 to P123 2.3 Processed Commands System Commands: Availability - Synchronization Command (ASDU 6): FUN<255>,INF <0>; TYP <6>;COT<8> P120-P122-P123 This command can be sent to a specific relay, or global. The time sent by master is the time of the first bit of the frame. The relay synchronizes with this time, corrected by the frame transmission delay. After updating its time, the relay send back an acknowledge to the master, by giving its new current time. This acknowledge message will be an event of ASDU 6 type. - General Interrogation Initialization command (ASDU 7): FUN<255>;INF <0>;TYP <7>; COT<9> P120 to P123 This command starts the relay interrogation: The relay then sends a list of data containing the relay state (see list described above). The GI command contains a scan number which will be included in the answers of the GI cycle generated by the GI command. If a data has just changed before extracted by the GI, the new state is sent to the master station. When an event is generated during the GI cycle, the event is sent in priority, and the GI cycle is temporarily interrupted. The end of the GI consists in sending an ASDU 8 to the master station. If, during a General Interrogation cycle, another GI Initialization command is received, the precedent answer is stopped, and the new GI cycle started. Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Page 143 /190 General Commands (ASDU 20) (Control direction): Availability - Auto-recloser On / Off: only on MiCOM P123: FUN<160>;INF<16>, TYP<20>, COT <20> P123 - LEDs Reset: This command acknowledge all alarms on Front Panel on MiCOM P12x products: FUN<160>;INF<19>, TYP<20>, COT <20>, P120 to P123 - Setting group number 1: FUN<160>;INF<23>, TYP<20>, COT <20>, P122-P123 - Setting group number 2: FUN<160>;INF<24>, TYP<20>, COT <20>, P122-P123 - Order TC COMM1: FUN<168>;INF <234>; TYP <20>; COT<20>, P122-P123 - Order TC COMM1 (pub): FUN<160>;INF <136>; TYP <1>; COT<20>, - Order TC COMM2: FUN<168>;INF <235>; TYP <20>; COT<20>, P122-P123 - Order TC COMM2 (pub): FUN<160>;INF <137>; TYP <1>; COT<20>, - Order TC COMM3: FUN<168>;INF <238>; TYP <20>; COT<20>, P122-P123 - Order TC COMM3 (pub): FUN<160>;INF <138>; TYP <1>; COT<20>, - Order TC COMM4: FUN<168>;INF <239>; TYP <20>; COT<20>, P122-P123 - Order TC COMM4 (pub): FUN<160>;INF <139>; TYP <1>; COT<20>, - Trip TC: FUN<168>;INF <1>; TYP <20>; COT<20>, P120 to P123 - Trip TC (pub): FUN<160>;INF <142>; TYP <1>; COT<20>, - Close TC: FUN<168>;INF <2>; TYP <20>; COT<20>, P120 to P123 - Close TC (pub): FUN<160>;INF <143>; TYP <1>; COT<20>, After executing one of these commands, the relay sends an acknowledge message, which contains the result of command execution. If a state change is the consequence of the command, it must be sent in a ASDU 1 with COT 12 (remote operation). If the relay receive another command message from the master station before sending the acknowledge message, it will be discarded. Commands which are not processed by the relay are rejected with a negative acknowledge message. P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 144 /190 MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 2.4 Relay re initialization In case of relay re initialization, the relay send to the master station: Availability - A message indicating relay start/restart (FUN<160>;INF <5>; TYP <5> COT <5>) P120 to P123 - or a message indicating Reset CU (FUN<160>;INF <5>; TYP <3> COT <4>) P120 to P123 - or a message indicating Reset FCB (FUN<160>;INF <5>; TYP <2> COT <3>) P120 to P123 Each identification message of the relay (ASDU 5) contains the manufacturer name in 8 ASCII characters ("AREVA") and 2 free bytes containing: � 120 � or � 121 �, or � 122 �, or � 123 � in decimal format, then 2 free bytes containing the software version number in decimal (for ex. : 112 corresponds to "11.C"). 2.5 Cyclic Messages (ASDU9 and ASDU 77) Only measurands can be stored in these messages. The measurands values are stored in lower levels of communication, before polling by master station. Several of the fields in the ASDU 9 (FUN<160>, INF <148>) are unused in the P120/P121/P122/P123 relay (Voltage and Power values), so they are set to 0: Only RMS Ia, Ib, Ic values and frequency are stored in the P121/P122/P123 (with a rate such as: 2,4 * nominal value = 4096).Only frequency is stored in the P120. The second ASDU is ASDU3.4 (FUN<160>, INF<147>), which contains in first position In earth current value in rated format (with a rate such as: 2,4 * nominal value = 4096). Vn value does not exist in the P120/P121/P122/P123 relay, so the second position value in ASDU3.4 is set to � unused �. Another ASDU is only used for P122/P123, ASDU 77 (FUN<168>, INF <209>), which is a private ASDU, contains 4 other measurands: Iinverse and Idirect values, Thermal state (in %), in �short floating-point � format (IEEE 32 bits floating-point format). These values are not rated. With private option inactive: FUN<160>,INF <149> 2.6 IEC870-5-103 messages for Disturbance record extraction The disturbance extraction procedure with IEC870-5-103 in MICOM Px2x relays is in conformance with IEC870-5-103 standard definition. The maximum disturbance record number stored in a P120/P122/P123 is 5. The disturbance record mapping for P120 is the following: - Number of analog channels transmitted: 1, which is: Channel 1: IN current (Earth). - Identifiers of tags (8) transmitted in ASDU 29 (logical informations) : - Tag number 1: IN>: FUN <160> INF <67> Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 - Tag number 2: General start: - Tag number 3: General Trip: - Tag number 4: tIN> (Earth): - Tag number 5: tIN>> (Earth): - Tag number 6: tIN>>> (Earth): - Tag number 6: tIN>>> (Earth) (pub): - Tag number 7: Log input 1: - Tag number 7: Log input 1 (pub): - Tag number 8: Log input 2: - Tag number 8: Log input 2 (pub): FUN <160> INF <84> FUN <160> INF <68> FUN <160> INF <92> FUN <160> INF <93> FUN <168> INF <22> FUN <160>,INF <95> FUN <168> INF <160> FUN <160>,INF <161> FUN <168> INF <161> FUN <160>,INF <162> The disturbance record mapping for P122 and P123 is the following: - Number of analog channels transmitted: 4, which are: Channel 1: Ia current (Phase L1). Channel 2: Ib current (Phase L2). Channel 3: Ic current (Phase L3). Channel 4: IN current (Earth). - Identifiers of tags (13) transmitted in ASDU 29 (logical informations) for P122: - Tag number 1: IN>: FUN <160> INF <67> - Tag number 2: General start: FUN <160> INF <84> - Tag number 3: CB Failure: FUN <160> INF <85> - Tag number 4: General Trip: FUN <160> INF <68> - Tag number 5: tI>: FUN <160> INF <90> P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 145 /190 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 146 /190 - Tag number 6: tI>>: - Tag number 7: tI>>>: - Tag number 7: tI>>> (pub): - Tag number 8: tIN> (Earth): - Tag number 9: tIN>> (Earth): - Tag number 10: tIN>>> (Earth): - Tag number 10: tIN>>> (Earth) (pub): - Tag number 11: Log input 1: - Tag number 11: Log input 1 (pub): - Tag number 12: Log input 2: - Tag number 12: Log input 2 (pub): - Tag number 13: Log input 3: - Tag number 13: Log input 3 (pub): FUN <160> INF <91> FUN <168> INF <19> FUN <160>,INF <94> FUN <160> INF <92> FUN <160> INF <93> FUN <168> INF <22> FUN <160>,INF <95> FUN <168> INF <160> FUN <160>,INF <161> FUN <168> INF <161> FUN <160>,INF <162> FUN <168> INF <162> FUN <160>,INF <163> For a P123, there are 15 identifiers of tags, so the two following tags in addition to the precedents: - Tag number 14: Log input 4: FUN <168> INF <163> - Tag number 14: Log input 4 (pub): FUN <160>,INF <164> - Tag number 15: Log input 5: FUN <168> INF <164> - Tag number 15: Log input 5 (pub): FUN <160>,INF <165> 2.7 IEC870-5-103 messages for Fault record extraction The fault record extraction procedure with IEC870-5-103 in MICOM P12x relays is private function by ASDU4 The fault record mapping for P120 is the following: - Fault record number: FUN <243> INF <1> Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 - Active Set Group: - Fault Phase: - Fault Type: - Magnitude: - Ia Magnitude: - Ib Magnitude: - Ic Magnitude: - I0 Magnitude: FUN <243> INF <2> FUN <243> INF <3> FUN <243> INF <4> FUN <243> INF <5> FUN <243> INF <6> FUN <243> INF <7> FUN <243> INF <8> FUN <243> INF <9> P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 147 /190 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 148 /190 BLANK PAGE Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 Communications MiCOM P120-P121-P122-P123 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 DNP 3.0 DATABASE MICOM P120-P121-P122-P123 VERSION V14.C P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 150/190 Communications MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 BLANK PAGE Communications MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 CONTENTS 1. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 1.4.4 INTRODUCTION Purpose of this document DNP V3.00 device Profile Implementation Table Point List Binary Input Points Binary Output Status Points and Control Relay Output Blocks Counters Analog Inputs P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 151/190 153 153 153 156 159 159 163 165 166 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 152/190 BLANK PAGE Communications MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 153/190 1. INTRODUCTION 1.1 Purpose of this document The purpose of this document is to describe the specific implementation of the Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) 3.0 within P12x MiCOM relays. P12x uses the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave Source Code Library Version 2.18. This document, in conjunction with the DNP 3.0 Basic 4 Document Set, and the DNP Subset Definitions Document, provides complete information on how to communicate with P12x via the DNP 3.0 protocol. This implementation of DNP 3.0 is fully compliant with DNP 3.0 Subset Definition Level 2, contains many Subset Level 3 features, and contains some functionality even beyond Subset Level 3. 1.2 DNP V3.00 device Profile The following table provides a "Device Profile Document" in the standard format defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions Document. While it is referred to in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions as a "Document," it is only a component of a total interoperability guide. This table, in combination with the following should provide a complete interoperability/configuration guide for P12x: � the Implementation Table provided in Section 1.3 (beginning on page 156), � the Point List Tables provided in Section 1.4 (beginning on page 159), � and a description of configuration methods and user-interface in Sections DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT (ALSO SEE THE IMPLEMENTATION TABLE IN SECTION 1.3, BEGINNING ON PAGE 156). Vendor Name: AREVA T&D Antomation & Information Device Name: SERIAL 20 Platform using the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave Source Code Library, Version 2.18. Highest DNP Level Supported: Device Function: For Requests: Level 2 Master For Responses: Level 2 Slave Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete list is described in the attached table): For static (non-change-event) object requests, request qualifier codes 00 and 01 (start- stop), 07 and 08 (limited quantity), and 17 and 28 (index) are supported in addition to request qualifier code 06 (no range � or all points). Static object requests received with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests received with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or 28. For change-event object requests, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded. 16-bit and 32-bit Analog Change Events with Time may be requested. The read function code for Object 50 (Time and Date), variation 1, is supported. Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets): Transmitted: 292 Transmitted: 2048 Received 292 Received: 2048 Maximum Data Link Re-tries: Maximum Application Layer Re-tries: None Fixed at 2 None Configurable Configurable P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 154/190 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT (ALSO SEE THE IMPLEMENTATION TABLE IN SECTION 1.3, BEGINNING ON PAGE 156). Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation: Never Always Sometimes Configurable Requires Application Layer Confirmation: Never Always When reporting Event Data When sending multi-fragment responses Sometimes Configurable Timeouts while waiting for: Data Link Confirm: None Complete Appl. Fragment: None Application Confirm: None Complete Appl. Response: None Fixed at 100 ms Variable Configura ble. Fixed at ____ Variable Configurable Fixed at 1s Variable Configurable Fixed at ____ Variable Configurable Others: Binary input change scanning period: 5ms Analog input change scanning period: 1s Sends/Executes Control Operations: WRITE Binary Outputs SELECT/OPERATE DIRECT OPERATE DIRECT OPERATE � NO ACK Never Never Never Never Always Always Always Always Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Count > 1 Pulse On Pulse Off Latch On Latch Off Never Never Never Never Never Always Always Always Always Always Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Queue Never Always Sometimes Configurable Clear Queue Never Always Sometimes Configurable Reports Binary Input Change Events when Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events no specific variation requested: when no specific variation requested: Never Only time-tagged for P122 and P123 Only non-time-tagged for P121 Configurable Never for P121 Binary Input Change With Time for P122 and P123 Binary Input Change With Relative Time Configurable (attach explanation) Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 155/190 DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT (ALSO SEE THE IMPLEMENTATION TABLE IN SECTION 1.3, BEGINNING ON PAGE 156). Sends Unsolicited Responses: Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses: Never Configurable Only certain objects Sometimes (attach explanation) ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED Function codes supported Default Counter Object/Variation: Never When Device Restarts When Status Flags Change No other options are permitted. Counters Roll Over at: No Counters Reported Configurable Default Object: 20 Default Variation: 5 Point-by-point list attached Sends Multi-Fragment Responses: Yes No No Counters Reported Configurable (attach explanation) 16 Bits 32 Bits Other Value: _____ Point-by-point list attached P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 156/190 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 1.3 Implementation Table The following table identifies the variations, function codes, and qualifiers supported by the P12x in both request messages and in response messages. For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or 28. For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded. In the table below the text shaded as indicates Subset Level 3 functionality (beyond Subset Level 2), and text shaded as beyond Subset Level 3. Subset Level 3 beyond Subset Level 3 indicates functionality Object Number 1 1 1 2 2 2 (only P122P123) 10 10 12 20 (only P122P123) 20 (only P122P123) 20 (only P122P123) 20 (only P122P123) 20 (only P122P123) 21 (only P122P123) OBJECT Variation Number 0 Description Binary Input (Variation 0 is used to request default variation) 1 (default � see note 1) 2 Binary Input Binary Input with Status 0 1(default � see note 1 for P120 - P121) 2 (default � see note 1) 0 2 (default � see note 1) Binary Input Change (Variation 0 is used to request default variation) Binary Input Change without Time Binary Input Change with Time Binary Output Status (Variation 0 is used to request default variation) Binary Output Status 1 Control Relay Output Block 0 Binary Counter (Variation 0 is used to request default variation) 1 32-Bit Binary Counter 2 16-Bit Binary Counter 5 32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 6 16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 0 Frozen Counter (Variation 0 is used to request default variation) REQUEST (Library will parse) Function Codes (dec) 1 (read) 1 (read) 22 Qualifier Codes (hex) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 1 (read) 1 (read) 3 (select) 4 (operate) 5 (direct op) 6 (dir. op, noack) 1 (read) 7 (freeze) 8 (freeze noack) 9 (freeze clear) 10 (frz. cl. Noack) 1 (read) 7 (freeze) 8 (freeze noack) 9 (freeze clear) 10 (frz. cl. Noack) 1 (read) 7 (freeze) 8 (freeze noack) 9 (freeze clear) 10 (frz. cl. Noack) 1 (read) 7 (freeze) 8 (freeze noack) 9 (freeze clear) 10 (frz. cl. Noack) 1 (read) 7 (freeze) 8 (freeze noack) 9 (freeze clear) 10 (frz. cl. Noack) 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) RESPONSE (Library will respond with) Function Qualifier Codes (dec) Codes (hex) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index � see note 2) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index � see note 2) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index � see note 2) 129 (response) echo of request 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index � see note 2) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index � see note 2) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index � see note 2) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index � see note 2) Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 157/190 Object Number 21 (only P122P123) 21 (only P122P123) 21 (only P122P123) 21 (only P122P123) 30 30 30 30 30 32 32 32 32 (only P122P123) 32 (only P122P123) 50 (only P122P123) 50 (only P122P123) 52 60 60 60 60 60 80 OBJECT Variation Number Description 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter 9 32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 10 16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 0 Analog Input (Variation 0 is used to request default variation) 1 (default � see note 1 2 32-Bit Analog Input 16-Bit Analog Input 3 32-Bit Analog Input without Flag 4 16-Bit Analog Input without Flag 0 1 (default � see note 1) 2 3 4 0 Analog Change Event (Variation 0 is used to request default variation) 32-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 16-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 32-Bit Analog Change Event with Time 16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time Time and Date 1 (default � see note 1) Time and Date 2 Time Delay Fine 0 Class 0, 1, 2, and 3 Data 1 Class 0 Data 2 Class 1 Data 3 Class 2 Data 4 Class 3 Data 1 Internal Indications No Object (function code only) �See Note 3 No Object (function code only) No Object (function code only) REQUEST (Library will parse) Function Codes (dec) 1 (read) 1 (read) 1 (read) 1 (read) 1 (read) 1 (read) 1 (read) 1 (read) 1 (read) 1 (read) Qualifier Codes (hex) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) RESPONSE (Library will respond with) Function Codes (dec) 129 (response) Qualifier Codes (hex) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index � see note 2) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index � see note 2) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index � see note 2) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index � see note 2) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index � see note 2) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index � see note 2) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index � see note 2) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index � see note 2) 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited qty) 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited qty) 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited qty) 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited qty) 1 (read) 1 (read) 2 (write) 1 (read) 1 (read) 1 (read) 1 (read) 1 (read) 2 (write) 13 (cold restart) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 06 (no range, or all) 07 (limited qty=1) 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 129 06 (no range, or all) 06 (no range, or all) 129 06 (no range, or all) 129 07, 08 (limited qty) 06 (no range, or all) 129 07, 08 (limited qty) 06 (no range, or all) 129 07, 08 (limited qty) 00 (start-stop) (index must =7) (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index � see note 2) (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index � see note 2) (response) 07 (limited qty) (qty = 1) 17,28 17,28 17,28 17,28 14 (warm restart) 23 (delay meas.) Note 1: Note 2: A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 158/190 Note 3: Communications MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 with qualifiers 00 or 01. (For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.) For P12x, a cold restart is implemented as a warm restart � the executable is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted. Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 159/190 1.4 1.4.1 Point List The tables in the following sections identify all the individual data points provided by this implementation of DNP 3.0. uses the database protection. Binary Input Points Every Binary Input Status points are included in class 0 polls, because they are included in one of classes 1, 2 or 3. Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 for P120 et P121 and 2 (Binary Input Change with Time) for P122 and P123 P120 P121 P122 P123 Change Point Point Point Point Index Index Index Index Name/Description init val. Event Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 0 0 0 0 Output relay 1 (trip) 0 1 1 1 1 1 Output relay 2 0 2 2 2 2 2 Output relay 3 0 2 3 3 3 3 Output relay 4 0 2 4 4 4 4 Output relay 0 ( watch dog) 0 2 5 5 Output relay 5 0 2 6 6 Output relay 6 0 2 7 Output relay 7 0 2 8 Output relay 8 0 2 5 5 7 9 Opto isolator 1 0 2 6 6 8 10 Opto isolator 2 0 2 9 11 Opto isolator 3 0 2 12 Opto isolator 4 0 2 13 Opto isolator 5 0 2 7 10 14 Phase overcurrent stage 1 start 0 1 8 11 15 Phase overcurrent stage 1 trip 0 1 9 12 16 Phase overcurrent stage 2 start 0 1 10 13 17 Phase overcurrent stage 2 trip 0 1 11 14 18 Phase overcurrent stage 3 start 0 1 12 15 19 Phase overcurrent stage 3 trip 0 1 7 13 16 20 Earth overcurrent stage 1 start 0 1 8 14 17 21 Earth overcurrent stage 1 trip 0 1 9 15 18 22 Earth overcurrent stage 2 start 0 1 10 16 19 23 Earth overcurrent stage 2 trip 0 1 11 17 20 24 Earth overcurrent stage 3 start 0 1 12 18 21 25 Earth overcurrent stage 3 trip 0 1 22 26 tI< 0 1 23 27 Thermal start 0 1 24 28 Thermal trip 0 1 26 35 25 29 Taux1 0 1 27 36 26 30 Taux2 0 1 27 31 Broken conductor 0 1 28 32 cb failure 0 1 29 33 I2> start 0 1 30 34 tI2> trip 0 1 31 35 Number of cb operation 0 1 32 36 Cb operation time alarm 0 1 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 160/190 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 for P120 et P121 and 2 (Binary Input Change with Time) for P122 and P123 P120 P121 P122 P123 Change Point Point Point Point Index Index Index Index Name/Description init val. Event Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 33 37 sa2n 0 1 34 38 trip circuit alarm 0 1 35 39 cb close time alarm 0 1 40 Blocking autoreclosure 0 1 41 Successful autoreclosure 0 1 42 In Progress autoreclosure 0 1 36 43 logic Selectivity 1 0 1 37 44 logic Selectivity 2 0 1 13 19 38 45 Blocking logic 1 0 1 39 46 Blocking logic 2 0 1 14 20 40 47 52a 0 1 15 21 41 48 52b 0 1 16 22 42 49 Lack of SF6 0 1 43 50 Cold load Pick up 0 1 17 23 44 51 De latching by a logic input 0 1 18 24 45 52 De latching of the Tripping output relay by remote order 0 1 19 25 46 53 Closing order by remote order 0 1 20 26 47 54 Tripping order by remote order 0 1 48 55 Thermal Resetting by communication 0 1 49 56 Shifting to maintenance mode 0 1 21 27 50 57 Major material Alarms 0 1 22 28 51 58 Minor material Alarms 0 1 29 52 59 Phase overcurrent stage 1 trip alarm (latched) 0 3 30 53 60 Phase overcurrent stage 2 trip alarm (latched) 0 3 31 54 61 Phase overcurrent stage 3 trip alarm (latched) 0 3 23 32 55 62 Earth overcurrent stage 1 trip alarm (latched) 0 3 24 33 56 63 Earth overcurrent stage 2 trip alarm (latched) 0 3 25 34 57 64 Earth overcurrent stage 3 trip alarm (latched) 0 3 58 65 tI< alarm (latched) 0 3 59 66 Thermal start alarm (latched) 0 3 60 67 Thermal trip alarm (latched) 0 3 28 37 61 68 Taux1 alarm (latched) 0 3 29 38 62 69 Taux2 alarm (latched) 0 3 63 70 Broken conductor alarm (latched) 0 3 64 71 cb failure alarm (latched) 0 3 65 72 tI2> alarm (latched) 0 3 66 73 Cb operation time alarm(latched) 0 3 67 74 Number of cb operation (latched) 0 3 68 75 sa2n alarm (latched) 0 3 69 76 trip circuit alarm(latched) 0 3 70 77 cb close time alarm ( latched) 0 3 78 Fault Configuration of autoreclosure 0 3 71 79 I min Start 0 1 72 80 External CB Failure 0 1 73 81 Latching of Relay 0 2 Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 161/190 Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 for P120 et P121 and 2 (Binary Input Change with Time) for P122 and P123 P120 P121 P122 P123 Change Point Point Point Point Index Index Index Index Name/Description init val. Event Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 74 82 I2>> start 0 1 75 83 tI2>> trip 0 1 76 84 tI2>> alarm (latched) 0 3 77 85 taux3 0 1 78 86 taux3 alarm (if latched by Trip) 0 3 87 taux4 0 1 88 taux4 alarm(if latched by Trip) 0 3 89 Final trip (autorecloser) 0 1 39 79 90 t Equation A 0 1 40 80 91 t Equation B 0 1 41 81 92 t Equation C 0 1 42 82 93 t Equation D 0 1 43 83 94 t Equation E 0 1 44 84 95 t Equation F 45 85 96 t Equation G 0 1 0 1 46 86 97 t Equation H 0 1 87 98 Blocking inrush 47 88 99 t Equation A (latched) 0 1 0 3 48 89 100 t Equation B (latched) 0 3 49 90 101 t Equation C (latched) 50 91 102 t Equation D (latched) 0 3 0 3 51 92 103 t Equation E (latched) 0 3 52 93 104 t Equation F (latched) 53 94 105 t Equation G (latched) 0 3 0 3 54 95 106 t Equation H (latched) 0 3 96 107 Start Ie_d> 97 108 Trip Ie_d> 0 1 0 1 98 109 Alarm tIe_d> latch 0 3 110 T Aux 5 111 Alarm t Aux 5 0 1 0 3 112 Autorecloser externally locked 0 1 99 113 Start Ie_d>> 100 114 Trip Ie_d>> 0 1 0 1 1.4.2 Double-point Binary Input Point The Double-point Binary Input Status point is included in class 0 polls, because they are included in one of classes 1, 2 or 3. P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 162/190 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Double-point Binary Input Point Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 3 Change Event Object Number: 4 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time) for P122 and P123 P120 P121 P122 P123 Change Point Point Point Point Index Index Index Index Name/Description init val. Event Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 0 0 CB status 0 2 Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 163/190 1.4.3 Binary Output Status Points and Control Relay Output Blocks The following table lists both the Binary Output Status Points (Object 10) and the Control Relay Output Blocks (Object 12). Binary Output Status points are not included in class 0 polls. Binary Output Status Points Object Number: 10 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status) Control Relay Output Blocks Object Number: 12 Request Function Codes supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, noack) P120 P121 P122 P123 Point Point Point Point Index Index Index Index Name/Description Initial Status Value Supported Control Relay Output Block Fields 0 0 0 0 De Latch of relays 0 Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On 1 1 1 1 Acknowledgement of the 1st alarm 0 Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On 2 2 2 2 Acknowledgement of all the alarms 0 Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On 3 3 3 3 Remote control Triping 0 Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, 4 4 4 4 Remote control Closing 0 Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On 5 5 Change of Active Group 0 Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On 6 6 Thermal State Resetting 0 Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On 7 7 Average and Max rms values resetting 0 Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On 8 8 Acknowledgement of RAMs material alarms 0 Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On 9 Counters initialization of the autorelosure 0 Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On 9 10 Initialization of rolling demand (average) 0 Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On 10 11 Initialization of Maximum 0 Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On 12 Re initialization of autoreclosure 0 Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On 11 13 tc com1 0 Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On 12 14 tc com2 0 Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On 13 15 tc com3 0 Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On 14 16 tc com4 0 Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On 15 17 CB operation nb reset 0 Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On 16 18 SA2n data reset 0 Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 164/190 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Binary Output Status Points Object Number: 10 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status) Control Relay Output Blocks Object Number: 12 Request Function Codes supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, noack) P120 P121 P122 P123 Point Point Point Point Index Index Index Index Name/Description Initial Status Value Supported Control Relay Output Block Fields 5 17 19 cb control by use one index 0 Unpaired Pulse On, Paired Trip/Pulse On, Paired Close/Pulse On Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 165/190 1.4.4 Counters The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21). When a freeze function is performed on a Binary Counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter point. Binary Counters and Frozen Counters are not included in class 0 polls. P120 and P121 do not support binary Counters and Frozen Counters. Binary Counters Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 20 Change Event Object Number: not supported Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 7 (freeze), 8 (freeze noack) 9 (freeze and clear), 10 (freeze and clear, noack) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 5 (32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: none-not supported Frozen Counters Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 21 Change Event Object Number: not supported Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 9 (32-Bit Frozen Binary without Flag) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: none-not supported P122 Point Index P123 Point Index Name/Description Data type 0 0 Max RMS current phase A D1 1 1 Max RMS current phase B D1 2 2 Max RMS current phase C D1 3 3 Average RMS current phase A D1 4 4 Average RMS current phase B D1 5 5 Average RMS current phase C D1 6 6 CB operation number D2 7 7 sa2n ia D3 8 8 sa2n ib D3 9 9 sa2n ic D3 10 Total number of autoreclosure cycle D2 11 Number of cycles 1 D2 12 Number of cycles 2 D2 13 Number of cycles 3 D2 14 Number of cycles 4 D2 15 Definitive Tripping number D2 16 Number of closing order D2 10 17 Rolling demand(average) RMS phase A D1 11 18 Rolling demand(average) RMS phase B D1 12 19 Rolling demand(average) RMS phase C D1 13 20 Maximum RMS phase A (after a new initialization) D1 14 21 Maximum RMS phase B (after a new initialization) D1 15 22 Maximum RMS phase C (after a new initialization) D1 P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Communications Page 166/190 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 1.4.5 Analog Inputs The following table lists Analog Inputs (Object 30). It is important to note that 16-bit and 32-bit variations of Analog Inputs, Analog Output Control Blocks, and Analog Output Statuses are transmitted through DNP as signed numbers. Even for analog input points that are not valid as negative values, the maximum positive representation is 32767. For each point, the "Scaling and Units" column indicates the value of a transmitted 32767. This also implies the value of a transmitted �32767. The entry in the column does not imply a valid value for the point. Always indicating the representation of 32767 in the tables below is a consistent method for representing scale, applicable to all scaling possibilities. The "Default Deadband," and the "Default Change Event Assigned Class" columns are used to represent the absolute amount by which the point must change before an analog change event will be generated, and once generated in which class poll (1, 2, 3) will the change event be reported. Only the default values for these columns are documented here because the values may change in operation due to either local (user-interface) or remote (through DNP) control. Every Analog Inputs points are included in class 0 polls, because they are included in one of classes 1, 2 or 3. Analog Inputs Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30 Change Event Object Number: 32 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Input) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Change Event w/o Time) Change Event Scan Rate: The scan rate for analog input change events is fixed at 1s Scaling Initial P120 P121 P122 P123 Point Point Point Point Index Index Index Index Name/Description Initial Value and Units (represent ation of 32767 � Valid Range Change Event Deadband Change Event Class (1, 2, 3 or see above) none) 0 0 Active Group 1 32767 1 � 2 1 1 0 1 1 Magnitude IA 0 40 In 0 to 40 In 0.02 In 3 1 2 2 Magnitude IB 0 40 In 0 to 40 In 0.02 In 3 2 3 3 Magnitude IC 0 40 In 0 to 40 In 0.02 In 3 0 3 4 4 Magnitude IN 0 40 IEn 0 to 40 IEn 0.02 IEn 3 4 5 5 rms IA 5 6 6 rms IB 6 7 7 rms IC 1 7 8 8 rms IN 9 9 Thermal State 0A 327.67A 0 to 3 40000000 2% 1/100 A 0A 327.67A 0 to 3 40000000 2% 1/100 A 0A 327.67A 0 to 3 40000000 2% 1/100 A 0A 327.67A 0 to 3 40000000 2% 1/100 A 0% 32767% 0 to 65535 10 3 2 10 10 Frequency 11 11 Magnitude I2 0 327,67 Hz 45Hz to 1Hz 3 65 Hz and 99.99Hz == ERROR 0 40 In 0 to 40 In 0.1 In 3 12 12 Magnitude I1 0 40 In 0 to 40 In 0.1 In 3 13 13 Tripping Time 0 327.67s 0 to 10.00s 1/100 s 3 14 14 Closing Time 0 327.67s 0 to 10.00s 1/100 s 3 3 15 15 Fault number 0 32767 0 to 65535 1 2 4 16 16 group 5 17 17 Fault phase 0 32767 1 to 2 each new 2 fault 0 32767 0 to 8 (F1) each new 2 fault Communications P12x/EN CT/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 167/190 Analog Inputs Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30 Change Event Object Number: 32 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Input) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Change Event w/o Time) Change Event Scan Rate: The scan rate for analog input change events is fixed at 1s Scaling Initial P120 P121 P122 P123 Point Point Point Point Index Index Index Index Name/Description Initial Value and Units (represent ation of 32767 � Valid Range Change Event Deadband Change Event Class (1, 2, 3 or see above) none) 6 18 18 Fault origin 0 32767 0 to each new 2 17 (P122) fault 18 (P123) (F2) 7 19 19 Fault magnitude 0 40 In 0 to 40 In each new 2 fault 20 20 Fault magnitude IA 0 40 In 0 to 40 In each new 2 fault 21 21 Fault magnitude IB 0 40 In 0 to 40 In each new 2 fault 22 22 Fault magnitude IC 0 40 In 0 to 40 In each new 2 fault 8 23 23 Fault magnitude IN 0 40 IEn 0 to 40 IEn each new 2 fault 24 24 Fault magnitude Ie_d 0 40 In 0 to 40 In each new 2 fault Format: F1: 0: None, 1: Phase A, 2: Phase B, 3: Phase C, 4: Phase AB, 5: Phase AC, 6: Phase BC, 7: Phase A B C, 8: Earth. F2: For P122/123 : 0: Null, 1: Remote trip, 2: thermal overload, 3: tI>, 4: tI>>, 5: tI>>>, 6: tIN>, 7: tIN>>, 8: tIN>>>, 9: tI<, 10: broken conductor, 11: taux1, 12: taux2, 13: tIinv>, 14: tIinv>>, 15:taux3, 16: taux4 (only p123), 17:breaker failure, 18: SOFT (only P123). For P120 : only 0: Null, 1: Remote trip, 6: tIN>, 7: tIN>>, 8: tIN>>>, 11: taux1, 12: taux2. P12x/EN CT/Gd6 Page 168/190 BLANK PAGE Communications MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN CM/Fc6 COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE GUIDE Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 CONTENTS 1. 2. 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.2 3. 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.6.1 3.6.2 3.6.3 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 4. 4.1 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.3.5 4.4 5. 5.1 REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING COMMISSIONING TEST ENVIRONMENT Important notes Injection test sets Additional commissioning test equipment Communication Commissioning test sheets PRODUCT VERIFICATION TESTS Allocation of terminals Electrostatic discharge (ESD) Visual inspection Earthing Current transformers (CT's) Use of a Core CT for earth faults. Cable shields and core CT Induced current flow through electric cables Core CT polarity Auxiliary supply Logic inputs Logic outputs RS 485 rear communication SETTING CHECK Settings Measurements MiCOM P120 MiCOM P121, P122 and P123 Phase overcurrent (I> and I>>) Test wiring diagram MiCOM settings I> threshold with DMT tI> I> threshold with IDMT tI> I>> threshold Final checks MAINTENANCE Equipment failure P12x/EN CM/Fc6 Page 1/18 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 11 12 14 14 15 15 P12x/EN CM/Fc6 Page 2/18 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 Minor fault Major fault Hardware and software faults Method of repair Replacing the active part Replacing the complete relay Problem solving Password lost or not accepted Communication Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 15 15 16 16 16 16 17 17 17 Commissioning and Maintenance P12x/EN CM/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 3/18 1. REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING The MiCOM P12x relays are fully numerical in their design, implementing all protection and non-protection functions in software. The MiCOM relays use a high degree of self-checking and, in the unlikely event of a failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the commissioning test do not need to be as extensive as with non-numerical relays (static or electromechanical). To commission MiCOM relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning correctly and the application-specific software setting have been applied to the MiCOM relay. It is considered unnecessary to test every function of the relay if the settings have been verified by one of the following method: � Extracting the settings applied to the relay using the appropriate setting software MiCOM S1 (preferred method) � Via the front panel user interface. REMINDER: It is not possible to download a new setting software as long as the programming mode is active. To confirm that the product is operating correctly once the application-specific settings have been applied, a test should be performed on a single protection element. Unless previously agreed to the contrary, the customer will be responsible for determining the application-specific settings to be applied to the MiCOM relays and for testing of any scheme logic applied by external wiring. Blank commissioning test sheets and setting records are provided at the APPENDIX 2 of the Technical Guide for completion as required. BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY GUIDE SFTY/4LM/D11 OR LATER ISSUE, OR THE SAFETY AND TECHNICAL DATA SECTION OF THE TECHNICAL MANUAL AND ALSO THE RATINGS ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL. P12x/EN CM/Fc6 Commissioning and Maintenance Page 4/18 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2. 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.2 COMMISSIONING TEST ENVIRONMENT Important notes All commissioning tests of MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays are carried out by injecting currents to the secondary of the earth and/or phases CTs using appropriate injection test sets provided for this purpose. Injection test sets For reasons of convenience (weight, spatial requirement, transportation), a single-phased injection test set is more suitable for commissioning and is able to perform all commissioning tests regarding MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays. Thus, the following descriptions indicate how to conduct the commissioning tests with a singlephase injection test set. However, for certain commissioning tests, the three-phase wiring diagrams are easier to understand and in this case the description is also given in three-phase format. Single-phase injection test set 1 current (0 to 50 A), timer (precision 1 ms). Three-phase injection test set 3 currents (0 to 50 A), timer (precision 1 ms). Additional commissioning test equipment - 1 multimeter (precision 1%), - 1 connecting terminal to measure the currents exceeding 10 A (precision 2%), - Test plugs and wires to carry out injections to the CT's secondary (dimension according to the currents injected). Communication For all commissioning tests, the records can be made by using the RS 485 communication on the rear connector of the MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays or for MiCOM P122 and P123 using the RS232 front port. According to each RS 485 communication protocol (MODBUS, Courier, IEC 60870-5-103, DNP3.0). Commissioning test sheets Commissioning test sheets are available in the APPENDIX 2 of the Technical Guide. The presentation of the Commissioning test sheets follows the description of the tests of this chapter. The contents of these Commissioning test sheets enable you to log: - The name of the relay, station and circuit - The characteristics of the MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays - The various settings - The results of the protection and automation checks - The result of the test records after commissioning. Commissioning and Maintenance P12x/EN CM/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 5/18 3. PRODUCT VERIFICATION TESTS BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY GUIDE SFTY/4LM/E11 OR LATER ISSUE, OR THE SAFETY AND TECHNICAL DATA SECTIONS OF THE TECHNICAL MANUAL AND ALSO THE RATINGS ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL. 3.1 Allocation of terminals It is necessary to consult the appropriate wiring diagram provided in section P12x/EN CO whilst observing the various polarities and ground/earth connection. 3.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) Before any handling of the module (active part of the relay), please refer to the recommendations in User guide of this Technical Guide. 3.3 Visual inspection Carefully examine the relay to see if there has been any possible deterioration following installation. Check if the external wiring corresponds to the appropriate relay diagram or the assembly diagram. The reference number of the relay diagram is indicated on a label situated under the upper flap of the front panel. When the relay withdraws from its case, use a continuity tester to check if the current shortcircuits (phases and earth CT's) between the terminals indicated on the wiring diagram are closed. 3.4 Earthing Check if the earth connection of the case situated above the rear terminal block is used to connect the relay to a local earth bar. With several relays present, make sure that the copper earth bar is properly installed for solidly connecting the earthing terminals of each case. 3.5 Current transformers (CT's) DANGER: NEVER OPEN CIRCUIT THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A CURRENT TRANSFORMER SINCE THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BE LETHAL AND COULD DAMAGE INSULATION. P12x/EN CM/Fc6 Commissioning and Maintenance Page 6/18 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 3.6 3.6.1 Use of a Core CT for earth faults. If a core CT is used to detect earth faults, prior to any test, the user must check the following points: MV or HV cable screens and core CT, No current flow through the MV or HV cables, Orientation of the core CT (P1-S1, P2-S2) Cable shields and core CT When mounting a core CT around electric cables, check the connection to the earth of the cable shields. It is vital that the earth cable of the shield moves in the opposite direction through the core CT. This cancel the currents carried by the cable shields through the core CT. 3.6.2 FIGURE 1: SCREEN SHIELDS AND CT CORE Induced current flow through electric cables When an electric line is earthed at its two ends for logging purposes, induced current may circulate if a second line is in parallel. This current can be read on the MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 and produce false readings. 3.6.3 FIGURE 2: LOGGING OF AN ELECTRICAL LINE Core CT polarity It is necessary to check the polarity of the core CT by following the figure below: Momentarily connect the battery + to P1 and � to P2. The centre zero ammeter connected with + to S1 and � to S2 will deflect in the positive direction if the wiring is correct. CT phase may be tested using the same method. Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN CM/Fc6 Page 7/18 FIGURE 3: CORE CT ORIENTATION TEST NOTE: De-magnetise the CT after polarity test. Inject an ac current starting from zero and increase to slowly exceed the CT nominal value and then decrease slowly to zero. 3.7 Auxiliary supply Check the value of the auxiliary supply voltage (terminals 33 and 34). The value measured shall be between 0.8 and 1.2 time the dc nominal auxiliary supply voltage, or 0.8 and 1.1 time the ac nominal auxiliary supply voltage indicated on MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123. Uaux range (Volts) 24 - 60 Vdc 48 - 250 Vdc/48 - 250 Vac Uaux nominal zone (Volts) 19 - 72 Vdc 38 - 300 Vdc/38 - 275 Vac Maximum peak value (Volts) 80 336 3.8 Logic inputs This test checks that all the opto-isolated inputs are functioning correctly. The P123 have 5 opto-isolated inputs while P122 relays have 3 opto-isolated inputs and P120/P121 have 2 logic opto-isolated inputs. The opto inputs should be energised on at a time. The status of the input can be viewed using menu OP. PARAMETERS/Input Status, an 1 indicating an energised input and a 0 indicating a de-energised input. When each logic input is energised one of the characters on the bottom line of the menu display will change to the value show in the following table to indicate the new state of the inputs. Input Opto input 1 22-24 Terminals Opto input 2 26-28 Terminals Opto input 3 17-19 Terminals Opto input 4 21-23 Terminals Opto input 5 25-27 Terminals MiCOM P12x models P120,P121, P122, P123 P120,P121, P122, P123 P122, P123 P123 P123 OP. PARAMETERS/Inputs Status cell value 00001 00010 00100 01000 10000 P12x/EN CM/Fc6 Commissioning and Maintenance Page 8/18 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 3.9 Logic outputs This test checks that all outputs are functioning correctly. The P123 have 9 outputs while P122 relays have 7 outputs and P120/P121 have 5 outputs. For all MiCOM relays, the WATCHDOG output is a normally close relays and is designed as WD (35-36), (normally open pin terminals 35-37). For all MiCOM relays, the RL1 and RL2 are change-over relays (2-4-6, 8-10-12). For all MiCOM relays, the RL3 and RL4 are normally open relays (14-16, 18-20). For MiCOM P122 and P123 relays, the RL5 and RL6 are normally open relays (1-3, 5-7). For MiCOM P123 relay, the RL7 and RL8 are normally open relays (9-11, 13-15). Each output contact may have its own and independent power supply (refer to wiring schemes). The status of the outputs can be viewed using menu OP. PARAMETERS/ Relay Status, an indicating an close output relay and a 0 indicating a open output relay. When each output relay is closed one of the characters on the bottom line of the menu display will change to the value show in the following table to indicate the new state of the inputs. OUTPUT RL 1 RL 2 RL 3 RL 4 RL 5 RL 6 RL 7 RL 8 MiCOM P12x models P120,P121, P122, P123 P120,P121, P122, P123 P120,P121, P122, P123 P120,P121, P122, P123 P122, P123 P122, P123 P123 P123 OP. PARAMETERS/Relay Status cell value 00000001 00000010 00000100 00001000 00010000 00100000 01000000 10000000 3.10 RS 485 rear communication This test should only be performed where the relay is to be accessed from a remote location and will vary depending on the communication protocol being adopted (refer to label under the upper flap). It is not the intention of the test to verify the operation of the complete system from the relay to the remote location, just the relay's rear communication port and any protocol converter necessary. Connect a laptop PC to the RS485 rear port (via a KITZ for Courier communication) and check the communication with the appropriate command. Commissioning and Maintenance P12x/EN CM/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 9/18 4. 4.1 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 SETTING CHECK The setting checks ensure that all of the application-specific relay setting for the particular installation have been correctly applied to the relay. Transfer the setting file to the relay using a laptop PC running the appropriate software via the RS232 front port (all MiCOM P12x models) or the RS485 rear port (all MiCOM models). This method is preferred transfer function settings because it is much faster and there is less margin for error. If the setting software is not used then enter manually via the relay front panel interface. The commissioning is following the points below: � Consignation of the settings � Validation of the measurements � Validation of the thresholds and associated timers. Settings Carry forward the settings on the commissioning test sheets. Measurements The MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays measure phase and earth currents (P120 only one phase or earth) as a True RMS value up to the 10th harmonics. The value(s) indicated take account of the phase and/or earth CT ratio. WARNING: MiCOM P120, P121, P122 AND P123 RELAYS HAVE 1 AND 5 AMP CURRENT INPUTS. CHECK THAT THE INJECTED CURRENT IS COMPATIBLE WITH THE SELECTED RANGE. MiCOM P120 - Note the select CT ratio. - Energise the MiCOM P120 relay. - Apply current to input terminals 55-56 or 47-48 and verify the value on the LCD display. - Carry forward the results to the Commissioning test sheets (Applied value and relay value displayed) MiCOM P121, P122 and P123 - Note the select phase and earth CTs ratio. - Energise the MiCOM P121, P122 or P123 relay. - Apply current to input (as per wiring diagram) and verify the values on the LCD display. - Carry forward the results to the Commissioning test sheets (Applied values and relay values displayed). P12x/EN CM/Fc6 Commissioning and Maintenance Page 10/18 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 4.3 4.3.1 Phase overcurrent (I> and I>>) Set the various thresholds on the trip output (refer to User Guide). For MiCOM P120, the same test can be performed for the phase/or earth threshold. Test wiring diagram This test wiring diagram makes it possible to conduct tests relating to the I> and I>> thresholds. The diagram describes current injection onto the 5 Amp phase current inputs (terminals 4142, 43-44, 45-46). To carry out injection for the 1 Amp phase inputs, perform the same test on the 1 Amp inputs (terminals 49-50, 51-52, 53-54). 4.3.2 4.3.2.1 FIGURE 4: I> AND I>> TESTS WIRING MiCOM settings MiCOM P120 Settings Protection Menu Ie> Ie> tIe> tIe> (if DMT) Type of curve (if IDMT) TMS value (if IDMT) K value (if RI) Ie>> Ie>> tIe>> AUTOMAT. CTRL/Trip commands Menu YES 1 In DMT or IDMT or RI 20 s IEC VI or IEEE VI 1 1 YES 12 In 10 s TRIP tIe> YES Commissioning and Maintenance MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 TRIP tIe>> YES P12x/EN CM/Fc6 Page 11/18 4.3.2.2 MiCOM P121, P122 and P123 settings Protection Menu I> I> tI> tI> (if DMT) Type of curve (if IDMT) TMS value (if IDMT) K value (if RI) I>> I>> AUTOMAT. CTRL/Trip commands Menu TRIP tI> TRIP tI>> YES 1 In DMT or IDMT or RI 20 s IEC VI or IEEE VI 1 1 YES 12 In YES YES 4.3.3 I> threshold with DMT tI> Values to be recorded: I> threshold for each phase Time delay tI> for each phase. I> threshold check: If the time delay tI> is short, gradually increase the injection current up to the value of the I> threshold. If the time delay tI> is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check that there is no tripping. Then inject 1,1 x I threshold and check the trip. Gradually decreases the injected current and record the value of the drop out I> threshold. Checks: Alarm message on the LCD display. Alarm LED flashes. Trip LED on I> threshold LED on (if programmed). Trip output closes. I> threshold output closes (if programmed). tI> time delay check: Apply a current onto one of the phases and measure the time delay tI> by pre-setting the current above the I> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold). Apply a current onto one of the phases and measure the time delay tI> by pre-setting the current above the I> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold). P12x/EN CM/Fc6 Commissioning and Maintenance Page 12/18 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 4.3.4 I> threshold with IDMT tI> Values to be recorded: I> threshold for each phase tI>time delay for each phase. I> threshold check: Inject a current equal to 2 x I threshold onto one of the phase current inputs. Repeat the operation for various current values (n x I threshold with n ranging from 4 to 10, for example). Check that the values measured correspond to those indicated in the table below (for TMS = 1). IEC curves Type of curve IEC Accuracy STI SI VI EI LTI Tripping time (in seconds) for TMS =1 2 x I threshold 10 x I threshold Nominal Min Max Nominal Min Max +/- 12.5 % for nominal tripping time greater than 40ms. +/- 50 ms for nominal tripping time less than 40ms. +/- 5 % for nominal tripping time greater than 40ms. +/- 20 ms for nominal tripping time less than 40ms. 1.78 1.56 2.00 0.518 0.492 0.544 10.03 8.78 11.28 2.971 2.822 3.119 13.5 11.81 15.19 1.5 1.425 1.575 26.67 23.33 30.00 0.808 0.7676 0.8484 120 105.0 135.0 13.33 12.667 14.00 IEEE/ANSI curves Type of curve IEEE/ANSI Accuracy STI (CO2) MI LTI (CO8) VI EI Tripping time (in seconds) for TMS =1 2 x I threshold 10 x I threshold Nominal Min Max Nominal Min Max +/- 12.5 % for nominal tripping time greater than 40ms. +/- 50 ms for nominal tripping time less than 40ms. +/- 5 % for nominal tripping time greater than 40ms. +/- 20 ms for nominal tripping time less than 40ms. 1.7319 1.515 1.948 0.5249 0.4987 0.5512 3.8032 3.328 4.279 1.2068 1.1464 1.2671 2.1633 1.893 2.434 0.2401 0.2201 0.2601 7.0277 6.149 7.906 0.6891 0.6546 0.7235 9.5215 8.33 10.71 0.4063 0.3860 0.4267 RI electromechanical curve Type of curve Electromechanical RI Tripping time (in seconds) for K =1 2 x I threshold 10 x I threshold Nominal Min - Max Nominal Min - Max 4.5 4 - 5 3.2 2.8 - 3.6 Commissioning and Maintenance P12x/EN CM/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 13/18 Rectifier curve Type of curve Rectifier RC RXIDG curve Tripping time (in seconds) for TMS =1 2 x I threshold 10 x I threshold Nominal Min - Max Nominal Min - Max 966 917 - 1014 0.402 0.382 - 0.422 Type of curve RXIDG with k = 0.3 RXIDG with k = 0.4 RXIDG with k = 0.5 RXIDG with k = 0.6 RXIDG with k = 0.7 RXIDG with k = 0.8 RXIDG with k = 0.9 RXIDG with k = 1 Tripping time (in seconds) 2 x I threshold 10 x I threshold Nominal Min - Max Nominal Min - Max 3.24 2.84 � 3.65 1.07 1.02 � 1.12 3.63 3.18 � 4.08 1.45 1.38 � 1.52 3.93 3.44 � 4.42 1.76 1.67 � 1.85 4.17 3.65 � 4.69 2.00 1.90 � 2.10 4.38 3.83 � 4.93 2.21 2.10 � 2.32 4.56 3.99 � 5.13 2.39 2.27 � 2.51 4.72 4.13 � 5.31 2.55 2.42 � 2.68 4.86 4.25 � 5.47 2.69 2.56 � 2.82 For other injected current values, compare the values found with the theoretical values calculated according to the formulae of the curves. NOTE: Equations of IEC, IEEE/ANSI, RI, RC and RXIDG curves are given in Chapter "Application Guide" of the present Technical Guide. Checks: Display of an alarm message on the front panel LCD. Alarm LED flashes. Trip LED on I> threshold LED on (if programmed). Trip output closes. I> threshold output closes (if programmed). P12x/EN CM/Fc6 Commissioning and Maintenance Page 14/18 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 4.3.5 4.4 I>> threshold Values to be recorded l>> threshold for each phase tl>> time delay for each phase I>> threshold check: If tI>> time delay is short, gradually raise the injection current up to the value of I>> threshold. If tI>> time delay is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check there is no trip. Then inject 1.1 x I threshold and check the trip output is close. Gradually lower the injected current and note the value of the drop out I>> threshold. Checks: Display of an alarm message on the front panel LCD. Alarm LED flashes Trip LED on I>> threshold LED on (if programmed). Trip output closes. I>> threshold output closes (if programmed). tI>> time delay check: Apply a current onto one of the phases and measure the time delay tI>> by pre-setting the current above the I>> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold). Apply a current onto one of the phases and measure the time delay tI>> by pre-setting the current above the I>> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold). Final checks The tests are now complete. Remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc... If it is necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the relay in order to perform the wiring verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replace in accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. If a MMLG test block is installed, remove the MMLB01 test plug and replace the MMLG cover so that the protection is put into service. Ensure that all event, fault and disturbance records, alarm and LEDs have been reset before leaving the relay. For MiCOM P123, if the relay is in a new installation or the circuit breaker has been just maintained, the circuit breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. These counters can be reset using command in RECORD/CB Monitoring menu (refer to User Guide). Commissioning and Maintenance P12x/EN CM/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 15/18 5. 5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 MAINTENANCE Equipment failure It is recommended that products supplied by Schneider Electric receive periodic monitoring after installation. In view of the critical nature of protective and control equipment, and their infrequent operation, it is desirable to confirm that they are operating correctly at regular intervals. Schneider Electric protection and control equipment is designed for a life in excess of 20 years. MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays are full digital and self-diagnosing. As soon as an internal fault is detected, depending on its type (minor or major), an alarm message is displayed as a priority on the front panel LCD before the fault LED is illuminated (fixed or flashing) and the watchdog relay is closed (if the fault is a major one). The watchdog facility provides two output relay contacts, one normally open and one normally closed that are driven by the processor board. These are provided to give an indication that the relay is in a healthy state. An equipment failure (major or minor) cannot be acknowledged on the front panel (using the dedicated tactile button keypad). Only the disappearance of the cause will acknowledge the fault and hence reset the fault LED. All tests are performed during relay boot and permanently in the background software task excepted volatile memory tests performed only when relay boots and on any setting change. Minor fault Regarded by the MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays as a minor fault is a communication failure. If the communication is in fault, MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 protection and automation modules are not affected. The MiCOM relay is fully operational. The watchdog relay is energised (35-36 contact open and 36-37 contact closed). Message: "COMM.ERROR": Communication fault Cause: Hardware or software failure of the communication module Action: Withdraw the active part and return it to the factory for repair. Alternative: If communication is not used, disable communication in the COMMUNICATION menu (Communication ? = No). Major fault Major fault for MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays are all software and hardware failures except the communication faults. As soon as this type of failure is detected, the watchdog (WD) is de-energised (35-36 contact closed and 36-37 contact open) and all operations are stopped (protection, automation, communication). P12x/EN CM/Fc6 Commissioning and Maintenance Page 16/18 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 5.1.3 5.2 5.2.1 Hardware and software faults Messages: "DEFAULT SETTING": Indication that the relay is running with default setting "SETTING ERROR": Failure in the setting " CALIBRATION ERROR.": Calibration zone failure "CT ERROR": Analogue channel failure Cause: Hardware or software failure Action: Restart the protection software (refer � 5.3). If the software fault still remain after restart, withdraw the active part and return the module to the factory for repair. Method of repair Replacing the active part BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY GUIDE SFTY/4LM/E11 OR LATER ISSUE, OR THE SAFETY AND TECHNICAL DATA SECTIONS OF THE TECHNICAL MANUAL AND ALSO THE RATINGS ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL. 5.2.2 The case and the rear terminals blocks have been designed to facilitate removal of the MiCOM P12x relay should replacement or repair become necessary without disconnect the scheme wiring. NOTE: The MiCOM range of relays have integral current transformer shorting switches which will close when the active part is removed from the case. Remove the upper and lower flap without exerting excessive force. Remove the external screws. Under the upper flap, turn the extractor with a 3 mm screwdriver and extract the active part of the relay by pulling from the upper and lower notches on the front panel of the MiCOM relay. The reinstall the repaired or replacement relay follow the above instruction in reverse, ensuring that no modification has been done on the scheme wiring. On completion of any operations which require the relay to be removed from its case, verify that the four fixing screws are fitted at the corners of the front panel, under the flaps. These screws secure the chassis (removable part) to the relay case, ensuring good seating/contact. Replacing the complete relay To remove the complete relay (active part and case) the entire wiring must be removed from the rear connector. Before working at the rear of the relay, isolate all current supplies to the MiCOM relay and ensure that the relay is no more powered. DANGER: NEVER OPEN THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A CURRENT TRANSFORMER SINCE THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BE LETHAL AND COULD DAMAGE to the INSULATION. Remove all wiring (communication, logic inputs, outputs, auxiliary voltage, current inputs). Disconnect the relay earth connection from the rear of the relay. Remove the screws used to fasten the relay to the panel, rack, etc... .These are the screws with the larger diameter heads that are accessible when the upper and lower flaps are installed. Commissioning and Maintenance P12x/EN CM/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 17/18 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.2.1 5.3.2.2 Withdraw the relay from the panel, rack, etc... carefully because it will be heavy due to the internal transformers. To reinstall the repaired or replacement relay follow the above instructions reverse, ensuring that each terminal block is relocated in the correct position and case earth, communication are replaced. Once reinstallation is complete the relay should be recommissioned using the instruction in sections 1 to 4 inclusive of this chapter. Problem solving Password lost or not accepted Problem: Password lost or not accepted Cause: MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays are supplied with the password set to AAAA. This password can be changed by the user ( refer OP PARAMETERS menu). Action: There is an additional unique recovery password associated to the relay which can be supplied by the factory or service agent, if given details of its serial number (under the upper flap of the front panel). With this serial number, contact your Schneider Electric local dealer or Schneider Electric Customer Care Center. Communication Values measured locally and remotely Problem: The measurements noted remotely and locally (via RS485 communication) differ. Cause: The values accessible on the front face via the Measurement menu are refreshed every second. Those fed back via the communication and accessible by the Schneider Electric Setting software generally have skeletal refreshing frequencies. If the refreshing frequency of the supervision software differs from that of MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays (1s), there may be a difference between indicated values. Action: Adjust the frequency for refreshing the measurements of the supervision software or of the setting software to 1 second. MiCOM relay no longer responds Problem: No response from MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 relays when asked by the supervision software without any communication fault message. Cause: Mainly, this type of problem is linked to an error in the MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 communication parameters. Action: Check MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 communication parameters (data rate, parity, etc.) are in accordance with the supervision settings. Check MiCOM P120, P121, P122 and P123 network address. Check that this address is not used by another device connected on the same LAN. P12x/EN CM/Fc6 Commissioning and Maintenance Page 18/18 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 5.3.2.3 Check that the other devices on the same LAN answer to supervision requests. A remote command is not taken in account Problem: The communication between the relay and the PC is correct, but the relay does not accept any remote command or file downloading. Cause: Generally this is due to the fact that the relay is in programming situation. This means that the password is active. Action: Check that the password is not active in the relay since the last 5 minutes. Connection Diagrams MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN CO/Gd6 CONNECTION DIAGRAMS Connection Diagrams P12x/EN CO/Gd6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 1/2 BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY GUIDE SFTY/4LM/E11 OR LATER ISSUE, OR THE SAFETY AND TECHNICAL DATA SECTION OF THE TECHNICAL MANUAL AND ALSO THE RATINGS ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL." Note: SCHEME REPRESENTING MiCOM RELAY OFF On P120 relay models, CT's must only be connected to terminals 55 & 56, or 47 & 48. P12x/EN CO/Gd6 Page 2/2 Connection Diagrams MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 SCHEME REPRESENTING MiCOM RELAY OFF Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN RS/Fc6 COMMISSIONING TEST & RECORD SHEETS Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 CONTENTS 1. 1.1 1.2 2. 2.1 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.7 2.2.8 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.3 2.4.4 2.4.5 2.4.6 2.4.7 2.4.8 2.5 COMMISSIONING TEST SHEETS Relay identification Commissioning test record COMMISSIONING SETTING RECORD SHEETS OP PARAMETERS Menu CONFIGURATION Menu Display CT Ratio LEDs 5 to 8 configuration Group select configuration Alarms configuration Inputs configuration Relays maintenance Phase rotation configuration COMMUNICATION Menu COMMUNICATION Menu (MODBUS) COMMUNICATION Menu (Courier) COMMUNICATION Menu (DNP3) PROTECTION G1 Menu Phase Overcurrent [50/51] Earth Overcurrent [50N/51N] [46] NEGATIVE PHASE SEQUENCE OVERCURRENT I2> [46] Negative phase sequence overcurrent I2> [46] Negative phase sequence overcurrent I2>> [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD [37] UNDERCURRENT I< [79] AUTORECLOSER PROTECTION G2 Menu P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 1/49 5 5 5 8 8 8 8 8 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 12 12 13 14 14 16 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets Page 2/49 2.5.1 Phase Overcurrent [50/51] 2.5.2 Earth Overcurrent [50N/51N] 2.5.3 [46] NEGATIVE PHASE SEQUENCE OVERCURRENT I2> 2.5.4 [46] Negative phase sequence overcurrent I2> 2.5.5 [46] Negative phase sequence overcurrent I2>> 2.5.6 [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD 2.5.7 [37] UNDERCURRENT I< 2.5.8 2.6 [79] AUTORECLOSER AUTOMAT.CTRL Menu 2.6.1 TRIP Command allocation 2.6.2 Latch function allocation 2.6.3 Blocking Logic 1 function allocation 2.6.4 Blocking Logic 2 function allocation 2.6.5 Inrush Blocking Logic function allocation 2.6.6 Selective Scheme Logic1 function allocation 2.6.7 Selective Scheme Logic2 function allocation 2.6.8 OUTPUT RELAYS allocation 2.6.9 LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS allocation 2.6.10 LOGIC INPUT allocation 2.6.11 BROKEN CONDUCTOR 2.6.12 Cold Load Pick up 2.6.13 CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE 2.6.14 CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION 2.6.15 SOTF 2.6.16 LOGIC EQUATIONS 2.7 RECORDING Menu MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 22 25 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 33 33 34 35 36 36 39 39 40 40 41 42 42 43 47 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2.7.1 CB MONITORING Record 2.7.2 FAULT RECORD Record 2.7.3 INSTANTANEOUS Record 2.7.4 DISTURBANCE RECORD 2.7.5 TIME PEAK VALUE 2.7.6 ROLLING DEMAND P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 3/49 47 48 48 48 48 48 P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 4/49 BLANK PAGE Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 5/49 1. COMMISSIONING TEST SHEETS BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY GUIDE SFTY/4LM/D11 OR LATER ISSUE, OR THE SAFETY AND TECHNICAL DATA SECTION OF THE TECHNICAL MANUAL AND ALSO THE RATINGS ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL. 1.1 Relay identification Commissioning date : Engineer : Substation : Circuit : Network nominal frequency: MiCOM Overcurrent relay model : P120 Serial number : Rated current In : Auxiliary voltage Uaux : Communication protocol : Language : P121 P122 P123 1.2 Commissioning test record (put a cross after each checked stage) Serial number check ? All current transformer shorting switches closed ? Wiring checked against diagram (if available) ? Case earth installed ? Test block connections checked (if installed) ? Insulation tested ? P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 6/49 Auxiliary supply control Auxiliary voltage to relay Auxiliary voltage value Watchdog contacts With auxiliary supply off With auxiliary supply on Measurements PHASE CT INPUT Phase A current Phase B current Phase C current EARTH CT INPUT Earth current Phase protection test I> threshold I> threshold I> drop threshold Time delay Time delay at 2 x I> Time delay at 10 x I> I>> threshold I>> threshold I>> drop threshold Time delay Time delay at 2 x I>> Time delay at 10 x I>> Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 _______________ Vdc/Vac Terminals 35 and 36 Terminals 35 and 36 Applied value ________________ A ________________ A ________________ A ________________ A Theoretical value ________________ A _______________ ms _______________ ms ________________ A ________________ A ________________ A Relay value A A A A Relay value A A A A ______________ A ______________ A A A Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Earth protection test Ie> threshold Ie> threshold Ie> drop threshold Time delay Time delay at 2 x Ie> Time delay at 10 x Ie> Ie>> threshold Ie>> threshold Ie>> drop threshold Time delay Time delay at 2 x Ie>> Time delay at 10 x Ie>> Commissioning Engineer ________________________ Theoretical value ________________ A _______________ ms _______________ ms ________________ A _______________ ms _______________ ms P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 7/49 Relay value _______________ A _______________ A ms ms _______________ A _______________ A ms ms Date _______________ P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets Page 8/49 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2. COMMISSIONING SETTING RECORD SHEETS 2.1 OP PARAMETERS Menu Password : Reference : Software version : Frequency : 50 Hz 60 Hz 2.2 2.2.1 CONFIGURATION Menu Display Phase A Text Phase B Text Phase C Text E/Gnd Text A L1 R B L2 S C L3 T N E G 2.2.2 CT Ratio Line CT Primary Line CT Secondary E/Gnd CT Primary E/Gnd CT Secondary Primary phase CT ratio Secondary phase CT ratio 1 A Primary earth CT ratio Secondary earth CT ratio 1 A 5A 5A Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2.2.3 LEDs 5 to 8 configuration � = available with this model. Functions I> I>> I>>> tI> tI>> tI>>> Ie> Ie>> Ie>>> tIe> tIe>> tIe>>> Ie_d> tIe_d> I< tI< Therm Trip Brkn Cond. CB Fail tI2> tI2>> Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Recloser Run Recloser Blocked 79 int Blk 79 Ext Blk t Aux 1 t Aux 2 t Aux 3 t Aux 4 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � P12 0 P12 1 P12 2 P12 3 LED 5 Yes LED 6 Yes P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 9/49 LED 7 Yes LED 8 Yes P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 10/49 Functions t Aux 5 Conf SOTF tIA> tIB> tIC> TCS alarm Equation A Equation B Equation C Equation D Equation E Equation F Equation G Equation H Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12 0 P12 1 P12 2 P12 3 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � LED 5 Yes LED 6 Yes LED 7 Yes LED 8 Yes 2.2.4 Group select configuration Relay: Change group input Setting group P120 (not available) P121 (not available) Menu 1 Input 2 2.2.5 Alarms configuration Relay: P120 (not available) Inst. Self Reset YES NO Reset Led on fault YES NO Alarm battery YES NO Inhibited alarms tAux 1 tAux 2 tAux 3 tAux 4 tAux 5 P121 YES P122 YES P123 YES Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Inhibited alarms Ctrl Trip [79] Ext Block I< Equation A Equation B Equation C Equation D Equation E Equation F Equation G Equation H P121 YES P122 YES P123 YES P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 11/49 2.2.6 Inputs configuration Relay: Relay: Inputs (P122 only) Inputs (P123 only) Voltage input DC 2.2.7 Relays maintenance Relay: Fail Safe Relay Maintenance Mode P122 and P123 only Relays CMD P122 and P123 only P120 (not available) P121 (not available) 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 DC AC P120 (not available) P121 P122 P123 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 YES NO P122 P123 6 5 W4 3 2 1 P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets Page 12/49 2.2.8 Phase rotation configuration Relay: P120 (not available) P121 (not available) MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Phase rotation A-B-C A-C-B 2.3 2.3.1 COMMUNICATION Menu COMMUNICATION Menu (MODBUS) Communication ? Baud Rate Parity Data bits Stop bits Relay Address YES 300 bds 1.200 bds 4.800 bds 19.200 bds Odd 7 1 Even NO 600 bds 2.400 bds 9.600 bds 38 400 bds None 8 2 2.3.2 COMMUNICATION Menu (Courier) Communication ? Relay Address YES NO 2.3.2.1 COMMUNICATION Menu (IEC 60870-5-103) Communication ? Baud Rate Relay Address YES 300 bds 1.200 bds 4.800 bds 19.200 bds NO 600 bds 2.400 bds 9.600 bds 38 400 bds Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 13/49 2.3.3 COMMUNICATION Menu (DNP3) Communication ? Baud Rate Parity Data bits Stop bits Relay Address YES 300 bds 1.200 bds 4.800 bds 19.200 bds Odd 7 1 Even NO 600 bds 2.400 bds 9.600 bds 38 400 bds None 8 2 P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 14/49 2.4 PROTECTION G1 Menu 2.4.1 Phase Overcurrent [50/51] 2.4.1.1 [50/51] I> I> ? I> Delay Type 2.4.1.1.1 [50/51] I> DMT tI> t Reset Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Yes DMT No: Next menu: I>> � In IDMT RI ms ms 2.4.1.1.2 [50/51] I> IDMT Idmt Tms Reset delay time Rtms tReset I> >> >>> Interlock 2.4.1.1.3 [50/51] I> RI K t Reset 2.4.1.2 [50/51] I>> I>> ? I>> Delay Type IEC SI IEC VI IEC LTI IEEE MI IEEE VI IEEE RC DMT IDMT YES s NO IEC STI IEC EI CO2 CO8 IEEE EI BPN EDF Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed s YES IDMT NO: Next menu: I>>> ? In DMT RI Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2.4.1.2.1 [50/51] I>> DMT tI>> t Reset 2.4.1.2.2 [50/51] I>> IDMT Idmt Tms Reset delay time Rtms tReset I> >> >>> Interlock 2.4.1.2.3 [50/51] I>> RI K t Reset 2.4.1.3 [50/51] I>>> I>>>? I>>> Sample I>>> tI>>> P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 15/49 s s IEC SI IEC VI IEC LTI IEEE MI IEEE VI IEEE RC DMT IDMT YES s NO IEC STI IEC EI CO2 CO8 IEEE EI BPN EDF Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed YES YES s NO (last menu) NO In s P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets Page 16/49 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2.4.2 Earth Overcurrent [50N/51N] 2.4.2.1 [50N/51N] E/Gnd Ie> ? Ie> Delay Type 2.4.2.1.1 [50N/51N] Ie > DMT tIe> t Reset 2.4.2.1.2 [50N/51N] Ie > IDMT Curve Tms Reset delay time Rtms tReset Ie> >> >>> Interlock 2.4.2.1.3 [51N] Ie> RI K t Reset YES IDMT DMT NO: Next menu: Ie>> ? Ien RI RXIDG ms ms DMT YES IEC SI IEC VI IEC LTI IEEE MI IEEE VI IEEE RC IDMT s NO IEC STI IEC EI CO2 CO8 IEEE EI BPN EDF Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed Ms 2.4.2.1.4 [51N] Ie>RXIDG RXIDG Curve t Reset 2.4.2.2 [51N] Ie>> Ie>> ? Ie>> Delay Type Ms YES IDMT DMT NO: Next menu: Ie>>> ? Ien RI RXIDG Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2.4.2.2.1 [51N] Ie >> DMT tIe>> t Reset 2.4.2.2.2 [51N] Ie >> IDMT Curve Tms Reset delay time Rtms tReset Ie> >> >>> Interlock 2.4.2.2.3 [50N/51N] Ie>> RI K t Reset 2.4.2.2.4 [50N/51N] Ie>> RXIDG RXIDG Curve t Reset 2.4.2.3 [50N/51N] Ie >>> Ie>>> ? Ie>>> Sample Ie>>> tIe>>> 2.4.2.4 [50N/51N] Ie_d> Ie_d> ? Ie_d> Delay Type P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 17/49 ms ms DMT YES IEC SI IEC VI IEC LTI IEEE MI IEEE VI IDMT s NO IEC STI IEC EI CO2 CO8 IEEE EI Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed ms YES YES ms NO Next menu: Ie_d> ? NO Ien ms YES IDMT NO: last menu Ien DMT RI P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 18/49 2.4.2.4.1 [50N/51N] Ied_> DMT tIe> t Reset 2.4.2.4.2 [50N/51N] Ie_d> IDMT Curve Tms Reset delay time Rtms tReset 2.4.2.4.3 [50N/51N] Ie_d> RI K t Reset 2.4.2.5 [50N/51N] Ie_d>> Ie_d>> ? Ie_d>> Delay Type 2.4.2.5.1 [50N/51N] Ied_>> DMT tIe>> t Reset Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 ms ms IEC SI IEC VI IEC LTI IEEE MI IEEE VI IEEE RC DMT IDMT s IEC STI IEC EI CO2 CO8 IEEE EI BPN EDF Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed ms YES IDMT NO: last menu Ien DMT RI ms ms Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2.4.2.5.2 [50N/51N] Ie_d>> IDMT Curve Tms Reset delay time Rtms tReset 2.4.2.5.3 [50N/51N] Ie_d> RI K t Reset P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 19/49 IEC SI IEC VI IEC LTI IEEE MI IEEE VI IEEE RC DMT IDMT s IEC STI IEC EI CO2 CO8 IEEE EI BPN EDF Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed ms 2.4.3 [46] NEGATIVE PHASE SEQUENCE OVERCURRENT I2> Relay: Relay: P120 (not available) P121 (not available) 2.4.4 [46] Negative phase sequence overcurrent I2> I2>? I2> Delay Trip 2.4.4.1 [46] I2> DMT YES IDMT tI2> t Reset NO Next menu: I2>> � In DMT RI ms ms P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets Page 20/49 [46] I2> IDMT Curve Tms Reset delay time Rtms tReset MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 DMT IEC SI IEC VI IEC LTI IEEE MI IEEE VI IEEE RC IDMT s IEC STI IEC EI CO2 CO8 IEEE EI BPN EDF Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable 2.4.4.2 [46] I2> RI K t Reset ms 2.4.5 [46] Negative phase sequence overcurrent I2>> I2>>? I2>> tI2>> YES NO Last menu In ms 2.4.6 [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD Relay: P120 (not available) P121 (not available) [49] Therm OL ? I> Te k Trip [49] Alarm ? Alarm YES YES NO In mn % NO % Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2.4.7 [37] UNDERCURRENT I< Relay: P120 (not available) P121 (not available) P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 21/49 I< ? I< tI< Inhibition I< on 52A YES YES NO % Ms NO 2.4.8 [79] AUTORECLOSER Relay: P120 (not available) P121 (not available) P122 (not available) [79] Autoreclose ? Ext CB Fail ? Ext CB Fail Time Ext Block ? Rolling demand ? Max cycles nb Time period Dead Time tD1 Dead Time tD2 Dead Time tD3 Dead Time tD4 Min Drop off time tI> Min Drop off time tI>> Min Drop off time tI>>> Min Drop off time tIe> Min Drop off time tIe>> Min Drop off time tIe>>> Reclaim Time tR Inhib Time tI Phase Cycles E/Gnd Cycles YES YES YES YES NO last menu NO Next menu: Ext Block? ms NO NO 1 1 mn s s s s s s s s s s s s 2 3 2 3 Cycles 4 4 P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 22/49 tI> tI>> tI>>> tIe> tIe>> tIe>>> tAux 1 tAux 2 2.5 PROTECTION G2 Menu 2.5.1 Phase Overcurrent [50/51] 2.5.1.1 [50/51] I> I> ? I> Delay Type 2.5.1.1.1 [50/51] I> DMT tI> t Reset Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 4 3 2 1 Yes DMT No: Next menu: I>> ? In IDMT RI ms ms 2.5.1.1.2 [50/51] I> IDMT Idmt Tms Reset delay time Rtms tReset I> >> >>> Interlock 2.5.1.1.3 [50/51] I> RI IEC SI IEC VI IEC LTI IEEE MI IEEE VI IEEE RC DMT IDMT YES s NO IEC STI IEC EI CO2 CO8 IEEE EI BPN EDF Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 K t Reset 2.5.1.2 [50/51] I>> I>> ? I>> Delay Type P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 23/49 s YES IDMT NO: Next menu: I>>> ? In DMT RI P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 24/49 2.5.1.2.1 [50/51] I>> DMT tI>> t Reset 2.5.1.2.2 [50/51] I>> IDMT Idmt Tms Reset delay time Rtms tReset I> >> >>> Interlock 2.5.1.2.3 [50/51] I>> RI K t Reset 2.5.1.3 [50/51] I>>> I>>>? I>>> Sample I>>> tI>>> Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 s s IEC SI IEC VI IEC LTI IEEE MI IEEE VI IEEE RC DMT IDMT YES s NO IEC STI IEC EI CO2 CO8 IEEE EI BPN EDF Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed YES YES s NO (last menu) NO In s Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 25/49 2.5.2 Earth Overcurrent [50N/51N] 2.5.2.1 [50N/51N] E/Gnd Ie> ? Ie> Delay Type 2.5.2.1.1 [50N/51N] Ie > DMT tIe> t Reset 2.5.2.1.2 [50N/51N] Ie > IDMT Curve Tms Reset delay time Rtms tReset Ie> >> >>> Interlock 2.5.2.1.3 [51N] Ie> RI K t Reset YES NO: Next menu: Ie>> ? Ien IDMT DMT RI RXIDG ms ms DMT YES IEC SI IEC VI IEC LTI IEEE MI IEEE VI IEEE RC IDMT s NO IEC STI IEC EI CO2 CO8 IEEE EI BPN EDF Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed Ms 2.5.2.1.4 [51N] Ie>RXIDG RXIDG Curve t Reset 2.5.2.2 [51N] Ie>> Ie>> ? Ie>> Delay Type Ms YES NO: Next menu: Ie>>> ? Ien IDMT DMT RI RXIDG P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 26/49 2.5.2.2.1 [51N] Ie >> DMT tIe>> t Reset 2.5.2.2.2 [51N] Ie >> IDMT Curve Tms Reset delay time Rtms tReset Ie> >> >>> Interlock 2.5.2.2.3 [50N/51N] Ie>> RI K t Reset 2.5.2.2.4 [50N/51N] Ie>> RXIDG RXIDG Curve t Reset 2.5.2.3 [50N/51N] Ie >>> Ie>>> ? Ie>>> Sample Ie>>> tIe>>> 2.5.2.4 [50N/51N] Ie_d> Ie_d> ? Ie_d> Delay Type Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 ms ms DMT YES IEC SI IEC VI IEC LTI IEEE MI IEEE VI IEEE RC IDMT s NO IEC STI IEC EI CO2 CO8 IEEE EI BPN EDF Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed ms YES YES ms NO Next menu: Ie_d> ? NO Ien ms YES IDMT NO: last menu Ien DMT RI Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2.5.2.4.1 [50N/51N] Ied_> DMT tIe> t Reset 2.5.2.4.2 [50N/51N] Ie_d> IDMT Curve Tms Reset delay time Rtms tReset 2.5.2.4.3 [50N/51N] Ie_d> RI K t Reset 2.5.2.5 [50N/51N] Ie_d>> Ie_d>> ? Ie_d>> Delay Type 2.5.2.5.1 [50N/51N] Ied_>> DMT tIe>> t Reset P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 27/49 ms ms IEC SI IEC VI IEC LTI IEEE MI IEEE VI IEEE RC DMT IDMT s IEC STI IEC EI CO2 CO8 IEEE EI BPN EDF Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed ms YES IDMT NO: last menu Ien DMT RI ms ms P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 28/49 2.5.2.5.2 [50N/51N] Ie_d>> IDMT Curve Tms Reset delay time Rtms tReset 2.5.2.5.3 [50N/51N] Ie_d> RI K t Reset Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 IEC SI IEC VI IEC LTI IEEE MI IEEE VI IEEE RC DMT IDMT s IEC STI IEC EI CO2 CO8 IEEE EI BPN EDF Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed ms 2.5.3 [46] NEGATIVE PHASE SEQUENCE OVERCURRENT I2> Relay: Relay: P120 (not available) P121 (not available) 2.5.4 [46] Negative phase sequence overcurrent I2> I2>? I2> Delay Trip 2.5.4.1 [46] I2> DMT YES IDMT tI2> t Reset NO Next menu: I2>> � In DMT RI ms ms Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 [46] I2> IDMT Curve Tms Reset delay time Rtms tReset Page 29/49 DMT IEC SI IEC VI IEC LTI IEEE MI IEEE VI IEEE RC IDMT s IEC STI IEC EI CO2 CO8 IEEE EI BPN EDF Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable 2.5.4.2 [46] I2> RI K t Reset ms 2.5.5 [46] Negative phase sequence overcurrent I2>> I2>>? I2>> tI2>> YES NO Last menu In ms 2.5.6 [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD Relay: P120 (not available) P121 (not available) [49] Therm OL ? I> Te k Trip [49] Alarm ? Alarm YES YES NO In mn % NO % P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 30/49 2.5.7 [37] UNDERCURRENT I< Relay: P120 (not available) P121 (not available) Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 I< ? I< tI< Inhibition I< on 52A YES YES NO % Ms NO 2.5.8 [79] AUTORECLOSER Relay: P120 (not available) P121 (not available) P122 (not available) [79] Autoreclose ? Ext CB Fail ? Ext CB Fail Time Ext Block ? Rolling demand ? Max cycles nb Time period Dead Time tD1 Dead Time tD2 Dead Time tD3 Dead Time tD4 Min Drop off time tI> Min Drop off time tI>> Min Drop off time tI>>> Min Drop off time tIe> Min Drop off time tIe>> Min Drop off time tIe>>> Reclaim Time tR Inhib Time tI Phase Cycles E/Gnd Cycles YES YES YES YES NO last menu NO Next menu: Ext Block? ms NO NO 1 1 mn s s s s s s s s s s s s 2 3 2 3 Cycles 4 4 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 tI> tI>> tI>>> tIe> tIe>> tIe>>> tAux 1 tAux 2 4 3 2 2.6 2.6.1 AUTOMAT.CTRL Menu TRIP Command allocation Function Trip tI> Trip tI>> Trip tI>>> Trip tIe> Trip tIe>> Trip tIe>>> Trip tIe_d> Trip tIe_d>> Trip tI < Trip tI2 > Trip tI2 >> Trip Thermal Trip Brkn.Cond Trip t Aux 1 Trip t Aux 2 Trip t Aux 3 Trip t Aux 4 Trip t Aux 5 Trip SOTF Ctrl Trip Trip CB Fail P120 Yes P121 Yes P122 Yes P123 Yes P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 31/49 1 P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 32/49 Function Trip Equ A Trip Equ B Trip Equ C Trip Equ D Trip Equ E Trip Equ F Trip Equ G Trip Equ H P120 Yes P121 Yes P122 Yes Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P123 Yes 2.6.2 Latch function allocation Function Latch tI> Latch tI>> Latch tI>>> Latch tIe> Latch tIe>> Latch tIe>>> Latch tIe_d> Latch tIe_d>> Latch tI < Latch tI2 > Latch tI2 >> Latch Thermal Latch Brkn.Cond Latch t Aux 1 Latch t Aux 2 Latch t Aux 3 Latch t Aux 4 Latch t Aux 5 Latch SOTF Latch CB Fail P120 YES P121 YES P122 YES P123 YES Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2.6.3 Blocking Logic 1 function allocation Function tI> tI>> tI>>> tIe> tIe>> tIe>>> tIe_d> tIe_d>> tI2 > tI2 >> Thermal Brkn.Cond tAux 1 tAux 2 tAux 3 tAux 4 tAux 5 P120 Yes P121 Yes P122 Yes P123 Yes 2.6.4 Blocking Logic 2 function allocation Function tI> tI>> tI>>> tIe> tIe>> tIe>>> tIe_d> tIe_d>> tI2 > tI2 >> Thermal Brkn.Cond P120 Yes P121 Yes P122 Yes P123 Yes P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 33/49 P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 34/49 Function tAux 1 tAux 2 tAux 3 tAux 4 tAux 5 P120 Yes P121 Yes P122 Yes Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P123 Yes 2.6.5 Inrush Blocking Logic function allocation Relay: P120 (not available) P121 (not available) Inrush blocking Inr. harmonic 2 ratio = T Inrush reset YES NO % ms Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Function I> I>> I>>> Ie> Ie>> Ie>>> Ie_d> Ie_d>> I2> I2>> P122 Yes P123 Yes 2.6.6 Selective Scheme Logic1 function allocation Relay: P120 (not available) P121 (not available) Sel1 tI>> Sel1 tI>>> Sel1 tIe>> Sel1 tIe>>> Sel1 tIe_d> Sel1 tIe_d>> t Sel1 YES YES YES YES YES YES P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 35/49 NO NO NO NO NO NO ms P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 36/49 2.6.7 Selective Scheme Logic2 function allocation Relay: P120 (not available) P121 (not available) Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Sel2 tI>> Sel2 tI>>> Sel2 tIe>> Sel2 tIe>>> Sel1 tIe_d> Sel1 tIe_d>> tSel2 = 2.6.8 OUTPUT RELAYS allocation Function Trip I> tI I>> tI>> I>>> tI>>> Ie> tIe> Ie>> tIe>> Ie>>> tIe>>> Ie_d> tIe_d> Ie_d>> tIe_d>> tI< � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � P12 0 P12 1 P12 2 P12 3 YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO ms P120 / P121 P122 P123 RL2 RL3 RL4 RL5 RL6 RL7 RL8 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � Commissioning Test & Record Sheets P12x/EN RS/Fc6 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Page 37/49 P120 / P121 P122 P123 Function tI2> P12 0 P12 1 P12 2 P12 3 RL2 RL3 RL4 RL5 RL6 RL7 RL8 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes � � tI2>> � � Therm. � � Therm. Trip � � CB Alarm � � 52 Fail � � Brkn. Cond � � CB Fail � � CB Close � � � � t Aux 1 � � � t Aux 2 � � � t Aux 3 � � t Aux 4 � t Aux 5 � 79 Run � 79 Trip � 79 Locked � 79 Int block � 79 Ext block � Order 1Comm. � � Order 2Comm. � � Order 3Comm. � � Order 4 Comm. � � Active Group � � SOTF Group � CONTROL Trip � CONTROL Close � Input1 � � � � Input2 � � � � Input3 � � Input4 � P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 38/49 Function Input5 tIA> tIB> tIC> CTS EQU. A EQU. B EQU. C EQU D EQU E EQU. F EQU. G EQU. H P12 0 P12 1 P12 2 P12 3 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P120 / P121 P122 P123 RL2 RL3 RL4 RL5 RL6 RL7 RL8 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2.6.9 LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS allocation Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 (P122 / P123) Output 6 (P122 / P123) Output 7 (P123) Output 8 (P123) YES YES YES YES YES YES YES P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 39/49 NO NO NO NO NO NO NO 2.6.10 LOGIC INPUT allocation 2.6.10.1 Inputs Function P12 0 P12 1 P12 2 P12 3 Inputs 1 2 3 4 5 None � � � � Unlatch � � � � 52 a � � � � 52 b � � � � CB FLT � � � � Aux 1 � � � � Aux 2 � � � � Aux 3 � � Aux 4 � Aux 5 � Block Logic 1 � � � � Block Logic 2 � � Start Disturb � � Cold Load PU � � Logic Select 1 � � Logic Select 2 � � Change setting � � Block [79] � Reset � � Trip Circuit � � Strt tBF � � Reset Leds � � P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 40/49 Function Maint. Mode SOTF Local Mode Synchro Ctrl Trip Ctrl Close P12 0 P12 1 P12 2 P12 3 1 � � � � � � � � � � Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Inputs 2 3 4 5 2.6.10.2 tAux Aux 1 : Time tAux 1 Aux 2 : Time tAux 2 Aux 3 : Time tAux 3 (P122 & P123) Aux 4 : Time tAux 4 (P123) Aux 5 : Time tAux 5 (P123) 2.6.11 BROKEN CONDUCTOR Relay: P120 (not available) P121 (not available) Brkn Cond Broken Conductor time tBC Ratio I2/I1 YES 2.6.12 Cold Load Pick up Relay: P120 (not available) P121 (not available) Cold Load PU ? CLPU Start Input CLPU Start auto tI> ? tI>> ? tI>>> ? tIe> ? YES YES YES YES YES YES YES s s s s s NO s % NO NO NO NO NO NO NO Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 tIe>> ? tIe>>> ? tIe_d> ? tIe_d>> ? t2> ? t2>> ? T Therm ? Cold load PU Level Cold load PU tCL YES YES YES YES YES 2.6.13 CIRCUIT BREAKER FAILURE Relay: P120 (not available) P121 (not available) CB Fail ? I< CB Fail Time tBF Block I> ? Block Ie> ? YES YES YES P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 41/49 NO NO NO NO NO % s NO In ms NO NO P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 42/49 2.6.14 CIRCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION Relay: P120 (not available) P121 (not available) Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 TC Supervision? T trip circuit t SUP CB Open S'vision CB Open Time CB Close S'vision CB Close Time CB Open Alarm? CB Open NB Amps(n)? Amps(n) n t Open Pulse t Close Pulse YES YES YES YES YES NO s NO ms NO ms NO NO ms ms 2.6.15 SOTF Relay: P120 (not available) P121 (not available) SOTF? t SOTF I>> ? I>>> ? Ctrl close input SOTF input [79] closing Front comm. order Rear comm. order YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO ms NO NO NO NO NO NO NO Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 2.6.16 LOGIC EQUATIONS Equ. A Boolean A.00 = / = NOT A.01 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT A.02 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT A.03 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT A.04 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT A.05 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT A.06 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT A.07 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT A.08 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT A.09 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT A.10 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT A.11 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT A.12 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT A.13 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT A.14 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT A.15 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT T Operate ms T Reset ms P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 43/49 Logic P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets Page 44/49 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Equ B Boolean B.00 = / = NOT B.01 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT B.02 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT B.03 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT B.04 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT B.05 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT B.06 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT B.07 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT B.08 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT B.09 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT B.10 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT B.11 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT B.12 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT B.13 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT B.14 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT B.15 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT T Operate ms T Reset ms Logic Equ. C Boolean C.00 = / = NOT C.01 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT C.02 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT C.03 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT C.04 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT C.05 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT C.06 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT C.07 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT C.08 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT C.09 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT C.10 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT C.11 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT C.12 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT C.13 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT C.14 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT C.15 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT T Operate ms T Reset ms Logic Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Equ. D Boolean D.00 = / = NOT D.01 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT D.02 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT D.03 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT D.04 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT D.05 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT D.06 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT D.07 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT D.08 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT D.09 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT D.10 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT D.11 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT D.12 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT D.13 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT D.14 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT D.15 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT T Operate ms T Reset ms Equ. E Boolean E.00 = / = NOT E.01 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT E.02 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT E.03 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT E.04 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT E.05 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT E.06 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT E.07 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT E.08 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT E.09 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT E.10 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT E.11 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT E.12 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT E.13 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT E.14 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT E.15 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT T Operate ms T Reset ms P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 45/49 Logic Logic P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Commissioning Test & Record Sheets Page 46/49 MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Equ. F Boolean F.00 = / = NOT F.01 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT F.02 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT F.03 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT F.04 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT F.05 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT F.06 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT F.07 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT F.08 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT F.09 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT F.10 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT F.11 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT F.12 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT F.13 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT F.14 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT F.15 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT T Operate ms T Reset ms Logic Equ. G Boolean G.00 G.01 G.02 G.03 G.04 G.05 G.06 G.07 G.08 G.09 G.10 G.11 G.12 G.13 G.14 G.15 = / = NOT OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT T Operate ms T Reset ms Logic Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Equ. H Boolean H.00 = / = NOT H.01 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT H.02 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT H.03 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT H.04 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT H.05 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT H.06 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT H.07 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT H.08 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT H.09 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT H.10 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT H.11 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT H.12 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT H.13 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT H.14 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT H.15 OR / = OR NOT / AND / = AND NOT T Operate ms T Reset ms 2.7 RECORDING Menu 2.7.1 CB MONITORING Record P122 & P123 only. CB Monitoring Time s CB Closing Time s CB Operations RST = [C] Amps (n) RST = [C] Amps (n) IA Amps (n) IB Amps (n) IC P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 47/49 Logic P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 48/49 2.7.2 FAULT RECORD Record Record Number Fault Time Fault date Active Set Group Faulted phase Threshold I>> Magnitude IA Magnitude IB Magnitude IC Magnitude IN Magnitude ID Magnitude 2.7.3 INSTANTANEOUS Record Number Hour Date Origin Length Trip 2.7.4 DISTURBANCE RECORD Pre-time Post-time Disturb Rec Trig 2.7.5 TIME PEAK VALUE Time Window 2.7.6 ROLLING DEMAND Sub Period Num of Sub Per. Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 1 None Phase C BC : : / / 2 Phase A Earth ABC Phase B AB AC A A A A A A 1 2 3 4 5 : : : / / YES s NO ms ms ON INST. ON TRIP mn mn Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 BLANK PAGE P12x/EN RS/Fc6 Page 49/49 HARDWARE/SOFTWARE VERSION P120 P121 P122 P123 HISTORY AND COMPATIBILITY Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 CONTENTS 1. INTRODUCTION 2. MiCOM P120 3. MiCOM P121 4. MiCOM P122 5. MiCOM P123 P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 1/33 3 4 7 11 23 P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 2/33 BLANK PAGE Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 3/33 1. INTRODUCTION HARDWARE INSTALLED HARD 1 HARD 2 Evolutions: - Add flash memory HARD 3 Evolutions: - The digital inputs can operate in AC voltage - The watchdog output is now a change over contact HARD 4 Evolutions: - CPU release D incompatible with the preceding ones. - The power supply battery box MiCOM E1 is available to ensure temporary supply to the relay to consult or modify data. HARD 5 Evolutions: - CPU redesign * new microprocessor (300MHz) * new RAM (2Mb) * new flash memory (20Mb) to replace BBRAM, EEPROM & front face battery * lead free design * Hardware watchdog - wide range power supply (24 � 250 Vdc/48-240Vac) - wide range digital input (24 � 250 Vdc/ 24-240Vac) - ANSI compliance for dielectric withstand of trip/close contacts P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 4/33 2. MiCOM P120 Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Relay Type P120 Software Date of Version Issue Full Description of Changes S1 Compatibility Backward Compatibility with previous hardware V1.F 11/06/99 Resolution of KITZ201 problem Modification of the output relay latching � HARD V 2 HARD V 3 HARD V 4 V3.B 19/11/99 Suppression of password in order to acknowledge the alarms Auto acknowledgement of the instantaneous Modbus time out of 200 ms Display of the letter P in the menu N and N-1 when password is active V2.0 HARD V 3 HARD V 4 V3.C 22/08/00 VDEW improvements V2.0 V4.A 15/03/01 Integration of DNP3 protocol Management of alternative logic input Latching of the auxiliary output relay by relay and not by function The digital input can work with AC signals (100 to 250 V AC) V2.0 HARD V 4 V4.D 27/08/02 Courier improvment: adding of the cell 0010 (CB control) V2.0 IEC103: correction of the checksum calculation for short message. HARD V 4 V6.A 18/06/03 Add periodic self test of EEPROM data / calibration every 24 hours with safeguard of the results in safeguarded RAM. V2.07 Add a new major alarm "Default settings" which is set after an EEPROM data error, and the following reloading of the default settings, and automatically reset after the following parameter write. IEC870-5-103 communication: - add ASDU 3.4 for measurement IN, instead of private ASDU 77, for setting in conformity with the standard (cf P127). Two versions HARD 3 or HARD 4 (HARD 2 *) V6.C 07/04/04 Software changes implemented in this version MODBUS communication: added MODBUS address filtering (rear panel). Software improvement in this version Modification to process leds for instantaneous alarms when they are self-acknowledged by the trip, or another instantaneous alarm (before this fix, these instantaneous alarms were not visible on configured leds). (Same fix than for P121). Modification to fix upload program for FPGA of new CPU board (index E or higher). Modification on 3rd threshold delay Ie>>>, whose limitation test was done on 1st threshold delay Ie>. V2.07 Two versions HARD 3 or HARD 4 (HARD 2 *) Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 5/33 Relay Type P120 Software Date of Version Issue Full Description of Changes S1 Compatibility Backward Compatibility with previous hardware V6.D 12/03/06 Software changes implemented in this version V2.12 Added EA Approval option: Filtering of logical inputs on 24 samples instead of 8 (on 1,5 period). Software improvement in this version Blocking of Px2x relay with IEC-103 communication after reception of a time synchronisation frame. Start In> correction of IEC-103 communication on (when going down). Recopy of the length of restored message when a message repetition is asked with IEC-103 communication. CO2 curves ratios correction. New DNP3 address is taken in Two versions HARD 3 or HARD 4 (HARD 2 *) V10.D 29/08/06 v10.D software is equivalent to v6.D software based on the phase II hardware redesign (HARD 5) Software changes implemented in this version Multilanguage Human Machine Interface Front port communication available (RS232 port) V2.14 HARD 5 V11.A 11/06/07 Software changes implemented in this version Calibration value memorization. Auxiliary logic inputs temporized, with alarm displayed or not (by setting), assignable to LED, to Trip order, to output relays or to logic equations. RL1 & RL2 can be configured as Fail safe Possibility to have contact outputs inverted to trip on drop of signals Time Synchronization through a digital Input TMS step to 0.001 of the TMS as well as the RTMS. That will authorize a better precision for the small values. Logic inputs assignable to one or several internal signal. Each signal result of a logical OR of all inputs assigned to it. Digital inputs can be directly assigned to outputs. Increase the number of fault records from 5 to 25. Increase the number of event records from 75 to 250. Correction of disturbance record in case of avalanche Event record time tagging correction Communication protocol enhancement (Modbus, DNP3 & Courier) V2.14 HARD 5 P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 6/33 Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Relay Type P120 Software Date of Version Issue V11.C Full Description of Changes S1 Compatibility Backward Compatibility with previous hardware Software changes implemented in this version - tAux1 and tAux2 modifications: . assigned to inputs, . temporization, . alarm inhibited, . Trip, . latching, . blocking logic, . assigned to outputs. V2.14 HARD 5 - IEC-103 and Courier: correction of the acknowledgement of the disturbance record. - Modbus: . correction of the manual, self and disturbance record acknowledgement, . address added to the event setting group change, . disturbance record: correction of the number of pages and sample in the last page, . hardware alarm after a communication failure, - correction of LSB of square root. V11.D V11.E V11.F 2011 2011 07.2012 New Schneider Electric brand S1 Studio Software changes implemented in this version S1 - Possibility to control locally a General Reset and to start a Studio disturbance record from the relay HMI, - Turkish language added - Reading of event without number improved (ModBus) - Correction of event's bit when >12, - Courier protocol: correction of SKd_setNb() function - modification of alarms and LEDs saving - Modification of date and time failure hardware alarms, - Improvement of the reception (rear communication), - DNP3: restart and multi-fragment responses corrections, - IEC-103 communication: ACD bit correction after general or time synchro command reception Software changes implemented in this version - Integration of new LCD for Chinese character Hard 5 Hard 5 Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 3. MiCOM P121 P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 7/33 Relay Type P121 Software Date of Version Issue Full Description of Changes S1 Compatibility Backward Compatibility with previous hardware V2.J 30/08/99 MODBUS improvement: � Correction of al encountered problem (answer to a synchronisation telegram, creation of a 2 seconds time out ...) HARD V 2 HARD V 3 HARD V 4 V3.B 19/11/99 Suppression of password in order to acknowledge the alarms Auto acknowledgement of the instantaneous Modbus time out of 200 ms Display of the letter P in the menu N and N-1 when password is active V2.0 HARD V 3 HARD V 4 V3.C 25/01/00 Evolution of Modbus writing 16 bits V2.0 V3.E 16/03/00 Czech and Hungarian version delivery V2.0 V3.G 22/08/00 VDEW improvements V2.0 V4.E 31/01/01 Latch of the output relays V2.0 Latch of the auxiliary relays, relay by relay and not by function (like previously up to V3 version). On the other hand the latch of the TRIP output relay remains by function. If the auxiliary relays are latched, no alarm is displayed. For an aknowledgment of the latch the user has to go in the OP-PARAMETERS/Relay status Menu and push on the �0� clear push button. DNP3 level 2 and 3 Addition of the tripping and closing order for IEC103 The digital input can work with AC signals (100 to 250 V AC) HARD V 4 V5.D 31/01/01 Improvement of the english labels. V2.0 V5.F 08/08/02 Courier improvment: adding of the cell 0010 (CB control) V2.0 IEC103: correction of the checksum calculation for short message. HARD V 4 V5.G 24/10/02 Added Private messages option (for non standard protection functions) in IEC870-5-103 communication. V2.07 Two versions HARD 3 or HARD 4 (HARD 2 *) P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 8/33 Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Relay Type P121 Software Date of Version Issue Full Description of Changes S1 Compatibility Backward Compatibility with previous hardware V6.A 18/06/03 Add periodic self test of EEPROM data / calibration every 24 hours with safeguard of the results in safeguarded RAM. V2.09 Add a new major alarm "Default settings" which is set after an EEPROM data error, and the following reloading of the default settings, and automatically reset after the following parameter write. IEC870-5-103 communication: - add ASDU 3.4 for measurement IN, instead of private ASDU 77, for setting in conformity with the standard (cf P127). Two versions HARD 3 or HARD 4 (HARD 2 *) V6.B 18/07/03 Improvement of the reading of the alarm "EEPROM DATA FAULT" when much access EEPROM is done: - Optimization of the readings in E2PROM (writing of the value of the checksums in internal RAM). - The function of access to the E2PROM becomes protected from the interruptions. V2.09 Two versions HARD 3 or HARD 4 (HARD 2 *) V6.C 28/11/03 Software changes implemented in this version - Modif. treatment of the thermal model: 20 milliseconds instead of 100. - Evolutions communication MODBUS: addition of the read quick byte (Function 7) by reading of words (Function 03 or 04), and of the reading of the date (on page 8). - Communication MODBUS Front Face: addition of the filtering of address. Software improvement done in this version Fix on RI curves processing in certain cases. V2.10 Two versions HARD 3 or HARD 4 (HARD 2 *) V6.D 11/12/03 Software improvement done in this version V2.10 Modification to remove the taking into account of the number of defect in the calculation of checksum of page 1 of E2PROM, like in autotest E2PROM. Two versions HARD 3 or HARD 4 V6.E 07/06/04 Software changes implemented in this version DNP3 modifications: Binary inputs move to Class 0. Acceptance of variation 2 object 1. Modified German texts for Front panel. Software improvement done in this version Modification to fix upload program for FPGA of new CPU board (index E or higher). Fixed checksum verification test in Front panel MODBUS communication. Fixed a shift in the fault numbers introduced by error since V6.A and V6.B. V2.10 (HARD 2 *) Two versions HARD 3 or HARD 4 (HARD 2 *) Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 9/33 Relay Type P121 Software Date of Version Issue Full Description of Changes V6.G 06H 11/01/05 Software changes implemented in this version Possibility to come back to the head line of the menu by pressing Clear Button. Software improvement done in this version None. 14/04/05 Software changes implemented in this version Watchdog behaviour when courier protocol used Primary ration correction when courier protocol used New DNP3 address is taken in account only after a reboot of the relay. S1 Compatibility Backward Compatibility with previous hardware V2.12 Two versions HARD 3 or HARD 4 V2.12 (HARD 2 *) HARD 3 or HARD 4, HARD 2* (*See Notes) 06I 19/06/06 Software changes implemented in this version V2.12 HARD 3 or No Px2x relay blocking after reception of a time synchronisation frame in T103 Correction of SF6 front face alarm text and Start I> event when IEC103 used HARD 4, HARD 2* (*See Notes) 06J 04/08/06 Software changes implemented in this version V2.12 HARD 3 or Correction of trip Phase L1/L2/L3 events in IEC-103 communication. HARD 4, HARD 2* (*See Notes) 07.A 16/05/08 Software changes implemented in this version - Correction of the following defects: . DMT temporisation 20s: decimal values truncated, . parameters of DNP3 and ModBus addresses, . update of the phase indication of alarm tI>, V2.14 HARD 3 or HARD 4, HARD 2. V10.D 29/08/06 v10.D software is equivalent to v6.J software based on the phase II hardware redesign (HARD 5) Software changes implemented in this version Multilanguage Human Machine Interface Front port communication available (RS232 port) V2.14 HARD 5 P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 10/33 Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Relay Type P121 Software Date of Version Issue Full Description of Changes S1 Compatibility Backward Compatibility with previous hardware V11.B 11/06/07 Software changes implemented in this version V2.14 Calibration value memorization. Auxiliary logic inputs temporized, with alarm displayed or not (by setting), assignable to LED, to Trip order, to output relays or to logic equations. RL1 & RL2 can be configured as Fail safe. Possibility to have contact outputs inverted to trip on drop of signals. TMS step to 0.001 of the TMS as well as the RTMS. That will authorize a better precision for the small values. Logic inputs assignable to one or several internal signal. Each signal result of a logical OR of all inputs assigned to it. Digital inputs can be directly assigned to outputs. The com1 and tcom2 max changes from 5s to 600s. Implementation of 8 Boolean logic equations of 16 operands (NOT, OR & AND). Communication protocol enhancement (Modbus, DNP3 & Courier). HARD 5 V11.C Software changes implemented in this version - software minor corrections. V2.14 HARD 5 V11.D Software changes implemented in this version - Portuguese language is added. - Correction for communication with system (Pacis...) - initialization of tAux1 and tAux2 procrastination at power on, - tAux1 and tAux2 alarm inhibition corrected, V2.14 HARD 5 Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 11/33 Relay Type P121 Software Date of Version Issue Full Description of Changes S1 Compatibility Backward Compatibility with previous hardware V11.E 30/06/08 Software changes implemented in this version - Compatibility with MiCOM S1 Studio, - separate output signalization of the three overcurrent (IA>, IB> and IC>). V2.14 S1 Studio Hard 5 - Language corrections - hardware alarm correction after a communication port failure, - phase indicator alarm modified, - RI delay type in In> protection saved after device restart when settings are loaded with S1 Modbus, - Displayed rms value corrected (when no current injected) corrected, Other documentation changes in B96 TM - new general presentation - presentation of MiCOM S1 Studio (new GS section) - TD: Phase and earth current transformers consumption added, - AD: more explanation added for transformers inrush current V11.F V12.A V12.B V12.C V12.D 19/11/08 01/2009 09/2009 03/2010 03/2010 Software changes implemented in this version None (modification on P122 & P123 relays only) Software changes implemented in this version V2.14 - New inhibited alarms added (possibility to inhibit alarm on tAux and Boolean logic) S1 Studio - Suspend IDMT curves on I> & I>>, interlock of I> IDMT by I>> DT or I>>> DT modified, - Logical inputs directly assignable to Boolean Logical Equations, Software changes implemented in this version V2.14 - Correction of: S1 . Chinese text (HMI display), Studio . control trip events when RL1 is assigned to "Ctrl Trip" Software changes implemented in this version - Correction of: . IDMT curve when inrush blocking is used with Ie> or Ie>> . German labels S1 Studio General: New Schneider Electric brand S1 Studio Hard 5 Hard 5 Hard 5 Hard 5 P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 12/33 Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Relay Type P121 Software Date of Version Issue Full Description of Changes V12.E V12.F 10/2011 - 07/2012 - Software changes implemented in this version Correction of: alarm message when an auxiliary relay is latched, alarm after a date / time failure Output relay assignation (autorecloser) CB failure reset before the end of a timer if current is null, Logic equation status (address 002Ch) At CB switching on, erratic alarm Software changes implemented in this version Integration of new LCD for Chinese character S1 Compatibility Backward Compatibility with previous hardware S1 Hard 5 Studio V13.A V13.B V14.A V14.B V14.C 09/2013 - 10/2013 - 04/2014 - 07/2015 - Software changes implemented in this version Creation of double Point Index for CB Status/Control in DNP3 protocol, Dwell of Trip Command adjusted to 100ms Access to Model number and serial number, Software Correction Software changes implemented in this version Correction of the derived earth measure value display in LCD screen and derived earth value cannot be shown in S1 studio measurement viewer Software changes implemented in this version Extension the first stage Phase O/C minimal setting from 0.1 *In to 0.05*In Software changes implemented in this version Autoreclose function improvement, ARC can be terminated within 1000s and go to lockout state after the initiation if doesn't detect change of CB status 08/2017 Software changes implemented in this version - Addition of SoE for protection trip reset in IEC 60870-5-103 protocol S1 Studio S1 Studio S1 Studio S1 Studio S1 Studio Hard 5 Hard 5 Hard 5 Hard 5 Hard 5 Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 4. MiCOM P122 P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 13/33 Relay Type P122 Software Date of Version Issue V2.J 30/08/99 V3.B 29/11/99 V3.C V3.D V3.E V3.G V4.E 06/01/00 06/04/00 16/03/00 22/08/00 31/01/01 Full Description of Changes S1 Compatibility Backward Compatibility with previous hardware MODBUS improvement: � Correction of al encountered problem (answer to a synchronisation telegram, creation of a 2 seconds time out ...) HARD V 2 HARD V 3 HARD V 4 Suppression of password in order to acknowledge the alarms Auto acknowledgement of the instantaneous Modbus time out of 200 ms Display of the letter P in the menu N and N-1 when password is active V2.0 HARD V 3 HARD V 4 Label correction V2.0 Evolution of Modbus writing 16 bits V2.0 Czech and Hungarian version delivery V2.0 VDEW improvements V2.0 Latch of the output relays V2.0 Latch of the auxiliary relays, relay by relay and not by function (like previously up to V3 version). On the other hand the latch of the TRIP output relay remains by function. If the auxiliary relays are latched, an alarm will be displayed. If the user acknowledges this alarm, the auxiliary relays will be delatched. HARD V 4 DNP3 level 2 and 3 Addition of the tripping and closing order for IEC103 Phase rotation (ABC or ACB) Third threshold algorithm for improvment of the behaviour on saturated current transformers Timer for the undercurrent feature (0 to 150 sec) Tripping curves (rectifier curve + LABORELLEC curves) Selection of the Setting group by level or by edge. CB fail detection (possibility to inhibit the starting signals) Instanteneous record Rolling demand Peak value demand Instantaneous alarm settable: self or not self reset Matrix for the autorecloser The digital input can work with AC signals signals (24 V to 250 V AC) Necessity to set in HMI Configuration menu, the type of voltage used, either AC or DC P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 14/33 Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Relay Type P122 Software Date of Version Issue Full Description of Changes S1 Compatibility Backward Compatibility with previous hardware V5.A 27/09/01 Maintenance mode for manual command of the output V2.0 relays Reset of leds by logic input or control command or front panel or on new fault appearance Addition of negative sequence protection feature (ANSI code 46) with two thresholds Addition of the CB supervision feature. V5.C 04/10/01 VDEW improvements V2.0 (Updating of the information SCN into the ASDU END OF GENERAL INTERROGATION) HARD V 4 V5.D 30/01/02 Addition of order COM1/COM2/COM3/COM4 assignalble on the auxiliary relays. Addition of the logic inputs AUX3 and AUX 4 do not genrating alarm message. Improvement of english label V2.0 V5.F 08/08/02 EA approval option: logical input filtering on 24 samples instead of 12 either 15 ms at 50 Hz) Improvment of the Recording of rolling demand in ram saved. The previous version could lead to an untimely ram saved error message due to the management of this recording Courier improvment: adding of the cell 0010 (CB control) protected by password Correction of the configuration of taux3 and taux4 for MODBUS IEC103: correction of the checksum calculation for short message. Correction of the I0 channel data into the disturbance record V2.0 HARD V 4 V5.G 24/10/02 Added Private messages option option (for non standard protection functions) in IEC870-5-103 communication V2.07 Two versions HARD 3 or HARD 4 (HARD 2 *) Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 15/33 Relay Type P122 Software Date of Version Issue Full Description of Changes S1 Compatibility Backward Compatibility with previous hardware V6.A 18/06/03 Add periodic self test of EEPROM data / calibration every 24 hours with safeguard of the results in safeguarded RAM. Add a new major alarm "Default settings" which is set after an EEPROM data error, and the following reloading of the default settings, and automatically reset after the following parameter write. Add "tReset" events for the thresholds I>, I>>, IN>, IN>> and I2>, and "tReset" parameter for the constant time temporization (thresholds I>, I>>, IN> and IN>>). Add "sample" parameter (Yes=Sample or No=RMS values) for the third thresholds I>>> and IN>>>. Add "CB Fail" choice for the "Trip functions" and "Latch functions" parameters. Add "tBF" event. IEC870-5-103 communication: - add ASDU 3.4 for measurement IN, instead of private ASDU 77, for setting in conformity with the standard (cf P127). - various improvements: in the management of the validity of the date and season in the messages, modifications in acknowledgement of the orders and time synchronization. V2.09 Two versions HARD 3 or HARD 4 (HARD 2 *) V6.B 18/07/03 Improvement of the reading of major alarm "EEPROM DATA FAULT" appearing when much access EEPROM is done: - Optimization of the readings in E2PROM (writing of the value of the checksums in internal RAM). - Replacement of the data storage circuit breaker in E2PROM by a storage in safeguarded RAM. - The function of access to the E2PROM becomes protected from the interruptions. V2.09 Two versions HARD 3 or HARD 4 (HARD 2 *) P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 16/33 Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Relay Type P122 Software Date of Version Issue Full Description of Changes S1 Compatibility Backward Compatibility with previous hardware V6.C 28/11/03 Software changes implemented in this version - Addition of function SOFT/TOR: Function allowing send a tripping order without awaiting temporization of release, addition of manual logical input closed (order of manual closing). - Addition of function LOCAL/REMOTE by wiring: addition of logical input LOCAL MODE (mode switch-over local, for inhibition of the writing orders the communication), and addition of exits CONTROL TRIP (remote control of release) and CLOSED CONTROL operate by remote control trip). - Modif. treatment of the thermal model: 20 milliseconds instead of 100. - Evolutions communication MODBUS: addition of the read quick byte (Function 7) by reading of words (Function 03 or 04), and of the reading of the date (on page 8). - Communication MODBUS Front Face: addition of the filtering of address. Software improvement done in this version Fix on RI curves processing in certain cases. V2.10 Two versions HARD 3 or HARD 4 (HARD 2 *) V6.D 11/12/03 Software improvement done in this version Modification to remove the taking into account of the number of defect in the calculation of checksum of page 1 of E2PROM, like in autotest E2PROM. V2.10 Two versions HARD 3 or HARD 4 V6.E 07/06/04 Software changes implemented in this version Modified recloser function: modified taking in account of manual reclose while blocking by recloser external input. Added a new DNP3 function: fault data can be accessed as analog inputs. DNP3 modifications: Binary inputs move to Class 0. Acceptance of variation 2 object 1. Modified German texts for Front panel. Software improvement done in this version Modification to fix upload program for FPGA of new CPU board (index E or higher). Improvement on 3rd threshold delay Ie>>>, whose limitation test was done on 1st threshold delay Ie>. Improved SOFT/TOR function. Improved Breaker Fail alarm processing Fixed checksum verification test in Front panel MODBUS communication. V2.10 (HARD 2 *) Two versions HARD 3 or HARD 4 (HARD 2 *) Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 17/33 Relay Type P122 Software Date of Version Issue Full Description of Changes S1 Compatibility Backward Compatibility with previous hardware V6.F 08/10/04 Software changes implemented in this version V2.10 None. Software improvements done in this version Improved KBUS/COURIER protocol. IEC870-5-103 protocol: Enhancement to improve all the system product line defect report (RFA disturbance transmission). Two versions HARD 3 or HARD 4 (HARD 2 *) V6.G 11/01/05 Software changes implemented in this version V2.12 Possibility to come back to the head line of the menu by pressing Clear Button. The setting group change will be done in exclusive way either by setting, either by logic input. The logic input will be active on level. The choice between level or edge is suppressed. Software improvements done in this version Software improvement done in this version WThe blocking logic feature can be used with a temporisation of the phase or earth current threshold set to zero. Two versions HARD 3 or HARD 4 (HARD 2 *) 06.I 19/06/06 Software changes implemented in this version V2.12 HARD 3 or No Px2x relay blocking after reception of a time synchronisation frame in T103 Correction of SF6 front face alarm text and Start I> event when IEC103 used HARD 4, HARD 2* (*See Notes) IDMT Rectifier curve selection coherency between P12x and MICOM S1. Correction of Start In> event in IEC103 communication (when going down). General trip correction in disturbance records Utilisation of nominal network frequency in the disturbance records (Comtrade format). 06J 04/08/06 Software changes implemented in this version V2.12 HARD 3 or Correction of trip Phase L1/L2/L3 events in IEC-103 communication. HARD 4, HARD 2* (*See Notes) P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 18/33 Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Relay Type P122 Software Date of Version Issue Full Description of Changes S1 Compatibility Backward Compatibility with previous hardware 07.A 16/05/08 Software changes implemented in this version V2.14 - Correction of the following defects: . temporisation IDMT of tReset (tI>> protection): 0s after tI>>, . fault record amplitude I2>> not displayed (front panel), . DMT temporisation 20s: decimal values truncated, . "Trip CB Fail" fault: type of fault not displayed, . SOTF: SOTF when current threshold is not selected, operation with I>> or I>>>with no possibility of reset, . CB supervision, amp: - measurement with 1 or 2 phases = 0A, - operation after a "CB Operation" sent by ModBus, . I2> and I2>> not updated when modified with ModBus, . the text for "SF6" alarm is incorrect, . parameters of DNP3 and ModBus addresses, . amplitude of K-Bus and Courier disturbances extraction, . DNP3: events of major and minor hardware alarms, . the content of SRAM backup can be different of corresponding checksum after an update, . update of the phase indication of alarm tI>, . thermal protection: - calculation error when K thermal coefficient 1, - during cooling phase: bad delay between thermal alarm reset and thermal overflow. HARD 3 or HARD 4, HARD 2. V10.E 29/08/06 v10.E software is equivalent to v6.J software based V2.14 on the phase II hardware redesign (HARD 5) HARD 5 Software changes implemented in this version Multilanguage Human Machine Interface Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 19/33 Relay Type P122 Software Date of Version Issue Full Description of Changes S1 Compatibility Backward Compatibility with previous hardware V11.A 11/06/07 Software changes implemented in this version Inrush blocking function implementation Calibration value memorization. Auxiliary logic inputs temporized, with alarm displayed or not (by setting), assignable to LED, to Trip order, to output relays or to logic equations. RL1 & RL2 can be configured as Fail safe Possibility to have contact outputs inverted to trip on drop of signals Time Synchronization through a digital Input TMS step to 0.001 of the TMS as well as the RTMS. That will authorize a better precision for the small values. Logic inputs assignable to one or several internal signal. Each signal result of a logical OR of all inputs assigned to it. Digital inputs can be directly assigned to outputs. Increase the number of fault records from 5 to 25. Increase the number of event records from 75 to 250. Correction of disturbance record in case of avalanche Event record time tagging correction Communication protocol enhancement (Modbus, DNP3 & Courier) V2.14 HARD 5 V11.C Software changes implemented in this version - software minor corrections. V2.14 HARD 5 V11.D Software changes implemented in this version - Portuguese language is added. V2.14 - Correction for communication with system (Pacis...) - DMT temporization decimal value corrected for values >20s - Communication Modbus correction: . manual, self and disturbance acknowledgment of the oldest event & fault record, . Modbus address added to the event setting group change, - Communication Modbus of disturbance record: number of pages and samples in the last page in the service name corrected, - "Disturbance trigger" added in the event record. HARD 5 P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 20/33 Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Relay Type P122 Software Date of Version Issue Full Description of Changes S1 Compatibility Backward Compatibility with previous hardware V11.E 30/06/08 Software changes implemented in this version - Compatibility with MiCOM S1 Studio, V2.14 Hard 5 S1 Studio - separate output signalization of the three overcurrent (IA>, IB> and IC>). - Language corrections - hardware alarm correction after a communication port failure, - tripping indication (LED) correction, - phase indicator alarm modified, - Displayed rms value corrected (when no current injected) corrected, - CB Supervision: Samps (n) counters after a "CB operations" clear sent with a modbus writing corrected, - process after boot or sending settings file(MiCOM S1) modified. Other documentation changes in B96 TM - new general presentation - presentation of MiCOM S1 Studio (new GS section) - TD: Phase and earth current transformers consumption added, - AD: more explanation added for transformers inrush current V11.F 09/2008 Software changes implemented in this version - "Inrush blocking" applied to IDMT curve correction V2.14 Hard 5 S1 Studio Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 21/33 Relay Type P122 Software Date of Version Issue V12.A 01/2009 V12.B 09/2009 V12.C 03/2010 V12.D 03/2010 Full Description of Changes S1 Compatibility Backward Compatibility with previous hardware Software changes implemented in this version V2.14 Hard 5 - New inhibited alarms added (possibility to inhibit alarm on tAux, I< and Boolean logic) S1 Studio - Possibility to operate the CB and to start a disturbance from the relay HMI, - Manual trip or manual close ordered from a logical input activation - Total trips number calculated with all the CB operations, - Suspend IDMT curves on I> & I>>, interlock of I> IDMT by I>> DT or I>>> DT modified, - Possibility to start Cold Load Pickup by 52A or "not I< & I>" or "I0< & I0>", - Detection of open circuits conditions which produce an unbalance creating negative phase sequence current, - Addition of a new derived earth overcurrent threshold, - Possibility to assign I< and tI< to any output relay and LED, - Disturbance recorder time modified (5x3s or 3 x 5s or 2 x 7.5s or 1 x 15s) - Logical inputs directly assignable to Boolean Logical Equations, Software changes implemented in this version V2.14 Hard 5 - Correction of: S1 Studio . disturbance recording when two records are triggered successively, . Chinese text (HMI display), . control trip events when RL1 is assigned to "Ctrl Trip" . Time synchronisation with logic input. Software changes implemented in this version - Correction of . IDMT curve when inrush blocking is used with Ie> or Ie>> . German labels S1 Studio Hard 5 General: New Schneider Electric brand S1 Studio Hard 5 Software changes implemented in this version - Correction of data transmission (Courier protocol). Fault extracted automatically was sometimes incorrectly transmitted P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 22/33 Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Relay Type P122 Software Date of Version Issue Full Description of Changes V12.E V12.F 10/2011 07/2012 Software changes implemented in this version - Fault records extraction using IEC103 enhanced protocol, - Possibility to control locally a general reset to clear all events, fault & disturbance records - Correction of: alarm message when an auxiliary relay is latched, alarm after a date / time failure Output relay assignation (autorecloser) CB failure reset before the end of a timer if current is null, Logic equation status (address 002Ch) At CB switching on, erratic alarm Software changes implemented in this version - Integration of new LCD for Chinese character S1 Compatibility Backward Compatibility with previous hardware V2.14 Hard 5 V13.A 09/2013 Software changes implemented in this version S1 Studio Hard 5 - Creation of double Point Index for CB Status/Control in DNP3 protocol, - Addition of a 2nd stage of Derived E/F Protection - Allocation of a TCS signal to LED and Equation - Access to Model number and serial number, - Software Correction V13.B 10/2013 Software changes implemented in this version S1 Studio Hard 5 - Correction of the derived earth measure value display in LCD screen and derived earth value cannot be shown in S1 studio measurement viewer V14.A 04/2014 Software changes implemented in this version - Extension the first stage Phase O/C minimal setting from 0.1 *In to 0.05*In S1 Studio Hard 5 V14.B 07/2015 Software changes implemented in this version S1 Studio Hard 5 - Autoreclose function improvement, ARC can be terminated within 1000s and go to lockout state after the initiation if doesn't detect change of CB status V14.C 08/2017 Software changes implemented in this version S1 Studio Hard 5 - Addition of SoE for protection trip reset in IEC 60870- 5-103 protocol - Broken Conductor time delay tBC minimum setting changed from 1s to 0s Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 5. MiCOM P123 P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 23/33 Relay Type P123 Software Date of Version Issue V2.J 30/08/99 V3.B 29/11/99 V3.C V3.D V3.E V3.G V4.E 06/01/00 06/04/00 13/04/00 22/08/00 31/01/01 Full Description of Changes S1 Compatibility MODBUS improvement: � Correction of al encountered problem (answer to a synchronisation telegram, creation of a 2 seconds time out ...) Suppression of password in order to acknowledge the V2.0 alarms Auto acknowledgement of the instantaneous Modbus time out of 200 ms Display of the letter P in the menu N and N-1 when password is active Label correction V2.0 Evolution of Modbus writing 16 bits V2.0 Czech and Hungarian version delivery V2.0 VDEW improvements V2.0 Latch of the output relays V2.0 Latch of the auxiliary relays, relay by relay and not by function (like previously up to V3 version). On the other hand, the latch of the TRIP output relay remains by function. If the auxiliary relays are latched, an alarm will be displayed. If the user acknowledges this alarm, the auxiliary relays will be delatched. Backward Compatibility with previous hardware HARD V 2 HARD V 3 HARD V 4 HARD V 3 HARD V 4 HARD V 4 V4.E cont'd) 31/01/01 DNP3 level 2 and 3 Addition of the tripping and closing order for IEC103 Phase rotation (ABC or ACB) Third threshold algorithm for improvement of the behaviour on saturated current transformers Timer for the undercurrent feature (0 to 150 sec) Tripping curves (rectifier curve + LABORELLEC curves) Selection of the Setting group by level or by edge. V2.0 CB fail detection (possibility to inhibit the starting signals) Instantaneous record Rolling demand Peak value demand Instantaneous alarm settable: self or not self reset Matrix for the auto-recloser Addition of a second threshold with definite time for the I2 feature The digital input can work with AC signals (24 V to 250 V AC) Necessity to set in HMI Configuration menu, the type of voltage used, either AC or DC . HARD V 4 P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 24/33 Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Relay Type P123 Software Date of Version Issue Full Description of Changes S1 Compatibility Backward Compatibility with previous hardware V5.A 27/09/01 Maintenance mode for manual command of the output relays Reset of leds by logic input or control command or front panel or on new fault appearance V2.0 HARD V4 V5.C 04/10/01 VDEW improvements (Updating of the information SCN into the END OF GENERAL INTERROGATION ASDU) V2.0 V5.D 30/01/02 Addition of order COM1/COM2/COM3/COM4 assignalble on the auxiliary relays. Addition of the logic inputs AUX3 and AUX 4 do not generate alarm message. Improvement of english label V2.0 V5.F 08/08/02 EA approval option: logical input filtering on 24 V2.0 samples instead of 12 either 15 ms at 50 Hz) Improvment of the Recording of rolling demand in ram saved. The previous version could lead to an untimely ram saved error message due to the management of this recording Courier improvment: adding of the cell 0010 (CB control) protected by password Correction of the configuration of taux3 and taux4 for MODBUS IEC103: correction of the checksum calculation for short message. Correction of the I0 channel data into the disturbance record HARD V4 V5.G 24/10/02 Added Private messages option option (for nonstandard protection functions) in IEC870-5-103 communication V2.07 Two versions HARD 3 or HARD 4 (HARD 2 *) Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 25/33 Relay Type P123 Software Date of Version Issue Full Description of Changes S1 Compatibility Backward Compatibility with previous hardware V6.A 18/06/03 Add periodic self test of EEPROM data / calibration every 24 hours with safeguard of the results in safeguarded RAM. Add a new major alarm "Default settings" which is set after an EEPROM data error, and the following reloading of the default settings, and automatically reset after the following parameter write. Add "tReset" events for the thresholds I>, I>>, IN>, IN>> and I2>, and "tReset" parameter for the constant time temporization (thresholds I>, I>>, IN> and IN>>). Add "sample" parameter (Yes=Sample or No=RMS values) for the third thresholds I>>> and IN>>>. Add "CB Fail" choice for the "Trip functions" and "Latch functions" parameters. Add "tBF" event. IEC870-5-103 communication: - add ASDU 3.4 for measurement IN, instead of private ASDU 77, for setting in conformity with the standard (cf P127). - various improvements: in the management of the validity of the date and season in the messages, modifications in acknowledgement of the orders and time synchronization. V2.09 Two versions Patch HARD 3 or Modbus HARD 4 V2.08.005 (HARD 2 *) V6.B 18/07/03 Improvement of the reading of major alarm V2.09 Two versions "EEPROM DATA FAULT" appearing when much Patch HARD 3 or access EEPROM is done: Modbus HARD 4 - Optimization of the readings in E2PROM (writing V2.08.005 of the value of the checksums in internal RAM). - Replacement of the data storage circuit breaker (HARD 2 *) in E2PROM by a storage in safeguarded RAM. - The function of access to the E2PROM becomes protected from the interruptions. P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 26/33 Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Relay Type P123 Software Date of Version Issue Full Description of Changes S1 Compatibility Backward Compatibility with previous hardware V6.C 28/11/03 Software changes implemented in this version - Addition of function SOFT/TOR: Function allowing send a tripping order without awaiting temporization of release, addition of manual logical input closed (order of manual closing). - Addition of function LOCAL/REMOTE by wiring: addition of logical input LOCAL MODE (mode switch-over local, for inhibition of the writing orders the communication), and addition of exits CONTROL TRIP (remote control of release) and CLOSED CONTROL operate by remote control trip). - Modif. treatment of the thermal model: 20 milliseconds instead of 100. - Evolutions communication MODBUS: addition of the read quick byte (Function 7) by reading of words (Function 03 or 04), and of the reading of the date (on page 8). - Communication MODBUS Front Face: addition of the filtering of address. Software improvements done in this version Fix on RI curves processing in certain cases. V2.10 Two versions HARD 3 or HARD 4 (HARD 2 *) V6.D 11/12/03 Software improvements done in this version Modification to remove the taking into account of the number of defect in the calculation of checksum of page 1 of E2PROM, like in autotest E2PROM. V2.10 Two versions HARD 3 or HARD 4 (HARD 2 *) V6.E 07/06/04 Software changes implemented in this version V2.10 Modified recloser function: modified taking in account of manual reclose while blocking by recloser external input. Added a new DNP3 function: fault data can be accessed as analog inputs. DNP3 modifications: Binary inputs move to Class 0. Acceptance of variation 2 object 1. Modified German texts for Front panel. Software improvement done in this version Modification to fix upload program for FPGA of new CPU board (index E or higher). (This problem affects all Px2x products equiped with this CPU board). Modification on 3rd threshold delay Ie>>>, whose limitation test was done on 1st threshold delay Ie>. Improved SOFT/TOR function Improved Breaker Fail alarm processing. Improved checksum verification test in Front panel MODBUS communication. Two versions HARD 3 or HARD 4 (HARD 2 *) Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 27/33 Relay Type P123 Software Date of Version Issue Full Description of Changes S1 Compatibility Backward Compatibility with previous hardware V6.F 08/10/04 Software changes implemented in this version None. Software improvement done in this version Improved KBUS/COURIER protocol (visibility of threshold). Improved IEC870-5-103 protocol: Enhancement of all the system product line defect report (RFA disturbance transmission). V2.10 Two versions HARD 3 or HARD 4 (HARD 2 *) V6.G 11/01/05 Software changes implemented in this version V2.12 Possibility to come back to the head line of the menu by pressing Clear Button. The setting group change will be done in exclusive way either by setting, either by logic input. The logic input will be active on level. The choice between level or edge is suppressed. Modification to the management of "the autorecloser in progress " information and generation of associated event: - Pick-up: at the start of the reclose cycle -> RL1 trip. - Drop-off: at the end of the last programmed cycle -> At the end of reclaim time for a successful reclose cycle or at release of "Final Trip" signal for an unsuccessful cycle. Modification of the "final trip" information management. This information must be now set to one during the last tripping (if default is always present and that the cycles are totally used) and must be set to zero as soon as the circuit breaker is done (supervision of the 52a information). Also, it should be kept at zero until the end of inhibits time (see also below connection with the "Recloser locked " signal status). The locked auto-recloser information must be set to the output relays and different from the "final trip" information. It will be reset at the end of the inhibit time. Software improvement done in this version The blocking logic feature can be used with a temporisation of the phase or earth current threshold set to zero. Two versions HARD 3 or HARD 4 (HARD 2 *) V6.I 19/06/06 Software changes implemented in this version V2.12 HARD 3 or No Px2x relay blocking after reception of a time synchronisation frame in T103 Correction of SF6 front face alarm text and Start I> event when IEC103 used HARD 4, HARD 2* (*See Notes) IDMT Rectifier curve selection coherency between P12x and MICOM S1. Correction of Start In> event in IEC103 communication (when going down). General trip correction in disturbance records Utilisation of nominal network frequency in the disturbance records (Comtrade format). P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 28/33 Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Relay Type P123 Software Date of Version Issue Full Description of Changes S1 Compatibility Backward Compatibility with previous hardware V6.J 04/08/06 Software changes implemented in this version Correction of trip Phase L1/L2/L3 events in IEC-103 communication. V2.12 HARD 3 or HARD 4, HARD 2. V7.A 16/05/08 Software changes implemented in this version V2.14 - Possibility to start the autoreclose from an external device by using tAux1 or tAux2 without tripping the CB - Correction of the following defects: . temporisation IDMT of tReset (tI>> protection): 0s after tI>>, . fault record amplitude I2>> not displayed (front panel), . DMT temporisation 20s: decimal values truncated, . Recloser [79]: bad definitive trip signal transmission, . "Trip CB Fail" fault: type of fault not displayed, . SOTF: SOTF when current threshold is not selected, operation with I>> or I>>>with no possibility of reset, . CB supervision, amp: - measurement with 1 or 2 phases = 0A, - operation after a "CB Operation" sent by ModBus, . I2> and I2>> not updated when modified with ModBus, . the text for "SF6" alarm is incorrect, . parameters of DNP3 and ModBus addresses, . amplitude of K-Bus and Courier disturbances extraction, . DNP3: events of major and minor hardware alarms, . the content of SRAM backup can be different of corresponding checksum after an update, . update of the phase indication of alarm tI>, . thermal protection: - calculation error when K thermal coefficient 1, - during cooling phase: bad delay between thermal alarm reset and thermal overflow. HARD 3 or HARD 4, HARD 2. V10.E 29/08/06 v10.E software is equivalent to v6.J software based V2.14 on the phase II hardware redesign (HARD 5) Software changes implemented in this version Multilanguage Human Machine Interface HARD 5 Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 29/33 Relay Type P123 Software Date of Version Issue Full Description of Changes S1 Compatibility Backward Compatibility with previous hardware V11.A 11/06/07 Software changes implemented in this version V2.14 Inrush blocking function implementation Calibration value memorization. Auxiliary logic inputs temporized, with alarm displayed or not (by setting), assignable to LED, to Trip order, to output relays or to logic equations. RL1 & RL2 can be configured as Fail safe Possibility to have contact outputs inverted to trip on drop of signals Time Synchronization through a digital Input TMS step to 0.001 of the TMS as well as the RTMS. That will authorize a better precision for the small values. Logic inputs assignable to one or several internal signal. Each signal result of a logical OR of all inputs assigned to it. Digital inputs can be directly assigned to outputs. Increase the number of fault records from 5 to 25. Increase the number of event records from 75 to 250. Correction of disturbance record in case of avalanche Event record time tagging correction Communication protocol enhancement (Modbus, DNP3 & Courier) Autorecloser modification to take into account the definitive trip information HARD 5 V11.C Software changes implemented in this version V2.14 - software minor corrections. HARD 5 V11.D Software changes implemented in this version V2.14 - Portuguese language is added. - Correction for communication with system (Pacis...) - DMT temporization decimal value corrected for values >20s - recloser: information of definitive trip occurs if the matrix of cycle does not set "nb cycle"+1. - Communication Modbus correction: . manual, self and disturbance acknowledgment of the oldest event & fault record, . Modbus address added to the event setting group change, - Communication Modbus of disturbance record: number of pages and samples in the last page in the service name corrected, - "Disturbance trigger" added in the event record. HARD 5 P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 30/33 Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Relay Type P123 Software Date of Version Issue Full Description of Changes S1 Compatibility Backward Compatibility with previous hardware V11.E 30/06/08 Software changes implemented in this version - Compatibility with MiCOM S1 Studio, V2.14 Hard 5 S1 Studio - separate output signalization of the three overcurrent (IA>, IB> and IC>). - Language corrections - hardware alarm correction after a communication port failure, - tripping indication (LED) correction, - modification of the process of a recloser automatism with final trip. - phase indicator alarm modified, - Displayed rms value corrected (when no current injected) corrected, - CB Supervision: Samps (n) counters after a "CB operations" clear sent with a modbus writing corrected, - Local mode input blocks Modbus function "Write 1 word" and "Write n bits", - process after boot or sending settings file(MiCOM S1) modified. Other documentation changes in B96 TM - new general presentation - presentation of MiCOM S1 Studio (new GS section) - TD: Phase and earth current transformers consumption added, - AD: more explanation added for transformers inrush current V11.F 09/2008 Software changes implemented in this version V2.14 Hard 5 - "Inrush blocking" applied to IDMT curve correction S1 Studio Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 31/33 Relay Type P123 Software Date of Version Issue V12.A 01/2009 Full Description of Changes S1 Compatibility Backward Compatibility with previous hardware Software changes implemented in this version - New inhibited alarms added (possibility to inhibit alarm on tAux, I< and Boolean logic) V2.14 Hard 5 S1 Studio - Possibility to operate the CB and to start a disturbance from the relay HMI, - Manual trip or manual close ordered from a logical input activation - Possibility to start SOTF using any control close information, - Total trips number calculated with all the CB operations, - Suspend IDMT curves on I> & I>>, interlock of I> IDMT by I>> DT or I>>> DT modified, - Possibility to start Cold Load Pickup by 52A or "not I< & I>" or "I0< & I0>", - Detection of open circuits conditions which produce an unbalance creating negative phase sequence current, - Addition of a new derived earth overcurrent threshold, - Possibility to program autoreclose blocking after a number of recluse or a defined time. - Possibility to assign I< and tI< to any output relay and LED, - Disturbance recorder time modified (5x3s or 3 x 5s or 2 x 7.5s or 1 x 15s) - Logical inputs directly assignable to Boolean Logical Equations, - tAux5 added, - "79 internal locked" and "79 external locked" assigned to output signals, - Selectivity between two relays with tReset + autorecloser. V12.B V12.C 09/2009 03/2010 Software changes implemented in this version V2.14 Hard 5 - Correction of: S1 Studio . disturbance recording when two records are triggered successively, . Chinese text (HMI display), . control trip events when RL1 is assigned to "Ctrl Trip" . Time synchronisation with logic input. Software changes implemented in this version - Correction of . IDMT curve when inrush blocking is used with Ie> or Ie>> . German labels S1 Studio Hard 5 P12x/EN VC/Gd6 Page 32/33 Hardware/Software Version History and Compatibility MiCOM P120/P121/P122/P123 Relay Type P123 Software Date of Version Issue V12.D 03/2010 V12.E 10/2011 V12.F 07/2012 Full Description of Changes S1 Compatibility Backward Compatibility with previous hardware General: New Schneider Electric brand Software changes implemented in this version - Correction of data transmission (Courier protocol). Fault extracted automatically was sometimes incorrectly transmitted S1 Studio Hard 5 Software changes implemented in this version - Fault records extraction using IEC103 enhanced protocol, - Possibility to control locally a general reset to clear all events, fault & disturbance records - Correction of: alarm message when an auxiliary relay is latched, alarm after a date / time failure Output relay assignation (autorecloser) CB failure reset before the end of a timer if current is null, Logic equation status (address 002Ch) At CB switching on, erratic alarm S1 Studio Hard 5 Software changes implemented in this version - Integration of new LCD for Chinese character V13.A V13.B V14.A V14.B V14.C 09/2013 Software changes implemented in this version S1 Studio Hard 5 - Creation of double Point Index for CB Status/Control in DNP3 protocol, - Addition of a 2nd stage of Derived E/F Protection - Allocation of a TCS signal to LED and Equation - Access to Model number and serial number, - Software Correction 10/2013 Software changes implemented in this version S1 Studio Hard 5 - Correction of the derived earth measure value display in LCD screen and derived earth value cannot be shown in S1 studio measurement viewer 04/2014 Software changes implemented in this version S1 Studio Hard 5 - Extension the first stage Phase O/C minimal setting from 0.1 *In to 0.05*In 07/2015 Software changes implemented in this version S1 Studio Hard 5 - Autoreclose function improvement, ARC can be terminated within 1000s and go to lockout state after the initiation if doesn't detect change of CB status 08/2017 Software changes implemented in this version - Addition of SoE for protection trip reset in IEC 60870-5-103 protocol - Broken Conductor time delay tBC minimum setting changed from 1s to 0s S1 Studio Hard 5 Adobe Acrobat Pro DC 20.9.20074 Source: https://manuals.plus/m/e275b2d4931512f690525f7bacd08090c27fd256e34d4030482af1b11b92e669_pdf
Posted by: christineexach1977esd.blogspot.com
Posting Komentar untuk "Micom P122 Relay Wiring Diagram"